 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| To all our customers Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document, such as Hitachi Electric and Hitachi XX, to Renesas Technology Corp. The semiconductor operations of Mitsubishi Electric and Hitachi were transferred to Renesas Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003. These operations include microcomputer, logic, analog and discrete devices, and memory chips other than DRAMs (flash memory, SRAMs etc.) Accordingly, although Hitachi, Hitachi, Ltd., Hitachi Semiconductors, and other Hitachi brand names are mentioned in the document, these names have in fact all been changed to Renesas Technology Corp. Thank you for your understanding. Except for our corporate trademark, logo and corporate statement, no changes whatsoever have been made to the contents of the document, and these changes do not constitute any alteration to the contents of the document itself. Renesas Technology Home Page: http://www.renesas.com Renesas Technology Corp. Customer Support Dept. April 1, 2003 Cautions Keep safety first in your circuit designs! 1. Renesas Technology Corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap. Notes regarding these materials 1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corporation product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corporation or a third party. 2. Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any third-party's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in these materials. 3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein. The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors. Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by various means, including the Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com). 4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein. 5. Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use. 6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials. 7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination. Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited. 8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or the products contained therein. Hitachi Single-Chip Microcomputer H8S/2128 Series H8S/2127 HD6432127RW, HD6432127R H8S/2126 HD6432126RW, HD6432126R H8S/2124 Series H8S/2122 HD6432122 H8S/2120 HD6432120 H8S/2128 F-ZTATTM HD64F2128 Hardware Manual ADE-602-114B Rev. 3.0 03/26/01 Hitachi, Ltd. Cautions 1. Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi's or any third party's patent, copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property rights for information contained in this document. Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party's rights, including intellectual property rights, in connection with use of the information contained in this document. 2. Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice. Confirm that you have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design, purchase or use. 3. Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability. However, contact Hitachi's sales office before using the product in an application that demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury, such as aerospace, aeronautics, nuclear power, combustion control, transportation, traffic, safety equipment or medical equipment for life support. 4. Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi particularly for maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation conditions and other characteristics. Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges. Even within the guaranteed ranges, consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and employ systemic measures such as fail-safes, so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi product does not cause bodily injury, fire or other consequential damage due to operation of the Hitachi product. 5. This product is not designed to be radiation resistant. 6. No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate, in any form, the whole or part of this document without written approval from Hitachi. 7. Contact Hitachi's sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi semiconductor products. Preface The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series comprise high-performance microcomputers with a 32-bit H8S/2000 CPU core, and a set of on-chip supporting functions required for system configuration. The H8S/2000 CPU can execute basic instructions in one state, and is provided with sixteen internal 16-bit general registers with a 32-bit configuration, and a concise and optimized instruction set. The CPU can handle a 16-Mbyte linear address space (architecturally 4 Gbytes). Programs based on the high-level language C can also be run efficiently. Single-power-supply flash memory (F-ZTATTM*) and mask ROM versions are available, providing a quick and flexible response to conditions from ramp-up through full-scale volume production, even for applications with frequently changing specifications. On-chip peripheral functions include a 16-bit free-running timer module (FRT), 8-bit timer module (TMR), watchdog timer module (WDT), two PWM timers (PWM and PWMX), a serial communication interface (SCI), A/D converter (ADC), and I/O ports. An I2C bus interface (IIC) can also be incorporated as an option. An on-chip data transfer controller (DTC) is also provided, enabling high-speed data transfer without CPU intervention. The H8S/2128 Series has all the above on-chip supporting functions, and can also be provided with an IIC module as an options. The H8S/2124 Series comprises reduced-function versions, with fewer TMR, and no PWM, IIC, or DTC modules. Use of the H8S/2128 or H8S/2124 Series enables compact, high-performance systems to be implemented easily. The various timer functions and their interconnectability (timer connection), plus the interlinked operation of the I2C bus interface and data transfer controller (DTC), in particular, make these devices ideal for use in PC monitors. In addition, the combination of FZTAT TM and reduced-function versions is ideal for system applications in which on-chip program memory is essential to meet performance requirements, product start-up times are short, and program modifications may be necessary after end-product assembly. This manual describes the hardware of the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series and H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Note: * F-ZTATTM (Flexible-ZTAT) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd. On-Chip Supporting Modules Series Product names Bus controller (BSC) Data transfer controller (DTC) 8-bit PWM timer (PWM) 14-bit PWM timer (PWMX) 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) 8-bit timer (TMR) Timer connection Watchdog timer (WDT) Serial communication interface (SCI) I C bus interface (IIC) A/D converter 2 H8S/2128 Series H8S/2128, 2127 Available (8 bits) Available x16 x2 x1 x4 Available x2 x2 x2 (option) H8S/2124 Series H8S/2122, 2120 Available (8 bits) -- -- -- x1 x3 -- x2 x2 -- x8 (analog inputs) x8 (analog inputs) x8 (expansion A/D inputs) x8 (expansion A/D inputs) Revisions and Additions in this Edition Page -- 1 4, 5 24, 26 27 to 72 70, 71 76 78 81 89 145 180, 183 Item Preface On-Chip Supporting Modules 1.1 Overview Table 1.1 Overview Table 1.4 Pin Functions 2. CPU 2.10 Usage Notes 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) 3.2.4 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) 3.5 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority 6.4.5 Wait Control 8.1 Over Viwe Revisions (See Manual for Details) Modification Modification of on-chip ROM size Modification of memory, products lineup Modification of SCI, port 4, and port 5 Modification of TAS instruction Addition of note on STM/LDM instructions Addition Modification of bit 6; IOS enable (IOSE) description Modification of bit 7 to 5 description Addition of description: "Do not ... " Modification of description Modification of Figure 6.7 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing Table 8.1 H8/2128 Series Port Functions Modification of port 2 description Table 8.2 H8/2124 Series Port Functions Modification of port 2 description 219 231 249 265 267 269 270 271 Table 9.2 PWM Timer Module Registers Table 10.2 Register Configuration 11.2.4 Output Compare Register AR and AF (OCRAR, OCRAF) 11.3.5 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) setting Figure 11.16 Input Capture Mask Signal Clearing Timing Figure 11.18 FRC write-Clear Contention Figure 11.19 FRC write-Increment Contention Figure 11.20 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-match (When automatic Addition Function Is Not Used) Figure 11.21 Contention between OCRAR/OCRA write and Compare-match (When automatic Addition Function Is Used) 12.2.6 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) 12.2.8 Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) 12.2.11 Input Capture Register R, and F (TICRR,TICRF) [TMRX Additional Functions] 12.3.6 Input Capture Operation 12.4 Interrupt Sources Addition of note 2 Addition of note 2 Modification Modification of Figure 11.11 Setting of Input Capture Flag (ICFA/B/C/D) Modification Modification Modification Modification 272 Modification 288 290 291 Modification Modification Addition of reference 299 301 Addition Modification of table number Page 302 302 311 323 324 341 350 420 431 433 438 444 446 450 453 456 457 459, 460 465 467 493 495 497 499 511, 512 527 528 540 543 549 Item 12.5 8-Bit Timer Application Example 12.6 Usage Notes Table 13.1 Timer Connection Input Output Pins Figure 13.2 Timing Chart for PWM decoding 13.3.2 Clamp Waveform Generation (CL1/CL2/CL3 signal generation) 14.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) 14.5.5 OVF Flag Clear Condition 16.2.1 I C Bus Data Register (ICDR) 16.2.5 I C Bus Control Register (ICCR) 16.2.6 I C Bus Status Register (ICSR) 16.2.7 Serial/Timer Control Register 16.3.2 Master Transmit Operation 16.3.3 Master Receive Operation 16.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation 16.3.7 Automatic Switching from formatless Mode to I2C Bus Format 16.3.9 Noise Canceller 2 2 2 Revisions (See Manual for Details) Modification of figure number Modification of the number for figures and tables Addition of description Modification Modification Addition of note on bit 7 Addition Modification of TDRE description Addition of bit 1 description Addition of description Modification Modification Modification Modification Addition of description Modification of Figure 16.14 Flow Chart for Master Transmit Mode (Example) Modification of Figure 16.15 Flow Chart for Master Receive Mode (Example) 16.3.11 Initialization of Internal State 16.4 Usage Note Modification Addition of note on Start Condition Issuance for Transmission Addition of note on I2C Bus Interface Stop Condition Instruction Issuance 18.1 Overview 18.3 Operation 19.1 Overview 19.3 Operation 19.5.4 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) 19.9 Interrupt Handling When Programming/Erasing Flash Memory 19.10 Flash Memory Programmer Mode 19.12 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator Figure 20.7 External Clock Output Setting Delay Timing Modification Modification Modification Modification Modification of description on bit 3 Modification Modification Addition Modification Modification Page 551 557 566 574 589 592 606 Item 20.9 Clock Selection Circuit Table 21.3 Power-Down State Registers Table 21.4 MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-chip Supporting Modules 21.10.1 Subactive Mode Figure 22.3 Output Load Circuit Table 22.6 Control Signal Timing Figure 22.21 SCK Clock Input Timing Figure 22.22 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode) Table 22.10 A/D Conversion Characteristics Table 22.12 Flash Memory Characteristics 23 Electrical Characteristics [H8S/2124 Series] Appendix A B.2 Register Selection Conditions B.3 HFF86,HFF87 Table F.1 H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series Product Code Lineup Description Modification Addition of note 2 Addition of description Modification Modification Modification Modification 609 611 615 643 713 to 718 737 813 Addition of note 6 Modification Addition Addition of note on STM/LDM instruction Addition of condition Modification of notes Modification Contents Section 1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1 Internal Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 6 Pin Arrangement and Functions ......................................................................................... 8 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement ................................................................................................... 8 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ................................................................ 14 1.3.3 Pin Functions......................................................................................................... 21 Section 2 CPU........................................................................................................................ 27 2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 2.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU ................................... 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU.............................................................................. 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU........................................................................... CPU Operating Modes ....................................................................................................... Address Space .................................................................................................................... Register Configuration ....................................................................................................... 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2.4.2 General Registers .................................................................................................. 2.4.3 Control Registers................................................................................................... 2.4.4 Initial Register Values ........................................................................................... Data Formats ...................................................................................................................... 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................. 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats .......................................................................................... Instruction Set .................................................................................................................... 2.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes ...................................................................... 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ........................................................ 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats...................................................................................... 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions .................................................... Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation...................................................... 2.7.1 Addressing Mode .................................................................................................. 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation............................................................................... Processing States ................................................................................................................ 2.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2.8.2 Reset State ............................................................................................................. 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State ..................................................................................... 2.8.4 Program Execution State ....................................................................................... 2.8.5 Bus-Released State................................................................................................ 27 27 28 29 29 30 35 36 36 37 38 39 40 40 42 43 43 44 46 55 56 56 56 59 63 63 64 65 66 66 i 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.8.6 Power-Down State ................................................................................................ Basic Timing ...................................................................................................................... 2.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) .......................................................................... 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing........................................................ 2.9.4 External Address Space Access Timing................................................................ 2.10 Usage Note ......................................................................................................................... 2.10.1 TAS Instruction ..................................................................................................... 2.10.2 STM/LDT Instruction ........................................................................................... 2.9 66 67 67 67 69 70 70 70 70 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes.................................................................................... 73 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection .................................................................................... 3.1.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) .......................................................................... 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ....................................................................... 3.2.3 Bus Control Register (BCR) ................................................................................. 3.2.4 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................. Operating Mode Descriptions ............................................................................................ 3.3.1 Mode 1 .................................................................................................................. 3.3.2 Mode 2 .................................................................................................................. 3.3.3 Mode 3 .................................................................................................................. Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode.............................................................................. Memory Map in Each Operating Mode.............................................................................. 73 73 74 74 74 75 77 78 80 80 80 80 81 81 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Section 4 Exception Handling........................................................................................... 89 4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority................................................................ 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation.............................................................................. 4.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table .................................................................... Reset ................................................................................................................................... 4.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 4.2.2 Reset Sequence...................................................................................................... 4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset ............................................................................................. Interrupts ............................................................................................................................ Trap Instruction .................................................................................................................. Stack Status after Exception Handling ............................................................................... Notes on Use of the Stack .................................................................................................. 89 89 90 90 92 92 92 94 95 96 97 98 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 Section 5 Interrupt Controller............................................................................................ 99 5.1 ii Overview ............................................................................................................................ 99 5.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 99 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 100 5.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 100 5.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 101 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 101 5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ....................................................................... 101 5.2.2 Interrupt Control Registers A to C (ICRA to ICRC) ............................................ 102 5.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IER) ................................................................................... 103 5.2.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)...................................... 104 5.2.5 IRQ Status Register (ISR) ..................................................................................... 105 5.2.6 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR)........................................................ 106 5.2.7 Break Address Registers A, B, C (BARA, BARB, BARC).................................. 107 Interrupt Sources ................................................................................................................ 108 5.3.1 External Interrupts................................................................................................. 108 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts.................................................................................................. 109 5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table.......................................................................... 109 Address Breaks................................................................................................................... 112 5.4.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 112 5.4.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 112 5.4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................... 113 5.4.4 Usage Notes .......................................................................................................... 113 Interrupt Operation ............................................................................................................. 115 5.5.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ................................................. 115 5.5.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ...................................................................................... 118 5.5.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1 ...................................................................................... 120 5.5.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence ............................................................... 123 5.5.5 Interrupt Response Times...................................................................................... 125 Usage Notes........................................................................................................................ 126 5.6.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling...................................... 126 5.6.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ....................................................................... 127 5.6.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction .......................................... 127 DTC Activation by Interrupt .............................................................................................. 128 5.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 128 5.7.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 128 5.7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................... 129 Section 6 Bus Controller..................................................................................................... 131 6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 131 6.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 131 6.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 132 6.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 133 6.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 133 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 134 6.2.1 Bus Control Register (BCR) ................................................................................. 134 iii 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.2.2 Wait State Control Register (WSCR).................................................................... 135 Overview of Bus Control.................................................................................................... 137 6.3.1 Bus Specifications ................................................................................................. 137 6.3.2 Advanced Mode .................................................................................................... 138 6.3.3 Normal Mode ........................................................................................................ 138 6.3.4 I/O Select Signal.................................................................................................... 138 Basic Bus Interface............................................................................................................. 139 6.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 139 6.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment.............................................................................. 139 6.4.3 Valid Strobes ......................................................................................................... 141 6.4.4 Basic Timing ......................................................................................................... 142 6.4.5 Wait Control.......................................................................................................... 144 Burst ROM Interface .......................................................................................................... 146 6.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 146 6.5.2 Basic Timing ......................................................................................................... 146 6.5.3 Wait Control.......................................................................................................... 147 Idle Cycle............................................................................................................................ 148 6.6.1 Operation ............................................................................................................... 148 6.6.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle ......................................................................................... 149 Bus Arbitration ................................................................................................................... 149 6.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 149 6.7.2 Operation ............................................................................................................... 149 6.7.3 Bus Transfer Timing ............................................................................................. 150 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2128 Series] ............................................. 151 7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 151 7.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 151 7.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 152 7.1.3 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 153 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 154 7.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA).............................................................................. 154 7.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB).............................................................................. 156 7.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR) ................................................................... 157 7.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR) ........................................................... 157 7.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) ............................................................... 157 7.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)................................................................ 158 7.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER) .......................................................................... 158 7.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR) ......................................................................... 159 7.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 160 Operation............................................................................................................................ 161 7.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 161 7.3.2 Activation Sources ................................................................................................ 163 7.3.3 DTC Vector Table ................................................................................................. 164 7.2 7.3 iv 7.4 7.5 7.3.4 Location of Register Information in Address Space ............................................. 166 7.3.5 Normal Mode ........................................................................................................ 167 7.3.6 Repeat Mode ......................................................................................................... 168 7.3.7 Block Transfer Mode ............................................................................................ 169 7.3.8 Chain Transfer....................................................................................................... 171 7.3.9 Operation Timing .................................................................................................. 172 7.3.10 Number of DTC Execution States ........................................................................ 173 7.3.11 Procedures for Using the DTC.............................................................................. 175 7.3.12 Examples of Use of the DTC ................................................................................ 176 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................ 178 Usage Notes........................................................................................................................ 178 Section 8 I/O Ports................................................................................................................ 179 8.1 8.2 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 179 Port 1 .................................................................................................................................. 185 8.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 185 8.2.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 186 8.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ................................................................................. 188 8.2.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function................................................................................ 189 Port 2 .................................................................................................................................. 190 8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 190 8.3.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 192 8.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ................................................................................. 194 8.3.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function................................................................................ 195 Port 3 .................................................................................................................................. 196 8.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 196 8.4.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 197 8.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ................................................................................. 199 8.4.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function................................................................................ 200 Port 4 .................................................................................................................................. 201 8.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 201 8.5.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 202 8.5.3 Pin Functions......................................................................................................... 203 Port 5 .................................................................................................................................. 206 8.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 206 8.6.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 206 8.6.3 Pin Functions......................................................................................................... 208 Port 6 .................................................................................................................................. 209 8.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 209 8.7.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 209 8.7.3 Pin Functions......................................................................................................... 211 Port 7 .................................................................................................................................. 214 8.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 214 v 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.8.2 8.8.3 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 215 Pin Functions......................................................................................................... 215 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2128 Series] ....................................................... 217 9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 217 9.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 217 9.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 218 9.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 219 9.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 219 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 220 9.2.1 PWM Register Select (PWSL).............................................................................. 220 9.2.2 PWM Data Registers (PWDR0 to PWDR15) ....................................................... 222 9.2.3 PWM Data Polarity Registers A and B (PWDPRA and PWDPRB) .................... 222 9.2.4 PWM Output Enable Registers A and B (PWOERA and PWOERB).................. 223 9.2.5 Peripheral Clock Select Register (PCSR) ............................................................. 224 9.2.6 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR).............................................................. 225 9.2.7 Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR).............................................................. 225 9.2.8 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) ................................................................................. 225 9.2.9 Port 2 Data Register (P2DR) ................................................................................. 225 9.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 226 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 227 9.3.1 Correspondence between PWM Data Register Contents and Output Waveform.................................................................................................. 227 9.2 9.3 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A ............................................................................................ 229 10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 229 10.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 229 10.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 230 10.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 230 10.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 231 10.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 231 10.2.1 PWM D/A Counter (DACNT) .............................................................................. 231 10.2.2 D/A Data Registers A and B (DADRA and DADRB).......................................... 232 10.2.3 PWM D/A Control Register (DACR) ................................................................... 233 10.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 235 10.3 Bus Master Interface .......................................................................................................... 236 10.4 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 239 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer.......................................................................... 243 11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 243 11.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 243 11.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 244 11.1.3 Input and Output Pins............................................................................................ 245 vi 11.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 246 11.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 247 11.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC)................................................................................ 247 11.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA, OCRB) .......................................... 247 11.2.3 Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) ................................................. 248 11.2.4 Output Compare Registers AR and AF (OCRAR, OCRAF)................................ 249 11.2.5 Output Compare Register DM (OCRDM)............................................................ 250 11.2.6 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) ............................................................... 250 11.2.7 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................. 252 11.2.8 Timer Control Register (TCR) .............................................................................. 255 11.2.9 Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR) ............................................... 257 11.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 259 11.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 260 11.3.1 FRC Increment Timing ......................................................................................... 260 11.3.2 Output Compare Output Timing ........................................................................... 261 11.3.3 FRC Clear Timing................................................................................................. 262 11.3.4 Input Capture Input Timing .................................................................................. 262 11.3.5 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting ......................................................... 264 11.3.6 Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA, OCFB) ................................ 265 11.3.7 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF) .................................................................. 266 11.3.8 Automatic Addition of OCRA and OCRAR/OCRAF .......................................... 266 11.3.9 ICRD and OCRDM Mask Signal Generation ....................................................... 267 11.4 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................ 268 11.5 Sample Application ............................................................................................................ 268 11.6 Usage Notes........................................................................................................................ 269 Section 12 8-Bit Timers ...................................................................................................... 275 12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 275 12.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 275 12.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 276 12.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 277 12.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 278 12.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 279 12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) ......................................................................................... 279 12.2.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA).................................................................... 280 12.2.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB) .................................................................... 281 12.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) .............................................................................. 281 12.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................. 285 12.2.6 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................. 288 12.2.7 System Control Register (SYSCR) ....................................................................... 289 12.2.8 Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) ............................................................ 290 12.2.9 Input Capture Register (TICR) [TMRX Additional Function] ............................. 290 12.2.10 Time Constant Register C (TCORC) [TMRX Additional Function].................... 291 vii 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.2.11 Input Capture Registers R and F (TICRR, TICRF) [TMRX Additional Functions].............................................................................. 291 12.2.12 Timer Input Select Register (TISR) [TMRY Additional Function]...................... 292 12.2.13 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 293 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 294 12.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing .............................................................................. 294 12.3.2 Compare-Match Timing........................................................................................ 295 12.3.3 TCNT External Reset Timing ............................................................................... 297 12.3.4 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting .............................................................. 297 12.3.5 Operation with Cascaded Connection ................................................................... 298 12.3.6 Input Capture Operation........................................................................................ 299 Interrupt Sources ................................................................................................................ 301 8-Bit Timer Application Example...................................................................................... 302 Usage Notes........................................................................................................................ 302 12.6.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear......................................................... 303 12.6.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment ................................................. 304 12.6.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match ....................................... 305 12.6.4 Contention between Compare-Matches A and B.................................................. 306 12.6.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation.............................................. 306 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2128 Series] ....................................................... 309 13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 309 13.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 309 13.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 310 13.1.3 Input and Output Pins............................................................................................ 311 13.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 312 13.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 312 13.2.1 Timer Connection Register I (TCONRI) .............................................................. 312 13.2.2 Timer Connection Register O (TCONRO) ........................................................... 314 13.2.3 Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) ............................................................ 316 13.2.4 Edge Sense Register (SEDGR) ............................................................................. 319 13.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 321 13.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 322 13.3.1 PWM Decoding (PDC Signal Generation) ........................................................... 322 13.3.2 Clamp Waveform Generation (CL1/CL2/CL3 Signal Generation) ...................... 324 13.3.3 Measurement of 8-Bit Timer Divided Waveform Period ..................................... 325 13.3.4 IHI Signal and 2fH Modification .......................................................................... 327 13.3.5 IVI Signal Fall Modification and IHI Synchronization ........................................ 329 13.3.6 Internal Synchronization Signal Generation (IHG/IVG/CL4 Signal Generation)....................................................................... 330 13.3.7 HSYNCO Output .................................................................................................. 333 13.3.8 VSYNCO Output .................................................................................................. 334 13.3.9 CBLANK Output .................................................................................................. 335 viii Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT)............................................................................... 337 14.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 337 14.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 337 14.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 338 14.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 339 14.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 340 14.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 340 14.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) ......................................................................................... 340 14.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................. 341 14.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR) ....................................................................... 344 14.2.4 Notes on Register Access...................................................................................... 345 14.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 346 14.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation................................................................................... 346 14.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ...................................................................................... 347 14.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF).......................................................... 348 14.4 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................ 348 14.5 Usage Notes........................................................................................................................ 349 14.5.1 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment...................... 349 14.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0....................................................................... 349 14.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode ................ 349 14.5.4 Counter Value in Transitions between High-Speed Mode, Subactive Mode, and Watch Mode .......................................................................................................... 350 14.5.5 OVF Flag Clear Condition .................................................................................... 350 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) ..................................................... 351 15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 351 15.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 351 15.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 353 15.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 353 15.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 354 15.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 355 15.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)................................................................................ 355 15.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) ............................................................................... 355 15.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) .............................................................................. 356 15.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR).............................................................................. 356 15.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)................................................................................. 357 15.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)............................................................................... 359 15.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR).................................................................................. 363 15.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)........................................................................................ 367 15.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR) ............................................................... 375 15.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 376 15.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 377 15.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 377 ix 15.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ........................................................................ 379 15.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function ............................................................ 391 15.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode .......................................................................... 399 15.4 SCI Interrupts ..................................................................................................................... 408 15.5 Usage Notes........................................................................................................................ 409 Section 16 I2 C Bus Interface (IIC) [H8S/2128 Series Option] ............................... 413 16.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 413 16.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 413 16.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 414 16.1.3 Input/Output Pins .................................................................................................. 416 16.1.4 Register Configuration.......................................................................................... 417 16.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 418 16.2.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR) .............................................................................. 418 16.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) .............................................................................. 421 16.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) .............................................................. 422 16.2.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)............................................................................ 423 16.2.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR).......................................................................... 426 16.2.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................. 433 16.2.7 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................. 438 16.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) ....................................................................... 439 16.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 441 16.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 442 16.3.1 I2C Bus Data Format.............................................................................................. 442 16.3.2 Master Transmit Operation ................................................................................... 444 16.3.3 Master Receive Operation ..................................................................................... 446 16.3.4 Slave Receive Operation ....................................................................................... 448 16.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation...................................................................................... 450 16.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ................................................................. 452 16.3.7 Automatic Switching from Formatless Mode to I 2C Bus Format......................... 453 16.3.8 Operation Using the DTC ..................................................................................... 454 16.3.9 Noise Canceler ...................................................................................................... 455 16.3.10 Sample Flowcharts ................................................................................................ 455 16.3.11 Initialization of Internal State................................................................................ 459 16.4 Usage Notes........................................................................................................................ 461 Section 17 A/D Converter .................................................................................................. 469 17.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 469 17.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 469 17.1.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 470 17.1.3 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 471 17.1.4 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 472 17.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 472 x 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) .............................................. 472 17.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ................................................................ 473 17.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR).............................................................................. 476 17.2.4 Keyboard Comparator Control Register (KBCOMP) ........................................... 477 17.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 478 Interface to Bus Master ...................................................................................................... 479 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 480 17.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0)...................................................................................... 480 17.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1) ........................................................................................ 482 17.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .......................................................... 484 17.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing .............................................................................. 485 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................ 485 Usage Notes........................................................................................................................ 486 Section 18 RAM.................................................................................................................... 493 18.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 493 18.1.1 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 493 18.1.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 494 18.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) .................................................................................... 494 18.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 495 18.3.1 Expanded Mode (Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1)) ................................................ 495 18.3.2 Single-Chip Mode (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)).................................................. 495 Section 19 ROM.................................................................................................................... 497 19.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 497 19.1.1 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 497 19.1.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 498 19.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 498 19.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) .......................................................................... 498 19.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 499 19.4 Overview of Flash Memory................................................................................................ 500 19.4.1 Features ................................................................................................................. 500 19.4.2 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 501 19.4.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes .......................................................................... 502 19.4.4 Pin Configuration .................................................................................................. 506 19.4.5 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 506 19.5 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 507 19.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)...................................................... 507 19.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)...................................................... 509 19.5.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2)...................................................... 510 19.5.4 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................. 511 19.6 On-Board Programming Modes ......................................................................................... 513 19.6.1 Boot Mode............................................................................................................. 513 xi 19.6.2 User Program Mode .............................................................................................. 518 19.7 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ................................................................................ 520 19.7.1 Program Mode....................................................................................................... 520 19.7.2 Program-Verify Mode ........................................................................................... 521 19.7.3 Erase Mode............................................................................................................ 523 19.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode................................................................................................ 523 19.8 Flash Memory Protection ................................................................................................... 525 19.8.1 Hardware Protection.............................................................................................. 525 19.8.2 Software Protection ............................................................................................... 525 19.8.3 Error Protection ..................................................................................................... 526 19.9 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory........................................ 527 19.10 Flash Memory Writer Mode............................................................................................... 528 19.10.1 PROM Mode Setting............................................................................................ 528 19.10.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map ..................................................................... 529 19.10.3 Writer Mode Operation........................................................................................ 529 19.10.4 Memory Read Mode ............................................................................................ 531 19.10.5 Auto-Program Mode ............................................................................................ 534 19.10.6 Auto-Erase Mode ................................................................................................. 535 19.10.7 Status Read Mode ................................................................................................ 536 19.10.8 Status Polling ....................................................................................................... 538 19.10.9 Writer Mode Transition Time.............................................................................. 538 19.10.10Notes On Memory Programming......................................................................... 539 19.11 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions...................................................... 539 19.12 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version ................................... 540 Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator ................................................................................... 543 20.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 543 20.1.1 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 543 20.1.2 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 543 20.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 544 20.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ..................................................................... 544 20.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ............................................................ 545 20.3 Oscillator ............................................................................................................................ 545 20.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator............................................................................ 545 20.3.2 External Clock Input ............................................................................................. 547 20.4 Duty Adjustment Circuit .................................................................................................... 550 20.5 Medium-Speed Clock Divider............................................................................................ 550 20.6 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit ................................................................................... 550 20.7 Subclock Input Circuit........................................................................................................ 550 20.8 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit................................................................................. 551 20.9 Clock Selection Circuit ...................................................................................................... 551 xii Section 21 Power-Down State .......................................................................................... 553 21.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 553 21.1.1 Register Configuration .......................................................................................... 557 21.2 Register Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 557 21.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ..................................................................... 557 21.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ............................................................ 559 21.2.3 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................. 561 21.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) ........................................................... 562 21.3 Medium-Speed Mode ......................................................................................................... 563 21.4 Sleep Mode......................................................................................................................... 564 21.4.1 Sleep Mode............................................................................................................ 564 21.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode ............................................................................................. 564 21.5 Module Stop Mode ............................................................................................................. 565 21.5.1 Module Stop Mode................................................................................................ 565 21.5.2 Usage Note ............................................................................................................ 566 21.6 Software Standby Mode ..................................................................................................... 567 21.6.1 Software Standby Mode........................................................................................ 567 21.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode ......................................................................... 567 21.6.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode ........... 568 21.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example ..................................................... 568 21.6.5 Usage Note ............................................................................................................ 569 21.7 Hardware Standby Mode.................................................................................................... 570 21.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode ...................................................................................... 570 21.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing.......................................................................... 571 21.8 Watch Mode ....................................................................................................................... 572 21.8.1 Watch Mode .......................................................................................................... 572 21.8.2 Clearing Watch Mode ........................................................................................... 572 21.9 Subsleep Mode ................................................................................................................... 573 21.9.1 Subsleep Mode ...................................................................................................... 573 21.9.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode ....................................................................................... 573 21.10 Subactive Mode.................................................................................................................. 574 21.10.1 Subactive Mode..................................................................................................... 574 21.10.2 Clearing Subactive Mode...................................................................................... 574 21.11 Direct Transition ................................................................................................................ 575 21.11.1 Overview of Direct Transition .............................................................................. 575 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics [H8S/2128 Series, H8S/2128 F-ZTAT]. 577 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings............................................................................................... 577 22.2 DC Characteristics.............................................................................................................. 578 22.3 AC Characteristics.............................................................................................................. 589 22.3.1 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 590 22.3.2 Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 592 xiii 22.3.3 Bus Timing............................................................................................................ 594 22.3.4 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules.............................................................. 601 22.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics ......................................................................................... 609 22.5 Flash Memory Characteristics............................................................................................ 611 22.6 Usage Note ......................................................................................................................... 613 Section 23 Electrical Characteristics [H8S/2124 Series].......................................... 615 23.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings............................................................................................... 615 23.2 DC Characteristics.............................................................................................................. 616 23.3 AC Characteristics.............................................................................................................. 623 23.3.1 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 624 23.3.2 Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 626 23.3.3 Bus Timing............................................................................................................ 628 23.3.4 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules.............................................................. 635 23.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics ......................................................................................... 640 23.5 Usage Note ......................................................................................................................... 642 Appendix A Instruction Set................................................................................................ 643 A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 Instruction........................................................................................................................... 643 Instruction Codes................................................................................................................ 661 Operation Code Map .......................................................................................................... 675 Number of States Required for Execution.......................................................................... 679 Bus States During Instruction Execution ........................................................................... 692 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers .................................................................................. 708 B.1 B.2 B.3 Addresses............................................................................................................................ 708 Register Selection Conditions ............................................................................................ 713 Functions ............................................................................................................................ 719 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams............................................................................ 787 C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 C.6 C.7 Port 1 Block Diagram......................................................................................................... Port 2 Block Diagrams ....................................................................................................... Port 3 Block Diagram......................................................................................................... Port 4 Block Diagrams ....................................................................................................... Port 5 Block Diagrams ....................................................................................................... Port 6 Block Diagrams ....................................................................................................... Port 7 Block Diagrams ....................................................................................................... 787 789 795 796 801 804 809 Appendix D Pin States ........................................................................................................ 810 D.1 Port States in Each Processing State .................................................................................. 810 Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode................................................................................................ 812 xiv E.1 E.2 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ............................................................. 812 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode.......................................................... 812 Appendix F Product Code Lineup ................................................................................... 813 Appendix G Package Dimensions.................................................................................... 815 xv Section 1 Overview 1.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series comprise microcomputers (MCUs) built around the H8S/2000 CPU, employing Hitachi's proprietary architecture, and equipped with supporting modules on-chip. The H8S/2000 CPU has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general registers and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space. The instruction set is upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPU instructions at the object-code level, facilitating migration from the H8/300, H8/300L, or H8/300H Series. On-chip supporting modules required for system configuration include a data transfer controller (DTC) bus master, ROM and RAM memory, a16-bit free-running timer module (FRT), 8-bit timer module (TMR), watchdog timer module (WDT), two PWM timers (PWM and PWMX), serial communication interface (SCI), A/D converter (ADC), and I/O ports. An I2C bus interface (IIC) can also be incorporated as an option. The on-chip ROM is either flash memory (F-ZTATTM*) or mask ROM, with a capacity of 64 or 32 kbytes. (128 kbytes in the H8S/2128 F-ZTAT) ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte and word data to be accessed in one state. Instruction fetching has been speeded up, and processing speed increased. Three operating modes, modes 1 to 3, are provided, and there is a choice of address space and single-chip mode or externally expanded modes. The features of the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series are shown in Table 1.1. Note: * F-ZTATTM is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd. 1 Table 1.1 Item CPU Overview Specifications * General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) High-speed operation suitable for real-time control Maximum operating frequency: 20 MHz/5 V, 10 MHz/3 V High-speed arithmetic and logic operations 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 50 ns (20 MHz operation) 16 x 16-bit register-register multiply: 1000 ns (20 MHz operation) 32 / 16-bit register-register divide: 1000 ns (20 MHz operation) Instruction set suitable for high-speed operation Sixty-five basic instructions 8/16/32-bit transfer/arithmetic and logic instructions Unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions Two CPU operating modes Normal mode: 64-kbyte address space Advanced mode: 16-Mbyte address space Three MCU operating modes External Data Bus CPU Operating Mode Mode Description 1 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode 3 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode * * Enabled On-Chip Initial ROM Value Disabled 8 bits Maximum Value 8 bits * * * Operating modes * 2 Advanced Enabled 8 bits 8 bits None 8 bits 8 bits None Bus controller 2-state or 3-state access space can be designated for external expansion areas Number of program wait states can be set for external expansion areas 2 Item Data transfer controller (DTC) (H8S/2128 Series) Specifications * * * * Can be activated by internal interrupt or software Multiple transfers or multiple types of transfer possible for one activation source Transfer possible in repeat mode, block transfer mode, etc. Request can be sent to CPU for interrupt that activated DTC One 16-bit free-running counter (also usable for external event counting) Two output compare outputs Four input capture inputs (with buffer operation capability) One 8-bit up-counter (also usable for external event counting) Two timer constant registers The two channels can be connected Measurement of input signal or frequency-divided waveform pulse width and cycle (FRT, TMR1) Output of waveform obtained by modification of input signal edge (FRT, TMR1) Determination of input signal duty cycle (TMRX) Output of waveform synchronized with input signal (FRT, TMRX, TMRY) Automatic generation of cyclical waveform (FRT, TMRY) Watchdog timer or interval timer function selectable Subclock operation capability (channel 1 only) Up to 16 outputs Pulse duty cycle settable from 0 to 100% Resolution: 1/256 1.25 MHz maximum carrier frequency (20 MHz operation) Up to 2 outputs Resolution: 1/16384 312.5 kHz maximum carrier frequency (20 MHz operation) Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable Multiprocessor communication function 16-bit free-running timer module (FRT: 1 channel) 8-bit timer module (2 channels: TMR0, TMR1) * * * * * * * * * * * Each channel has: Timer connection and 8-bit timer module (2 channels: TMRX, TMRY) (Timer connection and TMRX provided in H8S/2128 Series) Input/output and FRT, TMR1, TMRX, TMRY can be interconnected Watchdog timer module (WDT: 2 channels) 8-bit PWM timer module (PWM) (H8S/2128 Series) * * * * * * * * * 14-bit PWM timer module (PWMX) (H8S/2128 Series) Serial communication * interface * (SCI: 2 channels, SCI0, SCI1) 3 Item A/D converter Specifications * * * * * * Resolution: 10 bits Input: 8 channels (dedicated analog input pins) 8 channels (expansion A/D input pins) High-speed conversion: 6.7 s minimum conversion time (20 MHz operation) Single or scan mode selectable Sample-and-hold function A/D conversion can be activated by external trigger or timer trigger 43 input/output pins (including 24 with LED drive capability) 8 input-only pins Flash memory or mask ROM High-speed static RAM ROM 128 kbytes 64 kbytes 32 kbytes RAM 4 kbytes 2 kbytes 2 kbytes I/O ports Memory * * * * Product Name H8S/2128 H8S/2122, H8S/2127 H8S/2120, H8S/2126 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Interrupt controller Four external interrupt pins (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2) 33 internal interrupt sources Three priority levels settable Medium-speed mode Sleep mode Module stop mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Subclock operation Built-in duty correction circuit 64-pin plastic DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin plastic QFP (FP-64A) 80-pin plastic TQFP (TFP-80C) Conforms to Philips I2C bus interface standard Single master mode/slave mode Arbitration lost condition can be identified Supports two slave addresses Power-down state Clock pulse generator * Packages I 2C bus interface (IIC: 2 channels) (option in H8S/2128 Series) 4 Item Product lineup (preliminary) Specifications Product Code Series H8S/2128 Mask ROM Versions -- HD6432127R HD6432127RW* HD6432126R HD6432126RW* H8S/2124 HD6432122 HD6432120 2 F-ZTATTM Versions HD64F2128 -- ROM/RAM (Bytes) 128 k/4 k 64 k/2 k Packages DP-64S, FP-64A, TFP-80C -- 32 k/2 k -- -- 64 k/2 k 32 k/2 k Note: * "W" indicates the I C bus option. 5 1.2 Internal Block Diagram An internal block diagram of the H8S/2128 Series is shown in figure 1.1, and an internal block diagram of the H8S/2124 Series in figure 1.2. VCC1 VCC2 VSS VSS MD1 MD0 EXTAL XTAL STBY RES NMI Clock pulse generator Port 3 Internal address bus H8S/2000 CPU Internal data bus Bus controller P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 P30/D0 P27/A15/PW15/SCK1/CBLANK P26/A14/PW14/RxD1 P25/A13/PW13/TxD1 P24/A12/PW12/SCL1 P23/ A11/PW11/SDA1 P22/A10/PW10 P21/A9/PW9 P20/A8/PW8 P47/WAIT/SDA0 P46/o/EXCL P45/AS/IOS P44/WR P43/RD P42/IRQ0 P41/IRQ1 P40/IRQ2/ADTRG DTC ROM WDT0, WDT1 Peripheral data bus Interrupt controller Port 4 Peripheral address bus Port 2 Port 1 Port 5 P67/TMOX/TMO1/CIN7/HSYNCO P66/FTOB/TMRI1/CIN6/CSYNCI P65/FTID/TMCI1/CIN5/HSYNCI P64/FTIC/TMO0/CIN4/CLAMPO P63/FTIB/TMRI0/CIN3/VFBACKI P62/FTIA/CIN2/VSYNCI/TMIY P61/FTOA/CIN1/VSYNCO P60/FTCI/TMCI0/CIN0/HFBACKI/TMIX RAM Port 6 8-bit PWM 14-bit PWM 16-bit FRT P17/A7/PW7 P16/A6/PW6 P15/A5/PW5 P14/A4/PW4 P13/A3/PW3 P12/A2/PW2 P11/A1/PW1/PWX1 P10/A0/PW0/PWX0 P77/AN7 P76/AN6 P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 8-bit timer x 4ch Timer connection (TMR0, TMR1, TMRX, TMRY) Port 7 SCI x 2ch IIC x 2ch (option) P52/SCK0/SCL0 P51/RXD0 P50/TXD0 10-bit A/D AVCC AVSS Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2128 Series 6 VCC1 VCC2 VSS VSS Clock pulse generator Internal address bus H8S/2000 CPU Internal data bus MD1 MD0 EXTAL XTAL STBY RES NMI Bus controller P37/ D7 P36/ D6 P35/ D5 P34/ D4 P33/ D3 P32/ D2 P31/ D1 P30/ D0 P27/ A15/SCK1 P26/ A14/RxD1 P25/ A13/TxD1 P24/ A12 P23/ A11 P22/ A10 P21/ A9 P20/ A8 P47/ WAIT P46/ o/EXCL P45/ AS/IOS P44/ WR P43/ RD P42/ IRQ0 P41/ IRQ1 P40/ IRQ2/ ADTRG P67/TMO1/CIN7 P66/ FTOB/TMRI1/CIN6 P65/ FTID/TMCI1/CIN5 P64/ FTIC/TMO0/CIN4 P63/ FTIB/TMRI0/CIN3 P62/ FTIA/ C I N 2 /TMIY P61/ FTOA/CIN1 P60/ FTCI/TMCI0/CIN0 Interrupt controller ROM WDT0, WDT1 Peripheral data bus Peripheral address bus Port 4 Port 2 Port 1 Port 5 Port 3 RAM SCI x 2ch 10-bit A/D Port 6 16-bit FRT P17/ A7 P16/ A6 P15/ A5 P14/ A4 P13/ A3 P12/ A2 P11/ A1 P10/ A0 P77/ AN7 P76/ AN6 P75/ AN5 P74/ AN4 P73/ AN3 P72/ AN2 P71/ AN1 P70/ AN0 8-bit timer x 3ch (TMR0, TMR1, TMRY) P52/ SCK0 P51/ RXD0 P50/ TXD0 Port 7 AVCC AVSS Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2124 Series 7 1.3 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement and Functions Pin Arrangement The pin arrangement of the H8S/2128 Series is shown in figures 1.3 to 1.5, and the pin arrangement of the H8S/2124 Series in figures 1.6 to 1.8. ADTRG/IRQ2/P40 IRQ1/P41 IRQ0/P42 RD/P43 WR/P44 IOS/AS/P45 EXCL/o/P46 SDA0/WAIT/P47 TxD0/P50 RxD0/P51 SCL0/SCK0/P52 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS AN0/P70 AN1/P71 AN2/P72 AN3/P73 AN4/P74 AN5/P75 AN6/P76 AN7/P77 AVCC TMIX/HFBACKI/CIN0/TMCI0/FTCI/P60 VSYNCO/CIN1/FTOA/P61 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 P30/D0 P10/A0/PW0/PWX0 P11/A1/PW1/PWX1 P12/A2/PW2 P13/A3/PW3 P14/A4/PW4 P15/A5/PW5 P16/A6/PW6 P17/A7/PW7 VSS P20/A8/PW8 P21/A9/PW9 P22/A10/PW10 P23/A11/PW11/SDA1 P24/A12/PW12/SCL1 P25/A13/PW13/TxD1 P26/A14/PW14/RxD1 P27/A15/PW15/SCK1/CBLANK VCC1 P67/TMOX/TMO1/CIN7/HSYNCO P66/FTOB/TMRI1/CIN6/CSYNCI P65/FTID/TMCI1/CIN5/HSYNCI P64/FTIC/TMO0/CIN4/CLAMPO P63/FTIB/TMRI0/CIN3/VFBACKI P62/FTIA/CIN2/VSYNCI/TMIY Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2128 Series (DP-64S: Top View) 8 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 P30/D0 P31/D1 P32/D2 P33/D3 P34/D4 P35/D5 P36/D6 P37/D7 P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 P42/IRQ0 P43/RD P44/WR P45/AS/IOS P46/o/EXCL P47/WAIT/SDA0 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 P10/A0/PW0/PWX0 P11/A1/PW1/PWX1 P12/A2/PW2 P13/A3/PW3 P14/A4/PW4 P15/A5/PW5 P16/A6/PW6 P17/A7/PW7 VSS P20/A8/PW8 P21/A9/PW9 P22/A10/PW10 P23/A11/PW11/SDA1 P24/A12/PW12/SCL1 P25/A13/PW13/TxD1 P26/A14/PW14/RxD1 CBLANK/SCK1/PW15/A15/P27 VCC1 HSYNCO/CIN7/TMO1/TMOX/P67 CSYNCI/CIN6/TMRI1/FTOB/P66 HSYNCI/CIN5/TMCI1/FTID/P65 CLAMPO/CIN4/TMO0/FTIC/P64 VFBACKI /CIN3/TMRI0/FTIB/P63 TMIY/VSYNCI/CIN2/FTIA/P62 VSYNCO/CIN1/FTOA/P61 TMIX/HFBACKI/CIN0/TMCI0/FTCI/P60 AVCC AN7/P77 AN6/P76 AN5/P75 AN4/P74 AN3/P73 Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2128 Series (FP-64A: Top View) TxD0/P50 RxD0/P51 SCL0/SCK0/P52 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS AN0/P70 AN1/P71 AN2/P72 9 P30/D0 P31/D1 P32/D2 P33/D3 P34/D4 VSS P35/D5 P36/D6 P37/D7 VSS P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 VSS P42/IRQ0 P43/RD VSS P44/WR P45/AS/IOS P46/o/EXCL P47/WAIT/SDA0 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P10/A0/PW0/PWX0 P11/A1/PW1/PWX1 P12/A2/PW2 P13/A3/PW3 P14/A4/PW4 VSS P15/A5/PW5 P16/A6/PW6 P17/A7/PW7 VSS VSS VSS P20/A8/PW8 P21/A9/PW9 P22/A10/PW10 VSS P23/A11/PW11/SDA1 P24/A12/PW12/SCL1 P25/A13/PW13/TxD1 P26/A14/PW14/RxD1 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 CBLANK/SCK1/PW15/A15/P27 VCC1 HSYNCO/CIN7/TMO1/TMOX/P67 CSYNCI/CIN6/TMRI1/FTOB/P66 HSYNCI/CIN5/TMCI1/FTID/P65 CLAMPO/CIN4/TMO0/FTIC/P64 VSS VFBACKI /CIN3/TMRI0/FTIB/P63 TMIY/VSYNCI/CIN2/FTIA/P62 VSS VSYNCO/CIN1/FTOA/P61 VSS TMIX/HFBACKI/CIN0/TMCI0/FTCI/P60 AVCC AN7/P77 AN6/P76 VSS AN5/P75 AN4/P74 AN3/P73 Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2128 Series (TFP-80C: Top View) 10 TxD0/P50 RxD0/P51 SCL0/SCK0/P52 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL MD1 VSS MD0 AVSS AN0/P70 AN1/P71 AN2/P72 ADTRG/IRQ2/P40 IRQ1/P41 IRQ0/P42 RD/P43 WR/P44 IOS/AS/P45 EXCL/o/P46 WAIT/P47 TxD0/P50 RxD0/P51 SCK0/P52 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS AN0/P70 AN1/P71 AN2/P72 AN3/P73 AN4/P74 AN5/P75 AN6/P76 AN7/P77 AVCC CIN0/TMCI0/FTCI/P60 CIN1/FTOA/P61 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 P30/D0 P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 VSS P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13/TxD1 P26/A14/RxD1 P27/A15/SCK1 VCC1 P67/TMO1/CIN7 P66/FTOB/TMRI1/CIN6 P65/FTID/TMCI1/CIN5 P64/FTIC/TMO0/CIN4 P63/FTIB/TMRI0/CIN3 P62/FTIA/CIN2/TMIY Figure 1.6 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2124 Series (DP-64S: Top View) 11 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 VSS P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13/TxD1 P26/A14/RxD1 P30/D0 P31/D1 P32/D2 P33/D3 P34/D4 P35/D5 P36/D6 P37/D7 P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 P42/IRQ0 P43/RD P44/WR P45/AS/IOS P46/o/EXCL P47/WAIT A15/P27/SCK1 VCC1 CIN7/TMO1/P67 CIN6/TMRI1/FTOB/P66 CIN5/TMCI1/FTID/P65 CIN4/TMO0/FTIC/P64 CIN3/TMRI0/FTIB/P63 TMIY/CIN2/FTIA/P62 CIN1/FTOA/P61 CIN0/TMCI0/FTCI/P60 AVCC AN7/P77 AN6/P76 AN5/P75 AN4/P74 AN3/P73 Figure 1.7 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2124 Series (FP-64A: Top View) 12 TxD0/P50 RxD0/P51 SCK0/P52 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS XTAL EXTAL MD1 MD0 AVSS AN0/P70 AN1/P71 AN2/P72 P30/D0 P31/D1 P32/D2 P33/D3 P34/D4 VSS P35/D5 P36/D6 P37/D7 VSS P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 VSS P42/IRQ0 P43/RD VSS P44/WR P45/AS/IOS P46/o/EXCL P47/WAIT 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P10/A0 P11/A1 P12/A2 P13/A3 P14/A4 VSS P15/A5 P16/A6 P17/A7 VSS VSS VSS P20/A8 P21/A9 P22/A10 VSS P23/A11 P24/A12 P25/A13/TxD1 P26/A14/RxD1 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 A15/P27/SCK1 VCC1 CIN7/TMO1/P67 CIN6/TMRI1/FTOB/P66 CIN5/TMCI1/FTID/P65 CIN4/TMO0/FTIC/P64 VSS CIN3/TMRI0/FTIB/P63 TMIY/CIN2/FTIA/P62 VSS CIN1/FTOA/P61 VSS CIN0/TMCI0/FTCI/P60 AVCC AN7/P77 AN6/P76 VSS AN5/P75 AN4/P74 AN3/P73 Figure 1.8 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2124 Series (TFP-80C: Top View) TxD0/P50 RxD0/P51 SCK0/P52 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL MD1 VSS MD0 AVSS AN0/P70 AN1/P71 AN2/P72 13 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Tables 1.2 and 1.3 show the pin functions of the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series in each of the operating modes. Table 1.2 H8S/2128 Series Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Flash Memory Progr am Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) mer Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Mode P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 VSS P42/IRQ0 P43 VSS P44 P45 P46/o/EXCL P47/SDA0 P50/TxD0 P51/RxD0 P52/SCK0/SCL0 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL MD1 VCC VCC VSS VSS WE VSS FA15 FA16 NC VCC NC FA17 NC RES FA9 VCC VCC VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL VSS Single-Chip Modes DP-64S FP-64A TFP-80C Mode 1 1 2 -- 3 4 -- 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 -- -- 17 -- 18 19 57 58 -- 59 60 -- 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- -- 9 -- 10 11 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 VSS P42/IRQ0 RD VSS WR AS/IOS o/P46/EXCL P41/IRQ1 VSS P42/IRQ0 RD VSS WR AS/IOS P46/o/EXCL P47/WAIT/SDA0 P47/WAIT/SDA0 P50/TxD0 P51/RxD0 P50/TxD0 P51/RxD0 P52/SCK0/SCL0 P52/SCK0/SCL0 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL MD1 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL MD1 14 Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Flash Memory Progr am Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) mer Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Mode VSS MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 VSS P76/AN6 P77/AN7 AVCC P60/FTCI/TMCI0/ CIN0/HFBACKI/ TMIX VSS P61/FTOA/CIN1/ VSYNCO VSS P62/FTIA/CIN2/ VSYNCI/TMIY P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ CIN3/VFBACKI VSS P64/FTIC/TMO0/ CIN4/CLAMPO P65/FTID/TMCI1/ CIN5/HSYNCI P66/FTOB/TMRI1/ CIN6/CSYNCI VSS VSS VSS NC NC NC NC NC NC VSS NC NC VCC NC Single-Chip Modes DP-64S FP-64A TFP-80C Mode 1 -- 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -- 28 29 30 31 -- 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 -- 20 21 22 23 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 VSS MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 VSS P76/AN6 P77/AN7 AVCC VSS MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 VSS P76/AN6 P77/AN7 AVCC P60/FTCI/TMCI0/ P60/FTCI/TMCI0/ CIN0/HFBACKI/ CIN0/HFBACKI/ TMIX TMIX VSS VSS -- 32 -- 33 34 -- 35 36 37 -- 24 -- 25 26 -- 27 28 29 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 VSS NC VSS NC NC VSS NC NC NC P61/FTOA/CIN1/ P61/FTOA/CIN1/ VSYNCO VSYNCO VSS P62/FTIA/CIN2/ VSYNCI/TMIY VSS P62/FTIA/CIN2/ VSYNCI/TMIY P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ CIN3/VFBACKI CIN3/VFBACKI VSS VSS P64/FTIC/TMO0/ P64/FTIC/TMO0/ CIN4/CLAMPO CIN4/CLAMPO P65/FTID/TMCI1/ P65/FTID/TMCI1/ CIN5/HSYNCI CIN5/HSYNCI P66/FTOB/TMRI1/ P66/FTOB/TMRI1/ CIN6/CSYNCI CIN6/CSYNCI 15 Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Flash Memory Progr am Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) mer Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Mode P67/TMO1/TMOX/ CIN7/HSYNCO VCC1 P27/PW15/ SCK1/CBLANK P26/PW14/ RxD1 P25/PW13/ TxD1 P24/PW12/SCL1 P23/PW11/SDA1 VSS P22 /PW10 P21/PW9 P20/PW8 VSS VSS VSS P17/PW7 P16/PW6 P15/PW5 VSS P14/PW4 P13/PW3 P12/PW2 VSS Single-Chip Modes DP-64S FP-64A TFP-80C Mode 1 38 30 38 P67/TMOX/ TMO1/CIN7/ HSYNCO VCC1 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 VSS A10 A9 A8 VSS VSS VSS A7 A6 A5 VSS A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 P67/TMOX/TMO1/ CIN7/HSYNCO VCC1 A15/P27/PW15/ SCK1/CBLANK A14/P26/PW14/ RxD1 A13/P25/PW13/ TxD1 A12/P24/PW12/ SCL1 A11/P23/PW11/ SDA1 VSS A10/P22/PW10 A9 /P21/PW9 A8 /P20 /PW8 VSS VSS VSS A7/P17/PW7 A6/P16/PW6 A5/P15/PW5 VSS A4/P14/PW4 A3/P13/PW3 A2/P12/PW2 39 40 41 42 43 44 -- 45 46 47 -- 48 -- 49 50 51 -- 52 53 54 55 56 31 32 33 34 35 36 -- 37 38 39 -- 40 -- 41 42 43 -- 44 45 46 47 48 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 VCC CE FA14 FA13 FA12 FA11 VSS FA10 OE FA8 VSS VSS VSS FA7 FA6 FA5 VSS FA4 FA3 FA2 FA1 FA0 A1/P11/PW1/PWX1 P11/PW1/PWX1 A0/P10/PW0/PWX0 P10/PW0/PWX0 16 Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Flash Memory Progr am Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) mer Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Mode P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 VSS P35 P36 P37 VSS FO0 FO1 FO2 FO3 FO4 VSS FO5 FO6 FO7 VSS Single-Chip Modes DP-64S FP-64A TFP-80C Mode 1 57 58 59 60 61 -- 62 63 64 -- 49 50 51 52 53 -- 54 55 56 -- 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 VSS D5 D6 D7 VSS D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 VSS D5 D6 D7 VSS 17 Table 1.3 H8S/2124 Series Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Flash Memory Progr am Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) mer Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Mode P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 VSS P42/IRQ0 P43 VSS P44 P45 P46/o/EXCL P47 P50/TxD0 P51/RxD0 P52/SCK0 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL MD1 VSS MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 VCC VCC VSS VSS WE VSS FA15 FA16 NC VCC NC FA17 NC RES FA9 VCC VCC VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL VSS VSS VSS VSS NC Single-Chip Modes DP-64S FP-64A TFP-80C Mode 1 1 2 -- 3 4 -- 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 -- -- 17 -- 18 19 -- 20 21 22 18 57 58 -- 59 60 -- 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -- -- 9 -- 10 11 -- 12 13 14 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P41/IRQ1 VSS P42/IRQ0 RD VSS WR AS/IOS P46/o/EXCL P47/WAIT P50/TxD0 P51/RxD0 P52/SCK0 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL MD1 VSS MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P41/IRQ1 VSS P42/IRQ0 RD VSS WR AS/IOS P46/o/EXCL P47/WAIT P50/TxD0 P51/RxD0 P52/SCK0 RES NMI VCC2 STBY VSS VSS VSS XTAL VSS EXTAL MD1 VSS MD0 AVSS P70/AN0 Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Flash Memory Progr am Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) mer Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Mode P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 VSS P76/AN6 P77/AN7 AVCC P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 VSS P76/AN6 P77/AN7 AVCC P60/FTCI/TMCI0/ CIN0 VSS P61/FTOA/CIN1 VSS P62/FTIA/CIN2/ TMIY P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ CIN3 VSS P64/FTIC/TMO0/ CIN4 P65/FTID/TMCI1/ CIN5 P66/FTOB/TMRI1/ CIN6 P67/TMO1/CIN7 VCC1 P27/SCK1 P26/RxD1 NC NC NC NC NC VSS NC NC VCC NC VSS NC VSS NC NC VSS NC NC NC VSS VCC CE FA14 Single-Chip Modes DP-64S FP-64A TFP-80C Mode 1 23 24 25 26 27 -- 28 29 30 31 -- 32 -- 33 34 -- 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 15 16 17 18 19 -- 20 21 22 23 -- 24 -- 25 26 -- 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 VSS P76/AN6 P77/AN7 AVCC P60/FTCI/TMCI0/ P60/FTCI/TMCI0/ CIN0 CIN0 VSS P61/FTOA/CIN1 VSS P62/FTIA/CIN2/ TMIY VSS P61/FTOA/CIN1 VSS P62/FTIA/CIN2/ TMIY P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ CIN3 CIN3 VSS VSS P64/FTIC/TMO0/ P64/FTIC/TMO0/ CIN4 CIN4 P65/FTID/TMCI1/ P65/FTID/TMCI1/ CIN5 CIN5 P66/FTOB/TMRI1/ P66/FTOB/TMRI1/ CIN6 CIN6 P67/TMO1/CIN7 VCC1 A15 A14 P67/TMO1/CIN7 VCC1 A15/P27/SCK1 A14/P26/RxD1 19 Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Flash Memory Progr am Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) mer Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Mode P25/TxD1 P24 P23 VSS P22 P21 P20 VSS VSS VSS P17 P16 P15 VSS P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 VSS P35 P36 P37 VSS FA13 FA12 FA11 VSS FA10 OE FA8 VSS VSS VSS FA7 FA6 FA5 VSS FA4 FA3 FA2 FA1 FA0 FO0 FO1 FO2 FO3 FO4 VSS FO5 FO6 FO7 VSS Single-Chip Modes DP-64S FP-64A TFP-80C Mode 1 42 43 44 -- 45 46 47 -- 48 -- 49 50 51 -- 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -- 62 63 64 -- 34 35 36 -- 37 38 39 -- 40 -- 41 42 43 -- 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 -- 54 55 56 -- 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 A13 A12 A11 VSS A10 A9 A8 VSS VSS VSS A7 A6 A5 VSS A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 VSS D5 D6 D7 VSS A13/P25/TxD1 A12/P24 A11/P23 VSS A10/P22 A9 /P21 A8 /P20 VSS VSS VSS A7/P17 A6/P16 A5/P15 VSS A4/P14 A3/P13 A2/P12 A1/P11 A0/P10 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 VSS D5 D6 D7 VSS 20 1.3.3 Pin Functions Table 1.4 summarizes the functions of the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series pins. Table 1.4 Pin Functions Pin No. Type Power supply Symbol VCC1, VCC2 DP-64S FP-64A 14, 39 6, 31 TFP-80C 6, 39 I/O Input Name and Function Power supply: For connection to the power supply. All VCC1 and VCC2 pins should be connected to the system power supply. Ground: For connection to the power supply (0 V). All VSS pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). VSS 16, 48 8, 40 8, 9, 10, Input 12, 15, 24, 29, 31, 34, 45, 49, 50, 51, 55, 66, 70, 73, 76 11 Input Clock XTAL 17 9 Connected to a crystal oscillator. See section 21, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. Connected to a crystal oscillator. The EXTAL pin can also input an external clock. See section 21, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. EXTAL 18 10 13 Input o EXCL 7 7 63 63 79 79 Output System clock: Supplies the system clock to external devices. Input External subclock input: Input a 32.768 kHz external subclock. 21 Pin No. Type Operating mode control Symbol MD1 MD0 DP-64S FP-64A 19 20 11 12 TFP-80C 14 16 I/O Input Name and Function Mode pins: These pins set the operating mode. The relation between the settings of pins MD1 and MD0 and the operating mode is shown below. These pins should not be changed while the MCU is operating. Operating MD1 MD0 Mode Description 0 1 Mode 1 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled 1 0 Mode 2 Advanced Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode 1 1 Mode 3 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode System control RES STBY 12 15 4 7 4 7 Input Input Reset input: When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset. Standby: When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Address bus A15 to A0 40 to 47, 32 to 39, 40 to 44, 49 to 56 41 to 48 46 to 48, 52 to 54, 56 to 60 Output Address bus: These pins output an address. Data bus D7 to D0 64 to 57 56 to 49 69 to 67, 65 to 61 Input/ output Data bus: These pins constitute a bidirectional data bus. 22 Pin No. Type Bus control Symbol WAIT DP-64S FP-64A 8 64 TFP-80C 80 I/O Input Name and Function Wait: Requests insertion of a wait state in the bus cycle when accessing external 3-state address space. RD 4 60 75 Output Read: When this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space is being read. Output Write: When this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space is being written to. Output Address strobe: When this pin is low, it indicates that address output on the address bus is valid. Input Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a nonmaskable interrupt. Interrupt request 0 to 2: These pins request a maskable interrupt FRT counter clock input: Input pin for an external clock signal for the free-running counter (FRC). WR 5 61 77 AS/IOS 6 62 78 Interrupt signals NMI IRQ0 to IRQ2 13 1 to 3 31 5 5 57 to 59 71, 72, 74 Input 23 28 Input 16-bit free- FTCI running timer (FRT) FTOA FTOB FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID 32 37 33 34 25 36 24 29 25 26 27 28 30 37 32 33 35 36 Output FRT output compare A output: The output compare A output pin. Output FRT output compare B output: The output compare B output pin. Input Input Input Input FRT input capture A input: The input capture A input pin. FRT input capture B input: The input capture B input pin. FRT input capture C input: The input capture C input pin. FRT input capture D input: The input capture D input pin. 23 Pin No. Type 8-bit timer (TMR0, TMR1, TMRX, TMRY) Symbol TMO0 TMO1 TMOX TMCI0 TMCI1 TMRI0 TMRI1 TMIX TMIY DP-64S FP-64A 35 38 38 31 36 34 37 31 33 27 30 30 23 28 26 29 23 25 TFP-80C 35 38 38 28 36 33 37 28 32 I/O Name and Function Output Compare-match output: TMR0, TMR1, and TMRX compare-match output pins. Input Counter external clock input: TMR0 and TMR1 input pins for the external clock input to the counter. Counter external reset input: TMR0 and TMR1 counter reset input pins. Counter external clock input and reset input: TMRX and TMRY counter clock input pins and reset input pins. Input Input Serial communication interface (SCI0, SCI1) TxD0 TxD1 RxD0 RxD1 SCK0 SCK1 9 42 10 41 11 40 1 34 2 33 3 32 1 42 2 41 3 40 Output Transmit data: Data output pins. Input Receive data: Data input pins. Input/ output Serial clock: Clock input/output pins. The SCK0 output type is NMOS push-pull only by the H8S/2128 Series and is CMOS output in the H8S/2124 Series. A/D converter AN7 to AN0 CIN0 to CIN7 29 to 22 21 to 14 26, 25, 23 to 18 31 to 38 23 to 30 28, 30, 32 to 33, 35 to 38 Input Input Analog 7 to 0: Analog input pins. Expansion A/D input: Expansion A/D input pins can be connected to the A/D converter, but as they are also used as digital I/O pins, precision falls to the equivalent of 6-bit resolution. A/D conversion external trigger input: Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D conversion. ADTRG 1 57 71 Input 24 Pin No. Type A/D converter Symbol AVCC DP-64S FP-64A 30 22 TFP-80C 27 I/O Input Name and Function Analog power supply: The reference power supply pin for the A/D converter. When the A/D converter is not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V or +3 V). AVSS 21 13 17 Input Analog ground: The ground pin for the A/D converter. This pin should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). PWM timer PW15 to 40 to 47, 32 to 39, 40 to 44, (PWM) PW0 49 to 56 41 to 48 46 to 48, 52 to 54, 56 to 60 14-bit PWM PWX0 PWX1 timer (PWMX) Timer VSYNCI connection HSYNCI CSYNCI VFBACKI HFBACKI VSYNCO HSYNCO CLAMPO CBLANK I 2C bus interface (IIC) (option) SCL0 SCL1 56 55 33 36 37 34 31 32 38 35 40 11 43 48 47 25 28 29 26 23 24 30 27 32 3 35 60 59 32 36 37 33 28 30 38 35 40 3 43 Output PWM timer output: PWM timer pulse output pins. Output PWMX timer output: PWM D/A pulse output pins. Input Timer connection input: Timer connection synchronous signal input pins. Output Timer connection output: Timer connection synchronous signal output pins. Input/ output I 2C clock input/output (channels 0 and 1): I2C clock I/O pins. These pins have a bus drive function. The SCL0 output form is NMOS open-drain. I 2C clock input/output (channels 0 and 1): I2C clock I/O pins. These pins have a bus drive function. The SDA0 output form is NMOS open-drain. SDA0 SDA1 8 44 64 36 80 44 Input/ output 25 Pin No. Type I/O ports Symbol P17 to P10 DP-64S FP-64A TFP-80C I/O Input/ output Name and Function Port 1: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR). These pins have built-in MOS input pull-ups, and also have LED drive capability. Port 2: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 2 data direction register (P2DDR). These pins have built-in MOS input pull-ups, and also have LED drive capability. Port 3: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 3 data direction register (P3DDR). These pins have built-in MOS input pull-ups, and also have LED drive capability. Port 4: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 4 data direction register (P4DDR). (Except P46) P47 is an NMOS push-pull output only by the H8S/2128 Series. Port 5: Three input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 5 data direction register (P5DDR). P52 is an NMOS push-pull output only by the H8S/2128 Series and is an CMOS output in the H8S/2124 Series. Port 6: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 6 data direction register (P6DDR). Port 7: Eight input pins. 49 to 56 41 to 48 52 to 54, 56 to 60 P27 to P20 40 to 47 32 to 39 40 to 44, 46 to 48 Input/ output P37 to P30 64 to 57 56 to 49 69 to 67, 65 to 61 Input/ output P47 to P40 8 to 1 64 to 57 80 to 77, 75, 74, 72, 71 Input/ output P52 to P50 11 to 9 3 to 1 3 to 1 Input/ output P67 to P60 38 to 31 30 to 23 38 to 35, 33, 32, 30, 28 29 to 22 21 to 14 26, 25, 23 to 18 Input/ output P77 to P70 Input 26 Section 2 CPU 2.1 Overview The H8S/2000 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2000 CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 Features The H8S/2000 CPU has the following features. * Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H object programs * General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) * Sixty-five basic instructions 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions * Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] * 16-Mbyte address space Program: 16 Mbytes Data: 16 Mbytes (4 Gbytes architecturally) 27 * High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states Maximum clock rate: 20 MHz 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 50 ns 8 x 8-bit register-register multiply: 600 ns 16 / 8-bit register-register divide: 600 ns 16 x 16-bit register-register multiply: 1000 ns 32 / 16-bit register-register divide: 1000 ns * Two CPU operating modes Normal mode Advanced mode * Power-down state Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction CPU clock speed selection 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are shown below. * Register configuration The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. * Basic instructions The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. * Number of execution states The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions differ as follows. Number of Execution States Instruction MULXU Mnemonic MULXU.B Rs, Rd MULXU.W Rs, ERd MULXS MULXS.B Rs, Rd MULXS.W Rs, ERd H8S/2600 3 4 4 5 H8S/2000 12 20 13 21 There are also differences in the address space, EXR register functions, power-down state, etc., depending on the product. 28 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. * More general registers and control registers Eight 16-bit extended registers, and one 8-bit control register, have been added. * Expanded address space Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. * Enhanced addressing The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address space. * Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. * Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast. 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. * Additional control register One 8-bit control register has been added. * Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. * Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast. 29 2.2 CPU Operating Modes The H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address space (architecturally the maximum total address space is 4 Gbytes, with a maximum of 16 Mbytes for the program area and a maximum of 4 Gbytes for the data area). The mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller. Maximum 64 kbytes for program and data areas combined Normal mode CPU operating modes Advanced mode Maximum 16 Mbytes for program and data areas combined Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes (1) Normal Mode The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU. Address Space: A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed. Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@-Rn) or post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding extended register (En) will be affected. Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses (EA) are valid. 30 Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16 bits. The configuration of the exception vector table in normal mode is shown in figure 2.2. For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. H'0000 H'0001 H'0002 H'0003 H'0004 H'0005 H'0006 H'0007 H'0008 H'0009 H'000A H'000B Reset exception vector (Reserved for system use) Exception vector table Exception vector 1 Exception vector 2 Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode) The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector table. 31 Stack Structure: When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.3. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. SP PC (16 bits) SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch Note: * Ignored when returning. (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode (2) Advanced Mode Address Space: Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space (architecturally a maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum 4-Gbyte data area, with a maximum of 4 Gbytes for program and data areas combined). Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers. Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used. 32 Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In advanced mode the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.4). For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. H'00000000 Reserved Reset exception vector H'00000003 H'00000004 Reserved H'00000007 H'00000008 Exception vector table H'0000000B H'0000000C (Reserved for system use) H'00000010 Reserved Exception vector 1 Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode) The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector table. 33 Stack Structure: In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.5. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. SP Reserved PC (24 bits) SP CCR PC (24 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode 34 2.3 Address Space Figure 2.6 shows a memory map of the H8S/2000 CPU. The H8S/2000 CPU provides linear access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. H'0000 H'00000000 H'FFFF Program area H'00FFFFFF Data area Cannot be used by the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series H'FFFFFFFF (a) Normal Mode (b) Advanced Mode Figure 2.6 Memory Map 35 2.4 2.4.1 Register Configuration Overview The CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.7. There are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En) 15 ER0 ER1 ER2 ER3 ER4 ER5 ER6 ER7 (SP) Control Registers (CR) 23 PC 76543210 EXR* T -- -- -- -- I2 I1 I0 76543210 CCR I UI H U N Z V C Legend: SP: PC: EXR: T: I2 to I0: CCR: I: UI: 0 E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 07 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0 Stack pointer Program counter Extended control register Trace bit Interrupt mask bits Condition-code register Interrupt mask bit User bit or interrupt mask bit H: U: N: Z: V: C: Half-carry flag User bit Negative flag Zero flag Overflow flag Carry flag Note: * Does not affect operation in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. Figure 2.7 CPU Registers 36 2.4.2 General Registers The CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8bit registers. Figure 2.8 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. * Address registers * 32-bit registers * 16-bit registers E registers (extended registers) (E0 to E7) * 8-bit registers ER registers (ER0 to ER7) R registers (R0 to R7) RH registers (R0H to R7H) RL registers (R0L to R7L) Figure 2.8 Usage of General Registers General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.9 shows the stack. 37 Free area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2.9 Stack 2.4.3 Control Registers The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC), 8-bit extended control register (EXR), and 8-bit condition-code register (CCR). (1) Program Counter (PC): This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.) (2) Extended Control Register (EXR): An 8-bit register. In the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series, this register does not affect operation. Bit 7--Trace Bit (T): This bit is reserved. In the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series, this bit does not affect operation. Bits 6 to 3--Reserved: These bits are reserved. They are always read as 1. Bits 2 to 0--Interrupt Mask Bits (I2 to I0): These bits are reserved. In the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series, these bits do not affect operation. (3) Condition-Code Register (CCR): This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Bit 7--Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. (NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting.) The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exceptionhandling sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. 38 Bit 6--User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Bit 5--Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Bit 4--User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. Bit 3--Negative Flag (N): Stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data. Bit 2--Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. Bit 1--Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Bit 0--Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: * Add instructions, to indicate a carry * Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow * Shift and rotate instructions, to store the carry The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit-manipulation instructions. Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, refer to Appendix A.1, List of Instructions. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. 2.4.4 Initial Register Values Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized. The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset. 39 2.5 Data Formats The CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in general registers. Data Type General Register Data Format 1-bit data RnH 7 0 76543210 Don't care 1-bit data RnL Don't care 7 0 76543210 4-bit BCD data RnH 43 7 0 Upper digit Lower digit Don't care 4-bit BCD data RnL Don't care 43 7 0 Upper digit Lower digit Byte data RnH 7 MSB 0 Don't care LSB 7 Don't care MSB LSB 0 Byte data RnL Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats 40 Data Type General Register Data Format Word data Rn 15 MSB 0 LSB Word data 15 MSB Longword data 31 MSB En 0 LSB ERn 16 15 En Rn 0 LSB Legend: ERn: General register ER En: General register E Rn: General register R RnH: General register RH RnL: General register RL MSB: Most significant bit LSB: Least significant bit Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats (cont) 41 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2.11 shows the data formats in memory. The CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. Data Type Address Data Format 7 1-bit data Address L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Byte data Address L MSB LSB Word data Address 2M MSB Address 2M + 1 LSB Longword data Address 2N MSB Address 2N + 1 Address 2N + 2 Address 2N + 3 LSB Figure 2.11 Memory Data Formats When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. 42 2.6 2.6.1 Instruction Set Overview The H8S/2000 CPU has 65 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in table 2.1. Table 2.1 Function Data transfer Instruction Classification Instructions MOV POP* , PUSH* LDM* , STM* 3 5 5 3 1 1 Size BWL WL L B BWL B BWL L BW WL B BWL Types 5 MOVFPE* , MOVTPE* Arithmetic operations ADD, SUB, CMP, EG 19 ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS INC, DEC ADDS, SUBS MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS EXTU, EXTS TAS* 4 Logic operations Shift Bit manipulation Branch System control AND, OR, XOR, NOT 4 8 14 5 9 1 SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR BWL BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR Bcc* 2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS B -- TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP -- -- Block data transfer EEPMOV Total: 65 types Notes: B: byte size; W: word size; L: longword size. 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @-SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn, @-SP. 2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions. 3. Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series. 4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 5. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 43 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes Table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8S/2000 CPU can use. Table 2.2 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes Addressing Modes @-ERn/@ERn+ @(d:16,ERn) @(d:32,ERn) @(d:8,PC) @@aa:8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Function Instruction @ERn #xx @(d:16,PC) @aa:16 @aa:24 @aa:32 @aa:8 Rn Data transfer MOV POP, PUSH LDM* 3, STM* 3 MOVFPE* 1, MOVTPE* 1 BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- BWL -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- WL L -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Arithmetic operations ADD, CMP SUB ADDX, SUBX ADDS, SUBS INC, DEC DAA, DAS MULXU, DIVXU MULXS, DIVXS NEG EXTU, EXTS TAS* 2 BWL BWL WL B -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL B L BWL B BW BW BWL WL -- Logic operations AND, OR, XOR NOT BWL BWL -- -- -- -- -- -- BWL BWL B -- -- -- Shift Bit manipulation Branch Bcc, BSR JMP, JSR RTS -- -- -- -- -- -- Note: 1. Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series. 2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 44 -- Addressing Modes @-ERn/@ERn+ @(d:16,ERn) @(d:32,ERn) @(d:8,PC) @@aa:8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Function Instruction @ERn #xx @(d:16,PC) @aa:16 @aa:24 @aa:32 @aa:8 Rn System control TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC STC ANDC, ORC, XORC NOP -- -- -- B -- B -- -- -- -- -- B B -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- W W -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Block data transfer BW Legend: B: Byte W: Word L: Longword -- 45 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function Table 2.3 summarizes the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in table 2.3 is defined below. Operation Notation Rd Rs Rn ERn (EAd) (EAs) EXR CCR N Z V C PC SP #IMM disp + - x / :8/:16/:24/:32 General register (destination)* General register (source)* General register* General register (32-bit register) Destination operand Source operand Extended control register Condition-code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Program counter Stack pointer Immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Logical AND Logical OR Logical exclusive OR Move NOT (logical complement) 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7). 46 Table 2.3 Type Data transfer Instructions Classified by Function Instruction MOV Size* 1 B/W/L Function (EAs) Rd, Rs (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series. Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series. @SP+ Rn Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn. PUSH W/L Rn @-SP Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP. LDM* 3 MOVFPE MOVTPE POP B B W/L L L @SP+ Rn (register list) Pops two or more general registers from the stack. Rn (register list) @-SP Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack. STM* 3 47 Type Arithmetic operations Instruction ADD SUB Size* 1 B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction.) Rd Rs C Rd, Rd #IMM C Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) Rd 1 Rd, Rd 2 Rd, Rd 4 Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. Rd decimal adjust Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. Rd x Rs Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. Rd x Rs Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits x 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits x 16 bits 32 bits. Rd / Rs Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder. ADDX SUBX B INC DEC B/W/L ADDS SUBS DAA DAS L B MULXU B/W MULXS B/W DIVXU B/W 48 Type Arithmetic operations Instruction DIVXS Size* 1 B/W Function Rd / Rs Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits / 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits / 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder. Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result. 0 - Rd Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. Rd (zero extension) Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left. Rd (sign extension) Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit. @ERd - 0, 1 ( CMP B/W/L NEG B/W/L EXTU W/L EXTS W/L TAS B 49 Type Logic operations Instruction AND Size* 1 B/W/L Function Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd Rs Rd, Rd #IMM Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. (Rd) (Rd) Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general register contents. Rd (shift) Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible. Rd (shift) Rd Performs a logical shift on general register contents. A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible. Rd (rotate) Rd Rotates general register contents through the carry flag. 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible. OR B/W/L XOR B/W/L NOT B/W/L Shift operations SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR ROTL ROTR ROTXL ROTXR B/W/L B/W/L B/W/L B/W/L 50 Type Bitmanipulation instructions Instruction BSET Size* 1 B Function 1 ( BCLR B BNOT B BTST B BAND B BIAND B BOR B BIOR B 51 Type Bitmanipulation instructions Instruction BXOR Size* 1 B Function C ( BIXOR B BLD B BILD B BST B BIST B 52 Type Branch instructions Instruction Bcc Size* 1 -- Function Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The branching conditions are listed below. Mnemonic BRA(BT) BRN(BF) BHI BLS BCC(BHS) BCS(BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE Description Always (true) Never (false) High Low or same Carry clear (high or same) Carry set (low) Not equal Equal Overflow clear Overflow set Plus Minus Greater or equal Less than Greater than Less or equal Condition Always Never CZ=0 CZ=1 C=0 C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 NV=0 NV=1 Z(N V) = 0 Z(N V) = 1 JMP BSR JSR RTS -- -- -- -- Branches unconditionally to a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. Returns from a subroutine 53 Type Instruction Size* 1 -- -- -- B/W Function Starts trap-instruction exception handling. Returns from an exception-handling routine. Causes a transition to a power-down state. (EAs) CCR, (EAs) EXR Moves contents of a general register or memory or immediate data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. CCR (EAd), EXR (EAd) Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. CCR #IMM CCR, EXR #IMM EXR Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. PC + 2 PC Only increments the program counter. System control TRAPA instructions RTE SLEEP LDC STC B/W ANDC B ORC B XORC B NOP -- 54 Type Block data transfer instructions Instruction EEPMOV.B Size* 1 -- Function if R4L 0 then Repeat @ER5+ @ER6+ R4L-1 R4L Until R4L = 0 else next; if R4 0 then Repeat @ER5+ @ER6+ R4-1 R4 Until R4 = 0 else next; Block transfer instruction. Transfers the number of data bytes specified by R4L or R4 from locations starting at the address indicated by ER5 to locations starting at the address indicated by ER6. After the transfer, the next instruction is executed. EEPMOV.W -- Note: 1. Size refers to the operand size. 2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats The CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition field (cc). Operation Field: Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. Register Field: Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field. Effective Address Extension: Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. Condition Field: Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. Figure 2.12 shows examples of instruction formats. 55 (1) Operation field only op NOP, RTS, etc. (2) Operation field and register fields op rn rm ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc. (3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op EA (disp) (4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:16, etc rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc. Figure 2.12 Instruction Formats (Examples) 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read a byte of data, carry out bit manipulation, then write back the byte of data. Caution is therefore required when using these instructions on a register containing write-only bits, or a port. The BCLR instruction can be used to clear internal I/O register flags to 0. In this case, the relevant flag need not be read beforehand if it is clear that it has been set to 1 in an interrupt handling routine, etc. 2.7 2.7.1 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation Addressing Mode The CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.4. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect. Bit-manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. 56 Table 2.4 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addressing Modes Addressing Mode Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @ERn @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn) @ERn+ @-ERn @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32 #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) @@aa:8 Register Direct--Rn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. Register Indirect--@ERn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of the operand in memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Register Indirect with Displacement--@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn): A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement--@ERn+ or @-ERn: * Register indirect with post-increment--@ERn+ The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even. * Register indirect with pre-decrement--@-ERn The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even. 57 Absolute Address--@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32: The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32). To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits (@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Table 2.5 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges. Table 2.5 Absolute Address Access Ranges Normal Mode 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) 32 bits (@aa:32) Program instruction address 24 bits (@aa:24) H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'0000 to H'FFFF Advanced Mode H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'FFFFFF Absolute Address Data address Immediate--#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. Program-Counter Relative--@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC): This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to +32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. 58 Memory Indirect--@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be all 0 (H'00). Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. Specified by @aa:8 Branch address Specified by @aa:8 Reserved Branch address (a) Normal Mode (b) Advanced Mode Figure 2.13 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or an instruction code to be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats.) 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation Table 2.6 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal mode the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address. 59 Table 2.6 No. 1 Effective Address Calculation Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) Operand is general register contents. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Register direct (Rn) op rm rn 2 Register indirect (@ERn) 31 General register contents op r 0 31 24 23 0 Don't care 3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn) 31 General register contents 31 op r disp 31 Sign extension disp 0 24 23 0 Don't care 0 4 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement * Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ 31 General register contents 0 31 24 23 0 Don't care op r 1, 2, or 4 * Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn 31 General register contents 31 op r Operand Size Byte Word Longword Value Added 1 2 4 1, 2, or 4 24 23 0 Don't care 0 60 No. 5 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Absolute address @aa:8 op abs Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) 31 24 23 H'FFFF 87 0 Don't care @aa:16 op abs 31 Don't care 24 23 16 15 Sign extension 0 @aa:24 op abs 31 24 23 0 Don't care @aa:32 op abs 31 24 23 0 Don't care 6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 op IMM Operand is immediate data. 7 Program-counter relative @(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC) 23 PC contents 0 op disp 23 Sign extension 0 disp 31 24 23 0 Don't care 61 No. 8 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Memory indirect @@aa:8 * Normal mode op abs Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) 31 H'000000 87 abs 0 31 24 23 16 15 0 Don't care 15 Memory contents 0 H'00 * Advanced mode op abs 31 H'000000 87 abs 0 31 Memory contents 0 31 24 23 0 Don't care 62 2.8 2.8.1 Processing States Overview The CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception-handling state, program execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. Figure 2.14 shows a diagram of the processing states. Figure 2.15 indicates the state transitions. Reset state The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been initialized and are stopped. Exception-handling state A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal processing flow in response to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. Processing states Program execution state The CPU executes program instructions in sequence. Bus-released state The external bus has been released in response to a bus request signal from a bus master other than the CPU. Sleep mode Power-down state CPU operation is stopped to conserve power.* Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Note: * The power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, module stop mode, sub-active mode, sub-sleep mode, and watch mode. Figure 2.14 Processing States 63 End of bus request Bus request Program execution state End of bus request Bus request SLEEP instruction with LSON = 0, PSS = 0, SSBY = 1 SLEEP instruction with LSON = 0, SSBY = 0 Bus-released state End of exception handling Request for exception handling Sleep mode Interrupt request Exception-handling state External interrupt RES = high Software standby mode Reset state*1 STBY = high, RES = low Hardware standby mode*2 Power-down state*3 Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows. 2. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low. 3. The power-down state also includes a watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, etc. For details, refer to section 21, Power-Down State. Figure 2.15 State Transitions 2.8.2 Reset State When the RES input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All interrupts are disabled in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high. The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details, refer to section 14, Watchdog Timer. 64 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal processing flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address. Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority: Exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2.7 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted in the program execution state. Exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in SYSCR. Table 2.7 Priority High Exception Handling Types and Priority Type of Exception Reset Detection Timing Synchronized with clock Start of Exception Handling Exception handling starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. When an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence. Exception handling starts when a trap (TRAPA) instruction is executed.* 2 Interrupt End of instruction execution or end of exception-handling sequence* 1 When TRAPA instruction is executed Trap instruction Low Notes: 1. Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. 2. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted in the program execution state. Reset Exception Handling: After the RES pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when RES goes high again, reset exception handling starts. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during reset exception handling and after it ends. Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling: When interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack. Next, the CPU alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. Then the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution starts from that start address. 65 Figure 2.16 shows the stack after exception handling ends. Normal mode Advanced mode SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) SP CCR PC (24 bits) Note: * Ignored when returning. Figure 2.16 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples) 2.8.4 Program Execution State In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence. 2.8.5 Bus-Released State This is a state in which the bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master other than the CPU. While the bus is released, the CPU halts except for internal operations. There is one other bus master in addition to the CPU: the data transfer controller (DTC). For further details, refer to section 6, Bus Controller. 2.8.6 Power-Down State The power-down state includes both modes in which the CPU stops operating and modes in which the CPU does not stop. There are five modes in which the CPU stops operating: sleep mode, software standby mode, hardware standby mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. There are also three other power-down modes: medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and subactive mode. In medium-speed mode, the CPU and other bus masters operate on a medium-speed clock. Module stop mode permits halting of the operation of individual modules, other than the CPU. Subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode are power-down modes that use subclock input. For details, refer to section 21, Power-Down State. 66 Sleep Mode: A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the software standby bit (SSBY) in the standby control register (SBYCR) and the LSON bit in the low-power control register (LPWRCR) are both cleared to 0. In sleep mode, CPU operations stop immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction. The contents of CPU registers are retained. Software Standby Mode: A transition to software standby mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1 and the LSON bit in LPWRCR and the PSS bit in the WDT1 timer control/status register (TCSR) are both cleared to 0. In software standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop. As long as a specified voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers and on-chip RAM are retained. The I/O ports also remain in their existing states. Hardware Standby Mode: A transition to hardware standby mode is made when the STBY pin goes low. In hardware standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop. The on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM contents are retained. 2.9 2.9.1 Basic Timing Overview The CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol o. The period from one rising edge of o to the next is referred to as a "state." The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of one, two, or three states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory, on-chip supporting modules, and the external address space. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word transfer instruction. Figure 2.17 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 2.18 shows the pin states. 67 Bus cycle T1 o Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal data bus Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Read data Address Read access Figure 2.17 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle Bus cycle T1 o Address bus AS RD WR Data bus Unchanged High High High High impedance Figure 2.18 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access 68 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2.19 shows the access timing for the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 2.20 shows the pin states. Bus cycle T1 T2 o Internal address bus Address Internal read signal Read access Internal data bus Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Read data Figure 2.19 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle 69 Bus cycle T1 T2 o Address bus Unchanged AS RD WR High High High Data bus High impedance Figure 2.20 Pin States during On-Chip Supporting Module Access 2.9.4 External Address Space Access Timing The external address space is accessed with an 8-bit data bus width in a two-state or three-state bus cycle. In three-state access, wait states can be inserted. For further details, refer to section 6, Bus Controller. 2.10 2.10.1 Usage Notes TAS Instruction Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS instruction is not generated by the Hitachi H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. If the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 is used. 2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction ER7 is not used as the register that can be saved (STM)/restored (LDM) when using STM/LDM instruction, because ER7 is the stack pointer. Two, three, or four registers can be saved /restored by one STM/LDM instruction. The following ranges can be specified in the register list. 70 Two registers: ER0--ER1, ER2--ER3, or ER4--ER5 Three registers: ER0--ER2 or ER4--ER6 Four registers: ER0--ER3 The STM/LDM instruction including ER7 is not generated by the Hitachi H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. 71 72 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 3.1.1 Overview Operating Mode Selection The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have three operating modes (modes 1 to 3). These modes enable selection of the CPU operating mode and enabling/disabling of on-chip ROM, by setting the mode pins (MD1 and MD0). Table 3.1 lists the MCU operating modes. Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode 0 1 2 1 MCU Operating Mode Selection CPU Operating Mode -- Normal Advanced On-Chip ROM -- Disabled Enabled MD1 0 MD0 0 1 0 Description -- Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode 3 1 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode The CPU's architecture allows for 4 Gbytes of address space, but the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series actually access a maximum of 16 Mbytes. However, as there are 16 external address output pins, advanced mode is enabled only in single-chip mode or in expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled when a specific area in the external address space is accessed using IOS. The external data bus width is 8 bits. Mode 1 is an externally expanded mode that allows access to external memory and peripheral devices. With modes 2 and 3, operation begins in single-chip mode after reset release, but a transition can be made to external expansion mode by setting the EXPE bit in MDCR. The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series can only be used in modes 1 to 3. These means that the mode pins must select one of these modes. Do not changes the inputs at the mode pins during operation. 73 3.1.2 Register Configuration The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (MD1 and MD0), a system control register (SYSCR) and bus control register (BCR) that control the operation of the MCU, and a serial/timer control register (STCR) that controls the operation of the supporting modules. Table 3.2 summarizes these registers. Table 3.2 Name Mode control register System control register Bus control register Serial/timer control register MCU Registers Abbreviation MDCR SYSCR BCR STCR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value Undetermined H'09 H'D7 H'00 Address* H'FFC5 H'FFC4 H'FFC6 H'FFC3 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 3.2 3.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Mode Control Register (MDCR) 7 EXPE --* R/W* 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 MDS1 --* R 0 MDS0 --* R Initial value Read/Write Note: * Determined by pins MD1 and MD0. MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the operating mode setting and the current operating mode of the MCU. The EXPE bit is initialized in coordination with the mode pin states by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 74 Bit 7--Expanded Mode Enable (EXPE): Sets expanded mode. In mode 1, this bit is fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. In modes 2 and 3, this bit has an initial value of 0, and can be read and written. Bit 7 EXPE 0 1 Description Single chip mode is selected Expanded mode is selected Bits 6 to 2--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 1 and 0--Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1, MDS0): These bits indicate the input levels at pins MD1 and MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS1 and MDS0 correspond to MD1 and MD0. MDS1 and MDS0 are read-only bits--they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD1 and MD0) input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. 3.2.2 Bit Initial value Read/Write System Control Register (SYSCR) 7 CS2E 0 R/W 6 IOSE 0 R/W 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W 3 XRST 1 R 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 HIE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs selection of system pin functions, reset source monitoring, interrupt control mode selection, NMI detected edge selection, supporting module register access control, and RAM address space control. Only bits 7, 6, 3, 1, and 0 are described here. For a detailed description of these bits, refer also to the description of the relevant modules (bus controller, watchdog timer, RAM, etc.). For information on bits 5, 4, and 2, see section 5.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'09 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7--Chip Select 2 Enable (CS2E): Specifies the location of the host interface control pin. As these series do not include an on-chip host interface, this bit should not be set to 1. 75 Bit 6--IOS Enable (IOSE): Controls the function of the AS/IOS pin in expanded mode. Bit 6 IOSE 0 1 Description The AS/IOS pin functions as the address strobe pin (AS) (Low output when accessing an external area) (Initial value) The AS/IOS pin functions as the I/O strobe pin (IOS) (Low output when accessing a specified address from H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)FE4F) Bit 3--External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow as well as by external reset input. XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer overflow. Bit 3 XRST 0 1 Description A reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow A reset is generated by an external reset (Initial value) Bit 1--Host Interface Enable (HIE): Enables or disables CPU access to on-chip supporting function registers. This bit controls CPU access to the 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers (TCRX/TCRY, TCSRX/TCSRY, TICRR/TCORAY, TICRF/TCORBY, TCNTX/TCNTY, TCORC/TISR, TCORAX, and TCORBX), and the timer connection control registers (TCONRI, TCONRO, TCONRS, and SEDGR). Bit 1 HIE 0 Description In areas H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF7 and H'(FF)FFFC to H'(FF)FFFF, CPU access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers, is permitted In areas H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF7 and H'(FF)FFFC to H'(FF)FFFF, CPU access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers, is not permitted (Initial value) 1 76 Bit 0--RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized when the reset state is released. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME 0 1 Description On-chip RAM is disabled On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value) 3.2.3 Bit Bus Control Register (BCR) 7 ICIS1 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 -- 1 R/W 1 IOS1 1 R/W 0 IOS0 1 R/W ICIS0 BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0 Initial value Read/Write BCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the external memory space access mode, and the I/O area range when the AS pin is designated for use as the I/O strobe. For details on bits 7 to 2, see section 6.2.1, Bus Control Register (BCR). BCR is initialized to H'D7 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 1 and 0--IOS Select 1 and 0 (IOS1, IOS0): These bits specify the addresses for which the AS/IOS pin output goes low when IOSE = 1. BCR Bit 1 IOS1 0 Bit 0 IOS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description The AS/IOS pin output goes low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F03F The AS/IOS pin output goes low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F0FF The AS/IOS pin output goes low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F3FF The AS/IOS pin output goes low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)FE4F (Initial value) 77 3.2.4 Bit Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) 7 -- 0 R/W 6 IICX1 0 R/W 5 IICX0 0 R/W 4 IICE 0 R/W 3 FLSHE 0 R/W 2 -- 0 R/W 1 ICKS1 0 R/W 0 ICKS0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the IIC operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), an on-chip flash memory (in F-ZTAT versions), and also selects the TCNT input clock. For details of functions other than register access control, see the descriptions of the relevant modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 6 and 5--I2C Transfer Rate Select 1 and 0 (IICX1, IICX0): These bits control the operation of the I2C bus interface when the on-chip IIC option is included. For details, see section 16.2.7, Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR). Bit 4--I2C Master Enable (IICE): Controls CPU access to the I2C bus interface data registers and control registers (ICCR, ICSR, ICDR/SARX, and ICMR/SAR), the PWMX data registers and control registers (DADRAH/DACR, DADRAL, DADRBH/DACNTH, and DADRBL/DACNTL), and the SCI control registers (SMR, BRR, and SCMR). Bit 4 IICE 0 Description Addresses H'(FF)FF88 and H'(FF)89, and H'(FF)FF8E and H'(FF)FF8F, are used for SCI1 control register access Addresses H'(FF)FFD8 and H'(FF)FFD9, and H'(FF)FFDE and H'(FF)FFDF, are used for SCI0 control register access 1 Addresses H'(FF)FF88 and H'(FF)FF89, and H'(FF)FF8E and H'(FF)FF8F, are used for IIC1 data register and control register access Addresses H'(FF)FFA0 and H'(FF)FFA1, and H'(FF)FFA6 and H'(FF)FFA7, are used for PWMX data register and control register access Addresses H'(FF)FFD8 and H'(FF)FFD9, and H'(FF)FFDE and H'(FF)FFDF, are used for IIC0 data register and control register access (Initial value) 78 Bit 3--Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls CPU access to the flash memory control registers (FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2), the power-down mode control registers (SBYCR, LPWRCR, MSTPCRH, and MSTPCRL), and the supporting module control register (PCSR). Bit 3 FLSHE 0 1 Description Addresses H'(FF)F80 to H'(FF)F87 are used for power-down mode control register and supporting module control register access Addresses H'(FF)FF80 to H'(FF)FF87 are used for flash memory control register access (Initial value) Bit 2--Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0--Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR, select the clock to be input to TCNT. For details, see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register (TCR). 79 3.3 3.3.1 Operating Mode Descriptions Mode 1 The CPU can access a 64-kbyte address space in normal mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled. Ports 1 and 2 function as an address bus, port 3 function as a data bus, and part of port 4 carries bus control signals. 3.3.2 Mode 2 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled. After a reset, single-chip mode is set, and the EXPE bit in MDCR must be set to 1 in order to use external addresses. However, as these series have a maximum of 16 address outputs, an external address can be specified correctly only when the I/O strobe function of the AS/IOS pin is used. When the EXPE bit in MDCR is set to 1, ports 1 and 2 function as input ports after a reset. They can be set to output addresses by setting the corresponding bits in the data direction register (DDR) to 1. Port 3 function as a data bus, and part of port 4 carries bus control signals. 3.3.3 Mode 3 The CPU can access a 64-kbyte address space in normal mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled. After a reset, single-chip mode is set, and the EXPE bit in MDCR must be set to 1 in order to use external addresses. When the EXPE bit in MDCR is set to 1, ports 1 and 2 function as input ports after a reset. They can be set to output addresses by setting the corresponding bits in the data direction register (DDR) to 1. Port 3 function as a data bus, and part of port 4 carries bus control signals. In products with an on-chip ROM capacity of 64 kbytes or more, the amount of on-chip ROM that can be used is limited to 56 kbytes. 80 3.4 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode The pin functions of ports 1 to 4 vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3.3 shows their functions in each operating mode. Table 3.3 Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 P47 P46 P45 to P43 P42 to P40 Legend: P: I/O port A: Address bus output D: Data bus I/O C: Control signals, clock I/O *: After reset Pin Functions in Each Mode Mode 1 A A D P*/C C */P C P Mode 2 P*/A P*/A P*/D P*/C P*/C P*/C P Mode 3 P*/A P*/A P*/D P*/C P*/C P*/C P 3.5 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Figures 3.1 to 3.3 show memory maps for each of the operating modes. The address space is 64 kbytes in modes 1 and 3 (normal modes), and 16 Mbytes in mode 2 (advanced mode). The on-chip ROM capacity is 32 kbytes (H8S/2126 and H8S/2120), 64 kbytes (H8S/2127 and H8S/2122), or 128 kbytes (H8S/2128), but for products with an on-chip ROM capacity of 64 kbytes or more, the amount of on-chip ROM that can be used is limited to 56 kbytes in mode 3 (normal mode). Do not access the reserved areas and register addresses in internal I/O registers for modules which are not supported by the product. For details, see section 6, Bus Controller. 81 Mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) Mode 3/EXPE = 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 3/EXPE = 0 (normal single-chip mode) H'0000 H'0000 H'0000 External address space On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'DFFF External address space H'E080 On-chip RAM* H'EFFF External address space H'DFFF H'E080 On-chip RAM* H'EFFF External address space H'E080 On-chip RAM H'EFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Figure 3.1 H8S/2128 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode 82 Mode 2/EXPE = 1 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 Mode 2/EXPE = 0 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'01FFFF H'020000 H'FFE080 H'01FFFF External address*2 space H'FFE080 On-chip RAM*1 On-chip RAM H'FFEFFF H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) H'FFEFFF External address*2 space H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FFFF00 (128 bytes)*1 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 1 Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. For these models, the maximum number of external address pins is 16. An external address can only be specified correctly for an area that uses the I/O strobe function. Figure 3.1 H8S/2128 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont) 83 Mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) Mode 3/EXPE = 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 3/EXPE = 0 (normal single-chip mode) H'0000 H'0000 H'0000 External address space On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'DFFF External address space H'E080 Reserved area* H'E880 H'EFFF On-chip RAM* External address space H'DFFF H'E080 Reserved area* H'E880 H'EFFF On-chip RAM* External address space H'E080 Reserved area H'E880 H'EFFF On-chip RAM H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Figure 3.2 H8S/2127 and H8S/2122 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode 84 Mode 2/EXPE = 1 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 Mode 2/EXPE = 0 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'00FFFF H'00FFFF Reserved area Reserved area H'01FFFF H'020000 H'FFE080 H'01FFFF External address space*2 H'FFE080 Reserved area*1 Reserved area H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF On-chip RAM H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF On-chip RAM*1 External address space*2 H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FFFF00 (128 bytes)*1 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. For these models, the maximum number of external address pins is 16. An external address can only be specified correctly for an area that uses the I/O strobe function. Figure 3.2 H8S/2127 and H8S/2122 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont) 85 Mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) Mode 3/EXPE = 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 3/EXPE = 0 (normal single-chip mode) H'0000 H'0000 H'0000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM External address space H'7FFF H'7FFF Reserved area Reserved area H'DFFF External address space H'E080 Reserved area* H'E880 H'EFFF On-chip RAM* External address space H'DFFF H'E080 Reserved area* H'E880 H'EFFF On-chip RAM* External address space H'E080 Reserved area H'E880 H'EFFF On-chip RAM H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Figure 3.3 H8S/2126 and H8S/2120 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode 86 Mode 2/EXPE = 1 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 Mode 2/EXPE = 0 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'007FFF H'007FFF Reserved area Reserved area H'01FFFF H'020000 H'FFE080 H'01FFFF External address space*2 H'FFE080 Reserved area*1 Reserved area H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF On-chip RAM H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF On-chip RAM*1 External address space*2 H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FFFF00 (128 bytes)*1 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. For these models, the maximum number of external address pins is 16. An external address can only be specified correctly for an area that uses the I/O strobe function. Figure 3.3 H8S/2126 and H8S/2120 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont) 87 88 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1 4.1.1 Overview Exception Handling Types and Priority As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode set by the INTM0 and INTM1 bits in SYSCR. Table 4.1 Priority High Exception Types and Priority Exception Type Reset Trace Start of Exception Handling Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if the trace (T) bit is set to 1. (Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series.) Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued.* 1 Started by a direct transition resulting from execution of a SLEEP instruction. Interrupt Direct transition Low Trap instruction (TRAPA)*2 Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA). Notes: 1. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling. 2. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in the program execution state. 89 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows: 1. The program counter (PC) and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack. 2. The interrupt mask bits are updated. The T bit is cleared to 0. 3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from that address. For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. 4.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4.1. Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. Reset Trace Exception sources (Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series) External interrupts: NMI, IRQ2 to IRQ0 Interrupts Internal interrupts: interrupt sources in on-chip supporting modules Direct transition Trap instruction Figure 4.1 Exception Sources 90 Table 4.2 Exception Vector Table Vector Address* 1 Exception Source Reset Reserved for system use Vector Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 Normal Mode H'0000 to H'0001 H'0002 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0005 H'0006 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'0009 H'000A to H'000B H'000C to H'000D H'000E to H'000F H'0010 to H'0011 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0015 H'0016 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'0019 H'001A to H'001B H'001C to H'001D H'001E to H'001F H'0020 to H'0021 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0026 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'0029 H'002A to H'002B H'002C to H'002D H'002E to H'002F H'0030 to H'0031 H'00CE to H'00CF Advanced Mode H'0000 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0007 H'0008 to H'000B H'000C to H'000F H'0010 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'001B H'001C to H'001F H'0020 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'002B H'002C to H'002F H'0030 to H'0033 H'0034 to H'0037 H'0038 to H'003B H'003C to H'003F H'0040 to H'0043 H'0044 to H'0047 H'0048 to H'004B H'004C to H'004F H'0050 to H'0053 H'0054 to H'0057 H'0058 to H'005B H'005C to H'005F H'0060 to H'0063 H'019C to H'019F Direct transition External interrupt NMI 6 7 8 9 10 11 Trap instruction (4 sources) Reserved for system use 12 13 14 15 External interrupt IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Reserved Internal interrupt* 2 24 103 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For details on internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, Interrupt Exception Vector Table. 91 4.2 4.2.1 Reset Overview A reset has the highest exception priority. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and the MCU enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip supporting modules. Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set. Reset exception handling begins when the RES pin changes from low to high. H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series MCUs can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 14, Watchdog Timer. 4.2.2 Reset Sequence The MCU enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low. To ensure that the chip is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms when powering on. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states. For pin states in a reset, see Appendix D.1, Port States in Each Processing State. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset exception handling as follows: [1] The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR. [2] The reset exception vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution starts from the address indicated by the PC. Figures 4.2 and 4.3 show examples of the reset sequence. 92 Vector Internal Fetch of first program fetch processing instruction o RES Internal address bus Internal read signal Internal write signal Internal data bus (2) High (4) (1) (3) (1) Reset exception vector address ((1) = H'0000) (2) Start address (contents of reset exception vector address) (3) Start address ((3) = (2)) (4) First program instruction Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Mode 3) 93 Vector fetch Internal Fetch of first processing program instruction * * * o RES Address bus RD WR D7 to D0 (2) (1) (3) (5) High (4) (6) (1) (3) Reset exception vector address ((1) = H'0000, (3) = H'0001) (2) (4) Start address (contents of reset exception vector address) (5) Start address ((5) = (2) (4)) (6) First program instruction Note: * 3 program wait states are inserted. Figure 4.3 Reset Sequence (Mode 1) 4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx:32, SP). 94 4.3 Interrupts Interrupt exception handling can be requested by four external sources (NMI and IRQ2 to IRQ0), and internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 4.4 shows the interrupt sources and the number of interrupts of each type. The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (WDT), 16-bit free-running timer (FRT), 8-bit timer (TMR), serial communication interface (SCI), data transfer controller (DTC), A/D converter (ADC), I2C bus interface (option). Each interrupt source has a separate vector address. NMI is the highest-priority interrupt. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI and address break to either three priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control. For details on interrupts, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. External interrupts Interrupts NMI (1) IRQ2 to IRQ0 (3) WDT* (2) FRT (7) TMR (10) SCI (8) DTC (1) ADC (1) IIC (3) (option) Other (1) Internal interrupts Note: Numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources. * When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at each counter overflow. Figure 4.4 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts 95 4.4 Trap Instruction Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. Table 4.3 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling. Table 4.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling CCR Interrupt Control Mode 0 1 I 1 1 UI -- 1 I2 to I0 -- -- EXR T -- -- Legend: 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 --: Retains value prior to execution. 96 4.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling Figure 4.5 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Note: * Ignored on return. Figure 4.5 (1) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Normal Mode) SP CCR PC (24bits) Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Note: * Ignored on return. Figure 4.5 (2) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Advanced Mode) 97 4.6 Notes on Use of the Stack When accessing word data or longword data, the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series chip assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers: PUSH.W PUSH.L Rn ERn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP) Use the following instructions to restore registers: POP.W POP.L Rn ERn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn) Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.6 shows an example of what happens when the SP value is odd. CCR SP PC SP R1L PC H'FFEFFA H'FFEFFB H'FFEFFC H'FFEFFD H'FFEFFF SP TRAPA instruction executed MOV.B R1L, @-ER7 SP set to H'FFEFFF Legend: CCR: Condition-code register PC: Program counter R1L: General register R1L SP: Stack pointer Data saved above SP Contents of CCR lost Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode. Figure 4.6 Operation when SP Value is Odd 98 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1 5.1.1 Overview Features H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series MCUs control interrupts by means of an interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has the following features: * Two interrupt control modes Either of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in the system control register (SYSCR). * Priorities settable with ICR An interrupt control register (ICR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Three priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI and address break. * Independent vector addresses All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine. * Four external interrupt pins NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. A rising or falling edge at the NMI pin can be selected for the NMI interrupt. Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, at pins IRQ2 to IRQ0 can be selected for interrupts IRQ2 to IRQ0. * DTC control DTC activation is controlled by means of interrupts. 99 5.1.2 Block Diagram A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in Figure 5.1. INTM1 INTM0 SYSCR NMIEG NMI input IRQ input NMI input unit IRQ input unit ISR ISCR IER Priority determination I, UI Interrupt request Vector number CPU Internal interrupt requests SWDTEND to IICI1 CCR ICR Interrupt controller Legend: ISCR: IER: ISR: ICR: SYSCR: IRQ sense control register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt control register System control register Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller 5.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. Table 5.1 Name Nonmaskable interrupt External interrupt requests 2 to 0 Interrupt Controller Pins Symbol NMI I/O Input Function Nonmaskable external interrupt; rising or falling edge can be selected Maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or both edges, or level sensing, can be selected IRQ2 to IRQ0 Input 100 5.1.4 Register Configuration Table 5.2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller. Table 5.2 Name System control register IRQ sense control register H IRQ sense control register L IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt control register A Interrupt control register B Interrupt control register C Address break control register Break address register A Break address register B Break address register C Interrupt Controller Registers Abbreviation SYSCR ISCRH ISCRL IER ISR ICRA ICRB ICRC ABRKCR BARA BARB BARC R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 Initial Value H'09 H'00 H'00 H'F8 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 Address* 1 H'FFC4 H'FEEC H'FEED H'FFC2 H'FEEB H'FEE8 H'FEE9 H'FEEA H'FEF4 H'FEF5 H'FEF6 H'FEF7 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. 5.2 5.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions System Control Register (SYSCR) 7 CS2E 0 R/W 6 IOSE 0 R/W 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W 3 XRST 1 R 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 HIE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W Initial value Read/Write SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register of which bits 5, 4, and 2 select the interrupt control mode and the detected edge for NMI. Only bits 5, 4, and 2 are described here; for details on the other bits, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'09 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. 101 Bits 5 and 4--Interrupt Control Mode 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select one of four interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller. The INTM1 bit must not be set to 1. Bit 5 INTM1 0 Bit 4 INTM0 0 1 1 0 1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 1 2 3 Description Interrupts are controlled by I bit (Initial value) Interrupts are controlled by I and UI bits and ICR Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series Bit 2--NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the input edge for the NMI pin. Bit 2 NMIEG 0 1 Description Interrupt request generated at falling edge of NMI input Interrupt request generated at rising edge of NMI input (Initial value) 5.2.2 Bit Interrupt Control Registers A to C (ICRA to ICRC) 7 ICR7 0 R/W 6 ICR6 0 R/W 5 ICR5 0 R/W 4 ICR4 0 R/W 3 ICR3 0 R/W 2 ICR2 0 R/W 1 ICR1 0 R/W 0 ICR0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write The ICR registers are three 8-bit readable/writable registers that set the interrupt control level for interrupts other than NMI and address break. The correspondence between ICR settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 5.3. The ICR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit n--Interrupt Control Level (ICRn): Sets the control level for the corresponding interrupt source. Bit n ICRn 0 1 Description Corresponding interrupt source is control level 0 (non-priority) Corresponding interrupt source is control level 1 (priority) (n = 7 to 0) (Initial value) 102 Table 5.3 Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and ICR Settings Bits Register 7 ICRA ICRB IRQ0 6 IRQ1 5 IRQ2 -- 4 -- -- 3 -- 2 DTC 1 0 Watchdog Watchdog timer 0 timer 1 A/D Freeconverter running timer -- 8-bit 8-bit 8-bit timer timer timer channel 0 channel 1 channels X, Y -- -- ICRC SCI SCI -- channel 0 channel 1 -- IIC IIC channel 0 channel 1 (option) (option) 5.2.3 Bit IRQ Enable Register (IER) 7 -- 6 -- 1 R 5 -- 1 R 4 -- 1 R 3 -- 1 R 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write 1 R IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests IRQ2 to IRQ0. IER is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 2 to 0--IRQ2 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ2E to IRQ0E): These bits select whether IRQ2 to IRQ0 are enabled or disabled. Bit n IRQnE 0 1 Description IRQn interrupt disabled IRQn interrupt enabled (n = 2 to 0) (Initial value) 103 5.2.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL) * ISCRH Bit 15 -- Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 14 -- 0 R/W 13 -- 0 R/W 12 -- 0 R/W 11 -- 0 R/W 10 -- 0 R/W 9 -- 0 R/W 8 -- 0 R/W * ISCRL Bit 7 -- Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 -- 0 R/W 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W ISCRH and ISCRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, for the input at pins IRQ2 to IRQ0. Each of the ISCR registers is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. ISCRH Bits 7 to 0, ISCRL Bits 7 and 6--Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. ISCRL Bits 5 to 0--IRQ2 Sense Control A and B (IRQ2SCA, IRQ2SCB) to IRQ0 Sense Control A and B (IRQ0SCA, IRQ0SCB) ISCRL Bits 5 to 0 IRQ2SCB to IRQ0SCB 0 IRQ2SCA to IRQ0SCA 0 1 1 0 1 Description Interrupt request generated at IRQ2 to IRQ0 input low level (Initial value) Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ2 to IRQ0 input Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ2 to IRQ0 input Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ2 to IRQ0 input 104 5.2.5 Bit IRQ Status Register (ISR) 7 -- 6 -- 0 R 5 -- 0 R 4 -- 0 R 3 -- 0 R 2 IRQ2F 0 R/(W)* 1 IRQ1F 0 R/(W)* 0 IRQ0F 0 R/(W)* Initial value Read/Write 0 R Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ2 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. ISR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved Bits 2 to 0--IRQ2 to IRQ0 Flags (IRQ2F to IRQ0F): These bits indicate the status of IRQ2 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bit n IRQnF 0 Description [Clearing conditions] * * * 1 (Initial value) Cleared by reading IRQnF when set to 1, then writing 0 in IRQnF When interrupt exception handling is executed when low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) and IRQn input is high When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling, rising, or both-edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1 or IRQnSCA = 1) [Setting conditions] * * * * When IRQn input goes low when low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input when falling edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 0, IRQnSCA = 1) When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input when rising edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1, IRQnSCA = 0) When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQn input when both-edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 1) (n = 2 to 0) 105 5.2.6 Bit Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR) 7 CMF 0 R 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 -- 0 -- 0 BIE 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write ABRKCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs address break control. ABRKCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7--Condition Match Flag (CMF): This is the address break source flag, used to indicate that the address set by BAR has been prefetched. When the CMF flag and BIE flag are both set to 1, an address break is requested. Bit 7 CMF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When address break interrupt exception handling is executed [Setting condition] When address set by BARA to BARC is prefetched while BIE = 1 (Initial value) Bits 6 to 1--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bit 0--Break Interrupt Enable (BIE): Selects address break enabling or disabling. Bit 0 BIE 0 1 Description Address break disabled Address break enabled (Initial value) 106 5.2.7 Bit BARA Break Address Registers A, B, C (BARA, BARB, BARC) 7 A23 0 R/W 7 A15 0 R/W 7 A7 0 R/W 6 A22 0 R/W 6 A14 0 R/W 6 A6 0 R/W 5 A21 0 R/W 5 A13 0 R/W 5 A5 0 R/W 4 A20 0 R/W 4 A12 0 R/W 4 A4 0 R/W 3 A19 0 R/W 3 A11 0 R/W 3 A3 0 R/W 2 A18 0 R/W 2 A10 0 R/W 2 A2 0 R/W 1 A17 0 R/W 1 A9 0 R/W 1 A1 0 R/W 0 A16 0 R/W 0 A8 0 R/W 0 -- 0 -- Initial value Read/Write Bit BARB Initial value Read/Write Bit BARC Initial value Read/Write BAR consists of three 8-bit readable/writable registers (BARA, BARB, and BARC), and is used to specify the address at which an address break is to be executed. Each of the BAR registers is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. BARA Bits 7 to 0--Address 23 to 16 (A23 to A16) BARB Bits 7 to 0--Address 15 to 8 (A15 to A8) BARC Bits 7 to 1--Address 7 to 1 (A7 to A1) These bits specify the address at which an address break is to be executed. BAR bits A23 to A1 are compared with internal address bus lines A23 to A1, respectively. The address at which the first instruction byte is located should be specified as the break address. Occurrence of the address break condition may not be recognized for other addresses. In normal mode, no comparison is made with address lines A23 to A16. BARC Bit 0--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 0. 107 5.3 Interrupt Sources Interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (NMI and IRQ2 to IRQ0) and internal interrupts. 5.3.1 External Interrupts There are four external interrupt sources: NMI, and IRQ2 to IRQ0. NMI, and IRQ2 to IRQ0 can be used to restore the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series chip from software standby mode. NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU regardless of the interrupt control mode and the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling edge on the NMI pin. The vector number for NMI interrupt exception handling is 7. IRQ2 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ2 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ2 to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ2 to IRQ0 have the following features: * Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ2 to IRQ0. * Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ2 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER. * The interrupt control level can be set with ICR. * The status of interrupt requests IRQ2 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. A block diagram of interrupts IRQ2 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 5.2. IRQnE IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB IRQnF Edge/level detection circuit IRQn input Clear signal Note: n: 2 to 0 S R Q IRQn interrupt request Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ2 to IRQ0 108 Figure 5.3 shows the timing of IRQnF setting. o IRQn input pin IRQnF Figure 5.3 Timing of IRQnF Setting The vector numbers for IRQ2 to IRQ0 interrupt exception handling are 18 to 16. Detection of IRQ2 to IRQ0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for input or output. Therefore, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the corresponding DDR bit to 0 and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function. As interrupt request flags IRQ2F to IRQ0F are set when the setting condition is met, regardless of the IER setting, only the necessary flags should be referenced. 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts There are 32 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules, plus one software interrupt source (address break). * For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status, and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If any one of these is set to 1, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller. * The interrupt control level can be set by means of ICR. * The DTC can be activated by an FRT, TMR, SCI, or other interrupt request. When the DTC is activated by an interrupt, the interrupt control mode and interrupt mask bits have no effect. 5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table Table 5.4 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities. For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. Priorities among modules can be set by means of ICR. The situation when two or more modules are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in table 5.4. 109 Table 5.4 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities Origin of Interrupt Source External pin Vector Address Vector Normal Number Mode 7 16 17 18 -- 19 to 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 to 47 H'000E H'0020 H'0022 H'0024 H'0026 to H'002E H'0030 H'0032 H'0034 H'0036 H'0038 H'003A to H'005E H'0060 H'0062 H'0064 H'0066 H'0068 H'006A H'006C H'006E H'0070 to H'007E Advanced Mode H'00001C H'000040 H'000044 H'000048 H'00004C to H'00005C H'000060 H'000064 H'000068 H'00006C H'000070 H'000074 to H'0000BC H'0000C0 H'0000C4 H'0000C8 H'0000CC H'0000D0 H'0000D4 H'0000D8 H'0000DC H'0000E0 to H'0000FC ICRB6 ICRB7 ICRA2 ICRA1 ICRA0 ICRA7 ICRA6 ICRA5 ICR Priority High Interrupt Source NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 Reserved SWDTEND (software activation interrupt end) WOVI0 (interval timer) WOVI1 (interval timer) Address break (PC break) ADI (A/D conversion end) Reserved DTC Watchdog timer 0 Watchdog timer 1 -- A/D -- ICIA (input capture A) ICIB (input capture B) ICIC (input capture C) ICID (input capture D) OCIA (output compare A) OCIB (output compare B) FOVI (overflow) Reserved Reserved Free-running 48 timer 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 -- 56 to 63 Low 110 Table 5.4 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities (cont) Origin of Interrupt Source 8-bit timer channel 0 Vector Address Vector Normal Number Mode 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 to 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 84 to 91 H'0080 H'0082 H'0084 H'0086 H'0088 H'008A H'008C H'008E H'0090 H'0092 H'0094 H'0096 H'0098 to H'009E H'00A0 H'00A2 H'00A4 H'00A6 H'00A8 H'00AA H'00AC H'00AE H'00B0 to H'00B6 H'00B8 H'00BA H'00BC H'00BE H'00C0 to H'00CE Advanced Mode H'000100 H'000104 H'000108 H'00010C H'000110 H'000114 H'000118 H'00011C H'000120 H'000124 H'000128 H'00012C H'000130 to H'00013C H'000140 H'000144 H'000148 H'00014C H'000150 H'000154 H'000158 H'00015C H'000160 to H'00016C H'000170 H'000174 H'000178 H'00017C H'000180 to H'00019C ICRC3 ICRC4 ICRC7 ICR Priority Interrupt Source CMIA0 (compare-match A) CMIB0 (compare-match B) OVI0 (overflow) Reserved CMIA1 (compare-match A) CMIB1 (compare-match B) OVI1 (overflow) Reserved CMIAY (compare-match A) CMIBY (compare-match B) OVIY (overflow) ICIX (input capture X) Reserved ICRB3 High 8-bit timer channel 1 ICRB2 8-bit timer channels Y, X -- ICRB1 ERI0 (receive error 0) RXI0 (reception completed 0) TXI0 (transmit data empty 0) TEI0 (transmission end 0) ERI1 (receive error 1) RXI1 (reception completed 1) TXI1 (transmit data empty 1) TEI1 (transmission end 1) Reserved SCI channel 0 SCI channel 1 ICRC6 -- IICI0 (1-byte transmission/ reception completed) DDCSWI (format switch) IICI1 (1-byte transmission/ reception completed) Reserved Reserved IIC channel 0 92 (option) 93 IIC channel 1 94 (option) 95 -- 96 to 103 Low 111 5.4 5.4.1 Address Breaks Features With the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series, it is possible to identify the prefetch of a specific address by the CPU and generate an address break interrupt, using the ABRKCR and BAR registers. When an address break interrupt is generated, address break interrupt exception handling is executed. This function can be used to detect the beginning of execution of a bug location in the program, and branch to a correction routine. 5.4.2 Block Diagram A block diagram of the address break function is shown in figure 5.4. BAR ABRKCR Comparator Match signal Control logic Address break interrupt request Internal address Prefetch signal (internal signal) Figure 5.4 Block Diagram of Address Break Function 112 5.4.3 Operation ABRKCR and BAR settings can be made so that an address break interrupt is generated when the CPU prefetches the address set in BAR. This address break function issues an interrupt request to the interrupt controller when the address is prefetched, and the interrupt controller determines the interrupt priority. When the interrupt is accepted, interrupt exception handling is started on completion of the currently executing instruction. With an address break interrupt, interrupt mask control by the I and UI bits in the CPU's CCR is ineffective. The register settings when the address break function is used are as follows. 1. Set the break address in bits A23 to A1 in BAR. 2. Set the BIE bit in ABRKCR to 1 to enable address breaks. An address break will not be requested if the BIE bit is cleared to 0. When the setting condition occurs, the CMF flag in ABRKCR is set to 1 and an interrupt is requested. If necessary, the source should be identified in the interrupt handling routine. 5.4.4 Usage Notes * With the address break function, the address at which the first instruction byte is located should be specified as the break address. Occurrence of the address break condition may not be recognized for other addresses. * In normal mode, no comparison is made with address lines A23 to A16. * If a branch instruction (Bcc, BSR), jump instruction (JMP, JSR), RTS instruction, or RTE instruction is located immediately before the address set in BAR, execution of this instruction will output a prefetch signal for that address, and an address break may be requested. This can be prevented by not making a break address setting for an address immediately following one of these instructions, or by determining within the interrupt handling routine whether interrupt handling was initiated by a genuine condition occurrence. * As an address break interrupt is generated by a combination of the internal prefetch signal and address, the timing of the start of interrupt exception handling depends on the content and execution cycle of the instruction at the set address and the preceding instruction. Figure 5.5 shows some address timing examples. 113 * Program area in on-chip memory, 1-state execution instruction at specified break address Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Internal fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch operation o Stack save Vector fetch Internal Instruction fetch operation Address bus H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 H'0318 SP-2 SP-4 H'0036 NOP NOP NOP execution execution execution Break request signal H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 NOP NOP NOP NOP Interrupt exception handling Breakpoint NOP instruction is executed at breakpoint address H'0312 and next address, H'0314; fetch from address H'0316 starts after end of exception handling. * Program area in on-chip memory, 2-state execution instruction at specified break address Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Internal fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch operation Stack save Vector fetch Internal Instruction operation fetch o Address bus H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 H'0318 SP-2 SP-4 H'0036 NOP execution Break request signal H'0310 H'0312 H'0316 H'0318 NOP MOV.W #xx:16,Rd NOP NOP MOV.W execution Interrupt exception handling Breakpoint MOV instruction is executed at breakpoint address H'0312, NOP instruction at next address, H'0316, is not executed; fetch from address H'0316 starts after end of exception handling. * Program area in external memory (2-state access, 16-bit-bus access), 1-state execution instruction at specified break address Instruction fetch Instruction fetch Instruction fetch Internal operation Stack save Vector fetch Internal operation o Address bus H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 SP-2 SP-4 H'0036 NOP execution Break request signal H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 NOP NOP NOP NOP Interrupt exception handling Breakpoint NOP instruction at breakpoint address H'0312 is not executed; fetch from address H'0312 starts after end of exception handling. Figure 5.5 Examples of Address Break Timing 114 5.5 5.5.1 Interrupt Operation Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation Interrupt operations in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series differ depending on the interrupt control mode. NMI and address break interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state and the hardware standby state. In the case of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided for each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request. Interrupt sources for which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller. Table 5.5 shows the interrupt control modes. The interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in SYSCR, the priorities set in ICR, and the masking state indicated by the I and UI bits in the CPU's CCR. Table 5.5 Interrupt Control Modes Interrupt Mask Bits Description I Interrupt mask control is performed by the I bit Priority can be set with ICR 1 1 ICR I, UI 3-level interrupt mask control is performed by the I and UI bits Priority can be set with ICR SYSCR Interrupt Priority Setting Control Mode INTM1 INTM0 Register 0 0 0 ICR 115 Figure 5.6 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit. I ICR UI Interrupt source Interrupt acceptance control and 3-level mask control Default priority determination Vector number Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Figure 5.6 Block Diagram of Interrupt Control Operation Interrupt Acceptance Control and 3-Level Control: In interrupt control modes 0 and 1, interrupt acceptance control and 3-level mask control is performed by means of the I and UI bits in CCR, and ICR (control level). Table 5.6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode. Table 5.6 Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode Interrupt Mask Bits Interrupt Control Mode 0 I 0 1 1 0 1 UI * * * 0 1 Legend: *: Don't care Selected Interrupts All interrupts (control level 1 has priority) NMI and address break interrupts All interrupts (control level 1 has priority) NMI, address break interrupts, and control level 1 interrupts NMI and address break interrupts 116 Default Priority Determination: The priority is determined for the selected interrupt, and a vector number is generated. If the same value is set for ICR, acceptance of multiple interrupts is enabled, and so only the interrupt source with the highest priority according to the preset default priorities is selected and has a vector number generated. Interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending. Table 5.7 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode. Table 5.7 Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode Interrupt Acceptance Control 3-Level Control I UI ICR Interrupt Control Mode Setting INTM1 INTM0 Default Priority Determination T (Trace) 0 1 0 0 1 O O IM IM -- IM PR PR O O -- -- Legend: O: Interrupt operation control performed IM: Used as interrupt mask bit PR: Sets priority --: Not used 117 5.5.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 Enabling and disabling of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by means of the I bit in the CPU's CCR, and ICR. Interrupts are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when set to 1. Control level 1 interrupt sources have higher priority. Figure 5.7 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt, according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level setting are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 5.4 is selected. 3. The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. 4. When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This disables all interrupts except NMI and address break. 7. A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. 118 Program execution state Interrupt generated? Yes Yes No NMI? No Control level 1 interrupt? Yes No IRQ0? Yes No IRQ1? Yes No Hold pending No IRQ0? Yes IRQ1? Yes IICI1 Yes IICI1 Yes No I = 0? Yes No Save PC and CCR I1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.7 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0 119 5.5.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1 Three-level masking is implemented for IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts by means of the I and UI bits in the CPU's CCR, and ICR. * Control level 0 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when set to 1. * Control level 1 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit or UI bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1. For example, if the interrupt enable bit for an interrupt request is set to 1, and H'20, H'00, and H'00 are set in ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC, respectively, (i.e. IRQ2 interrupts are set to control level 1 and other interrupts to control level 0), the situation is as follows: * When I = 0, all interrupts are enabled (Priority order: NMI > IRQ2 > address break > IRQ0 > IRQ1 ...) * When I = 1 and UI = 0, only NMI, IRQ2, and address break interrupts are enabled * When I = 1 and UI = 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are enabled Figure 5.8 shows the state transitions in these cases. I0 All interrupts enabled I1, UI0 Only NMI, address break, and IRQ2 interrupts enabled I0 Exception handling execution or I1, UI1 UI0 Exception handling execution or UI1 Only NMI and address break interrupts enabled Figure 5.8 Example of State Transitions in Interrupt Control Mode 1 120 Figure 5.9 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt, according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level setting are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 5.4 is selected. 3. The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the UI bit has no effect. An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 0 is accepted when the I bit is cleared to 0. If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 1 has priority over an interrupt request set to interrupt control level 0, and is accepted if the I bit is cleared to 0, or if the I bit is set to 1 and the UI bit is cleared to 0. When both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. 4. When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. Next, the I and UI bits in CCR are set to 1. This disables all interrupts except NMI and address break. 7. A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. 121 Program execution state No Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI? No Control level 1 interrupt? Yes No No IRQ1? Yes IICI1 Yes No Hold pending No IRQ0? Yes IRQ1? Yes IICI1 Yes No IRQ0? Yes I = 0? Yes No I = 0? No Yes No UI = 0? Yes Save PC and CCR I 1, UI 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.9 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 1 122 5.5.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence Figure 5.10 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-chip memory. 123 124 Interrupt acceptance Instruction prefetch Stack Vector fetch Internal operation Internal operation Interrupt handling routine instruction prefetch (1) (7) Interrupt level determination Wait for end of instruction o Interrupt request signal Internal address bus (3) (5) (9) (11) (13) Internal read signal Internal write signal (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) Figure 5.10 Interrupt Exception Handling Internal data bus (1) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed. This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address.) (2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed.) (3) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.) (5) SP-2 (7) SP-4 (6) (8) Saved PC and saved CCR (9) (11) Vector address (10) (12) Interrupt handling routine start address (vector address contents) (13) Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10) (12)) (14) First instruction of interrupt handling routine 5.5.5 Interrupt Response Times The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series are capable of fast word access to on-chip memory, and high-speed processing can be achieved by providing the program area in on-chip ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM. Table 5.8 shows interrupt response times--the interval between generation of an interrupt request and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The symbols used in table 5.8 are explained in table 5.9. Table 5.8 Interrupt Response Times Number of States No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Item Interrupt priority determination* 1 Normal Mode 3 1 to 19+2*SI 2*S K SI 3 4 Advanced Mode 3 1 to 19+2*SI 2*S K 2*S I 2*S I 2 12 to 32 Number of wait states until executing instruction ends* 2 PC, CCR stack save Vector fetch Instruction fetch* 2*S I 2 11 to 31 Internal processing* Total (using on-chip memory) Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Two states in case of internal interrupt. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch. Table 5.9 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Object of Access External Device 8-Bit Bus Symbol Internal Memory 1 2-State Access 4 3-State Access 6+2m Instruction fetch Branch address read Stack manipulation SI SJ SK Legend: m: Number of wait states in an external device access 125 5.6 5.6.1 Usage Notes Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective after execution of the instruction. In other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored. The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0. Figure 5.11 shows an example in which the CMIEA bit in 8-bit timer register TCR is cleared to 0. TCR write cycle by CPU CMIA exception handling o Internal address bus TCR address Internal write signal CMIEA CMFA CMIA interrupt signal Figure 5.11 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt is masked. 126 5.6.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these instructions is executed, all interrupts, including NMI, are disabled and the next instruction is always executed. When the I bit or UI bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends. 5.6.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction. With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer is not accepted until the move is completed. With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the following coding should be used. L1: EEPMOV.W MOV.W BNE R4,R4 L1 127 5.7 5.7.1 DTC Activation by Interrupt Overview The DTC can be activated by an interrupt. In this case, the following options are available: * Interrupt request to CPU * Activation request to DTC * Both of the above For details of interrupt requests that can be used to activate the DTC, see section 7, Data Transfer Controller. 5.7.2 Block Diagram Figure 5.12 shows a block diagram of the DTC and interrupt controller. Interrupt request IRQ interrupt Interrupt source clear signal Selection circuit Select signal Clear signal DTCER DTC activation request vector number Control logic Clear signal DTC On-chip supporting module DTVECR SWDTE clear signal Determination of priority CPU interrupt request vector number CPU I, UI Interrupt controller Figure 5.12 Interrupt Control for DTC 128 5.7.3 Operation The interrupt controller has three main functions in DTC control. Selection of Interrupt Source: It is possible to select DTC activation request or CPU interrupt request with the DTCE bit of DTCERA to DTCERE in the DTC. After a DTC data transfer, the DTCE bit can be cleared to 0 and an interrupt request sent to the CPU in accordance with the specification of the DISEL bit of MRB in the DTC. When the DTC performs the specified number of data transfers and the transfer counter reaches 0, following the DTC data transfer the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Determination of Priority: The DTC activation source is selected in accordance with the default priority order, and is not affected by mask or priority levels. See section 7.3.3, DTC Vector Table, for the respective priorities. Operation Order: If the same interrupt is selected as a DTC activation source and a CPU interrupt source, the DTC data transfer is performed first, followed by CPU interrupt exception handling. Table 5.10 summarizes interrupt source selection and interrupt source clearance control according to the settings of the DTCE bit of DTCERA to DTCERE in the DTC and the DISEL bit of MRB in the DTC. Table 5.10 Interrupt Source Selection and Clearing Control Settings DTC DTCE 0 1 DISEL * 0 1 x Interrupt Source Selection/Clearing Control DTC CPU x Legend : The relevant interrupt is used. Interrupt source clearing is performed. (The CPU should clear the source flag in the interrupt handling routine.) : The relevant interrupt is used. The interrupt source is not cleared. x: The relevant bit cannot be used. *: Don't care Usage Note: SCI, IIC, and A/D converter interrupt sources are cleared when the DTC reads or writes to the prescribed register, and are not dependent upon the DISEL bit. 129 130 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have a built-in bus controller (BSC) that allows external address space bus specifications, such as bus width and number of access states, to be set. The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the internal bus masters: the CPU and data transfer controller (DTC). 6.1.1 Features The features of the bus controller are listed below. * Basic bus interface 2-state access or 3-state access can be selected Program wait states can be inserted * Burst ROM interface External space can be designated as ROM interface space 1-state or 2-state burst access can be selected * Idle cycle insertion An idle cycle can be inserted when an external write cycle immediately follows an external read cycle * Bus arbitration function Includes a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus mastership between the CPU and DTC 131 6.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller. External bus control signals Bus controller Internal control signals Bus mode signal WSCR BCR WAIT Internal data bus Wait controller CPU bus request signal DTC bus request signal Bus arbiter CPU bus acknowledge signal DTC bus acknowledge signal Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller 132 6.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 6.1 summarizes the pins of the bus controller. Table 6.1 Name Address strobe I/O select Read Write Wait Bus Controller Pins Symbol AS IOS RD WR WAIT I/O Output Output Output Output Input Function Strobe signal indicating that address output on address bus is enabled (when IOSE bit is 0) I/O select signal (when IOSE bit is 1) Strobe signal indicating that external space is being read Strobe signal indicating that external space is being written to, and that data bus is enabled Wait request signal when external 3-state access space is accessed 6.1.4 Register Configuration Table 6.2 summarizes the registers of the bus controller. Table 6.2 Name Bus control register Wait state control register Bus Controller Registers Abbreviation BCR WSCR R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'D7 H'33 Address* H'FFC6 H'FFC7 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 133 6.2 6.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Bus Control Register (BCR) 7 ICIS1 1 R/W 6 ICIS0 1 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 -- 1 R/W 1 IOS1 1 R/W 0 IOS0 1 R/W BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0 Initial value Read/Write BCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the external memory space access mode, and the extent of the I/O area when the I/O strobe function has been selected for the AS pin. BCR is initialized to H'D7 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7--Idle Cycle Insert 1 (ICIS1): Reserved. Do not write 0 to this bit. Bit 6--Idle Cycle Insert 0 (ICIS0): Selects whether or not a one-state idle cycle is to be inserted between bus cycles when successive external read and external write cycles are performed. Bit 6 ICIS0 0 1 Description Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles (Initial value) Bit 5--Burst ROM Enable (BRSTRM): Selects whether external space is designated as a burst ROM interface space. The selection applies to the entire external space . Bit 5 BRSTRM 0 1 Description Basic bus interface Burst ROM interface (Initial value) Bit 4--Burst Cycle Select 1 (BRSTS1): Selects the number of burst cycles for the burst ROM interface. 134 Bit 4 BRSTS1 0 1 Description Burst cycle comprises 1 state Burst cycle comprises 2 states (Initial value) Bit 3--Burst Cycle Select 0 (BRSTS0): Selects the number of words that can be accessed in a burst ROM interface burst access. Bit 3 BRSTS0 0 1 Description Max. 4 words in burst access Max. 8 words in burst access (Initial value) Bit 2--Reserved: Do not write 0 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0--IOS Select 1 and 0 (IOS1, IOS0): See table 6.4. 6.2.2 Bit Initial value Read/Write Wait State Control Register (WSCR) 7 RAMS 0 R/W 6 RAM0 0 R/W 5 ABW 1 R/W 4 AST 1 R/W 3 WMS1 0 R/W 2 WMS0 0 R/W 1 WC1 1 R/W 0 WC0 1 R/W WSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the data bus width, number of access states, wait mode, and number of wait states for external memory space. The on-chip memory and internal I/O register bus width and number of access states are fixed, irrespective of the WSCR settings. WSCR is initialized to H'33 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7--RAM Select (RAMS)/Bit 6--RAM Area Setting (RAM0): Reserved bits. Bit 5--Bus Width Control (ABW): Specifies whether the external memory space is 8-bit access space or 16-bit access space. However, a 16-bit access space cannot be specified for these series, and therefore 0 should not be written to this bit. 135 Bit 5 ABW 0 1 Description External memory space is designated as 16-bit access space (A 16-bit access space cannot be specified for these series) External memory space is designated as 8-bit access space (Initial value) Bit 4--Access State Control (AST): Specifies whether the external memory space is 2-state access space or 3-state access space, and simultaneously enables or disables wait state insertion. Bit 4 AST 0 1 Description External memory space is designated as 2-state access space Wait state insertion in external memory space accesses is disabled External memory space is designated as 3-state access space Wait state insertion in external memory space accesses is enabled (Initial value) Bits 3 and 2--Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1, WMS0): These bits select the wait mode when external memory space is accessed while the AST bit is set to 1. Bit 3 WMS1 0 Bit 2 WMS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Program wait mode Wait-disabled mode Pin wait mode Pin auto-wait mode (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1, WC0): These bits select the number of program wait states when external memory space is accessed while the AST bit is set to 1. Bit 1 WC1 0 Bit 0 WC0 0 1 1 0 1 Description No program wait states are inserted 1 program wait state is inserted in external memory space accesses 2 program wait states are inserted in external memory space accesses 3 program wait states are inserted in external memory space accesses (Initial value) 136 6.3 6.3.1 Overview of Bus Control Bus Specifications The external space bus specifications consist of three elements: bus width, number of access states, and wait mode and number of program wait states. The bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers are fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller. Bus Width: A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with the ABW bit. A 16-bit access space cannot be specified for these series. Number of Access States: Two or three access states can be selected with the AST bit. When 2-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled. The number of access states on the burst ROM interface is determined without regard to the AST bit setting. Wait Mode and Number of Program Wait States: When 3-state access space is designated by the AST bit, the wait mode and the number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with WMS1, WMS0, WC1, and WC0. From 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected. Table 6.3 shows the bus specifications for each basic bus interface area. Table 6.3 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface) Bus Specifications (Basic Bus Interface) ABW 0 1 AST 0 0 1 WMS1 WMS0 WC1 -- -- 0 --* -- -- 1 --* -- -- -- 0 WC0 -- -- -- 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * Except when WMS1 = 0 and WMS0 = 1 Bus Width Access States Program Wait States Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series. 8 8 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 2 3 137 6.3.2 Advanced Mode The H8S/2128 and H8S/2124 have 16 address output pins, so there are no pins for output of the upper address bits (A16 to A23) in advanced mode. H'FFF000 to H'FFFE4F can be accessed by designating the AS pin as an I/O strobe pin. The accessible external space is therefore H'FFF000 to H'FFFE4F even when expanded mode with ROM enabled is selected in advanced mode. The initial state of the external space is basic bus interface, three-state access space. In ROMenabled expanded mode, the space excluding the on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and internal I/O registers is external space. The on-chip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space. 6.3.3 Normal Mode The initial state of the external memory space is basic bus interface, three-state access space. In ROM-disabled expanded mode, the space excluding the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers is external space. In ROM-enabled expanded mode, the space excluding the on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and internal I/O registers is external space. The on-chip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the onchip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space. 6.3.4 I/O Select Signal In the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series, an I/O select signal (IOS) can be output, with the signal output going low when the designated external space is accessed. Figure 6.2 shows an example of IOS signal output timing. Bus cycle T1 o T2 T3 Address bus External address in IOS set range IOS Figure 6.2 IOS Signal Output Timing 138 Enabling or disabling of IOS signal output is controlled by the setting of the IOSE bit in SYSCR. In expanded mode, this pin operates as the AS output pin after a reset, and therefore the IOSE bit in SYSCR must be set to 1 in order to use this pin as the IOS signal output. See section 8, I/O Ports, for details. The range of addresses for which the IOS signal is output can be set with bits IOS1 and IOS0 in BCR. The IOS signal address ranges are shown in table 6.4. Table 6.4 IOS1 0 IOS Signal Output Range Settings IOS0 0 1 IOS Signal Output Range H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F03F H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F0FF H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F3FF H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)FE4F (Initial value) 1 0 1 6.4 6.4.1 Basic Bus Interface Overview The basic bus interface enables direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on. The bus specifications can be selected with the AST bit, and the WMS1, WMS0, WC1, and WC0 bits (see table 6.3). 6.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the upper data bus (D15 to D8) or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space) and the data size. These series only have an upper data bus, and only 8-bit access space alignment is used. In these series, the upper data bus pins are designated D7 to D0. 8-Bit Access Space: Figure 6.3 illustrates data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. With the 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is always used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word access is performed as two byte accesses, and a longword access, as four byte accesses. 139 Upper data bus Lower data bus D15 D8 D7 D0 Byte size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle 1st bus cycle Longword size 2nd bus cycle 3rd bus cycle 4th bus cycle Word size Figure 6.3 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space) 16-Bit Access Space (Cannot be Used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series): Figure 6.4 illustrates data alignment control for the 16-bit access space. With the 16-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7 to D0) are used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word, and a longword access is executed as two word accesses. In byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is even or odd. The upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd address. Lower data bus Upper data bus D15 D8 D7 D0 Byte size Byte size Word size Longword size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle * Even address * Odd address Figure 6.4 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Space) 140 6.4.3 Valid Strobes Table 6.5 shows the data buses used and valid strobes for the access spaces. In a read, the RD signal is valid without discrimination between the upper and lower halves of the data bus. In a write, the HWR signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the LWR signal for the lower half. These series only have an upper data bus, and only the RD and HWR signals are valid. In these series, the HWR signal pin is designated WR. Table 6.5 Area 8-bit access space Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes Access Read/ Size Write Byte Read Write Valid Address Strobe -- -- Even Odd Write Even Odd Word Read Write -- -- HWR LWR RD RD HWR* RD 2 Upper Data Bus Lower Data Bus (D7 to D0)*3 (D15 to D8)*1 Valid Port, etc. Port, etc. Valid Invalid Valid Undefined Valid Invalid Valid Undefined Valid Valid Valid 16-bit access space Byte (Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series) Read HWR, LWR Valid Notes: Undefined: Undefined data is output. Invalid: Input state; input value is ignored. Port, etc.: Pins are used as port or on-chip supporting module input/output pins, and not as data bus pins. 1. The pin names in these series are D7 to D0. 2. The pin name in these series is WR. 3. There are no lower data bus pins in these series. 141 6.4.4 Basic Timing 8-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figure 6.5 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 2-state access space. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used. Wait states cannot be inserted. These series have no lower data bus (D7 to D0) pins or LWR pin. In these series, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) pins are designated D7 to D0, and the HWR signal pin is designated WR. Bus cycle T1 o T2 Address bus AS/IOS (IOSE = 1) AS/IOS (IOSE = 0) RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR Write D15 to D8 Valid Figure 6.5 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 2-State Access Space 142 8-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figure 6.6 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 3-state access space. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used. Wait states can be inserted. These series have no lower data bus (D7 to D0) pins or LWR pin. In these series, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) pins are designated D7 to D0, and the HWR signal pin is designated WR. Bus cycle T1 o T2 T3 Address bus AS/IOS (IOSE = 1) AS/IOS (IOSE = 0) RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR Write D15 to D8 Valid Figure 6.6 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 3-State Access Space 143 6.4.5 Wait Control When accessing external space, the MCU can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait states (TW). There are three ways of inserting wait states: program wait insertion, pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin, and a combination of the two. Program Wait Mode In program wait mode, the number of TW states specified by bits WC1 and WC0 are always inserted between the T2 and T 3 states when external space is accessed. Pin Wait Mode In pin wait mode, the number of TW states specified by bits WC1 and WC0 are always inserted between the T 2 and T 3 states when external space is accessed. If the WAIT pin is low at the fall of o in the last T2 or TW state, another TW state is inserted. If the WAIT pin is held low, TW states are inserted until it goes high. Pin wait mode is useful for inserting four or more wait states, or for changing the number of TW states for different external devices. Pin Auto-Wait Mode In pin auto-wait mode, if the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock in the T2 state, the number of TW states specified by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted between the T2 and T 3 states when external space is accessed. No additional TW states are inserted even if the WAIT pin remains low. Pin auto-wait mode can be used for an easy interface to low-speed memory, simply by routing the chip select signal to the WAIT pin. Figure 6.7 shows an example of wait state insertion timing. 144 By program wait T1 o T2 Tw By WAIT pin Tw Tw T3 WAIT Address bus AS (IOSE = 0) RD Read Data bus Read data WR Write Data bus Write data Note: indicates the timing of WAIT pin sampling using the o clock. Figure 6.7 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing The settings after a reset are: 3-state access, insertion of 3 program wait states, and WAIT input disabled. 145 6.5 6.5.1 Burst ROM Interface Overview With the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series, external space area 0 can be designated as burst ROM space, and burst ROM interfacing can be performed. External space can be designated as burst ROM space by means of the BRSTRM bit in BCR. Consecutive burst accesses of a maximum of 4 words or 8 words can be performed for CPU instruction fetches only. One or two states can be selected for burst access. 6.5.2 Basic Timing The number of states in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface is in accordance with the setting of the AST bit. Also, when the AST bit is set to 1, wait state insertion is possible. One or two states can be selected for the burst cycle, according to the setting of the BRSTS1 bit in BCR. Wait states cannot be inserted. When the BRSTS0 bit in BCR is cleared to 0, burst access of up to 4 words is performed; when the BRSTS0 bit is set to 1, burst access of up to 8 words is performed. The basic access timing for burst ROM space is shown in figure 6.8 (a) and (b). The timing shown in figure 6.8 (a) is for the case where the AST and BRSTS1 bits are both set to 1, and that in figure 6.8 (b) is for the case where both these bits are cleared to 0. Full access T1 o T2 T3 T1 Burst access T2 T1 T2 Address bus Only lower address changed AS/IOS (IOSE = 0) RD Data bus Read data Read data Read data Figure 6.8 (a) Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST = BRSTS1 = 1) 146 Full access T1 T2 Burst access T1 T1 o Address bus Only lower address changed AS/IOS (IOSE = 0) RD Data bus Read data Read data Read data Figure 6.8 (b) Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST = BRSTS1 = 0) 6.5.3 Wait Control As with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface. See section 6.4.5, Wait Control. Wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle. 147 6.6 6.6.1 Idle Cycle Operation When the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series chip accesses external space, it can insert a 1-state idle cycle (T I) between bus cycles when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle. By inserting an idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between ROM, with a long output floating time, and high-speed memory, I/O interfaces, and so on. If an external write occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit in BCR is set to 1, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle. This is enabled in advanced mode and normal mode. Figure 6.9 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Bus cycle A T1 o Address bus T2 T3 Bus cycle B T1 T2 o Bus cycle A T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B TI T1 T2 RD WR Data bus (a) Idle cycle not inserted , , Address bus RD WR Data bus Data collision Long output floating time (b) Idle cycle inserted Figure 6.9 Example of Idle Cycle Operation 148 6.6.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle Table 6.5 shows pin states in an idle cycle. Table 6.5 Pins A15 to A0, IOS D7 to D0 AS RD WR Pin States in Idle Cycle Pin State Contents of next bus cycle High impedance High High High 6.7 6.7.1 Bus Arbitration Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations. There are two bus masters, the CPU and the DTC, which perform read/write operations when they have possession of the bus. Each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. The bus arbiter determines priorities at the prescribed timing, and permits use of the bus by means of a bus request acknowledge signal. The selected bus master then takes possession of the bus and begins its operation. 6.7.2 Operation The bus arbiter detects the bus masters' bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. If there are bus requests from both bus masters, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the higher priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the bus until that signal is canceled. The order of priority of the bus masters is as follows: (High) DTC > CPU (Low) 149 6.7.3 Bus Transfer Timing Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred immediately. There are specific times at which each bus master can relinquish the bus. CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DTC, the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the DTC. The timing for transfer of the bus is as follows: * The bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. However, if a bus cycle is executed in discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between the operations. See appendix A.5, Bus States during Instruction Execution, for timings at which the bus is not transferred. * If the CPU is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus immediately. DTC: The DTC sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is generated. The DTC does not release the bus until it has completed a series of processing operations. 150 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2128 Series] Provided in the H8S/2128 Series; not provided in the H8S/2124 Series. 7.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated by an interrupt or software, to transfer data. 7.1.1 Features * Transfer possible over any number of channels Transfer information is stored in memory One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer) * Wide range of transfer modes Normal, repeat, and block transfer modes available Incrementing, decrementing, and fixing of transfer source and destination addresses can be selected * Direct specification of 16-Mbyte address space possible 24-bit transfer source and destination addresses can be specified * Transfer can be set in byte or word units * A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after one data transfer ends An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after all specified data transfers have ended * Activation by software is possible * Module stop mode can be set The initial setting enables DTC registers to be accessed. DTC operation is halted by setting module stop mode 151 7.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC. The DTC's register information is stored in the on-chip RAM*. A 32-bit bus connects the DTC to the on-chip RAM (1 kbyte), enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC register information. Note: * When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1. Internal address bus Interrupt controller DTC Register information On-chip RAM CPU interrupt request Legend: MRA, MRB: DTC mode registers A and B CRA, CRB: DTC transfer count registers A and B SAR: DTC source address register DAR: DTC destination address register DTCERA to DTCERE: DTC enable registers A to E DTVECR: DTC vector register DTC activation request Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DTC 152 MRA MRB CRA CRB DAR SAR Interrupt request Control logic DTCERA to DTCERE DTVECR Internal data bus 7.1.3 Register Configuration Table 7.1 summarizes the DTC registers. Table 7.1 Name DTC mode register A DTC mode register B DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register A DTC transfer count register B DTC enable registers DTC vector register Module stop control register DTC Registers Abbreviation MRA MRB SAR DAR CRA CRB DTCER* 4 DTVECR* 4 R/W --* 2 --* 2 --* 2 --* 2 --* 2 --* 2 R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined H'00 H'00 H'3F H'FF Address* 1 --* 3 --* 3 --* 3 --* 3 --* 3 --* 3 H'FEEE to H'FEF2 H'FEF3 H'FF86 H'FF87 MSTPCRH MSTPCRL Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Registers within the DTC cannot be read or written to directly. 3. Allocated to on-chip RAM addresses H'EC00 to H'EFFF as register information.They cannot be located in external memory space. When the DTC is used, do not clear the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 4. The H8S/2124 Series does not include an on-chip DTC, and therefore the DTCER and DTVECR register addresses should not be accessed by the CPU. 153 7.2 7.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions DTC Mode Register A (MRA) 7 SM1 Undefined -- 6 SM0 Undefined -- 5 DM1 Undefined -- 4 DM0 Undefined -- 3 MD1 Undefined -- 2 MD0 Undefined -- 1 DTS Undefined -- 0 Sz Undefined -- Initial value Read/Write MRA is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode. Bits 7 and 6--Source Address Mode 1 and 0 (SM1, SM0): These bits specify whether SAR is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer. Bit 7 SM1 0 1 Bit 6 SM0 -- 0 1 Description SAR is fixed SAR is incremented after a transfer (by 1 when Sz = 0; by 2 when Sz = 1) SAR is decremented after a transfer (by 1 when Sz = 0; by 2 when Sz = 1) Bits 5 and 4--Destination Address Mode 1 and 0 (DM1, DM0): These bits specify whether DAR is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer. Bit 5 DM1 0 1 Bit 4 DM0 -- 0 1 Description DAR is fixed DAR is incremented after a transfer (by 1 when Sz = 0; by 2 when Sz = 1) DAR is decremented after a transfer (by 1 when Sz = 0; by 2 when Sz = 1) 154 Bits 3 and 2--DTC Mode (MD1, MD0): These bits specify the DTC transfer mode. Bit 3 MD1 0 Bit 2 MD0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Normal mode Repeat mode Block transfer mode -- Bit 1--DTC Transfer Mode Select (DTS): Specifies whether the source side or the destination side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode. Bit 1 DTS 0 1 Description Destination side is repeat area or block area Source side is repeat area or block area Bit 0--DTC Data Transfer Size (Sz): Specifies the size of data to be transferred. Bit 0 Sz 0 1 Description Byte-size transfer Word-size transfer 155 7.2.2 Bit DTC Mode Register B (MRB) 7 CHNE Undefined -- 6 DISEL Undefined -- 5 -- Undefined -- 4 -- Undefined -- 3 -- Undefined -- 2 -- Undefined -- 1 -- Undefined -- 0 -- Undefined -- Initial value Read/Write MRB is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode. Bit 7--DTC Chain Transfer Enable (CHNE): Specifies chain transfer. In chain transfer, multiple data transfers can be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. With data transfer for which CHNE is set to 1, there is no determination of the end of the specified number of transfers, clearing of the interrupt source flag, or clearing of DTCER. Bit 7 CHNE 0 1 Description End of DTC data transfer (activation waiting state is entered) DTC chain transfer (new register information is read, then data is transferred) Bit 6--DTC Interrupt Select (DISEL): Specifies whether interrupt requests to the CPU are disabled or enabled after a data transfer. Bit 6 DISEL 0 1 Description After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is disabled unless the transfer counter is 0 (the DTC clears the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0) After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is enabled (the DTC does not clear the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0) Bits 5 to 0--Reserved: In the H8S/2128 Series these bits have no effect on DTC operation, and should always be written with 0. 156 7.2.3 Bit DTC Source Address Register (SAR) 23 22 21 20 19 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/write Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined ---------- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined ---------- SAR is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even source address. 7.2.4 Bit Initial value Read/write DTC Destination Address Register (DAR) 23 22 21 20 19 4 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined ---------- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined ---------- DAR is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even destination address. 7.2.5 Bit Initial value Read/Write DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined -------------------------------- CRAH CRAL CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC. In normal mode, the entire CRA register functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536). It is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. In repeat mode or block transfer mode, CRA is divided into two parts: the upper 8 bits (CRAH) and the lower 8 bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL functions as an 8bit transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and the contents of CRAH are transferred when the count reaches H'00. This operation is repeated. 157 7.2.6 Bit DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined -------------------------------- CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. 7.2.7 Bit Initial value Read/Write DTC Enable Registers (DTCER) 7 DTCE7 0 R/W 6 DTCE6 0 R/W 5 DTCE5 0 R/W 4 DTCE4 0 R/W 3 DTCE3 0 R/W 2 DTCE2 0 R/W 1 DTCE1 0 R/W 0 DTCE0 0 R/W The DTC enable registers comprise five 8-bit readable/writable registers, DTCERA to DTCERE, with bits corresponding to the interrupt sources that can activate the DTC. These bits enable or disable DTC service for the corresponding interrupt sources. The DTC enable registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit n--DTC Activation Enable (DTCEn) Bit n DTCEn 0 Description DTC activation by interrupt is disabled [Clearing conditions] * * 1 When data transfer ends with the DISEL bit set to 1 When the specified number of transfers end (Initial value) DTC activation by interrupt is enabled [Holding condition] When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended (n = 7 to 0) A DTCE bit can be set for each interrupt source that can activate the DTC. The correspondence between interrupt sources and DTCE bits is shown in table 7.4, together with the vector number generated by the interrupt controller in each case. 158 For DTCE bit setting, read/write operations must be performed using bit-manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. For the initial setting only, however, when multiple activation sources are set at one time, it is possible to disable interrupts and write after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. 7.2.8 Bit Initial value Read/Write DTC Vector Register (DTVECR) 7 0 R/(W)* 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W SWDTE DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 Note: * A value of 1 can always be written to the SWDTE bit, but 0 can only be written after 1 is read. DTVECR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables DTC activation by software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt. DTVECR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--DTC Software Activation Enable (SWDTE): Specifies enabling or disabling of DTC software activation. To clear the SWDTE bit by software, read SWDTE when set to 1, then write 0 in the bit. Bit 7 SWDTE 0 Description DTC software activation is disabled [Clearing condition] When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended 1 DTC software activation is enabled [Holding conditions] * * * When data transfer ends with the DISEL bit set to 1 When the specified number of transfers end During software-activated data transfer (Initial value) Bits 6 to 0--DTC Software Activation Vectors 6 to 0 (DTVEC6 to DTVEC0): These bits specify a vector number for DTC software activation. The vector address is H'0400 + (vector number) << 1 (where << 1 indicates a 1-bit left shift). For example, if DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0420. 159 7.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 1 12 1 11 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP14 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, the DTC operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. Note that 1 cannot be written to the MSTP14 bit when the DTC is being activated. For details, see section 21.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 6--Module Stop (MSTP14): Specifies the DTC module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 6 MSTP14 0 1 Description DTC module stop mode is cleared DTC module stop mode is set (Initial value) 160 7.3 7.3.1 Operation Overview When activated, the DTC reads register information that is already stored in memory and transfers data on the basis of that register information. After the data transfer, it writes updated register information back to memory. Pre-storage of register information in memory makes it possible to transfer data over any required number of channels. Setting the CHNE bit to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of transfers with a single activation. Figure 7.2 shows a flowchart of DTC operation. Start Read DTC vector Next transfer Read register information Data transfer Write register information CHNE = 1? No Yes Transfer counter = 0 or DISEL = 1? No Clear activation flag Yes Clear DTCER End Interrupt exception handling Figure 7.2 Flowchart of DTC Operation 161 The DTC transfer mode can be normal mode, repeat mode, or block transfer mode. The 24-bit SAR designates the DTC transfer source address and the 24-bit DAR designates the transfer destination address. After each transfer, SAR and DAR are independently incremented, decremented, or left fixed. Table 7.2 outlines the functions of the DTC. Table 7.2 DTC Functions Address Registers Transfer Mode * Normal mode One transfer request transfers one byte or one word Memory addresses are incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 Up to 65,536 transfers possible * Repeat mode One transfer request transfers one byte or one word Memory addresses are incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 After the specified number of transfers (1 to 256), the initial state resumes and operation continues * Block transfer mode One transfer request transfers a block of the specified size Block size is from 1 to 256 bytes or words Up to 65,536 transfers possible A block area can be designated at either the source or destination Activation Source * IRQ * FRT ICI, OCI * 8-bit timer CMI * SCI TXI or RXI * A/D converter ADI * IIC IICI * Software Transfer Source 24 bits Transfer Destination 24 bits 162 7.3.2 Activation Sources The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTVECR by software (software activation). An interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTCER bit. The interrupt request is directed to the DTC when the corresponding bit is set to 1, and to the CPU when the bit is cleared to 0. At the end of one data transfer (or the last of the consecutive transfers in the case of chain transfer) the interrupt source or the corresponding DTCER bit is cleared. Table 7.3 shows activation sources and DTCER clearing. The interrupt source flag for RXI0, for example, is the RDRF flag in SCI0. Table 7.3 Activation Source Software activation Interrupt activation Activation Sources and DTCER Clearing When DISEL Bit Is 0 and Specified Number of Transfers Have Not Ended SWDTE bit cleared to 0 * * When DISEL Bit Is 1 or Specified Number of Transfers Have Ended * * Corresponding DTCER bit held at 1 Activation source flag cleared to 0 * * * SWDTE bit held at 1 Interrupt request sent to CPU Corresponding DTCER bit cleared to 0 Activation source flag held at 1 Activation source interrupt request sent to CPU Figure 7.3 shows a block diagram of activation source control. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. 163 Source flag cleared Clear control Clear DTCER Clear request Select On-chip supporting module IRQ interrupt Interrupt request Selection circuit DTC DTVECR Interrupt controller Interrupt mask CPU Figure 7.3 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control When an interrupt has been designated a DTC activation source, existing CPU mask level and interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same time, the DTC is activated in accordance with the default priorities. 7.3.3 DTC Vector Table Figure 7.4 shows the correspondence between DTC vector addresses and register information. Table 7.4 shows the correspondence between activation sources, vector addresses, and DTCER bits. When the DTC is activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: H'0400 + DTVECR[6:0] << 1 (where << 1 indicates a 1-bit left shift). For example, if DTVECR is H'10, the vector address is H'0420. The DTC reads the start address of the register information from the vector address set for each activation source, and then reads the register information from that start address. The register information can be placed at predetermined addresses in the on-chip RAM. The start address of the register information should be an integral multiple of four. The configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal and advanced modes, a 2-byte unit being used in both cases. These two bytes specify the lower bits of the address in the on-chip RAM. 164 Table 7.4 Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs Origin of Vector Interrupt Source Number Software DTVECR (Decimal indication) Vector Address H'0400 + DTVECR [6:0] << 1 H'0420 H'0422 H'0424 H'0426 H'0438 H'0460 H'0462 H'0468 H'046A H'0480 H'0482 H'0488 H'048A H'0490 H'0492 H'04A2 H'04A4 H'04AA H'04AC H'04B8 H'04BC DTCE* -- Priority High Interrupt Source Write to DTVECR IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 ADI (A/D conversion end) ICIA (FRT input capture A) ICIB (FRT input capture B) OCIA (FRT output compare A) OCIB (FRT output compare B) External pin 16 17 18 19 DTCEA7 DTCEA6 DTCEA5 DTCEA4 DTCEA3 DTCEA2 DTCEA1 DTCEA0 DTCEB7 DTCEB2 DTCEB1 DTCEB0 DTCEC7 DTCEC6 DTCEC5 DTCEC2 DTCEC1 DTCEC0 DTCED7 DTCED4 DTCED3 Low A/D FRT 28 48 49 52 54 64 65 68 69 72 73 81 82 85 86 92 94 CMIA0 (TMR0 compare-match A) TMR0 CMIB0 (TMR0 compare-match B) CMIA1 (TMR1 compare-match A) TMR1 CMIB1 (TMR1 compare-match B) CMIAY (TMRY compare-match A) TMRY CMIBY (TMRY compare-match B) RXI0 (reception completed 0) TXI0 (transmit data empty 0) RXI1 (reception completed 1) TXI1 (transmit data empty 1) IICI0 (IIC0 1-byte transmission/ reception completed) IICI1 (IIC1 1-byte transmission/ reception completed) IIC0 (option) IIC1 (option) SCI channel 1 SCI channel 0 Note: * DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and should be written with 0. 165 DTC vector address Register information start address Register information Chain transfer Figure 7.4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information 7.3.4 Location of Register Information in Address Space Figure 7.5 shows how the register information should be located in the address space. Locate the MRA, SAR, MRB, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers, in that order, from the start address of the register information (vector address contents). In chain transfer, locate the register information in consecutive areas. Locate the register information in the on-chip RAM (addresses: H'FFEC00 to H'FFEFFF). Lower address 0 Register information start address Chain transfer MRA MRB CRA MRA MRB CRA 4 bytes SAR DAR CRB 1 2 SAR DAR CRB Register information for 2nd transfer in chain transfer Register information 3 Figure 7.5 Location of DTC Register Information in Address Space 166 7.3.5 Normal Mode In normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a CPU interrupt can be requested. Table 7.5 lists the register information in normal mode and figure 7.6 shows memory mapping in normal mode. Table 7.5 Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register A DTC transfer count register B Register Information in Normal Mode Abbreviation SAR DAR CRA CRB Function Transfer source address Transfer destination address Transfer count Not used SAR Transfer DAR Figure 7.6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode 167 7.3.6 Repeat Mode In repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, the initial address register state specified by the transfer counter and repeat area resumes and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter does not reach H'00, and therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0. Table 7.6 lists the register information in repeat mode and figure 7.7 shows memory mapping in repeat mode. Table 7.6 Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register AH DTC transfer count register AL DTC transfer count register B Register Information in Repeat Mode Abbreviation SAR DAR CRAH CRAL CRB Function Transfer source address Transfer destination address Holds number of transfers Transfer count Not used SAR or DAR Repeat area Transfer DAR or SAR Figure 7.7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode 168 7.3.7 Block Transfer Mode In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the transfer destination is specified as a block area. The block size is 1 to 256. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size counter and the address register specified in the block area is restored. The other address register is successively incremented or decremented, or left fixed. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a CPU interrupt is requested. Table 7.7 lists the register information in block transfer mode and figure 7.8 shows memory mapping in block transfer mode. Table 7.7 Name DTC source address register DTC destination address register DTC transfer count register AH DTC transfer count register AL DTC transfer count register B Register Information in Block Transfer Mode Abbreviation SAR DAR CRAH CRAL CRB Function Transfer source address Transfer destination address Holds block size Block size count Transfer counter 169 First block SAR or DAR * * * Block area Transfer DAR or SAR Nth block Figure 7.8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode 170 7.3.8 Chain Transfer Setting the CHNE bit to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB, MRA, and MRB, which define data transfers, can be set independently. Figure 7.9 shows memory mapping for chain transfer. Source Destination Register information CHNE = 1 DTC vector address Register information start address Register information CHNE = 0 Source Destination Figure 7.9 Memory Mapping in Chain Transfer In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt source flag for the activation source is not affected. 171 7.3.9 Operation Timing Figures 7.10 to 7.12 show examples of DTC operation timing. o DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Vector read Address Transfer information read Read Write Transfer information write Figure 7.10 DTC Operation Timing (Normal Mode or Repeat Mode) o DTC activation request DTC request Vector read Address Transfer information read Data transfer Read Write Read Write Transfer information write Figure 7.11 DTC Operation Timing (Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2) 172 o DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Vector read Address Transfer information read Read Write Read Write Data transfer Transfer Transfer information information write read Transfer information write Figure 7.12 DTC Operation Timing (Chain Transfer) 7.3.10 Number of DTC Execution States Table 7.8 lists execution phases for a single DTC data transfer, and table 7.9 shows the number of states required for each execution phase. Table 7.8 DTC Execution Phases Vector Read I 1 1 1 Register Information Read/Write Data Read J K 6 6 6 1 1 N Data Write L 1 1 N Internal Operation M 3 3 3 Mode Normal Repeat Block transfer N: Block size (initial setting of CRAH and CRAL) 173 Table 7.9 Number of States Required for Each Execution Phase OnChip RAM 32 1 SI SJ -- 1 OnChip ROM 16 1 1 -- Internal I/O Registers 8 2 -- -- 16 2 -- -- Object of Access Bus width Access states Execution phase Vector read Register information read/write Byte data read Word data read Byte data write Word data write External Devices 8 2 4 -- 8 3 6+2m -- SK SK SL SL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 4 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 4 2 4 1 3+m 6+2m 3+m 6+2m 1 Internal operation SM The number of execution states is calculated from the formula below. Note that means the sum of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number for which the CHNE bit is set to one, plus 1). Number of execution states = I * SI + (J * SJ + K * SK + L * SL) + M * SM For example, when the DTC vector address table is located in on-chip ROM, normal mode is set, and data is transferred from the on-chip ROM to an internal I/O register, the time required for the DTC operation is 13 states. The time from activation to the end of the data write is 10 states. 174 7.3.11 Procedures for Using the DTC Activation by Interrupt: The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows: 1. Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM. 2. Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. 3. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. 4. Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. The DTC is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated. 5. After the end of one data transfer, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and a CPU interrupt is requested. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the DTCE bit to 1. Activation by Software: The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows: 1. Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM. 2. Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. 3. Check that the SWDTE bit is 0. 4. Write 1 in the SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVECR. 5. Check the vector number written to DTVECR. 6. After the end of one data transfer, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not requested, the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the SWDTE bit to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested. 175 7.3.12 Examples of Use of the DTC Normal Mode: An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI. 1. Set MRA to fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the SCI RDR address in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where the data will be received in DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value. 2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address. 3. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. 4. Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the reception complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error interrupts. 5. Each time reception of one byte of data ends on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. 6. When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The interrupt handling routine should perform wrap-up processing. 176 Software Activation: An example is shown in which the DTC is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means of software activation. The transfer source address is H'1000 and the destination address is H'2000. The vector number is H'60, so the vector address is H'04C0. 1. Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), block transfer mode (MD1 = 1, MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one block transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0). Set the transfer source address (H'1000) in SAR, the destination address (H'2000) in DAR, and 128 (H'8080) in CRA. Set 1 (H'0001) in CRB. 2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address (H'04C0). 3. Check that the SWDTE bit in DTVECR is 0. Check that there is currently no transfer activated by software. 4. Write 1 to the SWDTE bit and the vector number (H'60) to DTVECR. The write data is H'E0. 5. Read DTVECR again and check that it is set to the vector number (H'60). If it is not, this indicates that the write failed. This is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps 3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. To activate this transfer, go back to step 3. 6. If the write was successful, the DTC is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred. 7. After the transfer, an SWDTEND interrupt occurs. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing. 177 7.4 Interrupts An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC finishes the specified number of data transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation, the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control. In the case of activation by software, a software-activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) is generated. When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has ended, or the specified number of transfers have ended, after data transfer ends, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an SWDTEND interrupt is generated. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0. When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1. 7.5 Usage Notes Module Stop: When the MSTP14 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, the DTC clock stops, and the DTC enters the module stop state. However, 1 cannot be written in the MSTP14 bit while the DTC is operating. When the DTC is placed in the module stop state, the DTCER registers must all be in the cleared state when the MSTP14 bit is set to 1. On-Chip RAM: The MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers are all located in on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0. DTCE Bit Setting: For DTCE bit setting, read/write operations must be performed using bitmanipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. For the initial setting only, however, when multiple activation sources are set at one time, it is possible to disable interrupts and write after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. 178 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have six I/O ports (ports 1 to 6), and one input-only port (port 7). Tables 8.1 and 8.2 summarize the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions. Each port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output (not provided for the input-only port) and data registers (DR) that store output data. Ports 1 to 3 have a built-in MOS input pull-up function. Ports 1 to 3 have a MOS input pull-up control register (PCR), in addition to DDR and DR, to control the on/off status of the MOS input pull-ups. Ports 1 to 6 can drive a single TTL load and 30 pF capacitive load. All the I/O ports can drive a Darlington transistor when in output mode. Ports 1 to 3 can drive an LED (10 mA sink current). In the H8S/2128 Series, P52 in port 5 and P47 in port 4 are NMOS push-pull outputs. Note that the H8S/2124 Series has subset specifications that do not include some supporting modules. For differences in pin functions, see table 8.1, H8S/2128 Series Port Functions, and table 8.2, H8S/2124 Series Port Functions. 179 Table 8.1 H8S/2128 Series Port Functions Expanded Modes Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port also functioning as PWM timer output (PW7 to PW0, PWX1, PWX0) Port Description Pins P17 to P10/ A7 to A0/ PW7 to PW0/ PWX1, PWX0 Mode 1 Lower address output (A7 to A0) Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port When DDR = 1: lower address output (A7 to A0) or PWM timer output (PW7 to PW0, PWX1, PWX0) When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port, SCI1 I/O pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1) or timer connection output (CBLANK) When DDR = 1: upper address output (A15 to A8), PWM timer output (PW15 to PW12), SCI1 I/O pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1) or timer connection output (CBLANK), or output ports (P27 to P24) Port 1 * 8-bit I/O port * Built-in MOS input pull-ups * LED drive capability Port 2 * 8-bit I/O port * Built-in MOS input pull-ups * LED drive capability P27/A15/PW15/ SCK1/CBLANK P26/A14/PW14/ RxD1 P25/A13/PW13/ TxD1 P24/A12/PW12/ SCL1 P23/A11/PW11/ SDA1 P22/A10/PW10 P21/A9/PW9 P20/A8/PW8 Upper address output (A15 to A8) I/O port also functioning as PWM timer output (PW15 to PW8), SCI1 I/O pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1) and timer connection output (CBLANK), I2C bus interface 1 (option) I/O pins (SCL1, SDA1), and I/O port P37 to P30/ Port 3 * 8-bit I/O port D7 to D0 * Built-in MOS input pull-ups * LED drive capability Data bus input/output (D7 to D0) I/O port 180 Expanded Modes Port Description Pins P47/WAIT/SDA0 Mode 1 Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port also functioning as I 2C bus interface 0 (option) input/output (SDA0) Port 4 * 8-bit I/O port I/O port also functioning as expanded data bus control input (WAIT) and I2C bus interface 0 (option) input/output (SDA0) When DDR = 0: input port or EXCL input When DDR = 1 (after reset): o output P46/o/EXCL When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port or EXCL input When DDR = 1: o output P45/AS/IOS P44/WR P43/RD P42/IRQ0 P41/IRQ1 P40/IRQ2/ ADTRG Port 5 * 3-bit I/O port P52/SCK0/SCL0 P51/RxD0 P50/TxD0 Expanded data bus control output (AS/IOS, WR, RD) I/O port I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ0, IRQ1) I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ2), and A/D converter external trigger input (ADTRG) I/O port also functioning as SCI0 input/output (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0) and I 2C bus interface 0 (option) input/output (SCL0) 181 Expanded Modes Port Description Pins P67/TMOX/ TMO1/CIN7/ HSYNCO Mode 1 Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Port 6 * 8-bit I/O port I/O port also functioning as FRT input/output (FTCI, FTOA, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID, FTOB), 8-bit timer 0 and 1 input/output (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMO1), 8-bit timer X and Y input/output (TMOX, TMIX, P66/FTOB/ TMIY), timer connection input/output (HSYNCO, CSYNCI, TMRI1/CIN6/ HSYNCI, CLAMPO, VFBACKI, VSYNCI, VSYNCO, CSYNCI HFBACKI), and expansion A/D converter input (CIN7 to P65/FTID/TMCI1/ CIN0) CIN5/HSYNCI P64/FTIC/TMO0/ CIN4/CLAMPO P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ CIN3/VFBACKI P62/FTIA/TMIY/ CIN2/VSYNCI P61/FTOA/CIN1/ VSYNCO P60/FTCI/TMIX/ TMCI0/CIN0/ HFBACKI Port 7 * 8-bit input port P77/AN7 P76/AN6 P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 Input port also functioning as A/D converter analog input (AN7 to AN0) 182 Table 8.2 H8S/2124 Series Port Functions Expanded Modes Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port Port Description Pins Mode 1 Lower address output (A7 to A0) Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port When DDR = 1: lower address output (A7 to A0) When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port or SCI1 I/O pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1) When DDR = 1: upper address output (A15 to A8), SCI1 I/O pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1) or output ports (P27 to P24) P17 to P10/ Port 1 * 8-bit I/O port A7 to A0 * Built-in MOS input pull-ups * LED drive capability Port 2 * 8-bit I/O port * Built-in MOS input pull-ups * LED drive capability P27/A15/SCK1 P26/A14/RxD1 P25/A13/TxD1 P24/A12 P23/A11 P22/A10 P21/A9 P20/A8 Upper address output (A15 to A8) I/O port also functioning as SCI1 I/O pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1) P37 to P30/ Port 3 * 8-bit I/O port D7 to D0 * Built-in MOS input pull-ups * LED drive capability Port 4 * 8-bit I/O port P47/WAIT Data bus input/output (D7 to D0) I/O port I/O port also functioning as expanded data bus control input (WAIT) When DDR = 0: input port or EXCL input When DDR = 1 (after reset): o output I/O port P46/o/EXCL When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port or EXCL input When DDR = 1: o output 183 Expanded Modes Port Description Pins P45/AS/IOS P44/WR P43/RD P42/IRQ0 P41/IRQ1 P40/IRQ2/ ADTRG Mode 1 Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port Port 4 * 8-bit I/O port Expanded data bus control output(AS/IOS, WR, RD) I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ0, IRQ1) I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ2), and A/D converter external trigger input (ADTRG) I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ2) and A/D converter external trigger input (ADTRG) Port 5 * 3-bit I/O port P52/SCK0 P51/RxD0 P50/TxD0 I/O port also functioning as SCI0 input/output (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0) Port 6 * 8-bit I/O port P67/TMO1/CIN7 I/O port also functioning as FRT input/output (FTCI, FTOA, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID, FTOB), 8-bit timer 0 and 1 P66/FTOB/ input/output (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMRI1/CIN6 TMO1), 8-bit timer Y input (TMIY), and expansion A/D P65/FTID/TMCI1/ converter input (CIN7 to CIN0) CIN5 P64/FTIC/TMO0/ CIN4 P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ CIN3 P62/FTIA/TMIY/ CIN2 P61/FTOA/CIN1 P60/FTCI/TMCI0/ CIN0 Port 7 * 8-bit input port P77/AN7 P76/AN6 P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 Input port also functioning as A/D converter analog input (AN7 to AN0) 184 8.2 8.2.1 Port 1 Overview Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 1 pins also function as address bus output pins as 8-bit PWM output pins (PW7 to PW0) (H8S/2128 Series only), and as 14-bit PWM output pins (PWX1 to PWX0) (H8S/2128 Series only). Port 1 functions change according to the operating mode. Port 1 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 8.1 shows the port 1 pin configuration. Port 1 pins P17/A7/PW7 P16/A6/PW6 P15/A5/PW5 Port 1 P14/A4/PW4 P13/A3/PW3 P12/A2/PW2 P11/A1/PW1/PWX1 P10/A0/PW0/PWX0 Pin functions in mode 1 A7 (Output) A6 (Output) A5 (Output) A4 (Output) A3 (Output) A2 (Output) A1 (Output) A0 (Output) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) A7 (Output)/P17 (Input)/PW7 (Output) A6 (Output)/P16 (Input)/PW6 (Output) A5 (Output)/P15 (Input)/PW5 (Output) A4 (Output)/P14 (Input)/PW4 (Output) A3 (Output)/P13 (Input)/PW3 (Output) A2 (Output)/P12 (Input)/PW2 (Output) A1 (Output)/P11 (Input)/PW1 (Output)/PWX1 (Output) A0 (Output)/P10 (Input)/PW0 (Output)/PWX0 (Output) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) P17 (I/O)/PW7 (Output) P16 (I/O)/PW6 (Output) P15 (I/O)/PW5 (Output) P14 (I/O)/PW4 (Output) P13 (I/O)/PW3 (Output) P12 (I/O)/PW2 (Output) P11 (I/O)/PW1 (Output)/PWX1 (Output) P10 (I/O)/PW0 (Output)/PWX0 (Output) Figure 8.1 Port 1 Pin Functions 185 8.2.2 Register Configuration Table 8.3 shows the port 1 register configuration. Table 8.3 Name Port 1 data direction register Port 1 data register Port 1 MOS pull-up control register Port 1 Registers Abbreviation P1DDR P1DR P1PCR R/W W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFB0 H'FFB2 H'FFAC Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 1. P1DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. The address output pins maintain their output state in a transition to software standby mode. * Mode 1 The corresponding port 1 pins are address outputs, regardless of the P1DDR setting. In hardware standby mode, the address outputs go to the high-impedance state. * Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) The corresponding port 1 pins are address outputs or PWM outputs when P1DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. P10 and P11 can be designated as PWMX outputs regardless of P1DDR, but to ensure normal execution of external space accesses, this designation should not be used. * Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) The corresponding port 1 pins are output ports or PWM outputs when P1DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. P10 and P11 can be designated as PWMX outputs regardless of P1DDR. 186 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) Bit Initial value R/W 7 P17DR 0 R/W 6 P16DR 0 R/W 5 P15DR 0 R/W 4 P14DR 0 R/W 3 P13DR 0 R/W 2 P12DR 0 R/W 1 P11DR 0 R/W 0 P10DR 0 R/W P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10). If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 1 MOS Pull-Up Control Register (P1PCR) Bit Initial value R/W 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR P1PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the port 1 built-in MOS input pull-ups on a bit-by-bit basis. In modes 2 and 3, the MOS input pull-up is turned on when a P1PCR bit is set to 1 while the corresponding P1DDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting). P1PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 187 8.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Mode 1: In mode 1, port 1 pins automatically function as address outputs. The port 1 pin functions are shown in figure 8.2. A7 (Output) A6 (Output) A5 (Output) Port 1 A4 (Output) A3 (Output) A2 (Output) A1 (Output) A0 (Output) Figure 8.2 Port 1 Pin Functions (Mode 1) Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 1), port 1 pins function as address outputs, PWM outputs, or input ports, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P1DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an address output or PWM output, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. P10 and P11 can be designated as PWMX outputs regardless of P1DDR, but to ensure normal execution of external space accesses, this designation should not be used. The port 1 pin functions are shown in figure 8.3. When P1DDR = 1 and PWOERA = 0 A7 (Output) A6 (Output) A5 (Output) Port 1 A4 (Output) A3 (Output) A2 (Output) A1 (Output)/PWX1 (Output) A0 (Output)/PWX0 (Output) When P1DDR = 1 and PWOERA = 1 PW7 (Output) PW6 (Output) PW5 (Output) PW4 (Output) PW3 (Output) PW2 (Output) PW1 (Output)/PWX1 (Output) PW0 (Output)/PWX0 (Output) When P1DDR = 0 P17 (Input) P16 (Input) P15 (Input) P14 (Input) P13 (Input) P12 (Input) P11 (Input)/PWX1 (Output) P10 (Input)/PWX0 (Output) Figure 8.3 Port 1 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1)) 188 Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), port 1 pins function as PWM outputs or I/O ports, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P1DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as a PWM output or output port, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. P10 and P11 can be designated as PWMX outputs regardless of P1DDR. The port 1 pin functions are shown in figure 8.4. P1n: Input pin when P1DDR = 0, output pin when P1DDR = 1 and PWOERA = 0 P17 (I/O) P16 (I/O) P15 (I/O) Port 1 P14 (I/O) P13 (I/O) P12 (I/O) P11 (I/O)/PWX1 (Output) P10 (I/O)/PWX0 (Output) When P1DDR = 1 and PWOERA = 1 PW7 (Output) PW6 (Output) PW5 (Output) PW4 (Output) PW3 (Output) PW2 (Output) PW1 (Output)/PWX1 (Output) PW0 (Output)/PWX0 (Output) Figure 8.4 Port 1 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) 8.2.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port 1 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 2 and 3, and can be specified as on or off on a bit-bybit basis. When a P1DDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 2 or 3, setting the corresponding P1PCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained in software standby mode. Table 8.4 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. 189 Table 8.4 Mode 1 2, 3 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 1) Reset Off Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Off Software Standby Mode Off On/Off In Other Operations Off On/Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when P1DDR = 0 and P1PCR = 1; otherwise off. 8.3 8.3.1 Port 2 Overview Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 2 pins also function as address bus output pins, 8-bit PWM output pins (PW15 to PW8) (H8S/2128 Series only), the timer connection output pin (CBLANK) (H8S/2128 Series only), IIC1 I/O pins (SCL1, SDA1) (option in H8S/2128 Series only), and SCI1 I/O pins (SCK1, RxD1, TxD1). Port 2 functions change according to the operating mode. Port 2 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 8.5 shows the port 2 pin configuration. 190 Port 2 pins P27/A15/PW15/SCK1/CBLANK P26/A14/PW14/RxD1 P25/A13/PW13/TxD1 Port 2 P24/A12/PW12/SCL1 P23/A11/PW11/SDA1 P22/A10/PW10 P21/A9/PW9 P20/A8/PW8 Pin functions in mode 1 A15 (Output) A14 (Output) A13 (Output) A12 (Output) A11 (Output) A10 (Output) A9 (Output) A8 (Output) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) A15 (Output)/P27 (Input)/PW15 (Output)/SCK1(I/O)/CBLANK (Output) A14 (Output)/P26 (Input)/PW14 (Output)/RxD1 (Input) A13 (Output)/P25 (Input)/PW13 (Output)/TxD1 (Output) A12 (Output)/P24 (Input)/PW12 (Output)/SCL1 (I/O) A11 (Output)/P23 (Input)/PW11 (Output)/SDA1 (I/O) A10 (Output)/P22 (Input)/PW10 (Output) A9 (Output)/P21 (Input)/PW9 (Output) A8 (Output)/P20 (Input)/PW8 (Output) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) P27 (I/O)/PW15 (Output)/SCK1(I/O)/CBLANK (Output) P26 (I/O)/PW14 (Output)/RxD1 (Input) P25 (I/O)/PW13 (Output)/TxD1 (Output) P24 (I/O)/PW12 (Output)/SCL1 (I/O) P23 (I/O)/PW11 (Output)/SDA1 (I/O) P22 (I/O)/PW10 (Output) P21 (I/O)/PW9 (Output) P20 (I/O)/PW8 (Output) Figure 8.5 Port 2 Pin Functions 191 8.3.2 Register Configuration Table 8.5 shows the port 2 register configuration. Table 8.5 Name Port 2 data direction register Port 2 data register Port 2 MOS pull-up control register Port 2 Registers Abbreviation P2DDR P2DR P2PCR R/W W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFB1 H'FFB3 H'FFAD Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR P2DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 2. P2DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. P2DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. The address output pins maintain their output state in a transition to software standby mode. * Mode 1 The corresponding port 2 pins are address outputs, regardless of the P2DDR setting. In hardware standby mode, the address outputs go to the high-impedance state. * Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) The corresponding port 2 pins are address outputs or PWM outputs when P2DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. P27 to P24 are switched from address outputs to output ports by setting the IOSE bit to 1. P27 to P23 can be used as an on-chip supporting module output pin regardless of the P2DDR setting, but to ensure normal access to external space, P27 should not be set as an on-chip supporting module output pin when port 2 pins are used as address output pins. * Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) The corresponding port 2 pins are output ports or PWM outputs when P2DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. 192 P27 to P23 can be used as an on-chip supporting module output pin regardless of the P2DDR setting. Port 2 Data Register (P2DR) Bit Initial value R/W 7 P27DR 0 R/W 6 P26DR 0 R/W 5 P25DR 0 R/W 4 P24DR 0 R/W 3 P23DR 0 R/W 2 P22DR 0 R/W 1 P21DR 0 R/W 0 P20DR 0 R/W P2DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 2 pins (P27 to P20). If a port 2 read is performed while P2DDR bits are set to 1, the P2DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 2 read is performed while P2DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P2DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 2 MOS Pull-Up Control Register (P2PCR) Bit Initial value R/W 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR P2PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the port 2 built-in MOS input pull-ups on a bit-by-bit basis. In modes 2 and 3, the MOS input pull-up is turned on when a P2PCR bit is set to 1 while the corresponding P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting). P2PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 193 8.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Mode 1: In mode 1, port 2 pins automatically function as address outputs. The port 2 pin functions are shown in figure 8.6. A15 (Output) A14 (Output) A13 (Output) Port 2 A12 (Output) A11 (Output) A10 (Output) A9 (Output) A8 (Output) Figure 8.6 Port 2 Pin Functions (Mode 1) Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 1), port 2 pins function as address outputs, PWM outputs, or I/O ports, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P2DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an address output or PWM output, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. P27 to P24 are switched from address outputs to output ports by setting the IOSE bit to 1. P27 to P23 can be used as an on-chip supporting module output pin regardless of the P2DDR setting, but to ensure normal access to external space, P27 should not be set as an on-chip supporting module output pin when port 2 pins are used as address output pins. The port 2 pin functions are shown in figure 8.7. When P2DDR = 1 and PWOERB = 0 When P2DDR = 1 and PWOERB = 1 When P2DDR = 0 A15 (Output)/P27 (Output) P27 (Input)/SCK1 (I/O)/CBLANK (Output) PW15 (Output)/SCK1 (I/O)/CBLANK (Output) A14 (Output)/P26 (Output) P26 (Input)/RxD1 (Input) A13 (Output)/P25 (Output) P25 (Input)/TxD1 (Output) Port 2 A12 (Output)/P24 (Output) P24 (Input)/SCL1 (I/O) A11 (Output) A10 (Output) A9 (Output) A8 (Output) P23 (Input)/SDA1 (I/O) P22 (Input) P21 (Input) P20 (Input) PW14 (Output)/RxD1 (Input) PW13 (Output)/TxD1 (Output) PW12 (Output)/SCL1 (I/O) PW11 (Output)/SDA1 (I/O) PW10 (Output) PW9 (Output) PW8 (Output) Figure 8.7 Port 2 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1)) 194 Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), port 2 pins function as PWM outputs, the timer connection output (CBLANK), IIC1 I/O pins (SCL1, SDA1), SCI1 I/O pins (SCK1, RxD1, TxD1), or I/O ports, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P2DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as a PWM output or output port, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. P27 to P23 can be used as an on-chip supporting module output pin regardless of the P2DDR setting. The port 2 pin functions are shown in figure 8.8. P2n: Input pin when P2DDR = 0, output pin when P2DDR = 1 and PWOERB = 0 P27 (I/O)/SCK1 (I/O)/CBLANK (Output) P26 (I/O)/RxD1 (Input) P25 (I/O)/TxD1 (Output) Port 2 P24 (I/O)/SCL1 (I/O) P23 (I/O)/SDA1 (I/O) P22 (I/O) P21 (I/O) P20 (I/O) When P2DDR = 1 and PWOERB = 1 PW15 (Output)/SCK1 (I/O)/CBLANK (Output) PW14 (Output)/RxD1 (Input) PW13 (Output)/TxD1 (Output) PW12 (Output)/SCL1 (I/O) PW11 (Output)/SDA1 (I/O) PW10 (Output) PW9 (Output) PW8 (Output) Figure 8.8 Port 2 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) 8.3.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port 2 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 2 and 3, and can be specified as on or off on a bit-bybit basis. When a P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 2 or 3, setting the corresponding P2PCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained in software standby mode. Table 8.6 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. 195 Table 8.6 Mode 1 2, 3 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 2) Reset Off Off Hardware Standby Mode Off Off Software Standby Mode Off On/Off In Other Operations Off On/Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when P2DDR = 0 and P2PCR = 1; otherwise off. 8.4 8.4.1 Port 3 Overview Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 3 pins also function as data bus I/O pins. Port 3 functions change according to the operating mode. Port 3 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 8.9 shows the port 3 pin configuration. Pin functions in modes 1, 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) D7 (I/O) D6 (I/O) D5 (I/O) D4 (I/O) D3 (I/O) D2 (I/O) D1 (I/O) D0 (I/O) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) P37 (I/O) P36 (I/O) P35 (I/O) P34 (I/O) P33 (I/O) P32 (I/O) P31 (I/O) P30 (I/O) Port 3 pins P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 Port 3 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 P30/D0 Figure 8.9 Port 3 Pin Functions 196 8.4.2 Register Configuration Table 8.7 shows the port 3 register configuration. Table 8.7 Name Port 3 data direction register Port 3 data register Port 3 MOS pull-up control register Port 3 Registers Abbreviation P3DDR P3DR P3PCR R/W W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFB4 H'FFB6 H'FFAE Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR P3DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 3. P3DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. P3DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. * Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1) The input/output direction specified by P3DDR is ignored, and pins automatically function as data I/O pins. After a reset, and in hardware standby mode or software standby mode, the data I/O pins go to the high-impedance state. * Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) The corresponding port 3 pins are output ports when P3DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. 197 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P37DR 0 R/W 6 P36DR 0 R/W 5 P35DR 0 R/W 4 P34DR 0 R/W 3 P33DR 0 R/W 2 P32DR 0 R/W 1 P31DR 0 R/W 0 P30DR 0 R/W P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 3 pins (P37 to P30). If a port 3 read is performed while P3DDR bits are set to 1, the P3DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 3 read is performed while P3DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P3DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 3 MOS Pull-Up Control Register (P3PCR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR P3PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the port 3 built-in MOS input pull-ups on a bit-by-bit basis. In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), the MOS input pull-up is turned on when a P3PCR bit is set to 1 while the corresponding P3DDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting). P3PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 198 8.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1): In modes 1, 2, and 3 (when EXPE = 1), port 3 pins automatically function as data I/O pins. The port 3 pin functions are shown in figure 8.10. D7 (I/O) D6 (I/O) D5 (I/O) Port 3 D4 (I/O) D3 (I/O) D2 (I/O) D1 (I/O) D0 (I/O) Figure 8.10 Port 3 Pin Functions (Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1)) Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), port 3 functions as an I/O port, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P3DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an output port, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. The port 3 pin functions are shown in figure 8.11. P37 (I/O) P36 (I/O) P35 (I/O) Port 3 P34 (I/O) P33 (I/O) P32 (I/O) P31 (I/O) P30 (I/O) Figure 8.11 Port 3 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) 199 8.4.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port 3 has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), and can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. When a P3DDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 2 or 3 (when EXPE = 0), setting the corresponding P3PCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained in software standby mode. Table 8.8 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 8.8 Mode MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 3) Reset Hardware Standby Mode Off Off Software Standby Mode Off On/Off In Other Operations Off On/Off 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) Off 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when P3DDR = 0 and P3PCR = 1; otherwise off. 200 8.5 8.5.1 Port 4 Overview Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 4 pins also function as the IRQ0 to IRQ2 input pins, A/D converter external trigger input pin (ADTRG), IIC0 I/O pin (SDA0) (option in H8S/2128 Series only), subclock input pin (EXCL), bus control signal I/O pins (AS/IOS, RD, WR, WAIT), and system clock (o) output pin. In the H8S/2128 Series, P47 is an NMOS push-pull output. SDA0 is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. Figure 8.12 shows the port 4 pin configuration. Port 4 pins P47/WAIT/SDA0 P46/o/EXCL P45/AS/IOS Port 4 P44/WR P43/RD P42/IRQ0 P41/IRQ1 P40/IRQ2/ADTRG Pin functions in modes 1, 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) WAIT (Input)/P47 (I/O)/SDA0 (I/O) o (Output)/P46 (Input)/EXCL (Input) AS (Output)/IOS (Output) WR (Output) RD (Output) P42 (I/O)/IRQ0 (Input) P41 (I/O)/IRQ1 (Input) P40 (I/O)/IRQ2 (Input)/ADTRG (Input) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) P47 (I/O)/SDA0 (I/O) P46 (Input)/o (Output)/EXCL (Input) P45 (I/O) P44 (I/O) P43 (I/O) P42 (I/O)/IRQ0 (Input) P41 (I/O)/IRQ1 (Input) P40 (I/O)/IRQ2 (Input)/ADTRG (Input) Figure 8.12 Port 4 Pin Functions 201 8.5.2 Register Configuration Table 8.9 summarizes the port 4 registers. Table 8.9 Name Port 4 data direction register Port 4 data register Port 4 Registers Abbreviation P4DDR P4DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'40/H'00* 2 H'00 Address*1 H'FFB5 H'FFB7 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Initial value depends on the mode. Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR Mode 1 Initial value Read/Write Modes 2 and 3 Initial value Read/Write 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 1 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W P4DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 4. P4DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. P4DDR is initialized to H'40 (mode 1) or H'00 (modes 2 and 3) by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. * Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1) Pin P47 functions as a bus control input (WAIT), IIC0 I/O pin (SDA0), or I/O port, according to the wait mode setting. When P47 functions as an I/O port, it becomes an output port when P47DDR is set to 1, and an input port when P47DDR is cleared to 0. Pin P46 functions as the o output pin when P46DDR is set to 1, and as the subclock input (EXCL) or an input port when P46DDR is cleared to 0. Pins P45 to P43 automatically become bus control outputs (AS/IOS, WR, RD), regardless of the input/output direction indicated by P45DDR to P43DDR. Pins P42 to P40 become output ports when P42DDR to P40DDR are set to 1, and input ports when P42DDR to P40DDR are cleared to 0. 202 * Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) When the corresponding P4DDR bits are set to 1, pin P46 functions as the o output pin and pins P47 and P45 to P40 become output ports. When P4DDR bits are cleared to 0, the corresponding pins become input ports. Port 4 Data Register (P4DR) Bit 7 P47DR Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 P46DR --* R 5 P45DR 0 R/W 4 P44DR 0 R/W 3 P43DR 0 R/W 2 P42DR 0 R/W 1 P41DR 0 R/W 0 P40DR 0 R/W Note: * Determined by the state of pin P46. P4DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 4 pins (P47 to P40). With the exception of P46, if a port 4 read is performed while P4DDR bits are set to 1, the P4DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 4 read is performed while P4DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P4DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 8.5.3 Pin Functions Port 4 pins also function as the IRQ0 to IRQ2 input pins, A/D converter input pin (ADTRG), IIC0 I/O pin (SDA0), subclock input pin (EXCL), bus control signal I/O pins (AS/IOS, RD, WR, WAIT), and system clock (o) output pin. The pin functions differ between the mode 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1) expanded modes and the mode 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) single-chip modes. The port 4 pin functions are shown in table 8.10. 203 Table 8.10 Port 4 Pin Functions Pin P47/WAIT/SDA0 Selection Method and Pin Functions The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bit WMS1 in WSCR, bit ICE in ICCR of IIC0, and bit P47DDR. Operating mode WMS1 ICE P47DDR Pin function 0 P47 input pin 0 1 P47 output pin Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 0 1 -- SDA0 I/O pin 1 -- -- WAIT input pin 0 P47 input pin 0 1 P47 output pin Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) -- 1 -- SDA0 I/O pin In the H8S/2128 Series, when this pin is set as the P47 output pin, it is an NMOS push-pull output. SDA0 is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. P46/o/EXCL The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit EXCLE in LPWRCR and bit P46DDR. P46DDR EXCLE Pin function 0 P46 input pin 0 1 EXCL input pin 1 0 o output pin When this pin is used as the EXCL input pin, P46DDR should be cleared to 0. P45/AS/IOS The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bits IOSE in SYSCR, and bit P45DDR. Operating mode P45DDR IOSE Pin function 0 AS output pin Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) -- 1 IOS output pin Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) 0 -- P45 input pin 1 -- P45 output pin P44/WR The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, and bit P44DDR. Operating mode P44DDR Pin function Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) -- WR output pin Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) 0 P44 input pin 1 P44 output pin 204 Pin P43/RD/IOR Selection Method and Pin Functions The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, and bit P43DDR. Operating mode P43DDR Pin function Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) -- RD output pin Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) 0 P43 input pin 1 P43 output pin P42/IRQ0 P42DDR Pin function 0 P42 input pin IRQ0 input pin 1 P42 output pin When bit IRQ0E in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ0 input pin. P41/IRQ1 P41DDR Pin function 0 P41 input pin IRQ1 input pin 1 P41 output pin When bit IRQ1E in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ1 input pin. P40/IRQ2/ADTRG P40DDR Pin function 0 P40 input pin 1 P40 output pin IRQ2 input pin, ADTRG input pin When the IRQ2E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ2 input pin. When TRGS1 and TRGS0 bit in ADCR of the A/D converter are both set to 1, this pin is used as the ADTRG input pin. 205 8.6 8.6.1 Port 5 Overview Port 5 is a 3-bit I/O port. Port 5 pins also function as SCI0 I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0), and the IIC0 I/O pin (SCL0) (option in H8S/2128 Series only). In the H8S/2128 Series, P52 and SCK0 are NMOS push-pull outputs, and SCL0 is an NMOS open-drain output. Port 5 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.13 shows the port 5 pin configuration. Port 5 pins P52 (I/O)/SCK0 (I/O)/SCL0 (I/O) Port 5 P51 (I/O)/RxD0 (Input) P50 (I/O)/TxD0 (Output) Figure 8.13 Port 5 Pin Functions 8.6.2 Register Configuration Table 8.11 shows the port 5 register configuration. Table 8.11 Port 5 Registers Name Port 5 data direction register Port 5 data register Abbreviation P5DDR P5DR R/W W R/W Initial Value H'F8 H'F8 Address* H'FFB8 H'FFBA Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 206 Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR P5DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 5. P5DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. Bits 7 to 3 are reserved. Setting a P5DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 5 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. P5DDR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. As SCI0 is initialized, the pin states are determined by the IIC0 ICCR, P5DDR, and P5DR specifications. Port 5 Data Register (P5DR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 P52DR 0 R/W 1 P51DR 0 R/W 0 P50DR 0 R/W P5DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 5 pins (P52 to P50). If a port 5 read is performed while P5DDR bits are set to 1, the P5DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 5 read is performed while P5DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Bits 7 to 3 are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. P5DR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 207 8.6.3 Pin Functions Port 5 pins also function as SCI0 I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0) and the IIC0 I/O pin (SCL0). The port 5 pin functions are shown in table 8.12. Table 8.12 Port 5 Pin Functions Pin P52/SCK0/SCL0 Selection Method and Pin Functions The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR, bit C/A in SMR of SCI0, bit ICE in ICCR of IIC0, and bit P52DDR. ICE CKE1 C/A CKE0 P52DDR Pin function 0 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 -- -- 0 1 -- -- -- 1 0 0 0 -- SCL0 I/O pin P52 P52 SCK0 SCK0 SCK0 input pin output pin output pin output pin input pin When this pin is used as the SCL0 I/O pin, bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI0 and bit C/A in SMR of SCI0 must all be cleared to 0. SCL0 is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. In the H8S/2128 Series, when set as the P52 output pin or SCK0 output pin, this pin is an NMOS push-pull output. P51/RxD0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit RE in SCR of SCI0 and bit P51DDR. RE P51DDR Pin function P50/TxD0 0 P51 input pin 0 1 P51 output pin 1 -- RxD input pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit TE in SCR of SCI0 and bit P50DDR. TE P50DDR Pin function 0 P50 input pin 0 1 P50 output pin 1 -- TxD0 output pin 208 8.7 8.7.1 Port 6 Overview Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 6 pins also function as the 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) I/O pins (FTOA, FTOB, FTIA to FTID, FTCI), timer 0 and 1 (TMR0, TMR1) I/O pins (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMO1), timer X (TMRX) I/O pins (TMOX, TMIX) (H8S/2128 Series only), the timer Y (TMRY) input pin (TMIY), timer connection I/O pins (CSYNCI, HSYNCI, HSYNCO, HFBACKI, VSYNCI, VSYNCO, VFBACKI, CLAMPO) (H8S/2128 Series only), and expansion A/D converter input pins (CIN7 to CIN0). Port 6 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.14 shows the port 6 pin configuration. Port 6 pins P67 (I/O)/TMOX (Output)/TMO1 (Output)/CIN7 (Input)/HSYNCO (Output) P66 (I/O)/FTOB (Output)/TMRI1 (Input)/CIN6 (Input)/CSYNCI (Input) P65 (I/O)/FTID (Input)/TMCI1 (Input)/CIN5 (Input)/HSYNCI (Input) Port 6 P64 (I/O)/FTIC (Input)/TMO0 (Output)/CIN4 (Input)/CLAMPO (Output) P63 (I/O)/FTIB (Input)/TMRI0 (Input)/CIN3 (Input)/VFBACKI (Input) P62 (I/O)/FTIA (Input)/CIN2 (Input)/VSYNCI (Input)/TMIY (Input) P61 (I/O)/FTOA (Output)/CIN1 (Input)/VSYNCO (Output) P60 (I/O)/FTCI (Input)/TMCIO (Input)/CIN0 (Input)/HFBACKI (Input)/TMIX (Input) Figure 8.14 Port 6 Pin Functions 8.7.2 Register Configuration Table 8.13 shows the port 6 register configuration. Table 8.13 Port 6 Registers Name Port 6 data direction register Port 6 data register Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Abbreviation R/W P6DDR P6DR W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Address* H'FFB9 H'FFBB 209 Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR P6DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 6. P6DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. Setting a P6DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 6 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. P6DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 6 Data Register (P6DR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P67DR 0 R/W 6 P66DR 0 R/W 5 P65DR 0 R/W 4 P64DR 0 R/W 3 P63DR 0 R/W 2 P62DR 0 R/W 1 P61DR 0 R/W 0 P60DR 0 R/W P6DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 6 pins (P67 to P60). If a port 6 read is performed while P6DDR bits are set to 1, the P6DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 6 read is performed while P6DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P6DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 210 8.7.3 Pin Functions Port 6 pins also function as the 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) I/O pins (FTOA, FTOB, FTIA to FTID, FTCI), timer 0 and 1 (TMR0, TMR1) I/O pins (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMO1), timer X (TMRX) I/O pins (TMOX, TMIX), the timer Y (TMRY) input pin (TMIY), timer connection I/O pins (CSYNCI, HSYNCI, HSYNCO, HFBACKI, VSYNCI, VSYNCO, VFBACKI, CLAMPO), and expansion A/D converter input pins (CIN7 to CIN0). The port 6 pin functions are shown in table 8.14. Table 8.14 Port 6 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P67/TMO1/TMOX/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of CIN7/HSYNCO bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR of TMR1 and TMRX, bit HOE in TCONRO of the timer connection function, and bit P67DDR. HOE TMRX: OS3 to 0 TMR1: OS3 to 0 P67DDR Pin function 0 P67 input pin All 0 1 P67 output pin All 0 Not all 0 -- TMO1 output pin CIN7 input pin It can always be used as the CIN7 input pin. P66/FTOB/TMRI1/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of CIN6/CSYNCI bit OEB in TOCR of the FRT and bit P66DDR. OEB P66DDR Pin function 0 P66 input pin 0 1 P66 output pin 1 -- FTOB output pin 0 Not all 0 -- -- TMOX output pin 1 -- -- -- HSYNCO output pin TMRI1 input pin, CSYNCI input pin, CIN6 input pin This pin is used as the TMRI1 input pin when bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 are both set to 1 in TCR of TMR1. It can always be used as the CSYNCI or CIN6 input pin. 211 Pin P65/FTID/TMCI1/ CIN5/HSYNCI Selection Method and Pin Functions P65DDR Pin function 0 P65 input pin 1 P65 output pin FTID input pin, TMCI1 input pin, HSYNCI input pin, CIN5 input pin This pin is used as the TMCI1 input pin when an external clock is selected with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR of TMR1. It can always be used as the FTID, HSYNCI or CIN5 input pin. P64/FTIC/TMO0/ CIN4/CLAMPO The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR of TMR0, bit CLOE in TCONRO of the timer connection function, and bit P64DDR. CLOE OS3 to 0 P64DDR Pin function 0 P64 input pin All 0 1 P64 output pin 0 Not all 0 -- TMO0 output pin 1 -- -- CLAMPO output pin FTIC input pin, CIN4 input pin This pin can always be used as the FTIC or CIN4 input pin. P63/FTIB/TMRI0/ CIN3/VFBACKI P63DDR Pin function 0 P63 input pin 1 P63 output pin FTIB input pin, TMRI0 input pin, VFBACKI input pin, CIN3 input pin This pin is used as the TMRI0 input pin when bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 are both set to 1 in TCR of TMR0. It can always be used as the FTIB, VFBACKI or CIN3 input pin. P62/FTIA/CIN2/ VSYNCI/TMIY P62DDR Pin function 0 P62 input pin 1 P62 output pin FTIA input pin, VSYNCI input pin, TMIY input pin, CIN2 input pin This pin can always be used as the FTIA, TMIY, VSYNCI or CIN2 input pin. 212 Pin P61/FTOA/CIN1/ VSYNCO Selection Method and Pin Functions The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit OEA in TOCR of the FRT, bit VOE in TCONRO of the timer connection function, and bit P61DDR. VOE OEA P61DDR Pin function 0 P61 input pin 0 1 P61 output pin 0 1 -- FTOA0 output pin 1 0 -- VSYNCO output pin CIN1 input pin When this pin is used as the VSYNCO pin, the OEA bit in TOCR of the FRT must be cleared. This pin can always be used as the CIN1 pin. P60/FTCI/TMCI0/ CIN0/HFBACKI/ TMIX P60DDR Pin function 0 P60 I/O pin 1 P60 output pin FTCI input pin, TMCI0 input pin, HFBACKI input pin, CIN0 input pin, TMIX input pin This pin is used as the FTCI input pin when an external clock is selected with bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR of the FRT. It is used as the TMCI0 input pin when an external clock is selected with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR of TMR0. It can always be used as the TMIX, HFBACKI, CIN0 input pin. 213 8.8 8.8.1 Port 7 Overview Port 7 is an 8-bit input port. Port 7 pins also function as the A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7). Port 7 functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.15 shows the port 7 pin configuration. Port 7 pins P77 (Input)/AN7 (Input) P76 (Input)/AN6 (Input) P75 (Input)/AN5 (Input) Port 7 P74 (Input)/AN4 (Input) P73 (Input)/AN3 (Input) P72 (Input)/AN2 (Input) P71 (Input)/AN1 (Input) P70 (Input)/AN0 (Input) Figure 8.15 Port 7 Pin Functions 214 8.8.2 Register Configuration Table 8.16 shows the port 7 register configuration. Port 7 is an input-only port, and does not have a data direction register or data register. Table 8.16 Port 7 Registers Name Port 7 input data register Abbreviation P7PIN R/W R Initial Value Undefined Address* H'FFBE Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 7 Input Data Register (P7PIN) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P77PIN --* R 6 --* R 5 --* R 4 --* R 3 --* R 2 --* R 1 --* R 0 --* R P76PIN P75PIN P74PIN P73PIN P72PIN P71PIN P70PIN Note: * Determined by the state of pins P77 to P70. When a P7PIN read is performed, the pin states are always read. 8.8.3 Pin Functions Port 7 pins also function as the A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7). 215 216 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2128 Series] 9.1 Overview The H8/2128 Series has an on-chip pulse width modulation (PWM) timer module with sixteen outputs. Sixteen output waveforms are generated from a common time base, enabling PWM output with a high carrier frequency to be produced using pulse division. The PWM timer module has sixteen 8-bit PWM data registers (PWDRs), and an output pulse with a duty cycle of 0 to 100% can be obtained as specified by PWDR and the port data register (P1DR or P2DR). 9.1.1 Features The PWM timer module has the following features. * Operable at a maximum carrier frequency of 1.25 MHz using pulse division (at 20 MHz operation) * Duty cycles from 0 to 100% with 1/256 resolution (100% duty realized by port output) * Direct or inverted PWM output, and PWM output enable/disable control 217 9.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of the PWM timer module. P10/PW0 P11/PW1 P12/PW2 P13/PW3 P14/PW4 Port/PWM output control P15/PW5 P16/PW6 P17/PW7 P20/PW8 P21/PW9 P22/PW10 P23/PW11 P24/PW12 P25/PW13 P26/PW14 P27/PW15 Comparator 0 Comparator 1 Comparator 2 Comparator 3 Comparator 4 Comparator 5 Comparator 6 Comparator 7 Comparator 8 Comparator 9 Comparator 10 Comparator 11 Comparator 12 Comparator 13 Comparator 14 Comparator 15 PWDR0 PWDR1 PWDR2 PWDR3 PWDR4 PWDR5 PWDR6 PWDR7 PWDR8 PWDR9 PWDR10 PWDR11 PWDR12 PWDR13 PWDR14 PWDR15 Module data bus Bus interface Internal data bus PWDPRB PWOERB P2DDR P2DR PWDPRA PWOERA P1DDR P1DR TCNT Clock selection PWSL PCSR o/16 o/8 o/4 o/2 o Internal clock Legend: PWSL: PWDR: PWDPRA: PWDPRB: PWOERA: PWOERB: PCSR: P1DDR: P2DDR: P1DR: P2DR: PWM register select PWM data register PWM data polarity register A PWM data polarity register B PWM output enable register A PWM output enable register B Peripheral clock select register Port 1 data direction register Port 2 data direction register Port 1 data register Port 2 data register Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of PWM Timer Module 218 9.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 9.1 shows the PWM output pin. Table 9.1 Name PWM output pin 0 to 15 Pin Configuration Abbreviation PW0 to PW15 I/O Output Function PWM timer pulse output 0 to 15 9.1.4 Register Configuration Table 9.2 lists the registers of the PWM timer module. Table 9.2 Name PWM register select PWM data registers 0 to 15 PWM data polarity register A PWM data polarity register B PWM output enable register A PWM output enable register B Port 1 data direction register Port 2 data direction register Port 1 data register Port 2 data register Peripheral clock select register Module stop control register PWM Timer Module Registers Abbreviation PWSL PWDR0 to PWDR15 PWDPRA PWDPRB PWOERA PWOERB P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR PCSR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W W W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'20 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'3F H'FF Address* 1 H'FFD6 H'FFD7 H'FFD5 H'FFD4 H'FFD3 H'FFD2 H'FFB0 H'FFB1 H'FFB2 H'FFB3 H'FF82* 2 H'FF86 H'FF87 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Some of the 8-bit PWM timer registers are assigned to the same addresses as other registers. Register selection is performed with the FLSHE bit in the serial/timer control register (STCR). 219 9.2 9.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions PWM Register Select (PWSL) 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 RS3 0 R/W 2 RS2 0 R/W 1 RS1 0 R/W 0 RS0 0 R/W PWCKE PWCKS Initial value Read/Write PWSL is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to select the PWM timer input clock and the PWM data register. PWSL is initialized to H'20 by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bits 7 and 6--PWM Clock Enable, PWM Clock Select (PWCKE, PWCKS): These bits, together with bits PWCKA and PWCKB in PCSR, select the internal clock input to TCNT in the PWM timer. PWSL Bit 7 PWCKE 0 1 Bit 6 PWCKS -- 0 1 Bit 2 PWCKB -- -- 0 PCSR Bit 1 PWCKA -- -- 0 1 1 0 1 Description Clock input is disabled o (system clock) is selected o/2 is selected o/4 is selected o/8 is selected o/16 is selected (Initial value) The PWM resolution, PWM conversion period, and carrier frequency depend on the selected internal clock, and can be found from the following equations. Resolution (minimum pulse width) = 1/internal clock frequency PWM conversion period = resolution x 256 Carrier frequency = 16/PWM conversion period Thus, with a 20 MHz system clock (o), the resolution, PWM conversion period, and carrier frequency are as shown below. 220 Table 9.3 Resolution, PWM Conversion Period, and Carrier Frequency when o = 20 MHz Resolution 50 ns 100 ns 200 ns 400 ns 800 ns PWM Conversion Period 12.8 s 25.6 s 51.2 s 102.4 s 204.8 s Carrier Frequency 1250 kHz 625 kHz 312.5 kHz 156.3 kHz 78.1 kHz Internal Clock Frequency o o/2 o/4 o/8 o/16 Bit 5--Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Bit 4--Reserved: This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bits 3 to 0--Register Select (RS3 to RS0): These bits select the PWM data register. Bit 3 RS3 0 Bit 2 RS2 0 Bit 1 RS1 0 Bit 0 RS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Register Selection PWDR0 selected PWDR1 selected PWDR2 selected PWDR3 selected PWDR4 selected PWDR5 selected PWDR6 selected PWDR7 selected PWDR8 selected PWDR9 selected PWDR10 selected PWDR11 selected PWDR12 selected PWDR13 selected PWDR14 selected PWDR15 selected 221 9.2.2 Bit PWM Data Registers (PWDR0 to PWDR15) 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write Each PWDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the duty cycle of the basic pulse to be output, and the number of additional pulses. The value set in PWDR corresponds to a 0 or 1 ratio in the conversion period. The upper 4 bits specify the duty cycle of the basic pulse as 0/16 to 15/16 with a resolution of 1/16. The lower 4 bits specify how many extra pulses are to be added within the conversion period comprising 16 basic pulses. Thus, a specification of 0/256 to 255/256 is possible for 0/1 ratios within the conversion period. For 256/256 (100%) output, port output should be used. PWDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. 9.2.3 PWM Data Polarity Registers A and B (PWDPRA and PWDPRB) PWDPRA Bit Initial value Read/Write PWDPRB Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OS15 0 R/W 6 OS14 0 R/W 5 OS13 0 R/W 4 OS12 0 R/W 3 OS11 0 R/W 2 OS10 0 R/W 1 OS9 0 R/W 0 OS8 0 R/W 7 OS7 0 R/W 6 OS6 0 R/W 5 OS5 0 R/W 4 OS4 0 R/W 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W Each PWDPR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the polarity of the PWM output. Bits OS0 to OS15 correspond to outputs PW0 to PW15. 222 PWDPR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. OS 0 1 Description PWM direct output (PWDR value corresponds to high width of output) PWM inverted output (PWDR value corresponds to low width of output) (Initial value) 9.2.4 PWM Output Enable Registers A and B (PWOERA and PWOERB) PWOERA Bit Initial value Read/Write PWOERB Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OE15 0 R/W 6 OE14 0 R/W 5 OE13 0 R/W 4 OE12 0 R/W 3 OE11 0 R/W 2 OE10 0 R/W 1 OE9 0 R/W 0 OE8 0 R/W 7 OE7 0 R/W 6 OE6 0 R/W 5 OE5 0 R/W 4 OE4 0 R/W 3 OE3 0 R/W 2 OE2 0 R/W 1 OE1 0 R/W 0 OE0 0 R/W Each PWOER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that switches between PWM output and port output. Bits OE15 to OE0 correspond to outputs PW15 to PW0. To set a pin in the output state, a setting in the port direction register is also necessary. Bits P17DDR to P10DDR correspond to outputs PW7 to PW0, and bits P27DDR to P20DDR correspond to outputs PW15 to PW8. PWOER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. DDR 0 OE 0 1 1 0 1 Description Port input Port input Port output or PWM 256/256 output PWM output (0 to 255/256 output) (Initial value) 223 9.2.5 Bit Peripheral Clock Select Register (PCSR) 7 -- 0 -- 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 -- 0 -- 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 -- 0 -- PWCKB PWCKA Initial value Read/Write PCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the PWM timer input clock. PCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 3--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 2 and 1--PWM Clock Select (PWCKB, PWCKA): Together with bits PWCKE and PWCKS in PWSL, these bits select the internal clock input to TCNT in the PWM timer. For details, see section 9.2.1, PWM Register Select (PWSL). Bit 0--Reserved: Do not set this bit to 1. 9.2.6 Bit Initial value Read/Write Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that specifies the input/output direction and PWM output for each pin of port 1 on a bit-by-bit basis. Port 1 pins are multiplexed with pins PW0 to PW7. The bit corresponding to a pin to be used for PWM output should be set to 1. For details on P1DDR, see section 8.2, Port 1. 224 9.2.7 Bit Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR) 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Initial value Read/Write P2DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that specifies the input/output direction and PWM output for each pin of port J on a bit-by-bit basis. Port 2 pins are multiplexed with pins PW8 to PW15. The bit corresponding to a pin to be used for PWM output should be set to 1. For details on P2DDR, see section 8.3, Port 2. 9.2.8 Bit Initial value Read/Write Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) 7 P17DR 0 R/W 6 P16DR 0 R/W 5 P15DR 0 R/W 4 P14DR 0 R/W 3 P13DR 0 R/W 2 P12DR 0 R/W 1 P11DR 0 R/W 0 P10DR 0 R/W P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to fix PWM output at 1 (when OS = 0) or 0 (when OS = 1). For details on P1DR, see section 8.2, Port 1. 9.2.9 Bit Initial value Read/Write Port 2 Data Register (P2DR) 7 P27DR 0 R/W 6 P26DR 0 R/W 5 P25DR 0 R/W 4 P24DR 0 R/W 3 P23DR 0 R/W 2 P22DR 0 R/W 1 P21DR 0 R/W 0 P20DR 0 R/W P2DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to fix PWM output at 1 (when OS = 0) or 0 (when OS = 1). For details on P2DR, see section 8.3, Port 2. 225 9.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTP11 bit is set to 1, 8-bit PWM timer operation is halted and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 21.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 3--Module Stop (MSTP11): Specifies PWM module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 3 MSTP11 0 1 Description PWM module stop mode is cleared PWM module stop mode is set (Initial value) 226 9.3 9.3.1 Operation Correspondence between PWM Data Register Contents and Output Waveform The upper 4 bits of PWDR specify the duty cycle of the basic pulse as 0/16 to 15/16 with a resolution of 1/16, as shown in table 9.4. Table 9.4 Duty Cycle of Basic Pulse Basic Pulse Waveform (Internal) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A BC D E F 0 Upper 6 Bits 000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 . . . 111000 111001 111010 111011 111100 111101 111110 111111 227 The lower 4 bits of PWDR specify the position of pulses added to the 16 basic pulses, as shown in table 9.5. An additional pulse consists of a high period (when OS = 0) with a width equal to the resolution, added before the rising edge of a basic pulse. When the upper 4 bits of PWDR are 0000, there is no rising edge of the basic pulse, but the timing for adding pulses is the same. Table 9.5 Position of Pulses Added to Basic Pulses Basic Pulse No. Lower 4 Bits 0 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No additional pulse Resolution width Additional pulse provided Additional pulse Figure 9.2 Example of Additional Pulse Timing (When Upper 4 Bits of PWDR = 1000) 228 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have an on-chip 14-bit pulse-width modulator (PWM) with two output channels. Each channel can be connected to an external low-pass filter to operate as a 14-bit D/A converter. Both channels share the same counter (DACNT) and control register (DACR). 10.1.1 Features The features of the 14-bit PWM D/A are listed below. * The pulse is subdivided into multiple base cycles to reduce ripple. * Two resolution settings and two base cycle settings are available The resolution can be set equal to one or two system clock cycles. The base cycle can be set equal to T x 64 or T x 256, where T is the resolution. * Four operating rates The two resolution settings and two base cycle settings combine to give a selection of four operating rates. 229 10.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of the PWM D/A module. Internal clock o o/2 Clock selection Clock Basic cycle compare-match A PWX0 PWX1 Fine-adjustment pulse addition A Basic cycle compare-match B Fine-adjustment pulse addition B Control logic Comparator B DADRB Comparator A DADRA Bus interface Internal data bus Basic cycle overflow DACNT DACR Module data bus Legend: DACR: DADRA: DADRB: DACNT: PWM D/A control register ( 6 bits) PWM D/A data register A (15 bits) PWM D/A data register B (15 bits) PWM D/A counter (14 bits) Figure 10.1 PWM D/A Block Diagram 10.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 10.1 lists the pins used by the PWM D/A module. Table 10.1 Input and Output Pins Channel A B Name PWM output pin 0 PWM output pin 1 Abbr. PWX0 PWX1 I/O Output Output Function PWM output, channel A PWM output, channel B 230 10.1.4 Register Configuration Table 10.2 lists the registers of the PWM D/A module. Table 10.2 Register Configuration Name PWM D/A control register PWM D/A data register A high PWM D/A data register A low PWM D/A data register B high PWM D/A data register B low PWM D/A counter high PWM D/A counter low Module stop control register Abbreviation DACR DADRAH DADRAL DADRBH DADRBL DACNTH DACNTL MSTPCRH MSTPCRL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value H'30 H'FF H'FF H'FF H'FF H'00 H'03 H'3F H'FF Address* 1 H'FFA0* 2 H'FFA0* 2 H'FFA1* 2 H'FFA6* 2 H'FFA7* 2 H'FFA6* 2 H'FFA7* 2 H'FF86 H'FF87 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. The 14-bit PWM timer registers are assigned to the same addresses as other registers. Register selection is performed with the IICE bit in the serial/timer control register (STCR). DADRAH and DACR, and DADRB and DACNT, have the same address. Switching is performed with the REGS bit in DACNT or DADRB. 10.2 10.2.1 Register Descriptions PWM D/A Counter (DACNT) DACNTH DACNTL 10 2 9 1 8 0 7 8 6 9 5 10 4 11 3 12 2 13 1 -- 0 -- Bit (CPU) BIT (Counter) Initial value Read/Write 15 7 14 6 13 5 12 4 11 3 -- REGS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 -- 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W DACNT is a 14-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an input clock pulse. The input clock is selected by the clock select bit (CKS) in DACR. The CPU can read and write the DACNT value, but since DACNT is a 16-bit register, data transfers between it and the CPU are performed using a temporary register (TEMP). See section 10.3, Bus Master Interface, for details. 231 DACNT functions as the time base for both PWM D/A channels. When a channel operates with 14-bit precision, it uses all DACNT bits. When a channel operates with 12-bit precision, it uses the lower 12 (counter) bits and ignores the upper two (counter) bits. DACNT is initialized to H'0003 by a reset, in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode, and by the PWME bit. Bit 1 of DACNTL (CPU) is not used, and is always read as 1. DACNTL Bit 0--Register Select (REGS): DADRA and DACR, and DADRB and DACNT, are located at the same addresses. The REGS bit specifies which registers can be accessed. The REGS bit can be accessed regardless of whether DADRB or DACNT is selected. Bit 0 REGS 0 1 Description DADRA and DADRB can be accessed DACR and DACNT can be accessed (Initial value) 10.2.2 D/A Data Registers A and B (DADRA and DADRB) DADRH DADRL 10 8 9 7 8 6 7 5 6 4 5 3 4 2 3 1 2 0 1 -- 0 -- -- 1 -- Bit (CPU) Bit (Data) DADRA Initial value Read/Write DADRB Initial value Read/Write 15 13 14 12 13 11 12 10 11 9 DA13 DA12 DA11 DA10 DA9 DA8 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W DA13 DA12 DA11 DA10 DA9 DA8 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS REGS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W There are two 16-bit readable/writable D/A data registers: DADRA and DADRB. DADRA corresponds to PWM D/A channel A, and DADRB to PWM D/A channel B. The CPU can read and write the PWM D/A data register values, but since DADRA and DADRB are 16-bit registers, data transfers between them and the CPU are performed using a temporary register (TEMP). See section 10.3, Bus Master Interface, for details. The least significant (CPU) bit of DADRA is not used and is always read as 1. DADR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. 232 Bits 15 to 3--PWM D/A Data 13 to 0 (DA13 to DA0): The digital value to be converted to an analog value is set in the upper 14 bits of the PWM D/A data register. In each base cycle, the DACNT value is continually compared with these upper 14 bits to determine the duty cycle of the output waveform, and to decide whether to output a fineadjustment pulse equal in width to the resolution. To enable this operation, the data register must be set within a range that depends on the carrier frequency select bit (CFS). If the DADR value is outside this range, the PWM output is held constant. A channel can be operated with 12-bit precision by keeping the two lowest data bits (DA0 and DA1) cleared to 0 and writing the data to be converted in the upper 12 bits. The two lowest data bits correspond to the two highest counter (DACNT) bits. Bit 1--Carrier Frequency Select (CFS) Bit 1 CFS 0 1 Description Base cycle = resolution (T) x 64 DADR range = H'0401 to H'FFFD Base cycle = resolution (T) x 256 DADR range = H'0103 to H'FFFF (Initial value) DADRA Bit 0--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. DADRB Bit 0--Register Select (REGS): DADRA and DACR, and DADRB and DACNT, are located at the same addresses. The REGS bit specifies which registers can be accessed. The REGS bit can be accessed regardless of whether DADRB or DACNT is selected. Bit 0 REGS 0 1 Description DADRA and DADRB can be accessed DACR and DACNT can be accessed (Initial value) 10.2.3 Bit PWM D/A Control Register (DACR) 7 TEST 0 R/W 6 PWME 0 R/W 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 OEB 0 R/W 2 OEA 0 R/W 1 OS 0 R/W 0 CKS 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write 233 DACR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects test mode, enables the PWM outputs, and selects the output phase and operating speed. DACR is initialized to H'30 by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7--Test Mode (TEST): Selects test mode, which is used in testing the chip. Normally this bit should be cleared to 0. Bit 7 TEST 0 1 Description PWM (D/A) in user state: normal operation PWM (D/A) in test state: correct conversion results unobtainable (Initial value) Bit 6--PWM Enable (PWME): Starts or stops the PWM D/A counter (DACNT). Bit 6 PWME 0 1 Description DACNT operates as a 14-bit up-counter DACNT halts at H'0003 (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 3--Output Enable B (OEB): Enables or disables output on PWM D/A channel B. Bit 3 OEB 0 1 Description PWM (D/A) channel B output (at the PWX1 pin) is disabled PWM (D/A) channel B output (at the PWX1 pin) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 2--Output Enable A (OEA): Enables or disables output on PWM D/A channel A. Bit 2 OEA 0 1 Description PWM (D/A) channel A output (at the PWX0 pin) is disabled PWM (D/A) channel A output (at the PWX0 pin) is enabled (Initial value) 234 Bit 1--Output Select (OS): Selects the phase of the PWM D/A output. Bit 1 OS 0 1 Description Direct PWM output Inverted PWM output (Initial value) Bit 0--Clock Select (CKS): Selects the PWM D/A resolution. If the system clock (o) frequency is 10 MHz, resolutions of 100 ns and 200 ns can be selected. Bit 0 CKS 0 1 Description Operates at resolution (T) = system clock cycle time (tcyc ) Operates at resolution (T) = system clock cycle time (tcyc ) x 2 (Initial value) 10.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTP11 bit is set to 1, 14-bit PWM timer operation is halted and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 21.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 3--Module Stop (MSTP11): Specifies PWMX module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 3 MSTP11 0 1 Description PWMX module stop mode is cleared PWMX module stop mode is set (Initial value) 235 10.3 Bus Master Interface DACNT, DADRA, and DADRB are 16-bit registers. The data bus linking the bus master and the on-chip supporting modules, however, is only 8 bits wide. When the bus master accesses these registers, it therefore uses an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP). These registers are written and read as follows (taking the example of the CPU interface). * Write When the upper byte is written, the upper-byte write data is stored in TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is written, the lower-byte write data and TEMP value are combined, and the combined 16-bit value is written in the register. * Read When the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is transferred to the CPU and the lower-byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is read, the lower-byte value in TEMP is transferred to the CPU. These registers should always be accessed 16 bits at a time using an MOV instruction (by word access or two consecutive byte accesses), and the upper byte should always be accessed before the lower byte. Correct data will not be transferred if only the upper byte or only the lower byte is accessed. Also note that a bit manipulation instruction cannot be used to access these registers. Figure 10.2 shows the data flow for access to DACNT. The other registers are accessed similarly. Example 1: Write to DACNT MOV.W R0, @DACNT ; Write R0 contents to DACNT Example 2: Read DADRA MOV.W @DADRA, R0 ; Copy contents of DADRA to R0 Table 10.3 Read and Write Access Methods for 16-Bit Registers Read Register Name DADRA and DADRB DACNT Word Yes Yes Byte Yes x Word Yes Yes Write Byte x x Notes: Yes: Permitted type of access. Word access includes successive byte accesses to the upper byte (first) and lower byte (second). x: This type of access may give incorrect results. 236 Upper-Byte Write Bus interface Module data bus CPU (H'AA) Upper byte TEMP (H'AA) DACNTH ( ) DACNTL ( ) Lower-Byte Write Bus interface Module data bus CPU (H'57) Lower byte TEMP (H'AA) DACNTH (H'AA) DACNTL (H'57) Figure 10.2 (a) Access to DACNT (CPU Writes H'AA57 to DACNT) 237 Upper-Byte Read Bus interface Module data bus CPU (H'AA) Upper byte TEMP (H'57) DACNTH (H'AA) DACNTL (H'57) Lower-Byte Read Bus interface Module data bus CPU (H'57) Lower byte TEMP (H'57) DACNTH ( ) DACNTL ( ) Figure 10.2 (b) Access to DACNT (CPU Reads H'AA57 from DACNT) 238 10.4 Operation A PWM waveform like the one shown in figure 10.3 is output from the PWMX pin. When OS = 0, the value in DADR corresponds to the total width (TL ) of the low (0) pulses output in one conversion cycle (256 pulses when CFS = 0, 64 pulses when CFS = 1). When OS = 1, the output waveform is inverted and the DADR value corresponds to the total width (TH) of the high (1) output pulses. Figure 10.4 shows the types of waveform output available. 1 conversion cycle (T x 214 (= 16384)) tf Basic cycle (T x 64 or T x 256) tL T: Resolution TL = tLn (when OS = 0) n=1 m (When CFS = 0, m = 256; when CFS = 1, m = 64) Figure 10.3 PWM D/A Operation Table 10.4 summarizes the relationships of the CKS, CFS, and OS bit settings to the resolution, base cycle, and conversion cycle. The PWM output remains flat unless DADR contains at least a certain minimum value. Table 10.4 indicates the range of DADR settings that give an output waveform like the one in figure 10.3, and lists the conversion cycle length when low-order DADR bits are kept cleared to 0, reducing the conversion precision to 12 bits or 10 bits. 239 Table 10.4 Settings and Operation (Examples when o = 10 MHz) Fixed DADR Bits Bit Data Resolution Base Conversion TL (if OS = 0) CKS T (s) CFS Cycle (s) Cycle (s) TH (if OS = 1) 0 0.1 0 6.4 1638.4 Precision Conversion (Bits) 3 2 1 0 Cycle* (s) 1638.4 1. Always low (or high) 14 (DADR = H'0001 to H'03FD) 2. (Data value) x T (DADR = H'0401 to H'FFFD) 10 12 0 0 409.6 0 0 0 0 102.4 1638.4 1 25.6 1638.4 1. Always low (or high) 14 (DADR = H'0003 to H'00FF) 2. (Data value) x T (DADR = H'0103 to H'FFFF) 10 12 0 0 409.6 0 0 0 0 102.4 3276.8 1 0.2 0 12.8 3276.8 1. Always low (or high) 14 (DADR = H'0001 to H'03FD) 2. (Data value) x T (DADR = H'0401 to H'FFFD) 10 12 0 0 819.2 0 0 0 0 204.8 3276.8 1 51.2 3276.8 1. Always low (or high) 14 (DADR = H'0003 to H'00FF) 2. (Data value) x T (DADR = H'0103 to H'FFFF) 10 12 0 0 819.2 0 0 0 0 204.8 Note: * This column indicates the conversion cycle when specific DADR bits are fixed. 240 1. OS = 0 (DADR corresponds to TL) a. CFS = 0 [base cycle = resolution (T) x 64] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tf2 tf255 tf256 tL1 tL2 tL3 tL255 tL256 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = * * * = tf255 = tf256 = T x 64 tL1 + tL2 + tL3 + * * * + tL255 + tL256 = TL Figure 10.4 (1) Output Waveform b. CFS = 1 [base cycle = resolution (T) x 256] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tf2 tf63 tf64 tL1 tL2 tL3 tL63 tL64 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = * * * = tf63 = tf64 = T x 256 tL1 + tL2 + tL3 + * * * + tL63 + tL64 = TL Figure 10.4 (2) Output Waveform 241 2. OS = 1 (DADR corresponds to TH) a. CFS = 0 [base cycle = resolution (T) x 64] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tf2 tf255 tf256 tH1 tH2 tH3 tH255 tH256 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = * * * = tf255 = tf256 = T x 64 tH1 + tH2 + tH3 + * * * + tH255 + tH256 = TH Figure 10.4 (3) Output Waveform b. CFS = 1 [base cycle = resolution (T) x 256] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tf2 tf63 tf64 tH1 tH2 tH3 tH63 tH64 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = * * * = tf63 = tf64 = T x 256 tH1 + tH2 + tH3 + * * * + tH63 + tH64 = TH Figure 10.4 (4) Output Waveform 242 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have a single-channel on-chip 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) module that uses a 16-bit free-running counter as a time base. Applications of the FRT module include rectangular-wave output (up to two independent waveforms), input pulse width measurement, and measurement of external clock periods. 11.1.1 Features The features of the free-running timer module are listed below. * Selection of four clock sources The free-running counter can be driven by an internal clock source (o/2, o/8, or o/32), or an external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter). * Two independent comparators Each comparator can generate an independent waveform. * Four input capture channels The current count can be captured on the rising or falling edge (selectable) of an input signal. The four input capture registers can be used separately, or in a buffer mode. * Counter can be cleared under program control The free-running counters can be cleared on compare-match A. * Seven independent interrupts Two compare-match interrupts, four input capture interrupts, and one overflow interrupt can be requested independently. * Special functions provided by automatic addition function The contents of OCRAR and OCRAF can be added to the contents of OCRA automatically, enabling a periodic waveform to be generated without software intervention. The contents of ICRD can be added automatically to the contents of OCRDM x 2, enabling input capture operations in this interval to be restricted. 243 11.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the free-running timer. External clock source Internal clock sources o/2 o/8 o/32 Clock select Clock Comparematch A FTOA FTOB Overflow Clear Comparator B OCRA R/F (H/L) FTCI + OCRA (H/L) Comparator A Bus interface FRC (H/L) Internal data bus Comparematch B OCRB (H/L) Control logic FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID Comparator M Compare-match M OCRDM L TCSR TIER TCR TOCR ICIA ICIB ICIC ICID OCIA OCIB FOVI Legend: OCRA, B: FRC: ICRA, B, C, D: TCSR: Input capture ICRA (H/L) ICRB (H/L) ICRC (H/L) ICRD (H/L) + x1 x2 Interrupt signals Output compare register A, B (16 bits) Free-running counter (16 bits) Input capture register A, B, C, D (16 bits) Timer control/status register (8 bits) TIER: Timer interrupt enable register (8 bits) TCR: Timer control register (8 bits) TOCR: Timer output compare control register (8 bits) Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 244 Module data bus 11.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 11.1 lists the input and output pins of the free-running timer module. Table 11.1 Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module Name Counter clock input Output compare A Output compare B Input capture A Input capture B Input capture C Input capture D Abbreviation FTCI FTOA FTOB FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID I/O Input Output Output Input Input Input Input Function FRC counter clock input Output compare A output Output compare B output Input capture A input Input capture B input Input capture C input Input capture D input 245 11.1.4 Register Configuration Table 11.2 lists the registers of the free-running timer module. Table 11.2 Register Configuration Name Timer interrupt enable register Timer control/status register Free-running counter Output compare register A Output compare register B Timer control register Timer output compare control register Input capture register A Input capture register B Input capture register C Input capture register D Output compare register AR Output compare register AF Output compare register DM Module stop control register Abbreviation TIER TCSR FRC OCRA OCRB TCR TOCR ICRA ICRB ICRC ICRD OCRAR OCRAF OCRDM MSTPCRH MSTPCRL R/W R/W R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 Initial Value H'01 H'00 H'0000 H'FFFF H'FFFF H'00 H'00 H'0000 H'0000 H'0000 H'0000 H'FFFF H'FFFF H'0000 H'3F H'FF Address* 1 H'FF90 H'FF91 H'FF92 H'FF94* 3 H'FF94* 3 H'FF96 H'FF97 H'FF98* 4 H'FF9A* 4 H'FF9C* 4 H'FF9E H'FF98* 4 H'FF9A* 4 H'FF9C* 4 H'FF86 H'FF87 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Bits 7 to 1 are read-only; only 0 can be written to clear the flags. Bit 0 is readable/writable. 3. OCRA and OCRB share the same address. Access is controlled by the OCRS bit in TOCR. 4. ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC share the same addresses with OCRAR, OCRAF, and OCRDM. Access is controlled by the ICRS bit in TOCR. 246 11.2 11.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Free-Running Counter (FRC) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W FRC is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an internal pulse generated from a clock source. The clock source is selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR. FRC can also be cleared by compare-match A. When FRC overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1. FRC is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 11.2.2 Bit Initial value Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA, OCRB) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/ Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W OCRA and OCRB are 16-bit readable/writable registers, the contents of which are continually compared with the value in the FRC. When a match is detected, the corresponding output compare flags (OCFA or OCFB) is set in TCSR. In addition, if the output enable bit (OEA or OEB) in TOCR is set to 1, when OCR and FRC values match, the logic level selected by the output level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in TOCR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB). Following a reset, the FTOA and FTOB output levels are 0 until the first compare-match. OCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 247 11.2.3 Bit Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R There are four input capture registers, A to D, each of which is a 16-bit read-only register. When the rising or falling edge of the signal at an input capture input pin (FTIA to FTID) is detected, the current FRC value is copied to the corresponding input capture register (ICRA to ICRD). At the same time, the corresponding input capture flag (ICFA to ICFD) in TCSR is set to 1. The input capture edge is selected by the input edge select bits (IEDGA to IEDGD) in TCR. ICRC and ICRD can be used as ICRA and ICRB buffer registers, respectively, and made to perform buffer operations, by means of buffer enable bits A and B (BUFEA, BUFEB) in TCR. Figure 11.2 shows the connections when ICRC is specified as the ICRA buffer register (BUFEA = 1). When ICRC is used as the ICRA buffer, both rising and falling edges can be specified as transitions of the external input signal by setting IEDGA IEDGC. When IEDGA = IEDGC, either the rising or falling edge is designated. See table 11.3. Note: The FRC contents are transferred to the input capture register regardless of the value of the input capture flag (ICF). IEDGA BUFEA IEDGC FTIA Edge detect and capture signal generating circuit ICRC ICRA FRC Figure 11.2 Input Capture Buffering (Example) 248 Table 11.3 Buffered Input Capture Edge Selection (Example) IEDGA 0 IEDGC 0 1 1 0 1 Captured on rising edge of input capture A (FTIA) Description Captured on falling edge of input capture A (FTIA) (Initial value) Captured on both rising and falling edges of input capture A (FTIA) To ensure input capture, the width of the input capture pulse should be at least 1.5 system clock periods (1.5o). When triggering is enabled on both edges, the input capture pulse width should be at least 2.5 system clock periods (2.5o). ICR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 11.2.4 Bit Initial value Output Compare Registers AR and AF (OCRAR, OCRAF) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W OCRAR and OCRAF are 16-bit readable/writable registers. When the OCRAMS bit in TOCR is set to 1, the operation of OCRA is changed to include the use of OCRAR and OCRAF. The contents of OCRAR and OCRAF are automatically added alternately to OCRA, and the result is written to OCRA. The write operation is performed on the occurrence of compare-match A. In the first compare-match A after the OCRAMS bit is set to 1, OCRAF is added. The operation due to compare-match A varies according to whether the compare-match follows addition of OCRAR or OCRAF. The value of the OLVLA bit in TOCR is ignored, and 1 is output on a compare-match A following addition of OCRAF, while 0 is output on a compare-match A following addition of OCRAR. When the OCRA automatically addition function is used, do not set internal clock o/2 as the FRC counter input clock together with an OCRAR (or OCRAF) value of H'0001 or less. OCRAR and OCRAF are initialized to H'FFFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 249 11.2.5 Bit Output Compare Register DM (OCRDM) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value Read/Write 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W OCRDM is a 16-bit readable/writable register in which the upper 8 bits are fixed at H'00. When the ICRDMS bit in TOCR is set to 1 and the contents of OCRDM are other than H'0000, the operation of ICRD is changed to include the use of OCRDM. The point at which input capture D occurs is taken as the start of a mask interval. Next, twice the contents of OCRDM is added to the contents of ICRD, and the result is compared with the FRC value. The point at which the values match is taken as the end of the mask interval. New input capture D events are disabled during the mask interval. A mask interval is not generated when the ICRDMS bit is set to 1 and the contents of OCRDM are H'0000. OCRDM is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 11.2.6 Bit Initial value Read/Write Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) 7 ICIAE 0 R/W 6 ICIBE 0 R/W 5 ICICE 0 R/W 4 ICIDE 0 R/W 3 OCIAE 0 R/W 2 OCIBE 0 R/W 1 OVIE 0 R/W 0 -- 1 -- TIER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables and disables interrupts. TIER is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Input Capture Interrupt A Enable (ICIAE): Selects whether to request input capture interrupt A (ICIA) when input capture flag A (ICFA) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 7 ICIAE 0 1 Description Input capture interrupt request A (ICIA) is disabled Input capture interrupt request A (ICIA) is enabled (Initial value) 250 Bit 6--Input Capture Interrupt B Enable (ICIBE): Selects whether to request input capture interrupt B (ICIB) when input capture flag B (ICFB) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 6 ICIBE 0 1 Description Input capture interrupt request B (ICIB) is disabled Input capture interrupt request B (ICIB) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 5--Input Capture Interrupt C Enable (ICICE): Selects whether to request input capture interrupt C (ICIC) when input capture flag C (ICFC) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 5 ICICE 0 1 Description Input capture interrupt request C (ICIC) is disabled Input capture interrupt request C (ICIC) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 4--Input Capture Interrupt D Enable (ICIDE): Selects whether to request input capture interrupt D (ICID) when input capture flag D (ICFD) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 4 ICIDE 0 1 Description Input capture interrupt request D (ICID) is disabled Input capture interrupt request D (ICID) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 3--Output Compare Interrupt A Enable (OCIAE): Selects whether to request output compare interrupt A (OCIA) when output compare flag A (OCFA) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 3 OCIAE 0 1 Description Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is disabled Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 2--Output Compare Interrupt B Enable (OCIBE): Selects whether to request output compare interrupt B (OCIB) when output compare flag B (OCFB) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 2 OCIBE 0 1 Description Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is disabled Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is enabled 251 (Initial value) Bit 1--Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Selects whether to request a free-running timer overflow interrupt (FOVI) when the timer overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 1 OVIE 0 1 Description Timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is disabled Timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 0--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. 11.2.7 Bit Initial value Read/Write Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) 7 ICFA 0 R/(W)* 6 ICFB 0 R/(W)* 5 ICFC 0 R/(W)* 4 ICFD 0 R/(W)* 3 OCFA 0 R/(W)* 2 OCFB 0 R/(W)* 1 OVF 0 R/(W)* 0 CCLRA 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 1 to clear these flags. TCSR is an 8-bit register used for counter clear selection and control of interrupt request signals. TCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Timing is described in section 11.3, Operation. Bit 7--Input Capture Flag A (ICFA): This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRA by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEA = 1, ICFA indicates that the old ICRA value has been moved into ICRC and the new FRC value has been transferred to ICRA. ICFA must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 7 ICFA 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read ICFA when ICFA = 1, then write 0 in ICFA 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be transferred to ICRA (Initial value) 252 Bit 6--Input Capture Flag B (ICFB): This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRB by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEB = 1, ICFB indicates that the old ICRB value has been moved into ICRD and the new FRC value has been transferred to ICRB. ICFB must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 6 ICFB 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read ICFB when ICFB = 1, then write 0 in ICFB 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be transferred to ICRB (Initial value) Bit 5--Input Capture Flag C (ICFC): This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRC by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEA = 1, on occurrence of the signal transition in FTIC (input capture signal) specified by the IEDGC bit, ICFC is set but data is not transferred to ICRC. Therefore, in buffer operation, ICFC can be used as an external interrupt signal (by setting the ICICE bit to 1). ICFC must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 5 ICFC 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read ICFC when ICFC = 1, then write 0 in ICFC 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal is received (Initial value) Bit 4--Input Capture Flag D (ICFD): This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRD by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEB = 1, on occurrence of the signal transition in FTID (input capture signal) specified by the IEDGD bit, ICFD is set but data is not transferred to ICRD. Therefore, in buffer operation, ICFD can be used as an external interrupt by setting the ICIDE bit to 1. ICFD must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. 253 Bit 4 ICFD 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read ICFD when ICFD = 1, then write 0 in ICFD 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal is received (Initial value) Bit 3--Output Compare Flag A (OCFA): This status flag indicates that the FRC value matches the OCRA value. This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 3 OCFA 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read OCFA when OCFA = 1, then write 0 in OCFA 1 [Setting condition] When FRC = OCRA (Initial value) Bit 2--Output Compare Flag B (OCFB): This status flag indicates that the FRC value matches the OCRB value. This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 2 OCFB 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read OCFB when OCFB = 1, then write 0 in OCFB 1 [Setting condition] When FRC = OCRB (Initial value) Bit 1--Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag indicates that the FRC has overflowed (changed from H'FFFF to H'0000). This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. 254 Bit 1 OVF 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] When FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000 (Initial value) Bit 0--Counter Clear A (CCLRA): This bit selects whether the FRC is to be cleared at comparematch A (when the FRC and OCRA values match). Bit 0 CCLRA 0 1 Description FRC clearing is disabled FRC is cleared at compare-match A (Initial value) 11.2.8 Bit Timer Control Register (TCR) 7 IEDGA 0 R/W 6 IEDGB 0 R/W 5 IEDGC 0 R/W 4 IEDGD 0 R/W 3 BUFEA 0 R/W 2 BUFEB 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture signals, enables the input capture buffer mode, and selects the FRC clock source. TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode Bit 7--Input Edge Select A (IEDGA): Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture A signal (FTIA). Bit 7 IEDGA 0 1 Description Capture on the falling edge of FTIA Capture on the rising edge of FTIA (Initial value) Bit 6--Input Edge Select B (IEDGB): Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture B signal (FTIB). 255 Bit 6 IEDGB 0 1 Description Capture on the falling edge of FTIB Capture on the rising edge of FTIB (Initial value) Bit 5--Input Edge Select C (IEDGC): Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture C signal (FTIC). Bit 5 IEDGC 0 1 Description Capture on the falling edge of FTIC Capture on the rising edge of FTIC (Initial value) Bit 4--Input Edge Select D (IEDGD): Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture D signal (FTID). Bit 4 IEDGD 0 1 Description Capture on the falling edge of FTID Capture on the rising edge of FTID (Initial value) Bit 3--Buffer Enable A (BUFEA): Selects whether ICRC is to be used as a buffer register for ICRA. Bit 3 BUFEA 0 1 Description ICRC is not used as a buffer register for input capture A ICRC is used as a buffer register for input capture A (Initial value) Bit 2--Buffer Enable B (BUFEB): Selects whether ICRD is to be used as a buffer register for ICRB. Bit 2 BUFEB 0 1 Description ICRD is not used as a buffer register for input capture B ICRD is used as a buffer register for input capture B (Initial value) 256 Bits 1 and 0--Clock Select (CKS1, CKS0): Select external clock input or one of three internal clock sources for the FRC. External clock pulses are counted on the rising edge of signals input to the external clock input pin (FTCI). Bit 1 CKS1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description o/2 internal clock source o/8 internal clock source o/32 internal clock source External clock source (rising edge) (Initial value) 11.2.9 Bit Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR) 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 ICRS 0 R/W 4 OCRS 0 R/W 3 OEA 0 R/W 2 OEB 0 R/W 1 OLVLA 0 R/W 0 OLVLB 0 R/W ICRDMS OCRAMS Initial value Read/Write TOCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables output from the output compare pins, selects the output levels, switches access between output compare registers A and B, controls the ICRD and OCRA operating mode, and switches access to input capture registers A, B, and C. TOCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Input Capture D Mode Select (ICRDMS): Specifies whether ICRD is used in the normal operating mode or in the operating mode using OCRDM. Bit 7 ICRDMS 0 1 Description The normal operating mode is specified for ICRD The operating mode using OCRDM is specified for ICRD (Initial value) Bit 6--Output Compare A Mode Select (OCRAMS): Specifies whether OCRA is used in the normal operating mode or in the operating mode using OCRAR and OCRAF. 257 Bit 6 OCRAMS 0 1 Description The normal operating mode is specified for OCRA The operating mode using OCRAR and OCRAF is specified for OCRA (Initial value) Bit 5--Input Capture Register Select (ICRS): The same addresses are shared by ICRA and OCRAR, by ICRB and OCRAF, and by ICRC and OCRDM. The ICRS bit determines which registers are selected when the shared addresses are read or written to. The operation of ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC is not affected. Bit 5 ICRS 0 1 Description The ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC registers are selected The OCRAR, OCRAF, and OCRDM registers are selected (Initial value) Bit 4--Output Compare Register Select (OCRS): OCRA and OCRB share the same address. When this address is accessed, the OCRS bit selects which register is accessed. This bit does not affect the operation of OCRA or OCRB. Bit 4 OCRS 0 1 Description The OCRA register is selected The OCRB register is selected (Initial value) Bit 3--Output Enable A (OEA): Enables or disables output of the output compare A signal (FTOA). Bit 3 OEA 0 1 Description Output compare A output is disabled Output compare A output is enabled (Initial value) Bit 2--Output Enable B (OEB): Enables or disables output of the output compare B signal (FTOB). 258 Bit 2 OEB 0 1 Description Output compare B output is disabled Output compare B output is enabled (Initial value) Bit 1--Output Level A (OLVLA): Selects the logic level to be output at the FTOA pin in response to compare-match A (signal indicating a match between the FRC and OCRA values). When the OCRAMS bit is 1, this bit is ignored. Bit 1 OLVLA 0 1 Description 0 output at compare-match A 1 output at compare-match A (Initial value) Bit 0--Output Level B (OLVLB): Selects the logic level to be output at the FTOB pin in response to compare-match B (signal indicating a match between the FRC and OCRB values). Bit 0 OLVLB 0 1 Description 0 output at compare-match B 1 output at compare-match B (Initial value) 11.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP13 bit is set to 1, FRT operation is stopped at the end of the bus cycle, and module stop mode is entered. For details, see section 21.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. 259 MSTPCRH Bit 5--Module Stop (MSTP13): Specifies the FRT module stop mode. Bit 5 MSTPCRH 0 1 Description FRT module stop mode is cleared FRT module stop mode is set (Initial value) 11.3 11.3.1 Operation FRC Increment Timing FRC increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or external) clock source. Internal Clock: Any of three internal clocks (o/2, o/8, or o/32) created by division of the system clock (o) can be selected by making the appropriate setting in bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR. Figure 11.3 shows the increment timing. o Internal clock FRC input clock FRC N-1 N N+1 Figure 11.3 Increment Timing with Internal Clock Source External Clock: If external clock input is selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR, FRC increments on the rising edge of the external clock signal. The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clock (o) periods. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than 1.5 system clock periods. Figure 11.4 shows the increment timing. 260 o External clock input pin FRC input clock FRC N N+1 Figure 11.4 Increment Timing with External Clock Source 11.3.2 Output Compare Output Timing When a compare-match occurs, the logic level selected by the output level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in TOCR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB). Figure 11.5 shows the timing of this operation for compare-match A. o FRC N N+1 N N+1 OCRA Compare-match A signal N N Clear* OLVLA Output compare A output pin FTOA Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. Figure 11.5 Timing of Output Compare A Output 261 11.3.3 FRC Clear Timing FRC can be cleared when compare-match A occurs. Figure 11.6 shows the timing of this operation. o Compare-match A signal FRC N H'0000 Figure 11.6 Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A 11.3.4 Input Capture Input Timing Input Capture Input Timing: An internal input capture signal is generated from the rising or falling edge of the signal at the input capture pin, as selected by the corresponding IEDGx (x = A to D) bit in TCR. Figure 11.7 shows the usual input capture timing when the rising edge is selected (IEDGx = 1). o Input capture input pin Input capture signal Figure 11.7 Input Capture Signal Timing (Usual Case) If the upper byte of ICRA/B/C/D is being read when the corresponding input capture signal arrives, the internal input capture signal is delayed by one system clock (o) period. Figure 11.8 shows the timing for this case. 262 ICRA/B/C/D read cycle T1 o T2 Input capture input pin Input capture signal Figure 11.8 Input Capture Signal Timing (Input Capture Input when ICRA/B/C/D is Read) Buffered Input Capture Input Timing: ICRC and ICRD can operate as buffers for ICRA and ICRB. Figure 11.9 shows how input capture operates when ICRA and ICRC are used in buffer mode and IEDGA and IEDGC are set to different values (IEDGA = 0 and IEDGC = 1, or IEDG A = 1 and IEDGC = 0), so that input capture is performed on both the rising and falling edges of FTIA. o FTIA Input capture signal FRC n n+1 N N+1 ICRA M n n N ICRC m M M n Figure 11.9 Buffered Input Capture Timing (Usual Case) 263 When ICRC or ICRD is used as a buffer register, its input capture flag is set by the selected transition of its input capture signal. For example, if ICRC is used to buffer ICRA, when the edge transition selected by the IEDGC bit occurs on the FTIC input capture line, ICFC will be set, and if the ICIEC bit is set, an interrupt will be requested. The FRC value will not be transferred to ICRC, however. In buffered input capture, if the upper byte of either of the two registers to which data will be transferred (ICRA and ICRC, or ICRB and ICRD) is being read when the input signal arrives, input capture is delayed by one system clock (o) period. Figure 11.10 shows the timing when BUFEA = 1. Read cycle: CPU reads ICRA or ICRC T1 o FTIA T2 Input capture signal Figure 11.10 Buffered Input Capture Timing (Input Capture Input when ICRA or ICRC is Read) 11.3.5 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting The input capture flag ICFx (x = A, B, C, D) is set to 1 by the internal input capture signal. The FRC value is simultaneously transferred to the corresponding input capture register (ICRx). Figure 11.11 shows the timing of this operation. 264 o Input capture signal ICFA/B/C/D FRC N ICRA/B/C/D N Figure 11.11 Setting of Input Capture Flag (ICFA/B/C/D) 11.3.6 Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA, OCFB) The output compare flags are set to 1 by an internal compare-match signal generated when the FRC value matches the OCRA or OCRB value. This compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the two values match, just before FRC increments to a new value. Accordingly, when the FRC and OCR values match, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next period of the clock source. Figure 11.12 shows the timing of the setting of OCFA and OCFB. o FRC N N+1 OCRA or OCRB N Compare-match signal OCFA or OCFB Figure 11.12 Setting of Output Compare Flag (OCFA, OCFB) 265 11.3.7 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF) The FRC overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 when FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000). Figure 11.13 shows the timing of this operation. o FRC H'FFFF H'0000 Overflow signal OVF Figure 11.13 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) 11.3.8 Automatic Addition of OCRA and OCRAR/OCRAF When the OCRAMS bit in TOCR is set to 1, the contents of OCRAR and OCRAF are automatically added to OCRA alternately, and when an OCRA compare-match occurs a write to OCRA is performed. The OCRA write timing is shown in figure 11.14. o FRC N N+1 OCRA N N+A OCRAR, F Compare-match signal A Figure 11.14 OCRA Automatic Addition Timing 266 11.3.9 ICRD and OCRDM Mask Signal Generation When the ICRDMS bit in TOCR is set to 1 and the contents of OCRDM are other than H'0000, a signal that masks the ICRD input capture function is generated. The mask signal is set by the input capture signal. The mask signal setting timing is shown in figure 11.15. The mask signal is cleared by the sum of the ICRD contents and twice the OCRDM contents, and an FRC compare-match. The mask signal clearing timing is shown in figure 11.16. o Input capture signal Input capture mask signal Figure 11.15 Input Capture Mask Signal Setting Timing o FRC N N+1 ICRD + OCRDM x 2 Compare-match signal Input capture mask signal N Figure 11.16 Input Capture Mask Signal Clearing Timing 267 11.4 Interrupts The free-running timer can request seven interrupts (three types): input capture A to D (ICIA, ICIB, ICIC, ICID), output compare A and B (OCIA and OCIB), and overflow (FOVI). Each interrupt can be enabled or disabled by an enable bit in TIER. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt. Table 11.4 lists information about these interrupts. Table 11.4 Free-Running Timer Interrupts Interrupt ICIA ICIB ICIC ICID OCIA OCIB FOVI Description Requested by ICFA Requested by ICFB Requested by ICFC Requested by ICFD Requested by OCFA Requested by OCFB Requested by OVF DTC Activation Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Low Priority High 11.5 Sample Application In the example below, the free-running timer is used to generate pulse outputs with a 50% duty cycle and arbitrary phase relationship. The programming is as follows: * The CCLRA bit in TCSR is set to 1. * Each time a compare-match interrupt occurs, software inverts the corresponding output level bit in TOCR (OLVLA or OLVLB). FRC H'FFFF OCRA OCRB H'0000 FTOA Counter clear FTOB Figure 11.17 Pulse Output (Example) 268 11.6 Usage Notes Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the freerunning timer. Contention between FRC Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated during the state after an FRC write cycle, the clear signal takes priority and the write is not performed. Figure 11.18 shows this type of contention. FRC write cycle T1 T2 o Address FRC address Internal write signal Counter clear signal FRC N H'0000 Figure 11.18 FRC Write-Clear Contention 269 Contention between FRC Write and Increment: If an FRC increment pulse is generated during the state after an FRC write cycle, the write takes priority and FRC is not incremented. Figure 11.19 shows this type of contention. FRC write cycle T1 T2 o Address FRC address Internal write signal FRC input clock FRC N M Write data Figure 11.19 FRC Write-Increment Contention 270 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match: If a compare-match occurs during the state after an OCRA or OCRB write cycle, the write takes priority and the compare-match signal is inhibited. Figure 11.20 shows this type of contention. If automatic addition of OCRAR/OCRAF to OCRA is selected, and a compare-match occurs in the cycle following the OCRA, OCRAR, and OCRAF write cycle, the OCRA, OCRAR, and OCRAF write takes priority and the compare-match signal is inhibited. Consequently, the result of the automatic addition is not written to OCRA. The timing is shown in figure 11.21. OCRA or OCRB write cycle T1 T2 o Address OCR address Internal write signal FRC N N+1 OCR N M Write data Compare-match signal Inhibited Figure 11.20 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function Is Not Used) 271 o Address OCRAR (OCRAF) address Internal write signal OCRAR (OCRAF) Old Data Inhibited New Data Compare-match signal FRC N N+1 OCRA N No automatic addition, as compare-match signal is inhibited Figure 11.21 Contention between OCRAR/OCRAF Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function Is Used) Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation: When the internal clock is changed, the changeover may cause FRC to increment. This depends on the time at which the clock select bits (CKS1 and CKS0) are rewritten, as shown in table 11.5. When an internal clock is used, the FRC clock is generated on detection of the falling edge of the internal clock scaled from the system clock (o). If the clock is changed when the old source is high and the new source is low, as in case no. 3 in table 11.5, the changeover is regarded as a falling edge that triggers the FRC increment clock pulse. Switching between an internal and external clock can also cause FRC to increment. 272 Table 11.5 Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation Timing of Switchover by No. Means of CKS1 and CKS0 BitsFRC Operation 1 Switching from low to low Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock N+1 CKS bit rewrite FRC N 2 Switching from low to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock FRC N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite 3 Switching from high to low Clock before switchover Clock after switchover * FRC clock FRC N N+1 CKS bit rewrite N+2 4 Switching from high to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock FRC N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Note: * Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; FRC is incremented. 273 274 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series include an 8-bit timer module with two channels (TMR0 and TMR1). Each channel has an 8-bit counter (TCNT) and two time constant registers (TCORA and TCORB) that are constantly compared with the TCNT value to detect comparematches. The 8-bit timer module can be used as a multifunction timer in a variety of applications, such as generation of a rectangular-wave output with an arbitrary duty cycle. The H8S/2128 Series also has two similar 8-bit timer channels (TMRX and TMRY), and the H8S/2124 Series has one (TMRY). These channels can be used in a connected configuration using the timer connection function. TMRX and TMRY have greater input/output and interrupt function related restrictions than TMR0 and TMR1. 12.1.1 Features * Selection of clock sources TMR0, TMR1: The counter input clock can be selected from six internal clocks and an external clock (enabling use as an external event counter). TMRX, TMRY: The counter input clock can be selected from three internal clocks and an external clock (enabling use as an external event counter). * Selection of three ways to clear the counters The counters can be cleared on compare-match A or B, or by an external reset signal. * Timer output controlled by two compare-match signals The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by two independent compare-match signals, enabling the timer to be used for various applications, such as the generation of pulse output or PWM output with an arbitrary duty cycle. (Note: TMRY does not have a timer output pin.) * Cascading of the two channels (TMR0, TMR1) Operation as a 16-bit timer can be performed using channel 0 as the upper half and channel 1 as the lower half (16-bit count mode). Channel 1 can be used to count channel 0 compare-match occurrences (compare-match count mode). * Multiple interrupt sources for each channel TMR0, TMR1, TMRY: Two compare-match interrupts and one overflow interrupt can be requested independently. TMRX: One input capture source is available. 275 12.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit timer module (TMR0 and TMR1). TMRX and TMRY have a similar configuration, but cannot be cascaded. TMRX also has an input capture function. For details, see section 13, Timer Connection. External clock sources TMCI0 TMCI1 Internal clock sources TMR0 o/8, o/2 o/64, o/32 o/1024, o/256 TMR1 o/8, o/2 o/64, o/128 o/1024, o/2048 TMRX o o/2 o/4 TMRY o/4 o/256 o/2048 Clock 1 Clock 0 Clock select TCORA0 Compare-match A1 Compare-match A0 Comparator A0 Overflow 1 Overflow 0 Clear 0 Clear 1 Compare-match B1 Compare-match B0 Comparator B0 TMO1 TMRI1 Control logic TCORB0 TCORB1 Comparator B1 TCORA1 Comparator A1 TMO0 TMRI0 TCNT0 TCNT1 Internal bus TCSR0 TCSR1 TCR0 CMIA0 CMIB0 OVI0 CMIA1 CMIB1 OVI1 Interrupt signals TCR1 Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module 276 12.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 12.1 summarizes the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer module. Table 12.1 8-Bit Timer Input and Output Pins Channel 0 Name Timer output Timer clock input Timer reset input 1 Timer output Timer clock input Timer reset input X Timer output Timer clock/ reset input Y Timer clock/reset input Symbol* TMO0 TMCI0 TMRI0 TMO1 TMCI1 TMRI1 TMOX I/O Output Input Input Output Input Input Output Function Output controlled by compare-match External clock input for the counter External reset input for the counter Output controlled by compare-match External clock input for the counter External reset input for the counter Output controlled by compare-match External clock/reset input for the counter External clock/reset input for the counter HFBACKI/TMIX Input (TMCIX/TMRIX) VSYNCI/TMIY Input (TMCIY/TMRIY) Note: * The abbreviations TMO, TMCI, and TMRI are used in the text, omitting the channel number. Channel X and Y I/O pins have the same internal configuration as channels 0 and 1, and therefore the same abbreviations are used. 277 12.1.4 Register Configuration Table 12.2 summarizes the registers of the 8-bit timer module. Table 12.2 8-Bit Timer Registers Channel 0 Name Timer control register 0 Timer control/status register 0 Time constant register A0 Time constant register B0 Time counter 0 1 Timer control register 1 Timer control/status register 1 Time constant register A1 Time constant register B1 Timer counter 1 Common Serial/timer control register Module stop control register Timer connection register S X Timer control register X Timer control/status register X Time constant register AX Time constant register BX Timer counter X Time constant register C Input capture register R Input capture register F Y Timer control register Y Timer control/status register Y Time constant register AY Time constant register BY Timer counter Y Timer input select register Abbreviation* 3 R/W TCR0 TCSR0 TCORA0 TCORB0 TCNT0 TCR1 TCSR1 TCORA1 TCORB1 TCNT1 STCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL TCONRS TCRX TCSRX TCORAX TCORBX TCNTX TCORC TICRR TICRF TCRY TCSRY TCORAY TCORBY TCNTY TISR R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/(W)*2 R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'00 H'10 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'00 H'3F H'FF H'00 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'FF H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'FE Address* 1 H'FFC8 H'FFCA H'FFCC H'FFCE H'FFD0 H'FFC9 H'FFCB H'FFCD H'FFCF H'FFD1 H'FFC3 H'FF86 H'FF87 H'FFFE H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF6 H'FFF7 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 H'FFF2 H'FFF3 H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF2 H'FFF3 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. 3. The abbreviations TCR, TCSR, TCORA, TCORB, and TCNT are used in the text, omitting the channel designation (0, 1, X, or Y). 278 Each pair of registers for channel 0 and channel 1 comprises a 16-bit register with the upper 8 bits for channel 0 and the lower 8 bits for channel 1, so they can be accessed together by word access. (Access is not divided into two 8-bit accesses.) Certain of the channel X and channel Y registers are assigned to the same address. The TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS determines which register is accessed. 12.2 12.2.1 Register Descriptions Timer Counter (TCNT) TCNT0 TCNT1 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCNTX,TCNTY Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Each TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT0 and TCNT1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. TCNT increments on pulses generated from an internal or external clock source. This clock source is selected by clock select bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR. TCNT can be cleared by an external reset input signal or compare-match signal. Counter clear bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR select the method of clearing. When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1. The timer counters are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 279 12.2.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA) TCORA0 TCORA1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORAX, TCORAY Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W TCORA is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORA0 and TCORA1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. TCORA is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare-match flag A (CMFA) in TCSR is set. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORA write cycle. The timer output can be freely controlled by these compare-match signals and the settings of output select bits OS1 and OS0 in TCSR. TCORA is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 280 12.2.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB) TCORB0 TCORB1 10 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORBX, TCORBY Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W TCORB is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORB0 and TCORB1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. TCORB is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare-match flag B (CMFB) in TCSR is set. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORB write cycle. The timer output can be freely controlled by these compare-match signals and the settings of output select bits OS3 and OS2 in TCSR. TCORB is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 12.2.4 Bit Initial value Read/Write Timer Control Register (TCR) 7 CMIEB 0 R/W 6 CMIEA 0 R/W 5 OVIE 0 R/W 4 CCLR1 0 R/W 3 CCLR0 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock source and the time at which TCNT is cleared, and enables interrupts. TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. For details of the timing, see section 12.3, Operation. 281 Bit 7--Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B (CMIEB): Selects whether the CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is enabled or disabled when the CMFB flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note that a CMIB interrupt is not requested by TMRX, regardless of the CMIEB value. Bit 7 CMIEB 0 1 Description CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is disabled CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 6--Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A (CMIEA): Selects whether the CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is enabled or disabled when the CMFA flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note that a CMIA interrupt is not requested by TMRX, regardless of the CMIEA value. Bit 6 CMIEA 0 1 Description CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is disabled CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 5--Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Selects whether the OVF interrupt request (OVI) is enabled or disabled when the OVF flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note that an OVI interrupt is not requested by TMRX, regardless of the OVIE value. Bit 5 OVIE 0 1 Description OVF interrupt request (OVI) is disabled OVF interrupt request (OVI) is enabled (Initial value) Bits 4 and 3--Counter Clear 1 and 0 (CCLR1, CCLR0): These bits select the method by which the timer counter is cleared: by compare-match A or B, or by an external reset input. Bit 4 CCLR1 0 Bit 3 CCLR0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Clearing is disabled Cleared on compare-match A Cleared on compare-match B Cleared on rising edge of external reset input (Initial value) 282 Bits 2 to 0--Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select whether the clock input to TCNT is an internal or external clock. The input clock can be selected from either six or three clocks, all divided from the system clock (o). The falling edge of the selected internal clock triggers the count. When use of an external clock is selected, three types of count can be selected: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. Some functions differ between channel 0 and channel 1, because of the cascading function. TCR STCR Bit 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Channel CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0 Description 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- -- 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Clock input disabled (Initial value) o/8 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/2 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/64 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/32 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/1024 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/256 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge Counted on TCNT1 overflow signal* Clock input disabled (Initial value) o/8 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/2 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/64 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/128 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/1024 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/2048 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge Counted on TCNT0 compare-match A* 283 TCR STCR Bit 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Channel CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0 Description X 0 0 0 0 1 Y 0 0 0 0 1 Common 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Clock input disabled Counted on o internal clock source o/2 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/4 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge Clock input disabled Clock input disabled (Initial value) (Initial value) o/4 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/256 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge o/2048 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge Clock input disabled External clock source, counted at rising edge External clock source, counted at falling edge External clock source, counted at both rising and falling edges Note: * If the count input of channel 0 is the TCNT1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the TCNT0 compare-match signal, no incrementing clock will be generated. Do not use this setting. 284 12.2.5 TCSR0 Bit Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ADTE 0 R/W 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write TCSR1 Bit Initial value Read/Write TCSRX Bit Initial value Read/Write TCSRY Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 -- 1 -- 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ICF 0 R/(W)* 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ICIE 0 R/W 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 5, and in bit 4 in TCSRX, to clear these flags. TCSR is an 8-bit register that indicates compare-match and overflow statuses (and input capture status in TMRX only), and controls compare-match output. TCSR0, TCSRX, and TCSRY are initialized to H'00, and TCSR1 is initialized to H'10, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Compare-Match Flag B (CMFB): Status flag indicating whether the values of TCNT and TCORB match. 285 Bit 7 CMFB 0 Description [Clearing conditions] * * 1 Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB When the DTC is activated by a CMIB interrupt (Initial value) [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORB Bit 6--Compare-match Flag A (CMFA): Status flag indicating whether the values of TCNT and TCORA match. Bit 6 CMFA 0 Description [Clearing conditions] * * 1 Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA When the DTC is activated by a CMIA interrupt (Initial value) [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORA Bit 5 --Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): Status flag indicating that TCNT has overflowed (changed from H'FF to H'00). Bit 5 OVF 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 (Initial value) TCSR0 Bit 4--A/D Trigger Enable (ADTE): Enables or disables A/D converter start requests by compare-match A. Bit 4 ADTE 0 1 286 Description A/D converter start requests by compare-match A are disabled A/D converter start requests by compare-match A are enabled (Initial value) TCSR1 Bit 4--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. TCSRX Bit 4--Input Capture Flag (ICF): Status flag that indicates detection of a rising edge followed by a falling edge in the external reset signal after the ICST bit in TCONRI has been set to 1. Bit 4 ICF 0 Description [Clearing condition] Read ICF when ICF = 1, then write 0 in ICF 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected in the external reset signal after the ICST bit in TCONRI has been set to 1 (Initial value) TCSRY Bit 4--Input Capture Interrupt Enable (ICIE): Selects enabling or disabling of the interrupt request by ICF (ICIX) when the ICF bit in TCSRX is set to 1. Bit 4 ICIE 0 1 Description Interrupt request by ICF (ICIX) is disabled Interrupt request by ICF (ICIX) is enabled (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0--Output Select 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0): These bits specify how the timer output level is to be changed by a compare-match of TCOR and TCNT. OS3 and OS2 select the effect of compare-match B on the output level, OS1 and OS0 select the effect of compare-match A on the output level, and both of them can be controlled independently. Note, however, that priorities are set such that: trigger output > 1 output > 0 output. If comparematches occur simultaneously, the output changes according to the compare-match with the higher priority. Timer output is disabled when bits OS3 to OS0 are all 0. After a reset, the timer output is 0 until the first compare-match occurs. 287 Bit 3 OS3 0 Bit 2 OS2 0 1 Description No change when compare-match B occurs 0 is output when compare-match B occurs 1 is output when compare-match B occurs Output is inverted when compare-match B occurs (toggle output) (Initial value) 1 0 1 Bit 1 OS1 0 Bit 0 OS0 0 1 Description No change when compare-match A occurs 0 is output when compare-match A occurs 1 is output when compare-match A occurs Output is inverted when compare-match A occurs (toggle output) (Initial value) 1 0 1 12.2.6 Bit Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) 7 -- 0 R/W 6 IICX1 0 R/W 5 IICX0 0 R/W 4 IICE 0 R/W 3 FLSHE 0 R/W 2 -- 0 R/W 1 ICKS1 0 R/W 0 ICKS0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the IIC operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), and on-chip flash memory (in F-ZTAT versions), and also selects the TCNT input clock. For details on functions not related to the 8-bit timers, see section 3.2.4, Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 6 and 5--I2C Transfer Rate Select 1 and 0 (IICX1, IICX0): These bits control the operation of the I2C bus interface when the IIC option is included on-chip. For details see section 16.2.7, Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR). 288 Bit 4--I2C Master Enable (IICE): Controls CPU access to the I2C bus interface data and control registers, PWMX data and control registers, and SCI control registers. For details see section 3.2.4, Serial /Timer Control Register (STCR). Bit 3--Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls CPU access to the flash memory control registers, power-down state control registers, and peripheral module control registers. For details see section 3.2.4, Serial /Timer Control Register (STCR). Bit 2--Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0--Internal Clock Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR, select the clock to be input to TCNT. For details, see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register. 12.2.7 Bit Initial value Read/Write System Control Register (SYSCR) 7 CS2E 0 R/W 6 IOSE 0 R/W 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W 3 XRST 1 R 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 HIE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W Only bit 1 is described here. For details on functions not related to the 8-bit timers, see sections 3.2.2 and 5.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. Bit 1--Host Interface Enable (HIE): Controls CPU access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers. Bit 1 HIE 0 1 Description CPU access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers, is enabled (Initial value) CPU access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers, is disabled 289 12.2.8 Bit Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W TMRX/Y ISGENE HOMOD1HOMOD0 VOMOD1 VOMOD0 CLMOD1 CLMOD0 Initial value Read/Write TCONRS is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls access to the TMRX and TMRY registers and timer connection operation. TCONRS is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--TMRX/TMRY Access Select (TMRX/Y): The TMRX and TMRY registers can only be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is cleared to 0. In the H8S/2128 Series, some of the TMRX registers and the TMRY registers are assigned to the same memory space addresses (H'FFF0 to H'FFF5), and the TMRX/Y bit determines which registers are accessed. In the H8S/2124 Series, there is no control of TMRY register access by this bit. Bit 7 TMRX/Y Accessible Registers H'FFF0 H'FFF1 TCSRX (TMRX) TCSRY (TMRY) H'FFF2 TICRR (TMRX) H'FFF3 TICRF (TMRX) H'FFF4 TCNTX (TMRX) H'FFF5 TCORC (TMRX) TISR (TMRY) H'FFF6 H'FFF7 0 TCRX (Initial value) (TMRX) 1 TCRY (TMRY) TCORAX TCORBX (TMRX) (TMRX) TCORAY TCORBY TCNTY (TMRY) (TMRY) (TMRY) 12.2.9 Bit Input Capture Register (TICR) [TMRX Additional Function] 7 0 -- 6 0 -- 5 0 -- 4 0 -- 3 0 -- 2 0 -- 1 0 -- 0 0 -- Initial value Read/Write TICR is an 8-bit internal register to which the contents of TCNT are transferred on the falling edge of external reset input. The CPU cannot read or write to TICR directly. The TICR function is used in timer connection. For details, see section 13, Timer Connection. 290 12.2.10 Bit Time Constant Register C (TCORC) [TMRX Additional Function] 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W Initial value Read/Write TCORC is an 8-bit readable/writable register. The sum of the contents of TCORC and TICR is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, a compare-match C signal is generated. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORC write cycle and a TICR input capture cycle. TCORC is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The TCORC function is used in timer connection. For details, see section 13, Timer Connection. 12.2.11 Bit Initial value Read/Write Input Capture Registers R and F (TICRR, TICRF) [TMRX Additional Functions] 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R TICRR and TICRF are 8-bit read-only registers. When the ICST bit in TCONRI is set to 1, TICRR and TICRF capture the contents of TCNT successively on the rise and fall of the external reset input. When one capture operation ends, the ICST bit is cleared to 0. TICRR and TICRF are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The TICRR and TICRF functions are used in timer connection. For details, see 12.3.6 Input Capture Operation and section 13, Timer Connection. 291 12.2.12 Bit Timer Input Select Register (TISR) [TMRY Additional Function] 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 IS 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write TISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the external clock/reset signal source for the counter. TISR is initialized to H'FE by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 1--Reserved: Do not write 0 to these bits. Bit 0--Input Select (IS): Selects the internal synchronization signal (IVG signal) or the timer clock/reset input pin (VSYNCI/TMIY (TMCIY/TMRIY)) as the external clock/reset signal source for the counter. Bit 0 IS 0 1 Description IVG signal is selected (H8S/2128 Series) External clock/reset input is disabled (H8S/2124 Series) VSYNCI/TMIY (TMCIY/TMRIY) is selected (Initial value) 292 12.2.13 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTP12 bit or MSTP8 bit is set to 1, 8-bit timer operation is halted on channels 0 and 1 or channels X and Y, respectively, and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 21.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 4--Module Stop (MSTP12): Specifies 8-bit timer (channel 0/1) module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 4 MSTP12 0 1 Description 8-bit timer (channel 0/1) module stop mode is cleared 8-bit timer (channel 0/1) module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRH Bit 0--Module Stop (MSTP8): Specifies 8-bit timer (channel X/Y) and timer connection module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 0 MSTP8 0 1 Description 8-bit timer (channel X/Y) and timer connection module stop mode is cleared 8-bit timer (channel X/Y) and timer connection module stop mode is set (Initial value) 293 12.3 12.3.1 Operation TCNT Incrementation Timing TCNT is incremented by input clock pulses (either internal or external). Internal Clock: An internal clock created by dividing the system clock (o) can be selected by setting bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR. Figure 12.2 shows the count timing. o Internal clock TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 12.2 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input External Clock: Three incrementation methods can be selected by setting bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. Note that the external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states for incrementation at a single edge, and at least 2.5 states for incrementation at both edges. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is less than these values. Figure 12.3 shows the timing of incrementation at both edges of an external clock signal. 294 o External clock input pin TCNT input clock TCNT N-1 N N+1 Figure 12.3 Count Timing for External Clock Input 12.3.2 Compare-Match Timing Setting of Compare-Match Flags A and B (CMFA, CMFB): The CMFA and CMFB flags in TCSR are set to 1 by a compare-match signal generated when the TCOR and TCNT values match. The compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the match is true, just before the timer counter is updated. Therefore, when TCOR and TCNT match, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next incrementation clock input. Figure 12.4 shows this timing. o TCNT N N+1 TCOR Compare-match signal N CMF Figure 12.4 Timing of CMF Setting 295 Timer Output Timing: When compare-match A or B occurs, the timer output changes as specified by the output select bits (OS3 to OS0) in TCSR. Depending on these bits, the output can remain the same, be set to 0, be set to 1, or toggle. Figure 12.5 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle at compare-match A. o Compare-match A signal Timer output pin Figure 12.5 Timing of Timer Output Timing of Compare-Match Clear: TCNT is cleared when compare-match A or B occurs, depending on the setting of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. Figure 12.6 shows the timing of this operation. o Compare-match signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 12.6 Timing of Compare-Match Clear 296 12.3.3 TCNT External Reset Timing TCNT is cleared at the rising edge of an external reset input, depending on the settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. The width of the clearing pulse must be at least 1.5 states. Figure 12.7 shows the timing of this operation. o External reset input pin Clear signal TCNT N-1 N H'00 Figure 12.7 Timing of Clearing by External Reset Input 12.3.4 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting OVF in TCSR is set to 1 when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). Figure 12.8 shows the timing of this operation. o TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF Figure 12.8 Timing of OVF Setting 297 12.3.5 Operation with Cascaded Connection If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in either TCR0 or TCR1 are set to B'100, the 8-bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. With this configuration, a single 16-bit timer can be used (16-bit timer mode) or compare-matches of 8-bit channel 0 can be counted by the timer of channel 1 (comparematch count mode). In this case, the timer operates as described below. 16-Bit Count Mode: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR0 are set to B'100, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 0 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 occupying the lower 8 bits. * Setting of compare-match flags The CMF flag in TCSR0 is set to 1 when a 16-bit compare-match occurs. The CMF flag in TCSR1 is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare-match occurs. * Counter clear specification If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR0 have been set for counter clear at compare-match, the 16-bit counter (TCNT0 and TCNT1 together) is cleared when a 16-bit compare-match occurs. The 16-bit counter (TCNT0 and TCNT1 together) is cleared even if counter clear by the TMRI0 pin has also been set. The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR1 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. * Pin output Control of output from the TMO0 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR0 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare-match conditions. Control of output from the TMO1 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR1 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare-match conditions. Compare-Match Count Mode: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1 are B'100, TCNT1 counts compare-match A's for channel 0. Channels 0 and 1 are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF flag, generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clearing are in accordance with the settings for each channel. Usage Note: If the 16-bit count mode and compare-match count mode are set simultaneously, the input clock pulses for TCNT0 and TCNT1 are not generated and thus the counters will stop operating. Simultaneous setting of these two modes should therefore be avoided. 298 12.3.6 Input Capture Operation TMRX has input capture registers(TICR,TICRR,TICRF). Using TICRR and TICRF, capture operation is performed at once and narrow pulse width can be measured under the control of ICST bit in TCONRI register in timer connection. When TMRIX detects rising edge and falling edge sequentially after ICTST is set to 1, current values of TCNT registers are transferred to TICRR and TICRF, and ICST bit is cleared to 0. Input signal to the TMRIX is switched by setting other bits in TCONRI register. (1) Input capture input timing Figure 12.9 shows the operation timing when input capture function is enabled. TMRIX Input capture signal TCNTX n n+1 N N+1 TICRR M n n TICRF m m N Figure 12.9 Timing of Input Capture Operation If an input capture input occurs at the time when TICRR or TICRF is read, input capture signal is delayed one system clock() period. 299 T1 TICRR, TICRF read cycle T2 TMRIX Input capture signal Figure 12.10 Timing of Input Capture Signal (Input Capture Input Occurs When TICRR or TICRF is Read) (2) Selection of input capture input signal Input signal to the TMRIX is switched by the setting of the bits in TCONRI register in timer connection. Figure 12.11 and figure 12.12 shows the input capture signal selection. For details, see 13.2.1 Timer Connection Register I (TCONRI) TMRX TMIX pin Polarity inversion Signal selection TMRI1 pin Polarity inversion TMRIX TMCI1 pin Polarity inversion HFINV, HIINV SIMOD1, SIMOD0 ICST Figure 12.11 Input Capture Signal Selection 300 Table 12.3 Input Capture Signal Selection TCONRI Bit 4 ICST 0 1 Bit 7 SIMOD1 -- 0 Bit 6 SIMOD0 -- 0 Bit 3 HFINV -- 0 1 1 -- -- 1 1 -- -- Bit 1 HIINV -- -- -- 0 1 0 1 Description Input capture function is not used Input signal at the TMIX pin is selected Inverted signal of the TMIX pin input is selected Input signal at the TMRI1 pin is selected Inverted signal of the TMRI1 pin input is selected Input signal at the TMCI1 pin is selected Inverted signal of the TMCI1 pin input is selected 12.4 Interrupt Sources The TMR0, TMR1, and TMRY 8-bit timers can generate three types of interrupt: compare-match A and B (CMIA and CMIB), and overflow (OVI). TMRX can generate only an ICIX interrupt. An interrupt is requested when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set in TCR or TCSR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt. It is also possible to activate the DTC by means of CMIA and CMIB interrupts from TMR0, TMR1 and TMRY. An overview of 8-bit timer interrupt sources is given in tables 12.4 to 12.6. Table 12.4 TMR0 and TMR1 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources Interrupt source CMIA CMIB OVI Description Requested by CMFA Requested by CMFB Requested by OVF DTC Activation Possible Possible Not possible Low Interrupt Priority High Table 12.5 TMRX 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Source Interrupt source ICIX Description Requested by ICF DTC Activation Not possible 301 Table 12.6 TMRY 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources Interrupt source CMIA CMIB OVI Description Requested by CMFA Requested by CMFB Requested by OVF DTC Activation Possible Possible Not possible Low Interrupt Priority High 12.5 8-Bit Timer Application Example In the example below, the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty cycle, as shown in figure 12.12. The control bits are set as follows: * In TCR, CCLR1 is cleared to 0 and CCLR0 is set to 1 so that the timer counter is cleared by a TCORA compare-match. * In TCSR, bits OS3 to OS0 are set to B'0110, causing 1 output at a TCORA compare-match and 0 output at a TCORB compare-match. With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by TCORA with a pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required. TCNT H'FF TCORA TCORB H'00 TMO Counter clear Figure 12.12 Pulse Output (Example) 12.6 Usage Notes Application programmers should note that the following kinds of contention can occur in the 8-bit timer module. 302 12.6.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the clear takes priority, so that the counter is cleared and the write is not performed. Figure 12.13 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle by CPU T1 T2 o Address TCNT address Internal write signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 12.13 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear 303 12.6.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the counter is not incremented. Figure 12.14 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle by CPU T1 T2 o Address TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 12.14 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment 304 12.6.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match During the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle, the TCOR write has priority even if a compare-match occurs and the compare-match signal is disabled. Figure 12.15 shows this operation. With TMRX, an ICR input capture contends with a compare-match in the same way as with a write to TCORC. In this case, the input capture has priority and the compare-match signal is inhibited. TCOR write cycle by CPU T1 T2 o Address TCOR address Internal write signal TCNT N N+1 TCOR N M TCOR write data Compare-match signal Inhibited Figure 12.15 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match 305 12.6.4 Contention between Compare-Matches A and B If compare-matches A and B occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates in accordance with the priorities for the output states set for compare-match A and compare-match B, as shown in table 12.7. Table 12.7 Timer Output Priorities Output Setting Toggle output 1 output 0 output No change Low Priority High 12.6.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation TCNT may increment erroneously when the internal clock is switched over. Table 12.8 shows the relationship between the timing at which the internal clock is switched (by writing to the CKS1 and CKS0 bits) and the TCNT operation When the TCNT clock is generated from an internal clock, the falling edge of the internal clock pulse is detected. If clock switching causes a change from high to low level, as shown in no. 3 in table 12.8, a TCNT clock pulse is generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge. This increments TCNT. Erroneous incrementation can also happen when switching between internal and external clocks. 306 Table 12.8 Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits Switching from low to low* 1 No. 1 TCNT Clock Operation Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N CKS bit rewrite N+1 2 Switching from low to high* 2 Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite 307 No. 3 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits Switching from high to low* 3 TCNT Clock Operation Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock *4 TCNT N N+1 CKS bit rewrite N+2 4 Switching from high to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Includes switching from low to stop, and from stop to low. Includes switching from stop to high. Includes switching from high to stop. Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; TCNT is incremented. 308 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2128 Series] Provided in the H8S/2128 Series; not provided in the H8S/2124 Series. 13.1 Overview H8S/2128 Series allows interconnection between a combination of input signals, the input/output of the single free-running timer (FRT) channel, and the three 8-bit timer channels (TMR1, TMRX, and TMRY). This capability can be used to implement complex functions such as PWM decoding and clamp waveform output. All the timers are initially set for independent operation. 13.1.1 Features The features of the timer connection facility are as follows. * Five input pins and four output pins, all of which can be designated for phase inversion. Positive logic is assumed for all signals used within the timer connection facility. * An edge-detection circuit is connected to the input pins, simplifying signal input detection. * TMRX can be used for PWM input signal decoding. * TMRX can be used for clamp waveform generation. * An external clock signal divided by TMR1 can be used as the FRT capture input signal. * An internal synchronization signal can be generated using the FRT and TMRY. * A signal generated/modified using an input signal and timer connection can be selected and output. 309 310 Read flag IVI signal IVO signal selection Phase inversion FRT output selection VSYNCO/ FTOA SET IVG signal IVO signal RES Vertical sync signal generation IVI signal selection SET sync RES Vertical sync signal modify 16-bit FRT FTOA FTIA FRT input selection FTIB OCRA +VR, +VF CMA(R) FTIC ICRD +1M, +2M CMA(F) compare-match FTOB FTID CM1M CM2M SET RES 2f H mask generation 2f H mask/flag TMIY signal selection TMRI/TMCI 8-bit TMRY TMO Phase inversion IHG signal Blanking waveform generation CBLANK IHO signal selection TMR1 input selection TMRI PDC signal PWM decoding IHI signal TMCI TMRI CM1C 8-bit TMRX ICR ICR +1C compare-match CMB TMO CMA CL1 signal Read flag Clamp waveform generation CL2 signal CL3 signal CLO signal selection CL4 signal IHI signal selection CL4 generation CMB TMCI 8-bit TMR1 TMO Phase inversion TMOX TMO1 output selection HSYNCO/ TMO1/ TMOX Phase inversion CLAMP0/ FTIC/ TMO0 13.1.2 VSYNCI/ FTIA/TMIY Edge detection Block Diagram VFBACKI/ FTIB/TMRI0 Edge detection Phase inversion Phase inversion Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the timer connection facility. FTIC Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Timer Connection Facility HSYNCI/ TMCI1/FTID Edge detection Phase inversion CSYNCI/ TMRI1/FTOB HFBACKI/ FTCI/TMIX/ TMCIO Edge detection Phase inversion Phase inversion Edge detection 13.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 13.1 lists the timer connection input and output pins. Table 13.1 Timer Connection Input and Output Pins Name Vertical synchronization signal input pin Horizontal synchronization signal input pin Composite synchronization signal input pin Abbreviation VSYNCI Input/ Output Input Function Vertical synchronization signal input pin or FTIA input pin/TMIY input pin Horizontal synchronization signal input pin or FTID input pin/TMCI1 input pin Composite synchronization signal input pin or TMRI1 input pin/FTOB output pin Spare vertical synchronization signal input pin or FTIB input pin/TMRI0 input pin Spare horizontal synchronization signal input pin or FTCI input pin/TMCI0 input pin/TMIX input pin Vertical synchronization signal output pin or FTOA output pin Horizontal synchronization signal output pin or TMO1 output pin/TMOX output pin Clamp waveform output pin or TMO0 output pin/FTIC input pin Blanking waveform output pin HSYNCI Input CSYNCI Input Spare vertical synchronization signal input pin Spare horizontal synchronization signal input pin Vertical synchronization signal output pin Horizontal synchronization signal output pin VFBACKI Input HFBACKI Input VSYNCO Output HSYNCO Output Clamp waveform output pin Blanking waveform output pin CLAMPO CBLANK Output Output 311 13.1.4 Register Configuration Table 13.2 lists the timer connection registers. Timer connection registers can only be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0. Table 13.2 Register Configuration Name Timer connection register I Timer connection register O Timer connection register S Edge sense register Module stop control register Abbreviation TCONRI TCONRO TCONRS SEDGR MSTPRH MSTPRL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R/W R/W 2 Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00* H'3F H'FF 3 Address* 1 H'FFFC H'FFFD H'FFFE H'FFFF H'FF86 H'FF87 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Bits 7 to 2: Only 0 can be written to clear the flags. 3. Bits 1 and 0: Undefined (reflect the pin states). 13.2 13.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Timer Connection Register I (TCONRI) 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 ICST 0 R/W 3 HFINV 0 R/W 2 VFINV 0 R/W 1 HIINV 0 R/W 0 VIINV 0 R/W SIMOD1 SIMOD0 SCONE Initial value Read/Write TCONRI is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls connection between timers, the signal source for synchronization signal input, phase inversion, etc. TCONR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 312 Bits 7 and 6--Input Synchronization Mode Select 1 and 0 (SIMOD1, SIMOD0): These bits select the signal source of the IHI and IVI signals. Bit 7 SIMOD1 0 Bit 6 SIMOD0 0 1 1 0 1 Mode No signal S-on-G mode Composite mode Separate mode Description IHI Signal (Initial value) HFBACKI input CSYNCI input HSYNCI input HSYNCI input IVI Signal VFBACKI input PDC input PDC input VSYNCI input Bit 5--Synchronization Signal Connection Enable (SCONE): Selects the signal source of the FRT FTI input and the TMR1 TMCI1/TMRI1 input. Bit 5 SCONE 0 1 Mode Description FTIA FTIB FTIB input TMO1 signal FTIC FTIC input FTID FTID input TMCI1 TMRI1 TMCI1 TMRI1 input input IHI signal IVI inverse signal Normal connection (Initial value) FTIA input Synchronization signal connection mode IVI signal VFBACKI IHI input signal Bit 4--Input Capture Start Bit (ICST): The TMRX external reset input (TMRIX) is connected to the IHI signal. TMRX has input capture registers (TICR, TICRR, and TICRF). TICRR and TICRF can measure the width of a short pulse by means of a single capture operation under the control of the ICST bit. When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIX after the ICST bit is set to 1, the contents of TCNT at those points are captured into TICRR and TICRF, respectively, and the ICST bit is cleared to 0. Bit 4 ICST 0 Description The TICRR and TICRF input capture functions are stopped [Clearing condition] When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIX 1 The TICRR and TICRF input capture functions are operating (Waiting for detection of a rising edge followed by a falling edge on TMRIX) [Setting condition] When 1 is written in ICST after reading ICST = 0 (Initial value) 313 Bits 3 to 0--Input Synchronization Signal Inversion (HFINV, VFINV, HIINV, VIINV): These bits select inversion of the input phase of the spare horizontal synchronization signal (HFBACKI), the spare vertical synchronization signal (VFBACKI), the horizontal synchronization signal and composite synchronization signal (HSYNCI, CSYNCI), and the vertical synchronization signal (VSYNCI). Bit 3 HFINV 0 1 Description The HFBACKI pin state is used directly as the HFBACKI input The HFBACKI pin state is inverted before use as the HFBACKI input (Initial value) Bit 2 VFINV 0 1 Description The VFBACKI pin state is used directly as the VFBACKI input The VFBACKI pin state is inverted before use as the VFBACKI input (Initial value) Bit 1 HIINV 0 1 Description The HSYNCI and CSYNCI pin states are used directly as the HSYNCI and CSYNCI inputs (Initial value) The HSYNCI and CSYNCI pin states are inverted before use as the HSYNCI and CSYNCI inputs Bit 0 VIINV 0 1 Description The VSYNCI pin state is used directly as the VSYNCI input The VSYNCI pin state is inverted before use as the VSYNCI input (Initial value) 13.2.2 Bit Timer Connection Register O (TCONRO) 7 HOE 0 R/W 6 VOE 0 R/W 5 CLOE 0 R/W 4 CBOE 0 R/W 3 HOINV 0 R/W 2 VOINV 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W CLOINV CBOINV Initial value Read/Write 314 TCONRO is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls output signal output, phase inversion, etc. TCONRO is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 4--Output Enable (HOE, VOE, CLOE, CBOE): These bits control enabling/disabling of horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNCO), vertical synchronization signal (VSYNCO), clamp waveform (CLAMPO), and blanking waveform (CBLANK) output. When output is disabled, the state of the relevant pin is determined by the port DR and DDR, FRT, TMR, and PWM settings. Output enabling/disabling control does not affect the port, FRT, or TMR input functions, but some FRT and TMR input signal sources are determined by the SCONE bit in TCONRI. Bit 7 HOE 0 1 Description The P67/TMO1/TMOX/CIN7/HSYNCO pin functions as the P67/TMO1/TMOX/CIN7 pin The P67/TMO1/TMOX/CIN7/HSYNCO pin functions as the HSYNCO pin (Initial value) Bit 6 VOE 0 1 Description The P61/FTOA/CIN1/VSYNCO pin functions as the P61/FTOA/CIN1 pin (Initial value) The P61/FTOA/CIN1/VSYNCO pin functions as the VSYNCO pin Bit 5 CLOE 0 1 Description The P64/FTIC/CIN4/CLAMPO pin functions as the P64/FTIC/CIN4 pin The P64/FTIC/CIN4/CLAMPO pin functions as the CLAMPO pin (Initial value) Bit 4 CBOE 0 1 Description The P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the P27/A15/PW15 pin In mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled): The P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the A15 pin In modes 2 and 3 (modes with on-chip ROM enabled): The P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the CBLANK pin (Initial value) 315 Bits 3 to 0--Output Synchronization Signal Inversion (HOINV, VOINV, CLOINV, CBOINV): These bits select inversion of the output phase of the horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNCO), the vertical synchronization signal (VSYNCO), the clamp waveform (CLAMPO), and the blank waveform (CBLANK). Bit 3 HOINV 0 1 Description The IHO signal is used directly as the HSYNCO output The IHO signal is inverted before use as the HSYNCO output (Initial value) Bit 2 VOINV 0 1 Description The IVO signal is used directly as the VSYNCO output The IVO signal is inverted before use as the VSYNCO output (Initial value) Bit 1 CLOINV 0 1 Description The CLO signal (CL1, CL2, CL3, or CL4 signal) is used directly as the CLAMPO output The CLO signal (CL1, CL2, CL3, or CL4 signal) is inverted before use as the CLAMPO output (Initial value) Bit 0 CBOINV 0 1 Description The CBLANK signal is used directly as the CBLANK output The CBLANK signal is inverted before use as the CBLANK output (Initial value) 13.2.3 Bit Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W TMRX/Y ISGENE HOMOD1 HOMOD0VOMOD1 VOMOD0 CLMOD1 CLMOD0 Initial value Read/Write 316 TCONRS is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects 8-bit timer TMRX/TMRY access and the synchronization signal output signal source and generation method. TCONRS is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--TMRX/TMRY Access Select (TMRX/Y): The TMRX and TMRY registers can only be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is cleared to 0. In the H8S/2128 Series, some of the TMRX registers and the TMRY registers are assigned to the same memory space addresses (H'FFF0 to H'FFF5), and the TMRX/Y bit determines which registers are accessed. In the H8S/2124 Series, there is no control of TMRY register access by this bit. Bit 7 TMRX/Y 0 1 Description The TMRX registers are accessed at addresses H'FFF0 to H'FFF5 The TMRY registers are accessed at addresses H'FFF0 to H'FFF5 (Initial value) Bit 6--Internal Synchronization Signal Select (ISGENE): Selects internal synchronization signals (IHG, IVG, and CL4 signals) as the signal sources for the IHO, IVO, and CLO signals. Bits 5 and 4--Horizontal Synchronization Output Mode Select 1 and 0 (HOMOD1, HOMOD0): These bits select the signal source and generation method for the IHO signal. Bit 6 ISGENE 0 Bit 5 VOMOD1 0 Bit 4 VOMOD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 The IHG signal is selected Description The IHI signal (without 2fH modification) is selected (Initial value) The IHI signal (with 2fH modification) is selected The CL1 signal is selected 317 Bits 3 and 2--Vertical Synchronization Output Mode Select 1 and 0 (VOMOD1, VOMOD0): These bits select the signal source and generation method for the IVO signal. Bit 6 ISGENE 0 Bit 3 VOMOD1 0 Bit 2 VOMOD0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description The IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) is selected (Initial value) The IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) is selected The IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) is selected The IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) is selected The IVG signal is selected Bits 1 and 0--Clamp Waveform Mode Select 1 and 0 (CLMOD1, CLMOD0): These bits select the signal source for the CLO signal (clamp waveform). Bit 6 ISGENE 0 Bit 1 CLMOD1 0 Bit 0 CLMOD2 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 The CL4 signal is selected Description The CL1 signal is selected The CL2 signal is selected The CL3 signal is selected (Initial value) 318 13.2.4 Bit Edge Sense Register (SEDGR) 7 VEDG 0 R/(W) *1 6 HEDG 0 R/(W) *1 5 CEDG 0 R/(W) *1 4 0 R/(W) *1 3 0 R/(W) *1 2 0 R/(W) *1 1 IHI --*2 R 0 IVI --*2 R HFEDG VFEDG PREQF Initial value Read/Write Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flags. 2. The initial value is undefined since it depends on the pin states. SEDGR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to detect a rising edge on the timer connection input pins and the occurrence of 2fH modification, and to determine the phase of the IVI and IHI signals. The upper 6 bits of SEDGR are initialized to 0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The initial value of the lower 2 bits is undefined, since it depends on the pin states. Bit 7--VSYNCI Edge (VEDG): Detects a rising edge on the VSYNCI pin. Bit 7 VEDG 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in VEDG after reading VEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the VSYNCI pin (Initial value) Bit 6--HSYNCI Edge (HEDG): Detects a rising edge on the HSYNCI pin. Bit 6 HEDG 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in HEDG after reading HEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the HSYNCI pin (Initial value) 319 Bit 5--CSYNCI Edge (CEDG): Detects a rising edge on the CSYNCI pin. Bit 5 CEDG 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in CEDG after reading CEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the CSYNCI pin (Initial value) Bit 4--HFBACKI Edge (HFEDG): Detects a rising edge on the HFBACKI pin. Bit 4 HFEDG 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in HFEDG after reading HFEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the HFBACKI pin (Initial value) Bit 3--VFBACKI Edge (VFEDG): Detects a rising edge on the VFBACKI pin. Bit 3 VFEDG 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in VFEDG after reading VFEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the VFBACKI pin (Initial value) Bit 2--Pre-Equalization Flag (PREQF): Detects the occurrence of an IHI signal 2fH modification condition. The generation of a falling/rising edge in the IHI signal during a mask interval is expressed as the occurrence of a 2fH modification condition. For details, see section 13.3.4, IHI Signal 2fH Modification. Bit 2 PREQF 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in PREQF after reading PREQF = 1 [Setting condition] When an IHI signal 2fH modification condition is detected (Initial value) 320 Bit 1--IHI Signal Level (IHI): Indicates the current level of the IHI signal. Signal source and phase inversion selection for the IHI signal depends on the contents of TCONRI. Read this bit to determine whether the input signal is positive or negative, then maintain the IHI signal at positive phase by modifying TCONRI. Bit 1 IHI 0 1 Description The IHI signal is low The IHI signal is high Bit 0--IVI Signal Level (IVI): Indicates the current level of the IVI signal. Signal source and phase inversion selection for the IVI signal depends on the contents of TCONRI. Read this bit to determine whether the input signal is positive or negative, then maintain the IVI signal at positive phase by modifying TCONRI. Bit 0 IVI 0 1 Description The IVI signal is low The IVI signal is high 13.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP13, MSTP12, and MSTP8 bits are set to 1, the 16-bit free-running timer, 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 and channels X and Y, and timer connection, respectively, halt and enter module stop mode at the end of the bus cycle. See section 21.5, Module Stop Mode, for details. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. 321 MSTPCRH Bit 5--Module Stop (MSTP13): Specifies FRT module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 5 MSTP13 0 1 Description FRT module stop mode is cleared FRT module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRH Bit 4--Module Stop (MSTP12): Specifies 8-bit timer channel 0 and 1 module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 4 MSTP12 0 1 Description 8-bit timer channel 0 and 1 module stop mode is cleared 8-bit timer channel 0 and 1 module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRH Bit 0--Module Stop (MSTP8): Specifies 8-bit timer channel X and Y and timer connection module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 0 MSTP8 0 1 Description 8-bit timer channel X and Y and timer connection module stop mode is cleared 8-bit timer channel X and Y and timer connection module stop mode is set (Initial value) 13.3 13.3.1 Operation PWM Decoding (PDC Signal Generation) The timer connection facility and TMRX can be used to decode a PWM signal in which 0 and 1 are represented by the pulse width. To do this, a signal in which a rising edge is generated at regular intervals must be selected as the IHI signal. The timer counter (TCNT) in TMRX is set to count the internal clock pulses and to be cleared on the rising edge of the external reset signal (IHI signal). The value to be used as the threshold for deciding the pulse width is written in TCORB. The PWM decoder contains a delay latch which uses the IHI signal as data and compare-match signal B (CMB) as a clock, and the state of the IHI signal (the result of the pulse width decision) at the compare-match signal B timing after TCNT is 322 reset by the rise of the IHI signal is output as the PDC signal. The pulse width setting using TICRR and TICRF of TMRX can be used to determine the pulse width decision threshold. Examples of TCR and TCORB settings are shown in tables 13.3 and 13.4, and the timing chart is shown in figure 13.2. Table 13.3 Examples of TCR Settings Bit(s) 7 6 5 4 and 3 2 to 0 Abbreviation CMIEB CMIEA OVIE CCLR1, CCLR0 CKS2 to CKS0 Contents 0 0 0 11 001 TCNT is cleared by the rising edge of the external reset signal (IHI signal) Incremented on internal clock: o Description Interrupts due to compare-match and overflow are disabled Table 13.4 Examples of TCORB (Pulse Width Threshold) Settings o:10 MHz H'07 H'0F H'1F H'3F H'7F 0.8 s 1.6 s 3.2 s 6.4 s 12.8 s o: 12 MHz 0.67 s 1.33 s 2.67 s 5.33 s 10.67 s o: 16 MHz 0.5 s 1 s 2 s 4 s 8 s o: 20 MHz 0.4 s 0.8 s 1.6 s 3.2 s 6.4 s IHI signal PDC signal TCNT TCORB (threshold) Determination of IHI signal state at compare-match Counter reset by IHI signal Counter cleared by TCNT overflow IHI signal state at 2nd compare-match is not determined Figure 13.2 Timing Chart for PWM Decoding 323 13.3.2 Clamp Waveform Generation (CL1/CL2/CL3 Signal Generation) The timer connection facility and TMRX can be used to generate signals with different duty cycles and rising/falling edges (clamp waveforms) in synchronization with the input signal (IHI signal). Three clamp waveforms can be generated: the CL1, CL2, and CL3 signals. In addition, the CL4 signal can be generated using TMRY. The CL1 signal rises simultaneously with the rise of the IHI signal, and when the CL1 signal is high, the CL2 signal rises simultaneously with the fall of the IHI signal. The fall of both the CL1 and the CL2 signal can be specified by TCORA. The rise of the CL3 signal can be specified as simultaneous with the sampling of the fall of the IHI signal using the system clock, and the fall of the CL3 signal can be specified by TCORC. The CL3 signal falls at the rise of the IHI signal. TCNT in TMRX is set to count internal clock pulses and to be cleared on the rising edge of the external reset signal (IHI signal). The value to be used as the CL1 signal pulse width is written in TCORA. Write a value of H'02 or more in TCORA when internal clock o is selected as the TMRX counter clock, and a value or H'01 or more when o/2 is selected. When internal clock o is selected, the CL1 signal pulse width is (TCORA set value + 3 0.5). When the CL2 signal is used, the setting must be made so that this pulse width is greater than the IHI signal pulse width. The value to be used as the CL3 signal pulse width is written in TCORC. The TICR register in TMRX captures the value of TCNT at the inverse of the external reset signal edge (in this case, the falling edge of the IHI signal). The timing of the fall of the CL3 signal is determined by the sum of the contents of TICR and TCORC. Caution is required if the rising edge of the IHI signal precedes the fall timing set by the contents of TCORC, since the IHI signal will cause the CL3 signal to fall. Examples of TMRX TCR settings are the same as those in table 13.3. The clamp waveform timing charts are shown in figures 13.3 and 13.4. Since the rise of the CL1 and CL2 signals is synchronized with the edge of the IHI signal, and their fall is synchronized with the system clock, the pulse width variation is equivalent to the resolution of the system clock. Both the rise and the fall of the CL3 signal are synchronized with the system clock and the pulse width is fixed, but there is a variation in the phase relationship with the IHI signal equivalent to the resolution of the system clock. 324 IHI signal CL1 signal CL2 signal TCNT TCORA Figure 13.3 Timing Chart for Clamp Waveform Generation (CL1 and CL2 Signals) IHI signal CL3 signal TCNT TICR+TCORC TICR Figure 13.4 Timing Chart for Clamp Waveform Generation (CL3 Signal) 13.3.3 Measurement of 8-Bit Timer Divided Waveform Period The timer connection facility, TMR1, and the free-running timer (FRT) can be used to measure the period of an IHI signal divided waveform. Since TMR1 can be cleared by a rising edge of inverted IVI signal, the rise and fall of the IHI signal divided waveform can be virtually synchronized with the IVI signal. This enables period measurement to be carried out efficiently. To measure the period of an IHI signal divided waveform, TCNT in TMR1 is set to count the external clock (IHI signal) pulses and to be cleared on the rising edge of the external reset signal (inverted IVI signal). The value to be used as the division factor is written in TCORA, and the TMO output method is specified by the OS bits in TCSR. Examples of TMR1 TCR and TCSR settings are shown in table 13.5, and the timing chart for measurement of the IVI signal and IHI signal divided waveform periods is shown in figure 13.5. The period of the IHI signal divided waveform is given by (ICRD(3) - ICRD(2)) x the resolution. 325 Table 13.5 Examples of TCR and TCSR Settings Register TCR in TMR1 Bit(s) 7 6 5 Abbreviation CMIEB CMIEA OVIE Contents 0 0 0 11 TCNT is cleared by the rising edge of the external reset signal (inverted IVI signal) TCNT is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock (IHI signal) Not changed by compare-match B; output inverted by compare-match A (toggle output): division by 512 or when TCORB < TCORA, 1 output on compare-match B, and 0 output on compare-match A: division by 256 0: FRC value is transferred to ICRB on falling edge of input capture input B (IHI divided signal waveform) 1: FRC value is transferred to ICRB on rising edge of input capture input B (IHI divided signal waveform) 1 and 0 CKS1, CKS0 TCSR in FRT 0 CCLRA 01 0 FRC is incremented on internal clock: o/8 FRC clearing is disabled Description Interrupts due to compare-match and overflow are disabled 4 and 3 CCLR1, CCLR0 2 to 0 CKS2 to CKS0 101 TCSR in TMR1 3 to 0 OS3 to OS0 0011 1001 TCR in FRT 6 IEDGB 0/1 326 IVI signal IHI signal divided waveform ICRB(4) ICRB(3) ICRB(2) ICRB(1) FRC ICRB Figure 13.5 Timing Chart for Measurement of IVI Signal and IHI Signal Divided Waveform Periods 13.3.4 IHI Signal and 2fH Modification By using the timer connection FRT, even if there is a part of the IHI signal with twice the frequency, this can be eliminated. In order for this function to operate properly, the duty cycle of the IHI signal must be approximately 30% or less, or approximately 70% or above. The 8-bit OCRDM contents or twice the OCRDM contents can be added automatically to the data captured in ICRD in the FRT, and compare-matches generated at these points. The interval between the two compare-matches is called a mask interval. A value equivalent to approximately 1/3 the IHI signal period is written in OCRDM. ICRD is set so that capture is performed on the rise of the IHI signal. Since the IHI signal supplied to the IHO signal selection circuit is normally set on the rise of the IHI signal and reset on the fall, its waveform is the same as that of the original IHI signal. When 2fH modification is selected, IHI signal edge detection is disabled during mask intervals. Capture is also disabled during these intervals. Examples of FRT TCR settings are shown in table 13.6, and the 2fH modification timing chart is shown in figure 13.6. 327 Table 13.6 Examples of TCR, TCSR, TCOR, and OCRDM Settings Register TCR in FRT Bit(s) 4 Abbreviation IEDGD Contents 1 Description FRC value is transferred to ICRD on the rising edge of input capture input D (IHI signal) FRC is incremented on internal clock: o/8 FRC clearing is disabled ICRD is set to the operating mode in which OCRDM is used 1 and 0 TCSR in FRT TCOR in FRT 0 7 CKS1, CKS0 CCLRA ICRDMS OCRDM7 to 0 01 0 1 OCRDM in FRT 7 to 0 H'01 to H'FF Specifies the period during which ICRD operation is masked IHI signal (without 2fH modification) IHI signal (with 2fH modification) Mask interval ICRD + OCRDM x 2 ICRD + OCRDM FRC ICRD Figure 13.6 2fH Modification Timing Chart 328 13.3.5 IVI Signal Fall Modification and IHI Synchronization By using the timer connection TMR1, the fall of the IVI signal can be shifted backward by the specified number of IHI signal waveforms. Also, the fall of the IVI signal can be synchronized with the rise of the IHI signal. To perform 8-bit timer divided waveform period measurement, TCNT in TMR1 is set to count external clock (IHI signal) pulses, and to be cleared on the rising edge of the external reset signal (inverse of the IVI signal). The number of IHI signal pulses until the fall of the IVI signal is written in TCORB. Since the IVI signal supplied to the IVO signal selection circuit is normally set on the rise of the IVI signal and reset on the fall, its waveform is the same as that of the original IVI signal. When fall modification is selected, a reset is performed on a TMR1 TCORB compare-match. The fall of the waveform generated in this way can be synchronized with the rise of the IHI signal, regardless of whether or not fall modification is selected. Examples of TMR1 TCORB, TCR, and TCSR settings are shown in table 13.7, and the fall modification/IHI synchronization timing chart is shown in figure 13.7. Table 13.7 Examples of TCORB, TCR, and TCSR Settings Register TCR in TMR1 Bit(s) 7 6 5 4 and 3 Abbreviation CMIEB CMIEA OVIE CCLR1, CCLR0 CKS2 to CKS0 OS3 to OS0 Contents 0 0 0 11 TCNT is cleared by the rising edge of the external reset signal (inverse of the IVI signal) TCNT is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock (IHI signal) Not changed by compare-match B; output inverted by compare-match A (toggle output) or when TCORB < TCORA, 1 output on compare-match B, 0 output on comparematch A Compare-match on the 4th (example) rise of the IHI signal after the rise of the inverse of the IVI signal Description Interrupts due to compare-match and overflow are disabled 2 to 0 TCSR in TMR1 3 to 0 101 0011 1001 TOCRB in TMR1 H'03 (example) 329 IHI signal IVI signal (PDC signal) IVO signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) IVO signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) IVO signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) TCNT 0 1 2 3 4 5 TCNT = TCORB (3) Figure 13.7 Fall Modification/IHI Synchronization Timing Chart 13.3.6 Internal Synchronization Signal Generation (IHG/IVG/CL4 Signal Generation) By using the timer connection FRT and TMRY, it is possible to automatically generate internal signals (IHG and IVG signals) corresponding to the IHI and IVI signals. As the IHG signal is synchronized with the rise of the IVG signal, the IHG signal period must be made a divisor of the IVG signal period in order to keep it constant. In addition, the CL4 signal can be generated in synchronization with the IHG signal. The contents of OCRA in the FRT are updated by the automatic addition of the contents of OCRAR or OCRAF, alternately, each time a compare-match occurs. A value corresponding to the 0 interval of the IVG signal is written in OCRAR, and a value corresponding to the 1 interval of the IVG signal is written in OCRAF. The IVG signal is set by a compare-match after an OCRAR addition, and reset by a compare-match after an OCRAF addition. The IHG signal is the TMRY 8-bit timer output. TMRY is set to count internal clock pulses, and to be cleared on TCORA compare-match, to fix the period and set the timer output. TCORB is set so as to reset the timer output. The IVG signal is connected as the TMRY reset input (TMRI), and the rise of the IVG signal can be treated in the same way as a TCORA compare-match. The CL4 signal is a waveform that rises within one system clock period after the fall of the IHG signal, and has a 1 interval of 6 system clock periods. Examples of settings of TCORA, TCORB, TCR, and TCSR in TMRY, and OCRAR, OCRAF, and TCR in the FRT, are shown in table 13.8, and the IHG signal/IVG signal timing chart is shown in figure 13.8. 330 Table 13.8 Examples of OCRAR, OCRAF, TOCR, TCORA, TCORB, TCR, and TCSR Settings Register TCR in TMRY Bit(s) 7 6 5 4 and 3 2 to 0 TCSR in TMRY TOCRA in TMRY TOCRB in TMRY TCR in FRT OCRAR in FRT 1 and 0 CKS1, CKS0 3 to 0 Abbreviation CMIEB CMIEA OVIE CCLR1, CCLR0 Contents 0 0 0 01 TCNT is cleared by compare-match A TCNT is incremented on internal clock: o/4 0 output on compare-match B 1 output on compare-match A IHG signal period = o x 256 IHG signal 1 interval = o x 16 FRC is incremented on internal clock: o/8 IVG signal 0 interval = o x 262016 IVG signal 1 interval = o x 128 OCRA is set to the operating mode in which OCRAR and OCRAF are used IVG signal period = o x 262144 (1024 times IHG signal) Description Interrupts due to compare-match and overflow are disabled CKS2 to CKS0 001 OS3 to OS0 0110 H'3F (example) H'03 (example) 01 H'7FEF (example) H'000F (example) OCRAF in FRT TOCR in FRT 6 OCRAMS 1 331 IVG signal OCRA (1) = OCRA (0) + OCRAF OCRA FRC OCRA (2) = OCRA (1) + OCRAR OCRA (3) = OCRA (2) + OCRAF OCRA (4) = OCRA (3) + OCRAR 6 system clocks CL4 signal IHG signal TCORA TCORB TCNT 6 system clocks 6 system clocks Figure 13.8 IVG Signal/IHG Signal/CL4 Signal Timing Chart 332 13.3.7 HSYNCO Output With the HSYNCO output, the meaning of the signal source to be selected and use or non-use of modification varies according to the IHI signal source and the waveform required by external circuitry. The meaning of the HSYNCO output in each mode is shown in table 13.9. Table 13.9 Meaning of HSYNCO Output in Each Mode Mode No signal IHI Signal HFBACKI input IHO Signal IHI signal (without 2fH modification) IHI signal (with 2fH modification) CL1 signal IHG signal S-on-G mode CSYNCI input IHI signal (without 2fH modification) IHI signal (with 2fH modification) CL1 signal Meaning of IHO Signal HFBACKI input is output directly Meaningless unless there is a double-frequency part in the HFBACKI input HFBACKI input 1 interval is changed before output Internal synchronization signal is output CSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) is output directly Double-frequency part of CSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) is eliminated before output CSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) horizontal synchronization signal part is separated before output Internal synchronization signal is output HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) is output directly Double-frequency part of HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) is eliminated before output HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) horizontal synchronization signal part is separated before output Internal synchronization signal is output HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) is output directly Meaningless unless there is a double-frequency part in the HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) 1 interval is changed before output Internal synchronization signal is output IHG signal Composite HSYNCI mode input IHI signal (without 2fH modification) IHI signal (with 2fH modification) CL1 signal IHG signal Separate mode HSYNCI input IHI signal (without 2fH modification) IHI signal (with 2fH modification) CL1 signal IHG signal 333 13.3.8 VSYNCO Output With the VSYNCO output, the meaning of the signal source to be selected and use or non-use of modification varies according to the IVI signal source and the waveform required by external circuitry. The meaning of the VSYNCO output in each mode is shown in table 13.10. Table 13.10 Meaning of VSYNCO Output in Each Mode Mode No signal IVI Signal VFBACKI input IVO Signal IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) IVG signal PDC signal S-on-G mode or composite mode IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) Meaning of IVO Signal VFBACKI input is output directly Meaningless unless VFBACKI input is synchronized with HFBACKI input VFBACKI input fall is modified before output VFBACKI input fall is modified and signal is synchronized with HFBACKI input before output Internal synchronization signal is output CSYNCI/HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) vertical synchronization signal part is separated before output CSYNCI/HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) vertical synchronization signal part is separated, and signal is synchronized with CSYNCI/HSYNCI input before output CSYNCI/HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) vertical synchronization signal part is separated, and fall is modified before output CSYNCI/HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) vertical synchronization signal part is separated, fall is modified, and signal is synchronized with CSYNCI/HSYNCI input before output Internal synchronization signal is output IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) IVG signal 334 Mode Separate mode IVI Signal VSYNCI input IVO Signal IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) IVG signal Meaning of IVO Signal VSYNCI input (vertical synchronization signal) is output directly Meaningless unless VSYNCI input (vertical synchronization signal) is synchronized with HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) VSYNCI input (vertical synchronization signal) fall is modified before output VSYNCI input (vertical synchronization signal) fall is modified and signal is synchronized with HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) before output Internal synchronization signal is output 13.3.9 CBLANK Output Using the signals generated/selected with timer connection, it is possible to generate a waveform based on the composite synchronization signal (blanking waveform). One kind of blanking waveform is generated by combining HFBACKI and VFBACKI inputs, with the phase polarity made positive by means of bits HFINV and VFINV in TCONRI, with the IVO signal. The composition logic is shown in figure 13.9. HFBACKI input (positive) VFBACKI input (positive) Falling edge sensing Rising edge sensing IVO signal (positive) Reset Q Set CBLANK signal (positive) Figure 13.9 CBLANK Output Waveform Generation 335 336 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.1 Overview These series have an on-chip watchdog timer/watch timer with two channels (WDT0, WDT1). The WDT outputs an overflow signal if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, allowing it to overflow. At the same time, the WDT can also generate an internal reset signal or internal NMI interrupt signal. When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. 14.1.1 Features * Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode WOVI interrupt generation in interval timer mode * Internal reset or internal interrupt generated when the timer counter overflows Choice of internal reset or NMI interrupt generation in watchdog timer mode * Choice of 8 (WDT0) or 16 (WDT1) counter input clocks Maximum WDT interval: system clock period x 131072 x 256 Subclock can be selected for the WDT1 input counter Maximum interval when the subclock is selected: subclock period x 256 x 256 337 14.1.2 Block Diagram Figures 14.1 (a) and (b) show block diagrams of WDT0 and WDT1. WOVI (interrupt request signal) Internal NMI interrupt request signal*2 Internal reset signal*1 Interrupt control Reset control Overflow Clock Clock select o/2 o/64 o/128 o/512 o/2048 o/8192 o/32768 o/131072 Internal clock source Internal bus TCNT TCSR Module bus Bus interface WDT Legend: TCSR: Timer control/status register TCNT: Timer counter Notes: 1. For the internal reset signal, the reset of the WDT that overflowed first has priority. 2. The internal NMI interrupt request signal can be output independently by either WDT0 or WDT1. The interrupt controller does not distinguish between NMI interrupt requests from WDT0 and WDT1. Figure 14.1 (a) Block Diagram of WDT0 338 WOVI (interrupt request signal) Internal NMI (interrupt request signal)*2 Internal reset signal*1 Interrupt control Reset control Overflow Clock Clock select o/2 o/64 o/128 o/512 o/2048 o/8192 o/32768 o/131072 Internal clock source oSUB/2 oSUB/4 oSUB/8 oSUB/16 oSUB/32 oSUB/64 oSUB/128 oSUB/256 TCNT TCSR Module bus Bus interface WDT Legend: TCSR: Timer control/status register TCNT: Timer counter Notes: 1. For the internal reset signal, the reset of the WDT that overflowed first has priority. 2. The internal NMI interrupt request signal can be output independently by either WDT0 or WDT1. The interrupt controller does not distinguish between NMI interrupt requests from WDT0 and WDT1. Figure 14.1 (b) Block Diagram of WDT1 14.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 14.1 describes the WDT input pin. Table 14.1 WDT Pin Name External subclock input pin Symbol EXCL I/O Input Function WDT1 prescaler counter input clock Internal bus 339 14.1.4 Register Configuration The WDT has four registers, as summarized in table 14.2. These registers control clock selection, WDT mode switching, the reset signal, etc. Table 14.2 WDT Registers Address* 1 Channel 0 Name Timer control/status register 0 Timer counter 0 1 Timer control/status register 1 Timer counter 1 Common System control register Abbreviation R/W TCSR0 TCNT0 TCSR1 TCNT1 SYSCR R/(W)* R/W R/(W)* R/W R/W 3 3 Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'09 Write*2 H'FFA8 H'FFA8 H'FFEA H'FFEA H'FFC4 Read H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'FFEA H'FFEB H'FFC4 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For details of write operations, see section 14.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 3. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 14.2 14.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Timer Counter (TCNT) 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter. When the TME bit is set to 1 in TCSR, TCNT starts counting pulses generated from the internal clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR. When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the OVF flag in TCSR is set to 1, and an internal reset, NMI interrupt, interval timer interrupt (WOVI), etc., can be generated, according to the mode selected by the WT/IT bit and RST/NMI bit. TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, or when the TME bit is cleared to 0. It is not initialized in software standby mode. 340 Note: * The method of writing to TCNT is more complicated than for most other registers, to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 14.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 14.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) * TCSR0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OVF 0 R/(W)* 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 RSTS 0 R/W 3 RST/NMI 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * TCSR1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OVF 0 R/(W)* 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 PSS 0 R/W 3 RST/NMI 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be input to TCNT, and the timer mode. TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Note: * The method of writing to TCSR is more complicated than for most other registers, to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 14.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 341 Bit 7--Overflow Flag (OVF): A status flag that indicates that TCNT has overflowed from H'FF to H'00. Bit 7 OVF 0 Description [Clearing conditions] * * 1 Write 0 in the TME bit Read TCSR when OVF = 1*, then write 0 in OVF (Initial value) [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00) (When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset.) Note: * When OVF flag is polled and the interval timer interrupt is disabled, OVF = 1 must be read at least twice. Bit 6--Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. If used as an interval timer, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when TCNT overflows. If used as a watchdog timer, the WDT generates a reset or NMI interrupt when TCNT overflows. Bit 6 WT/IT 0 1 Description Interval timer: Sends the CPU an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when TCNT overflows (Initial value) Watchdog timer: Generates a reset or NMI interrupt when TCNT overflows Bit 5--Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether TCNT runs or is halted. Bit 5 TME 0 1 Description TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted TCNT counts (Initial value) TCSR0 Bit 4--Reset Select (RSTS): Reserved. This bit should not be set to 1. 342 TCSR1 Bit 4--Prescaler Select (PSS): Selects the input clock source for TCNT in WDT1. For details, see the description of the CKS2 to CKS0 bits below. TCSR1 Bit 4 PSS 0 1 Description TCNT counts o-based prescaler (PSM) divided clock pulses TCNT counts oSUB-based prescaler (PSS) divided clock pulses (Initial value) Bit 3--Reset or NMI (RST/NMI): Specifies whether an internal reset or NMI interrupt is requested on TCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode. Bit 3 RST/NMI 0 1 Description An NMI interrupt is requested An internal reset is requested (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0--Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select an internal clock source, obtained by dividing the system clock (o), or subclock (oSUB) for input to TCNT. * WDT0 input clock selection Bit 2 CKS2 0 Bit 1 CKS1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Clock o/2 (Initial value) o/64 o/128 o/512 o/2048 o/8192 o/32768 o/131072 Description Overflow Period* (when o = 20 MHz) 25.6 s 819.2 s 1.6 ms 6.6 ms 26.2 ms 104.9 ms 419.4 ms 1.68 s Note: * The overflow period is the time from when TCNT starts counting up from H'00 until overflow occurs. 343 * WDT1 input clock selection Bit 4 PSS 0 Bit 2 CKS2 0 Bit 1 CKS1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Clock Description Overflow Period* (when o = 20 MHz and oSUB = 32.768 kHz) o/2 (Initial value) 25.6 s o/64 o/128 o/512 o/2048 o/8192 o/32768 o/131072 oSUB/2 oSUB/4 oSUB/8 oSUB/16 oSUB/32 oSUB/64 oSUB/128 oSUB/256 819.2 s 1.6 ms 6.6 ms 26.2 ms 104.9 ms 419.4 ms 1.68 s 15.6 ms 31.3 ms 62.5 ms 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s Note: * The overflow period is the time from when TCNT starts counting up from H'00 until overflow occurs. 14.2.3 Bit System Control Register (SYSCR) 7 CS2E 0 R/W 6 IOSE 0 R/W 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W 3 XRST 1 R 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 HIE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W Initial value Read/Write Only bit 3 is described here. For details on functions not related to the watchdog timer, see sections 3.2.2 and 5.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. 344 Bit 3--External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow in addition to external reset input. XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset, and when the RST/NMI bit is 1, is cleared to 0 by an internal reset due to watchdog timer overflow. Bit 3 XRST 0 1 Description Reset is generated by an internal reset due to watchdog timer overflow Reset is generated by external reset input (Initial value) 14.2.4 Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer's TCNT and TCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT0): These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to with byte transfer instructions. Figure 14.2 shows the format of data written to TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. For a write to TCNT, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. For a write to TCSR, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'A5 and the lower byte must contain the write data. This transfers the write data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR. TCNT write 15 Address: H'FFA8 H'5A 87 Write data 0 TCSR write 15 Address: H'FFA8 H'A5 87 Write data 0 Figure 14.2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT0) Reading TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT0): These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read addresses are H'FFA8 for TCSR, and H'FFA9 for TCNT. 345 14.3 14.3.1 Operation Watchdog Timer Operation To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT and TME bits in TCSR to 1. Software must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before overflow occurs. This ensures that TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating normally. If TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or other error, an internal reset or NMI interrupt request is generated. When the RST/NMI bit is set to 1, the chip is reset for 518 system clock periods (518 o) by a counter overflow. This is illustrated in figure 14.3. When the RST/NMI bit cleared to 0, an NMI interrupt request is generated by a counter overflow. An internal reset request from the watchdog timer and reset input from the RES pin are handled via the same vector. The reset source can be identified from the value of the XRST bit in SYSCR. If a reset caused by an input signal from the RES pin and a reset caused by WDT overflow occur simultaneously, the RES pin reset has priority, and the XRST bit in SYSCR is set to 1. An NMI interrupt request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin are handled via the same vector. Simultaneous handling of a watchdog timer NMI interrupt request and an NMI pin interrupt request must therefore be avoided. TCNT value Overflow H'FF H'00 WT/IT = 1 TME = 1 H'00 written to TCNT OVF = 1* WT/IT = 1 H'00 written TME = 1 to TCNT Time Internal reset signal 518 system clock periods Timer mode select bit Timer enable bit Overflow flag Cleared to 0 by an internal reset when OVF is set to 1. XRST is cleared to 0. WT/IT: TME: OVF: Note: * Figure 14.3 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode 346 14.3.2 Interval Timer Operation To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear the WT/IT bit in TCSR to 0 and set the TME bit to 1. An interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time TCNT overflows, provided that the WDT is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 14.4. This function can be used to generate interrupt requests at regular intervals. TCNT count H'FF Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow H'00 WT/IT = 0 TME = 1 WOVI WOVI WOVI WOVI Time Legend: WOVI: Interval timer interrupt request generation Figure 14.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode 347 14.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) The OVF bit in TCSR is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the same time, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 14.5. If NMI request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, when TCNT overflows the OVF bit in TCSR is set to 1 and at the same time an NMI interrupt is requested. o TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal (internal signal) OVF Figure 14.5 Timing of OVF Setting 14.4 Interrupts During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. When NMI interrupt request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, an overflow generates an NMI interrupt request. 348 14.5 14.5.1 Usage Notes Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 14.6 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 o Address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 14.6 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment 14.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0 If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value of bits CKS2 to CKS0. 14.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode. 349 14.5.4 Counter Value in Transitions between High-Speed Mode, Subactive Mode, and Watch Mode If the mode is switched between high-speed mode and subactive mode or between high-speed mode and watch mode when WDT1 is used as a realtime clock counter, an error will occur in the counter value when the internal clock is switched. When the mode is switched from high-speed mode to subactive mode or watch mode, the increment timing is delayed by approximately 2 or 3 clock cycles when the WDT1 control clock is switched from the main clock to the subclock. Also, since the main clock oscillator is halted during subclock operation, when the mode is switched from watch mode or subactive mode to high-speed mode, the clock is not supplied until internal oscillation stabilizes. As a result, after oscillation is started, counter incrementing is halted during the oscillation stabilization time set by bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, and there is a corresponding discrepancy in the counter value. Caution is therefore required when using WDT1 as the realtime clock counter. No error occurs in the counter value while WDT1 is operating in the same mode. 14.5.5 OVF Flag Clear Condition To clear OVF flag in WOVI handling routine, read TCSR when OVF=1, then write with 0 to OVF, as stated above. When WOVI is masked and OVF flag is poling, if contention between OVF flag set and TCSR read is occurred, OVF=1 is read but OVF can not be cleared by writing with 0 to OVF. In this case, reading TCSR when OVF=1 two times meet the requirements of OVF clear condition. Please read TCSR when OVF=1 two times before writing with 0 to OVF. LOOP BTST.B BEQ MOV.B MOV.W MOV.W #7,@TCSR LOOP @TCSR,R0L #H'A521,R0 R0,@TCSR ; ; ; ; ; OVF flag read if OVF=1, exit from loop OVF=1 read again OVF flag clear : 350 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) 15.1 Overview These series are equipped with a serial communication interface (SCI) with two independent channels. The SCI can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function). 15.1.1 Features SCI features are listed below. * Choice of asynchronous or synchronous serial communication mode Asynchronous mode Serial data communication is executed using an asynchronous system in which synchronization is achieved character by character Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA) A multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data communication with a number of processors Choice of 12 serial data transfer formats Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Even, odd, or none Multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0 Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in case of a framing error Synchronous mode Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous communication function One serial data transfer format Data length: 8 bits Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected 351 * Full-duplex communication capability The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data * LSB-first or MSB-first transfer can be selected This selection can be made regardless of the communication mode (with the exception of 7bit data transfer in asynchronous mode)* Note: * LSB-first transfer is used in the examples in this section. * Built-in baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected * Choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from SCK pin * Capability of transmit and receive clock output The P 27/SCK1 is CMOS type output The P 52/SCK0 pin is an NMOS push-pull type output in the H8S/2128 series and a CMOS output in the H8S/2124 series (when the P52/SCK0 pin is used as an output in the H8S/2128 series, external pull-up resistor must be connected in order to output high level) * Four interrupt sources Four interrupt sources (transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive error) that can issue requests independently The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive-data-full interrupt can activate the data transfer controller (DTC) to execute data transfer 352 15.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI. Bus interface Module data bus Internal data bus RDR TDR RxD RSR TSR SCMR SSR SCR SMR Transmission/ reception control BRR o Baud rate generator o/4 o/16 o/64 Clock TxD Parity generation Parity check SCK External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI Legend: RSR: RDR: TSR: TDR: SMR: SCR: SSR: SCMR: BRR: Receive shift register Receive data register Transmit shift register Transmit data register Serial mode register Serial control register Serial status register Serial interface mode register Bit rate register Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of SCI 15.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 15.1 shows the serial pins used by the SCI. Table 15.1 SCI Pins Channel 0 Pin Name Serial clock pin 0 Receive data pin 0 Transmit data pin 0 1 Serial clock pin 1 Receive data pin 1 Symbol* SCK0 RxD0 TxD0 SCK1 RxD1 I/O I/O Input Output I/O Input Function SCI0 clock input/output SCI0 receive data input SCI0 transmit data output SCI1 clock input/output SCI1 receive data input Transmit data pin 1 TxD1 Output SCI1 transmit data output Note: * The abbreviations SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text, omitting the channel number. 353 15.1.4 Register Configuration The SCI has the internal registers shown in table 15.2. These registers are used to specify asynchronous mode or synchronous mode, the data format, and the bit rate, and to control the transmitter/receiver. Table 15.2 SCI Registers Channel 0 Name Serial mode register 0 Bit rate register 0 Serial control register 0 Transmit data register 0 Serial status register 0 Receive data register 0 Abbreviation SMR0 BRR0 SCR0 TDR0 SSR0 RDR0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* R R/W R/W R/W 2 2 Initial Value Address* 1 H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'84 H'00 H'F2 H'00 H'FF H'00 H'FF H'84 H'00 H'F2 H'3F H'FF H'FFD8* 3 H'FFD9* 3 H'FFDA H'FFDB H'FFDC H'FFDD H'FFDE* 3 H'FF83* 3 H'FF89* 3 H'FF8A H'FF8B H'FF8C H'FF8D H'FF8E* 3 H'FF86 H'FF87 Serial interface mode register 0 SCMR0 1 Serial mode register 1 Bit rate register 1 Serial control register 1 Transmit data register 1 Serial status register 1 Receive data register 1 SMR1 BRR1 SCR1 TDR1 SSR1 RDD1 Serial interface mode register 1 SCMR1 Common Module stop control register MSTPCRH MSTPCRL Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 3. Some serial communication interface registers are assigned to the same addresses as other registers. In this case, register selection is performed by the IICE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR). 354 15.2 15.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Receive Shift Register (RSR) 7 -- 6 -- 5 -- 4 -- 3 -- 2 -- 1 -- 0 -- Read/Write RSR is a register used to receive serial data. The SCI sets serial data input from the RxD pin in RSR in the order received, starting with the LSB (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU. 15.2.2 Bit Initial value Read/Write Receive Data Register (RDR) 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R RDR is a register that stores received serial data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. After this, RSR is receive-enabled. Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations can be performed. RDR is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. 355 15.2.3 Bit Transmit Shift Register (TSR) 7 -- 6 -- 5 -- 4 -- 3 -- 2 -- 1 -- 0 -- Read/Write TSR is a register used to transmit serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then sends the data to the TxD pin starting with the LSB (bit 0). When transmission of one byte is completed, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and transmission started, automatically. However, data transfer from TDR to TSR is not performed if the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU. 15.2.4 Bit Initial value Read/Write Transmit Data Register (TDR) 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission can be carried out by writing the next transmit data to TDR during serial transmission of the data in TSR. TDR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. 356 15.2.5 Bit Serial Mode Register (SMR) 7 C/A 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write SMR is an 8-bit register used to set the SCI's serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source. SMR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. SMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7--Communication Mode (C/A): Selects asynchronous mode or synchronous mode as the SCI operating mode. Bit 7 C/A 0 1 Description Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode (Initial value) Bit 6--Character Length (CHR): Selects 7 or 8 bits as the data length in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used regardless of the CHR setting. Bit 6 CHR 0 1 Description 8-bit data 7-bit data* (Initial value) Note: * When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted, and LSB-first/MSBfirst selection is not available. Bit 5--Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, selects whether or not parity bit addition is performed in transmission, and parity bit checking in reception. In synchronous mode, or when a multiprocessor format is used, parity bit addition and checking is not performed, regardless of the PE bit setting. 357 Bit 5 PE 0 1 Description Parity bit addition and checking disabled Parity bit addition and checking enabled* (Initial value) Note: * When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit is added to transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is checked for the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit. Bit 4--Parity Mode (O/E): Selects either even or odd parity for use in parity addition and checking. The O/E bit setting is only valid when the PE bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and checking, in asynchronous mode. The O/E bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, when parity bit addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor format is used. Bit 4 O/E 0 1 Description Even parity* 1 Odd parity* 2 (Initial value) Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is even. 2. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is odd. Bit 3--Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects 1 or 2 bits as the stop bit length in asynchronous mode. The STOP bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode. If synchronous mode is set the STOP bit setting is invalid since stop bits are not added. Bit 3 STOP 0 1 Description 1 stop bit* 1 2 stop bits* 2 (Initial value) Notes: 1. In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end of a transmit character before it is sent. 2. In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end of a transmit character before it is sent. 358 In reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit character. Bit 2--Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects multiprocessor format. When multiprocessor format is selected, the PE bit and O/E bit parity settings are invalid. The MP bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode; it is invalid in synchronous mode. For details of the multiprocessor communication function, see section 15.3.3, Multiprocessor Communication Function. Bit 2 MP 0 1 Description Multiprocessor function disabled Multiprocessor format selected (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0--Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. The clock source can be selected from o, o/4, o/16, and o/64, according to the setting of bits CKS1 and CKS0. For the relation between the clock source, the bit rate register setting, and the baud rate, see section 15.2.8, Bit Rate Register. Bit 1 CKS1 0 Bit 0 CKS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description o clock o/4 clock o/16 clock o/64 clock (Initial value) 15.2.6 Bit Serial Control Register (SCR) 7 TIE 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W 0 CKE0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write SCR is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations, serial clock output in asynchronous mode, and interrupt requests, and selection of the serial clock source. 359 SCR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. SCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7--Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request generation when serial transmit data is transferred from TDR to TSR and the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1. Bit 7 TIE 0 1 Description Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request disabled* Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request enabled (Initial value) Note: * TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0. Bit 6--Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request generation when serial receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR and the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1. Bit 6 RIE 0 1 Description Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request disabled* (Initial value) Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request enabled Note: * RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0. Bit 5--Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of serial transmission by the SCI. Bit 5 TE 0 1 Description Transmission disabled* 1 Transmission enabled* 2 (Initial value) Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR is fixed at 1. 2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and the TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0. SMR setting must be performed to decide the transmission format before setting the TE bit to 1. 360 Bit 4--Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of serial reception by the SCI. Bit 4 RE 0 1 Description Reception disabled* 1 Reception enabled* 2 (Initial value) Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states. 2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode. SMR setting must be performed to decide the reception format before setting the RE bit to 1. Bit 3--Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. The MPIE bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode when receiving with the MP bit in SMR set to 1. The MPIE bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0. Bit 3 MPIE 0 Description Multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed) [Clearing conditions] * * 1 When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 When data with MPB = 1 is received (Initial value) Multiprocessor interrupts enabled* Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. Note: * When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR to RDR, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR , is not performed. When receive data with MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting is enabled. Bit 2--Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request generation if there is no valid transmit data in TDR when the MSB is transmitted. 361 Bit 2 TEIE 0 1 Description Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request disabled* Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request enabled* (Initial value) Note: * TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0. Bits 1 and 0--Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits are used to select the SCI clock source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. The combination of the CKE1 and CKE0 bits determines whether the SCK pin functions as an I/O port, the serial clock output pin, or the serial clock input pin. The setting of the CKE0 bit, however, is only valid for internal clock operation (CKE1 = 0) in asynchronous mode. The CKE0 bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, and in the case of external clock operation (CKE1 = 1). The setting of bits CKE1 and CKE0 must be carried out before the SCI's operating mode is determined using SMR. For details of clock source selection, see table 15.9 in section 15.3, Operation. Bit 1 CKE1 0 Bit 0 CKE0 0 Description Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 1 0 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Internal clock/SCK pin functions as I/O port* 1 Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock output* 1 Internal clock/SCK pin functions as clock output* 2 Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock output External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input* 3 External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock input External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input* 3 External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock input Notes: 1. Initial value 2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate. 3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. 362 15.2.7 Bit Serial Status Register (SSR) 7 TDRE 1 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 FER 0 R/(W)* 3 PER 0 R/(W)* 2 TEND 1 R 1 MPB 0 R 0 MPBT 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. SSR is an 8-bit register containing status flags that indicate the operating status of the SCI, and multiprocessor bits. SSR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. However, 1 cannot be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER. Also note that in order to clear these flags they must be read as 1 beforehand. The TEND flag and MPB flag are read-only flags and cannot be modified. SSR is initialized to H'84 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7--Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that data has been transferred from TDR to TSR and the next serial data can be written to TDR. Bit 7 TDRE 0 Description [Clearing conditions] * * 1 * * When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR (Initial value) When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data can be written to TDR [Setting conditions] 363 Bit 6--Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR. Bit 6 RDRF 0 Description [Clearing conditions] * * 1 When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and reads data from RDR (Initial value) [Setting condition] When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR Note: RDR and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is detected during reception or when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost. Bit 5--Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception, causing abnormal termination. Bit 5 ORER 0 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in ORER after reading ORER = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1*2 Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR, and the data received subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. (Initial value)*1 364 Bit 4--Framing Error (FER): Indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. Bit 4 FER 0 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in FER after reading FER = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the SCI checks the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception ends, and the stop bit is 0 * 2 Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 0; the second stop bit is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the FER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. (Initial value)*1 Bit 3--Parity Error (PER): Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. Bit 3 PER 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in PER after reading PER = 1 [Setting condition] When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR* 2 (Initial value)*1 Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. 365 Bit 2--Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that there is no valid data in TDR when the last bit of the transmit character is sent, and transmission has been ended. The TEND flag is read-only and cannot be modified. Bit 2 TEND 0 Description [Clearing conditions] * * 1 * * When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR (Initial value) When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character [Setting conditions] Bit 1--Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): When reception is performed using a multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data. MPB is a read-only bit, and cannot be modified. Bit 1 MPB 0 1 Description [Clearing condition] When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received [Setting condition] When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received (Initial value)* Note: * Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 with multiprocessor format. Bit 0--Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): When transmission is performed using a multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit data. The MPBT bit setting is invalid when a multiprocessor format is not used, when not transmitting, and in synchronous mode. Bit 0 MPBT 0 1 Description Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted (Initial value) 366 15.2.8 Bit Bit Rate Register (BRR) 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W Initial value Read/Write BRR is an 8-bit register that sets the serial transfer bit rate in accordance with the baud rate generator operating clock selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR. BRR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. BRR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. As baud rate generator control is performed independently for each channel, different values can be set for each channel. Table 15.3 shows sample BRR settings in asynchronous mode, and table 15.4 shows sample BRR settings in synchronous mode. 367 Table 15.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) Operating Frequency o (MHz) o = 2 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -- -- 0.00 -- o = 2.097152 MHz Error (%) o = 2.4576 MHz Error (%) o = 3 MHz Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -2.34 -2.34 -2.34 0.00 -- n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- 0 -- N 141 103 207 103 51 25 12 -- -- 1 -- n 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- N 148 108 217 108 54 26 13 6 -- -- -- n N 174 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 3 -- 1 n N 212 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 4 2 -- -0.04 1 0.21 0.21 0.21 1 0 0 -0.26 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -- 0.00 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -0.70 0 1.14 0 -2.48 0 -2.48 0 -- -- -- 0 -- 0 Operating Frequency o (MHz) o = 3.6864 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 Error (%) 0.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -- 0.00 o = 4 MHz Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -- 0.00 -- o = 4.9152 MHz Error (%) 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 o = 5 MHz Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 1.73 1.73 0.00 1.73 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 N 64 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 5 -- 2 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 -- N 70 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 -- 3 -- n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 86 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 4 3 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 7 4 3 -1.70 0 0.00 0 368 Operating Frequency o (MHz) o = 6 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 Error (%) o = 6.144 MHz Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 o = 7.3728 MHz Error (%) o = 8 MHz Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 -- n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 106 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 5 4 n N 108 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 9 5 4 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- 0 N 130 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 -- 5 n N 141 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 7 -- -0.44 2 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 2 1 1 0 0 0 -0.07 2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 -- 0.00 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -2.34 0 -2.34 0 0.00 0 -2.34 0 Operating Frequency o (MHz) o = 9.8304 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 Error (%) o = 10 MHz Error (%) o = 12 MHz Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 o = 12.288 MHz Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 174 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 9 7 n N 177 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 9 7 n N 212 155 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 11 9 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 N 217 159 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 11 9 -0.26 2 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 -0.25 2 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 2 2 1 1 0 0 -1.36 0 1.73 0.00 1.73 0 0 0 -2.34 0 0.00 0 -1.70 0 0.00 0 -2.34 0 369 Operating Frequency o (MHz) o = 14 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 Error (%) o = 14.7456 MHz Error (%) 0.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 o = 16 MHz Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 0.16 o = 17.2032 MHz Error (%) 0.48 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.20 0.00 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 -- N 248 181 90 181 90 181 90 45 22 13 -- n N 64 191 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 14 11 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 N 70 207 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 15 12 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 75 223 111 223 111 223 111 55 27 16 13 -0.17 3 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 2 2 1 1 0 0 -0.93 0 -0.93 0 0.00 -- 0 0 -1.70 0 0.00 0 Operating Frequency o (MHz) o = 18 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 Error (%) o = 19.6608 MHz Error (%) 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 o = 20 MHz Error (%) -0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 -1.36 0.00 1.73 n 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 79 233 116 233 116 233 116 58 28 17 14 n N 86 255 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 19 15 n 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 19 15 -0.12 3 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 2 2 1 1 0 0 -0.69 0 1.02 0.00 0 0 -1.70 0 0.00 0 -2.34 0 370 Table 15.4 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Synchronous Mode) Operating Frequency o (MHz) Bit Rate (bits/s) 110 250 500 1k 2.5 k 5k 10 k 25 k 50 k 100 k 250 k 500 k 1M 2.5 M 5M n 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o = 2 MHz N 70 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* n -- 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o = 4 MHz N -- 249 124 249 99 199 99 39 19 9 3 1 0* 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 0 0* -- -- -- 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- -- 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 249 124 249 99 199 99 159 79 39 15 7 3 -- -- 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- -- 124 249 124 199 99 49 19 9 4 1 0* n o = 8 MHz N n o = 10 MHz N n o = 16 MHz N n o = 20 MHz N Note: As far as possible, the setting should be made so that the error is no more than 1%. Legend: Blank: Cannot be set. --: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. *: Continuous transfer is not possible. 371 The BRR setting is found from the following equations. Asynchronous mode: N= 64 x 22n-1 xB x 106 - 1 Synchronous mode: N= 8x 22n-1 xB x 106 - 1 Where B: N: o: n: Bit rate (bits/s) BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 N 255) Operating frequency (MHz) Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0 to 3) (See the table below for the relation between n and the clock.) SMR Setting n 0 1 2 3 Clock o o/4 o/16 o/64 CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is found from the following equation: x 106 Error (%) = - 1 x 100 (N + 1) x B x 64 x 22n-1 372 Table 15.5 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. Tables 15.6 and 15.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input. Table 15.5 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) o (MHz) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 19.6608 20 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 62500 65536 76800 93750 115200 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 230400 250000 307200 312500 375000 384000 437500 460800 500000 537600 562500 614400 625000 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 373 Table 15.6 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) o (MHz) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 12 12.288 14 14.7456 16 17.2032 18 19.6608 20 External Input Clock (MHz) 0.5000 0.5243 0.6144 0.7500 0.9216 1.0000 1.2288 1.2500 1.5000 1.5360 1.8432 2.0000 2.4576 2.5000 3.0000 3.0720 3.5000 3.6864 4.0000 4.3008 4.5000 4.9152 5.0000 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 31250 32768 38400 46875 57600 62500 76800 78125 93750 96000 115200 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 218750 230400 250000 268800 281250 307200 312500 374 Table 15.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Synchronous Mode) o (MHz) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 External Input Clock (MHz) 0.3333 0.6667 1.0000 1.3333 1.6667 2.0000 2.3333 2.6667 3.0000 3.3333 Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 333333.3 666666.7 1000000.0 1333333.3 1666666.7 2000000.0 2333333.3 2666666.7 3000000.0 3333333.3 15.2.9 Bit Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR) 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 SDIR 0 R/W 2 SINV 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- 0 SMIF 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write SCMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to select SCI functions. SCMR is initialized to H'F2 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bits 7 to 4--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 3--Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion format. Bit 3 SDIR 0 Description TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first Receive data is stored in RDR LSB-first 1 TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first Receive data is stored in RDR MSB-first (Initial value) 375 Bit 2--Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit(s): parity bit inversion requires inversion of the O/E bit in SMR. Bit 2 SINV 0 Description TDR contents are transmitted without modification Receive data is stored in RDR without modification 1 TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted Receive data is stored in RDR in inverted form (Initial value) Bit 1--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 0--Serial Communication Interface Mode Select (SMIF): Reserved bit. 1 should not be written in this bit. Bit 0 SMIF 0 1 Description Normal SCI mode Reserved mode (Initial value) 15.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When bits MSTP7 and MSTP6 are set to 1, SCI0 and SCI1 operation, respectively, stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 21.5., Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. 376 Bit 7--Module Stop (MSTP7): Specifies the SCI0 module stop mode. Bit 7 MSTP7 0 1 Description SCI0 module stop mode is cleared SCI0 module stop mode is set (Initial value) Bit 6--Module Stop (MSTP6): Specifies the SCI1 module stop mode. Bit 6 MSTP6 0 1 Description SCI1 module stop mode is cleared SCI1 module stop mode is set (Initial value) 15.3 15.3.1 Operation Overview The SCI can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved character by character, and synchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved with clock pulses. Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the transmission format is made using SMR as shown in table 15.8. The SCI clock is determined by a combination of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR, as shown in table 15.9. Asynchronous Mode * Data length: Choice of 7 or 8 bits * Choice of parity addition, multiprocessor bit addition, and addition of 1 or 2 stop bits (the combination of these parameters determines the transfer format and character length) * Detection of framing, parity, and overrun errors, and breaks, during reception * Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source When internal clock is selected: The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a clock with the same frequency as the bit rate can be output When external clock is selected: 377 A clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate must be input (the built-in baud rate generator is not used) Synchronous Mode * Transfer format: Fixed 8-bit data * Detection of overrun errors during reception * Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source When internal clock is selected: The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a serial clock is output off-chip When external clock is selected: The built-in baud rate generator is not used, and the SCI operates on the input serial clock Table 15.8 SMR Settings and Serial Transfer Format Selection SMR Settings Bit 7 C/A 0 Bit 6 CHR 0 Bit 2 MP 0 Bit 5 PE 0 Bit 3 STOP 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 -- -- 1 -- -- 1 -- -- -- 0 1 0 1 -- Synchronous mode 8-bit data No Asynchronous mode (multiprocessor format) 7-bit data 8-bit data Yes No Yes 7-bit data No Mode Asynchronous mode Yes SCI Transfer Format Multiprocessor Bit No Data Length 8-bit data Parity Bit No Stop Bit Length 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits 1 bit 2 bits None 378 Table 15.9 SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection SMR Bit 7 C/A 0 SCR Setting Bit 1 CKE1 0 Bit 0 CKE0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Synchronous mode Internal Mode Asynchronous mode Clock Source Internal SCI Transfer Clock SCK Pin Function SCI does not use SCK pin Outputs clock with same frequency as bit rate External Inputs clock with frequency of 16 times the bit rate Outputs serial clock External Inputs serial clock 15.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, characters are sent or received, each preceded by a start bit indicating the start of communication and followed by one or two stop bits indicating the end of communication. Serial communication is thus carried out with synchronization established on a character-bycharacter basis. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. Figure 15.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. One serial communication character consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSBfirst order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally one or two stop bits (high level). In asynchronous mode, the SCI performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in reception. The SCI samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times the length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit. 379 Idle state (mark state) 1 Serial data 0 Start bit 1 bit LSB D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 MSB D7 0/1 1 1 1 Transmit/receive data 7 or 8 bits Parity Stop bit(s) bit 1 bit, or none 1 or 2 bits One unit of transfer data (character or frame) Figure 15.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) 380 Data Transfer Format: Table 15.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12 transfer formats can be selected by settings in SMR. Table 15.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) SMR Settings CHR 0 PE 0 MP 0 STOP 0 1 S 2 Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 STOP 11 12 8-bit data 0 0 0 1 S 8-bit data STOP STOP 0 1 0 0 S 8-bit data P STOP 0 1 0 1 S 8-bit data P STOP STOP 1 0 0 0 S 7-bit data STOP 1 0 0 1 S 7-bit data STOP STOP 1 1 0 0 S 7-bit data P STOP 1 1 0 1 S 7-bit data P STOP STOP 0 -- 1 0 S 8-bit data MPB STOP 0 -- 1 1 S 8-bit data MPB STOP STOP 1 -- 1 0 S 7-bit data MPB STOP 1 -- 1 1 S 7-bit data MPB STOP STOP Legend: S: Start bit STOP: Stop bit P: Parity bit MPB: Multiprocessor bit 381 Clock: Either an internal clock generated by the built-in baud rate generator or an external clock input at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI's serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. For details of SCI clock source selection, see table 15.9. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is at the center of each transmit data bit, as shown in figure 15.3. 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1 1 frame Figure 15.3 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) Data Transfer Operations SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode): Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. When an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during operation, including initialization, since operation is uncertain. 382 Figure 15.4 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart. [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0. When the clock is selected in asynchronous mode, it is output immediately after SCR settings are made. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR. [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. This is not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used. [4] Start initialization Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE, RE bits 0) [1] Set data transfer format in SMR and SCMR Set value in BRR Wait [2] [3] No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits Figure 15.4 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart 383 Serial Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 15.5 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission. The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission. Initialization Start transmission [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, one frame of 1s is output and transmission is enabled. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set DDR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin to 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0. No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes No Break output? Yes Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1 [4] Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 Figure 15.5 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart 384 In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order. a. Start bit: One 0-bit is output. b. Transmit data: 8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order. c. Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: One parity bit (even or odd parity), or one multiprocessor bit is output. A format in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. d. Stop bit(s): One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output. e. Mark state: 1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent. 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. 385 Figure 15.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 1 1 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt Data written to TDR and TXI interrupt request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in request generated TXI interrupt handling routine TEI interrupt request generated 1 frame Figure 15.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) 386 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 15.7 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception. The following procedure should be used for serial data reception. [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. Initialization Start reception [1] [2] [3] Receive error handling and break detection: Read ORER, PER, and If a receive error occurs, read the [2] FER flags in SSR ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error Yes handling, ensure that the ORER, PERFERORER= 1? PER, and FER flags are all [3] cleared to 0. Reception cannot No Error handling be resumed if any of these flags (Continued on next page) are set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the value of [4] Read RDRF flag in SSR the input port corresponding to the RxD pin. No RDRF= 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 [4] SCI status check and receive data read : Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the stop bit for the current frame is received, read the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and the RDR value is read. Figure 15.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart 387 [3] Error handling No ORER = 1? Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1? Yes Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 No PER = 1? Yes Parity error handling Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 15.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (cont) 388 In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the transmission line, and if a 0 stop bit is detected, performs internal synchronization and starts reception. 2. The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order. 3. The parity bit and stop bit are received. After receiving these bits, the SCI carries out the following checks. Parity check: The SCI checks whether the number of 1 bits in the receive data agrees with the parity (even or odd) set in the O/E bit in SMR. Stop bit check: The SCI checks whether the stop bit is 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first is checked. Status check: The SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0, indicating that the receive data can be transferred from RSR to RDR. If all the above checks are passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR. If a receive error* is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 15.11. Note: * Subsequent receive operations cannot be performed when a receive error has occurred. Also note that the RDRF flag is not set to 1 in reception, and so the error flags must be cleared to 0. 4. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request is generated. Also, if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the ORER, PER, or FER flag changes to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is generated. 389 Table 15.11 Receive Errors and Conditions for Occurrence Receive Error Overrun error Abbreviation ORER Occurrence Condition Data Transfer When the next data reception is Receive data is not completed while the RDRF flag transferred from RSR to RDR in SSR is set to 1 When the stop bit is 0 Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR Framing error Parity error FER PER When the received data differs Receive data is transferred from the parity (even or odd) set from RSR to RDR in SMR Figure 15.8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode. Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 0 1 1 Idle state (mark state) RDRF FER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ERI interrupt request generated by framing error 1 frame Figure 15.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) 390 15.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function The multiprocessor communication function performs serial communication using a multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data, in asynchronous mode. Use of this function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors sharing transmission lines. When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. The transmitting station first sends the ID of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. The receiving station skips the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does not match continue to skip the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. In this way, data communication is carried out among a number of processors. Figure 15.9 shows an example of inter-processor communication using a multiprocessor format. Data Transfer Format: There are four data transfer formats. When a multiprocessor format is specified, the parity bit specification is invalid. For details, see table 15.10. Clock: See the section on asynchronous mode. 391 Transmitting station Serial communication line Receiving station A (ID = 01) Serial data Receiving station B (ID = 02) Receiving station C (ID = 03) Receiving station D (ID = 04) H'01 (MPB = 1) ID transmission cycle: receiving station specification H'AA (MPB = 0) Data transmission cycle: data transmission to receiving station specified by ID Legend: MPB: Multiprocessor bit Figure 15.9 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) Data Transfer Operations Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission: Figure 15.10 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data transmission. 392 Initialization Start transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, one frame of 1s is output and transmission is enabled. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. Set the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR Clear TDRE flag to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes No Break output? Yes [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is [3] possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmitdata-empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set the port DDR to [4] 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0. Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1 Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 Figure 15.10 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart 393 In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order. a. Start bit: One 0-bit is output. b. Transmit data: 8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order. c. Multiprocessor bit One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output. d. Stop bit(s): One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output. e. Mark state: 1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent. 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is generated. 394 Figure 15.11 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission using a multiprocessor format. Multiprocessor Stop bit bit D7 0/1 1 1 Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Multiproces- Stop 1 sor bit bit 0/1 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated Data written to TDR and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt handling routine TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated 1 frame Figure 15.11 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception: Figure 15.12 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial reception. The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data reception. 395 Initialization Start reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] ID reception cycle: Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1. [3] SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and compare it with this station's ID. If the data is not this station's ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the data is this station's ID, clear the RDRF flag to 0. [4] SCI status check and data reception: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the data in RDR. [5] Receive error handling and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error handling, ensure that the ORER and FER flags are both cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if either of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value. Read MPIE bit in SCR Read ORER and FER flags in SSR [2] Yes FERORER = 1? No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR No This station's ID? Yes Read ORER and FER flags in SSR Yes FERORER = 1? No Read RDRF flag in SSR [4] No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] Error handling (Continued on next page) Figure 15.12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart 396 [5] Error handling No ORER = 1? Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1? Yes Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 15.12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (cont) 397 Figure 15.13 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception. Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data (ID1) MPB D7 1 Stop bit 1 Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data (Data1) MPB D7 0 Stop bit 1 1 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ID1 If not this station's ID, RXI interrupt request is not generated, and RDR MPIE bit is set to 1 retains its state again (a) Data does not match station's ID 1 Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data (ID2) MPB D7 1 Stop bit 1 Start bit 0 D0 Data (Data2) MPB D1 D7 0 Stop bit 1 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value ID1 MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ID2 Matches this station's ID, so reception continues, and data is received in RXI interrupt handling routine Data2 MPIE bit set to 1 again (b) Data matches station's ID Figure 15.13 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) 398 15.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode In synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses, making it suitable for high-speed serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. Figure 15.14 shows the general format for synchronous serial communication. One unit of transfer data (character or frame) * Serial clock LSB Serial data Don't care Note: * High except in continuous transfer Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 MSB Bit 7 Don't care * Figure 15.14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication In synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data is guaranteed valid at the rising edge of the serial clock. In synchronous serial communication, one character consists of data output starting with the LSB and ending with the MSB. After the MSB is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock. 399 Data Transfer Format: A fixed 8-bit data format is used. No parity or multiprocessor bits are added. Clock: Either an internal clock generated by the built-in baud rate generator or an external serial clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. For details on SCI clock source selection, see table 15.9. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high. When only receive operations are performed, however, the serial clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. To perform receive operations in units of one character, select an external clock as the clock source. Data Transfer Operations SCI Initialization (Synchronous Mode): Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the settings of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. Figure 15.15 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart. 400 Start initialization [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE and RE, to 0. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR. Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE, RE bits 0) [1] [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. This is not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used. Set data transfer format in SMR and SCMR Set value in BRR Wait [2] [3] No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits [4] Note: In simultaneous transmitting and receiving, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously. Figure 15.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart 401 Serial Data Transmission (Synchronous Mode): Figure 15.16 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission. The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission. Initialization Start transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 Figure 15.16 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart 402 In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. When clock output mode has been set, the SCI outputs 8 serial clock pulses. When use of an external clock has been specified, data is output synchronized with the input clock. The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin starting with the LSB (bit 0) and ending with the MSB (bit 7). 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7). If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the MSB (bit 7) is sent, and the TxD pin maintains its state. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is generated. 4. After completion of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held in a constant state. Figure 15.17 shows an example of SCI operation in transmission. Transfer direction Serial clock Serial data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated TXI interrupt Data written to TDR request generated and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame TEI interrupt request generated Figure 15.17 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission 403 Serial Data Reception (Synchronous Mode): Figure 15.18 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception. The following procedure should be used for serial data reception. When changing the operating mode from asynchronous to synchronous, be sure to check that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0. The RDRF flag will not be set if the FER or PER flag is set to 1, and neither transmit nor receive operations will be possible. 404 Initialization Start reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. Read ORER flag in SSR Yes ORER= 1? No [2] [3] Error handling (Continued below) [2] [3] Receive error handling: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR , and after performing the appropriate error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DTC is activated by a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read. Read RDRF flag in SSR [4] No RDRF= 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 Error handling Overrun error handling Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0 Figure 15.18 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart 405 In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with serial clock input or output. 2. The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order. After reception, the SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0 and the receive data can be transferred from RSR to RDR. If this check is passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR. If a receive error is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 15.11. Neither transmit nor receive operations can be performed subsequently when a receive error has been found in the error check. 3. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request is generated. Also, if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the ORER flag changes to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is generated. Figure 15.19 shows an example of SCI operation in reception. Serial clock Serial data RDRF ORER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame RXI interrupt request generated ERI interrupt request generated by overrun error Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 Figure 15.19 Example of SCI Operation in Reception Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Synchronous Mode): Figure 15.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations. 406 Initialization Start transmission/reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is designated as the transmit data output pin, and the RxD pin is designated as the receive data input pin, enabling simultaneous transmit and receive operations. Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 [2] [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by a TXI interrupt. [3] Receive error handling: Read ORER flag in SSR Yes [3] Error handling ORER = 1? No If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR , and after performing the appropriate error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 [4] [5] Serial transmission/reception continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission/ reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. Also, the RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DTC is activated by a receive-datafull interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read. No All data received? Yes [5] Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Figure 15.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations 407 15.4 SCI Interrupts The SCI has four interrupt sources: the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request, receive-error interrupt (ERI) request, receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request, and transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request. Table 15.12 shows the interrupt sources and their relative priorities. Individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled with the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in SCR. Each kind of interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller independently. When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt can activate the DTC to perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC. The DTC cannot be activated by a TEI interrupt request. When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER, PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt can activate the DTC to perform data transfer. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC. The DTC cannot be activated by an ERI interrupt request. Table 15.12 SCI Interrupt Sources Channel 0 Interrupt Source Description ERI RXI TXI TEI 1 ERI RXI TXI TEI Receive error (ORER, FER, or PER) Receive data register full (RDRF) Transmit data register empty (TDRE) Transmit end (TEND) Receive error (ORER, FER, or PER) Receive data register full (RDRF) Transmit data register empty (TDRE) Transmit end (TEND) DTC Activation Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible Low Priority* High Note: * The table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller. The TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. The TEND flag is cleared at the same time as the TDRE flag. Consequently, if a TEI interrupt and a TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt will have priority for acceptance, and the TDRE flag and TEND flag may be cleared. Note that the TEI interrupt will not be accepted in this case. 408 15.5 Usage Notes The following points should be noted when using the SCI. Relation between Writes to TDR and the TDRE Flag: The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred from TDR to TSR. When the SCI transfers data from TDR to TSR, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Data can be written to TDR regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. However, if new data is written to TDR when the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in TDR will be lost since it has not yet been transferred to TSR. It is therefore essential to check that the TDRE flag is set to 1 before writing transmit data to TDR. Operation when Multiple Receive Errors Occur Simultaneously: If a number of receive errors occur at the same time, the state of the status flags in SSR is as shown in table 15.13. If there is an overrun error, data is not transferred from RSR to RDR, and the receive data is lost. Table 15.13 State of SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data SSR Status Flags RDRF 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 ORER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Receive Data Transfer RSR to RDR X O O X X O X Receive Errors Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error Notes: O: Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR. X: Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR. Break Detection and Processing: When a framing error (FER) is detected, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set, and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set. Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. Sending a Break: The TxD pin has a dual function as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) is determined by DR and DDR. This feature can be used to send a break. 409 Between serial transmission initialization and setting of the TE bit to 1, the mark state is replaced by the value of DR (the pin does not function as the TxD pin until the TE bit is set to 1). Consequently, DDR and DR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin should first be set to 1. To send a break during serial transmission, first clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TxD pin. Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Synchronous Mode Only): Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0. Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode: In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a base clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the base clock, and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the base clock. This is illustrated in figure 15.21. 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 Internal base clock 7 15 0 7 15 0 Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing Start bit D0 D1 Data sampling timing Figure 15.21 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode 410 Thus the receive margin in asynchronous mode is given by equation (1) below. M = 0.5 - 1 D - 0.5 (1 + F) x 100% - (L - 0.5)F - 2N N .......... (1) Where M: N: D: L: F: Receive margin (%) Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16) Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0) Frame length (L = 9 to 12) Absolute value of clock rate deviation Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in equation (1), a receive margin of 46.875% is given by equation (2) below. When D = 0.5 and F = 0, M = 0.5 - 1 x 100% 2 x 16 .......... (2) = 46.875% However, this is only a theoretical value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in system design. Restrictions on Use of DTC * When an external clock source is used as the serial clock, the transmit clock should not be input until at least 5 o clock cycles after TDR is updated by the DTC. Misoperation may occur if the transmit clock is input within 4 clock cycles after TDR is updated. (Figure 15.22) * When RDR is read by the DTC, be sure to set the activation source to the relevant SCI receivedata-full interrupt (RXI). SCK t TDRE LSB Serial data D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Note: When operating on an external clock, set t > 4 states. Figure 15.22 Example of Synchronous Transmission by DTC 411 412 Section 16 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) [H8S/2128 Series Option] A two-channel I2C bus interface is available as an option in the H8S/2128 Series. The I2C bus interface is not available for the H8S/2124 Series. Observe the following notes when using this option. 1. For mask-ROM versions, a W is added to the part number in products in which this optional function is used. Example: HD6432127RWF 2. The product number is identical for F-ZTAT versions. However, be sure to inform your Hitachi sales representative if you will be using this option. 16.1 Overview A two-channel I2C bus interface is available for the H8S/2128 Series as an option. The I2C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I2C bus (inter-IC bus) interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I2C bus differs partly from the Philips configuration, however. Each I2C bus interface channel uses only one data line (SDA) and one clock line (SCL) to transfer data, saving board and connector space. 16.1.1 Features * Selection of addressing format or non-addressing format I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit, for master/slave operation Serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master operation only * Conforms to Philips I2C bus interface (I2C bus format) * Two ways of setting slave address (I2C bus format) * Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode (I2C bus format) * Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving (I2C bus format) * Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting (I2C bus format) * Wait function in master mode (I 2C bus format) A wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding acknowledgement. The wait can be cleared by clearing the interrupt flag. 413 * Wait function in slave mode (I2C bus format) A wait request can be generated by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding acknowledgement. The wait request is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible. * Three interrupt sources Data transfer end (including transmission mode transition with I 2C bus format and address reception after loss of master arbitration) Address match: when any slave address matches or the general call address is received in slave receive mode (I2C bus format) Stop condition detection * Selection of 16 internal clocks (in master mode) * Direct bus drive (with SCL and SDA pins) Two pins--P52/SCL0 and P47/SDA0--(normally NMOS push-pull outputs) function as NMOS open-drain outputs when the bus drive function is selected. Two pins--P24/SCL1 and P23/SDA1--(normally CMOS pins) function as NMOS-only outputs when the bus drive function is selected. * Automatic switching from formatless mode to I2C bus format (channel 0 only) Formatless operation (no start/stop conditions, non-addressing mode) in slave mode Operation using a common data pin (SDA) and independent clock pins (VSYNCI, SCL) Automatic switching from formatless mode to I2C bus format on the fall of the SCL pin 16.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the I2C bus interface. Figure 16.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. Channel 0 I/O pins and channel 1 I/O pins differ in structure, and have different specifications for permissible applied voltages. For details, see section 22, Electrical Characteristics. 414 Formatless dedicated clock (channel 0 only) o SCL PS ICCR Clock control Noise canceler Bus state decision circuit Arbitration decision circuit ICMR ICSR ICDRT SDA Output data control circuit ICDRS ICDRR Noise canceler Address comparator SAR, SARX Legend: ICCR: I2C bus control register ICMR: I2C bus mode register ICSR: I2C bus status register ICDR: I2C bus data register SAR: Slave address register SARX: Slave address register X PS: Prescaler Interrupt generator Interrupt request Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface Internal data bus 415 Vcc VCC SCL SCL in SCL out SDA SDA SCL SDA in SDA out (Master) SCL SDA SCL in SCL out SCL in SCL out H8S/2138 Series chip SDA in SDA out (Slave 1) SDA in SDA out (Slave 2) Figure 16.2 I2C Bus Interface Connections (Example: H8S/2128 Series Chip as Master) 16.1.3 Input/Output Pins Table 16.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I2C bus interface. Table 16.1 I2C Bus Interface Pins Channel 0 Name Serial clock Serial data Formatless serial clock 1 Serial clock Serial data Abbreviation SCL0 SDA0 VSYNCI SCL1 SDA1 I/O I/O I/O Input I/O I/O Function IIC0 serial clock input/output IIC0 serial data input/output IIC0 formatless serial clock input IIC1 serial clock input/output IIC1 serial data input/output Note: In the text, the channel subscript is omitted, and only SCL and SDA are used. 416 SCL SDA 16.1.4 Register Configuration Table 16.2 summarizes the registers of the I2C bus interface. Table 16.2 Register Configuration Channel 0 Name I 2C bus control register I C bus status register I C bus data register I 2C bus mode register Slave address register Second slave address register 1 I 2C bus control register I C bus status register I C bus data register I 2C bus mode register Slave address register Second slave address register Common Serial/timer control register DDC switch register Module stop control register 2 2 2 2 Abbreviation ICCR0 ICSR0 ICDR0 ICMR0 SAR0 SARX0 ICCR1 ICSR1 ICDR1 ICMR1 SAR1 SARX1 STCR DDCSWR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'01 H'00 -- H'00 H'00 H'01 H'01 H'00 -- H'00 H'00 H'01 H'00 H'0F H'3F H'FF Address* 1 H'FFD8 H'FFD9 H'FFDE* 2 H'FFDF* 2 H'FFDF* 2 H'FFDE* 2 H'FF88 H'FF89 H'FF8E* 2 H'FF8F* 2 H'FF8F* 2 H'FF8E* 2 H'FFC3 H'FEE6 H'FF86 H'FF87 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. The register that can be written or read depends on the ICE bit in the I 2C bus control register. The slave address register can be accessed when ICE = 0, and the I2C bus mode register can be accessed when ICE = 1. The I 2C bus interface registers are assigned to the same addresses as other registers. Register selection is performed by means of the IICE bit in the serial/timer control register (STCR). 417 16.2 16.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR) 7 ICDR7 -- R/W 6 ICDR6 -- R/W 5 ICDR5 -- R/W 4 ICDR4 -- R/W 3 ICDR3 -- R/W 2 ICDR2 -- R/W 1 ICDR1 -- R/W 0 ICDR0 -- R/W Initial value Read/Write * ICDRR Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- R 6 -- R 5 -- R 4 -- R 3 -- R 2 -- R 1 -- R 0 -- R ICDRR7 ICDRR6 ICDRR5 ICDRR4 ICDRR3 ICDRR2 ICDRR1 ICDRR0 * ICDRS Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- -- 6 -- -- 5 -- -- 4 -- -- 3 -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- -- 0 -- -- ICDRS7 ICDRS6 ICDRR5 ICDRS4 ICDRS3 ICDRS2 ICDRS1 ICDRS0 * ICDRT Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- W 6 -- W 5 -- W 4 -- W 3 -- W 2 -- W 1 -- W 0 -- W ICDRT7 ICDRT6 ICDRT5 ICDRT4 ICDRT3 ICDRT2 ICDRT1 ICDRT0 * TDRE, RDRF (internal flags) Bit Initial value Read/Write -- TDRE 0 -- -- RDRF 0 -- 418 ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. ICDR is divided internally into a shift register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmit buffer (ICDRT). ICDRS cannot be read or written by the CPU, ICDRR is read-only, and ICDRT is write-only. Data transfers among the three registers are performed automatically in coordination with changes in the bus state, and affect the status of internal flags such as TDRE and RDRF. If IIC is in transmit mode and the next data is in ICDRT (the TDRE flag is 0) following transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred automatically from ICDRT to ICDRS. If IIC is in receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the RDRF flag is 0) following transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR. If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1. ICDR is assigned to the same address as SARX, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR. The value of ICDR is undefined after a reset. The TDRE and RDRF flags are set and cleared under the conditions shown below. Setting the TDRE and RDRF flags affects the status of the interrupt flags. 419 TDRE 0 Description The next transmit data is in ICDR (ICDRT), or transmission cannot be started [Clearing conditions] * * * * When transmit data is written in ICDR (ICDRT) in transmit mode (TRS = 1) When a stop condition is detected in the bus line state after a stop condition is issued with the I 2C bus format or serial format selected When a stop condition is detected with the I 2C bus format selected In receive mode (TRS = 0) (A 0 write to TRS during transfer is valid after reception of a frame containing an acknowledge bit) (Initial value) 1 The next transmit data can be written in ICDR (ICDRT) [Setting conditions] * In transmit mode (TRS = 1), when a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is issued in master mode with the I 2C bus format or serial format selected At the first setting to the transmit mode (TRS = 1) (first transmit mode setting only) after switching from I2C bus mode to the formatless mode. When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS (Data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS when TRS = 1 and TDRE = 0, and ICDRS is empty) when detecting a start condition and then switching from slave receive mode (TRS = 0) state to transmit mode (TRS = 1 ) (first transmit mode switching only). * * * RDRF 0 Description The data in ICDR (ICDRR) is invalid [Clearing condition] When ICDR (ICDRR) receive data is read in receive mode (Initial value) 1 The ICDR (ICDRR) receive data can be read [Setting condition] When data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR (Data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR in case of normal termination with TRS = 0 and RDRF = 0) 420 16.2.2 Bit Slave Address Register (SAR) 7 SVA6 0 R/W 6 SVA5 0 R/W 5 SVA4 0 R/W 4 SVA3 0 R/W 3 SVA2 0 R/W 2 SVA1 0 R/W 1 SVA0 0 R/W 0 FS 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write SAR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the slave address and selects the communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR is assigned to the same address as ICMR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR. SAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 1--Slave Address (SVA6 to SVA0): Set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0, differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I2C bus. Bit 0--Format Select (FS): Used together with the FSX bit in SARX and the SW bit in DDCSWR to select the communication format. * I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit * Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode only * Formatless mode (channel 0 only): non-addressing format with or without acknowledge bit, slave mode only, start/stop conditions not detected The FS bit also specifies whether or not SAR slave address recognition is performed in slave mode. 421 DDCSWR Bit 6 SW 0 SAR Bit 0 FS 0 SARX Bit 0 FSX 0 1 Operating Mode I 2C bus format * 2 SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized (Initial value) SAR slave address recognized SARX slave address ignored SAR slave address ignored SARX slave address recognized SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored Acknowledge bit used I C bus format * * 1 0 I 2C bus format * * 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Synchronous serial format * * Formatless mode (start/stop conditions not detected) Formatless mode* (start/stop conditions not detected) * No acknowledge bit Note: * Do not set this mode when automatic switching to the I 2C bus format is performed by means of the DDCSWR setting. 16.2.3 Bit Second Slave Address Register (SARX) 7 SVAX6 0 R/W 6 SVAX5 0 R/W 5 SVAX4 0 R/W 4 SVAX3 0 R/W 3 SVAX2 0 R/W 2 SVAX1 0 R/W 1 SVAX0 0 R/W 0 FSX 1 R/W Initial value Read/Write SARX is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the second slave address and selects the communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if the upper 7 bits of SARX match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SARX is assigned to the same address as ICDR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR. SARX is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 1--Second Slave Address (SVAX6 to SVAX0): Set a unique address in bits SVAX6 to SVAX0, differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I2C bus. 422 Bit 0--Format Select X (FSX): Used together with the FS bit in SAR and the SW bit in DDCSWR to select the communication format. * I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit * Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode only * Formatless mode: non-addressing format with or without acknowledge bit, slave mode only, start/stop conditions not detected The FSX bit also specifies whether or not SARX slave address recognition is performed in slave mode. For details, see the description of the FS bit in SAR. 16.2.4 Bit Initial value Read/Write I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) 7 MLS 0 R/W 6 WAIT 0 R/W 5 CKS2 0 R/W 4 CKS1 0 R/W 3 CKS0 0 R/W 2 BC2 0 R/W 1 BC1 0 R/W 0 BC0 0 R/W ICMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred first, performs master mode wait control, and selects the master mode transfer clock frequency and the transfer bit count. ICMR is assigned to the same address as SAR. ICMR can be written and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR. ICMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--MSB-First/LSB-First Select (MLS): Selects whether data is transferred MSB-first or LSB-first. If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1. Do not set this bit to 1 when the I 2C bus format is used. Bit 7 MLS 0 1 Description MSB-first LSB-first (Initial value) 423 Bit 6--Wait Insertion Bit (WAIT): Selects whether to insert a wait between the transfer of data and the acknowledge bit, in master mode with the I2C bus format. When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of the clock for the final data bit, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and a wait state begins (with SCL at the low level). When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR, the wait ends and the acknowledge bit is transferred. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively with no wait inserted. The IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 on completion of the acknowledge bit transfer, regardless of the WAIT setting. The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode. Bit 6 WAIT 0 1 Description Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits (Initial value) 424 Bits 5 to 3--Serial Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits, together with the IICX1 (channel 1) or IICX0 (channel 0) bit in the STCR register, select the serial clock frequency in master mode. They should be set according to the required transfer rate. STCR Bit 5 or 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 IICX 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 o/28 o/40 o/48 o/64 o/80 o/100 o/112 o/128 o/56 o/80 o/96 o/128 o/160 o/200 o/224 o/256 o= 5 MHz 179 kHz 125 kHz 104 kHz 78.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 44.6 kHz 39.1 kHz 89.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 52.1 kHz 39.1 kHz 31.3 kHz 25.0 kHz 22.3 kHz 19.5 kHz o= 8 MHz 286 kHz 200 kHz 167 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 80.0 kHz 71.4 kHz 62.5 kHz 143 kHz 100 kHz 83.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 40.0 kHz 35.7 kHz 31.3 kHz Transfer Rate o= 10 MHz 357 kHz 250 kHz 208 kHz 156 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 89.3 kHz 78.1 kHz 179 kHz 125 kHz 104 kHz 78.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 44.6 kHz 39.1 kHz o= 16 MHz 571 kHz* 400 kHz 333 kHz 250 kHz 200 kHz 160 kHz 143 kHz 125 kHz 286 kHz 200 kHz 167 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 80.0 kHz 71.4 kHz 62.5 kHz o= 20 MHz 714 kHz* 500 kHz* 417 kHz* 313 kHz 250 kHz 200 kHz 179 kHz 156 kHz 357 kHz 250 kHz 208 kHz 156 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 89.3 kHz 78.1 kHz Note: * Outside the I2C bus interface specification range (normal mode: max. 100 kHz; high-speed mode: max. 400 kHz). 425 Bits 2 to 0--Bit Counter (BC2 to BC0): Bits BC2 to BC0 specify the number of bits to be transferred next. With the I 2C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the data is transferred with one addition acknowledge bit. Bits BC2 to BC0 settings should be made during an interval between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting should be made while the SCL line is low. The bit counter is initialized to 000 by a reset and when a start condition is detected. The value returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit. Bit 2 BC2 0 Bit 1 BC1 0 Bit 0 BC0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Bits/Frame Synchronous Serial Format 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 2C Bus Format 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Initial value) 16.2.5 Bit I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR) 7 ICE 0 R/W 6 IEIC 0 R/W 5 MST 0 R/W 4 TRS 0 R/W 3 ACKE 0 R/W 2 BBSY 0 R/W 1 IRIC 0 R/(W)* 0 SCP 1 W Initial value Read/Write Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. ICCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the I2C bus interface, enables or disables interrupts, selects master or slave mode and transmission or reception, enables or disables acknowledgement, confirms the I2C bus interface bus status, issues start/stop conditions, and performs interrupt flag confirmation. ICCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 426 Bit 7--I2C Bus Interface Enable (ICE): Selects whether or not the I2C bus interface is to be used. When ICE is set to 1, port pins function as SCL and SDA input/output pins and transfer operations are enabled. When ICE is cleared to 0, I2C bus interface module functions are halted and its internal states are cleared. The SAR and SARX registers can be accessed when ICE is 0. The ICMR and ICDR registers can be accessed when ICE is 1. Bit 7 ICE 0 Description I 2C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins set to port function I 2C bus interface module internal state initialization SAR and SARX can be accessed 1 I 2C bus interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SCA are driving the bus) ICMR and ICDR can be accessed (Initial value) Bit 6--I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable (IEIC): Enables or disables interrupts from the I2C bus interface to the CPU. Bit 6 IEIC 0 1 Description Interrupts disabled Interrupts enabled (Initial value) Bit 5--Master/Slave Select (MST) Bit 4--Transmit/Receive Select (TRS) MST selects whether the I2C bus interface operates in master mode or slave mode. TRS selects whether the I2C bus interface operates in transmit mode or receive mode. In master mode with the I2C bus format, when arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode. In slave receive mode with the addressing format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0), hardware automatically selects transmit or receive mode according to the R/W bit in the first frame after a start condition. Modification of the TRS bit during transfer is deferred until transfer of the frame containing the acknowledge bit is completed, and the changeover is made after completion of the transfer. MST and TRS select the operating mode as follows. 427 Bit 5 MST 0 Bit 4 TRS 0 1 Operating Mode Slave receive mode Slave transmit mode Master receive mode Master transmit mode (Initial value) 1 0 1 Bit 5 MST 0 Description Slave mode [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software 2. When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I 2C bus format master mode 1 Master mode [Setting conditions] 1. When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing condition 2) 2. When 1 is written in MST after reading MST = 0 (in case of clearing condition 2) Bit 4 TRS 0 Description Receive mode [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software (in cases other than setting condition 3) 2. When 0 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 1 (in case of clearing condition 3) 3. When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I 2C bus format master mode 4. When the SW bit in DDCSWR changes from 1 to 0 1 Transmit mode [Setting conditions] 1. When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing conditions 3 and 4) 2. When 1 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 0 (in case of clearing conditions 3 and 4) 3. When a 1 is received as the R/W bit of the first frame in I2C bus format slave mode (Initial value) (Initial value) 428 Bit 3--Acknowledge Bit Judgement Selection (ACKE): Specifies whether the value of the acknowledge bit returned from the receiving device when using the I2C bus format is to be ignored and continuous transfer is performed, or transfer is to be aborted and error handling, etc., performed if the acknowledge bit is 1. When the ACKE bit is 0, the value of the received acknowledge bit is not indicated by the ACKB bit, which is always 0. In the H8S/2128 Series, the DTC can be used to perform continuous transfer. The DTC is activated when the IRTR interrupt flag is set to 1 (IRTR is one of two interrupt flags, the other being IRIC). When the ACKE bit is 0, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission, regardless of the value of the acknowledge bit. When the ACKE bit is 1, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 0, and the IRIC flag alone is set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 1. When the DTC is activated, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are cleared to 0 after the specified number of data transfers have been executed. Consequently, interrupts are not generated during continuous data transfer, but if data transmission is completed with a 1 acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is set to 1, the DTC is not activated and an interrupt is generated, if enabled. Depending on the receiving device, the acknowledge bit may be significant, in indicating completion of processing of the received data, for instance, or may be fixed at 1 and have no significance. Bit 3 ACKE 0 1 Description The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted (Initial value) Bit 2--Bus Busy (BBSY): The BBSY flag can be read to check whether the I2C bus (SCL, SDA) is busy or free. In master mode, this bit is also used to issue start and stop conditions. A high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a start condition, setting BBSY to 1. A low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a stop condition, clearing BBSY to 0. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, use a MOV instruction to write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. It is not possible to write to BBSY in slave mode; the I2C bus interface must be set to master transmit mode before issuing a start condition. MST and TRS should both be set to 1 before writing 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. 429 Bit 2 BBSY 0 Description Bus is free [Clearing condition] When a stop condition is detected 1 Bus is busy [Setting condition] When a start condition is detected (Initial value) Bit 1--I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag (IRIC): Indicates that the I2C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU. IRIC is set to 1 at the end of a data transfer, when a slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode, when bus arbitration is lost in master transmit mode, and when a stop condition is detected. IRIC is set at different times depending on the FS bit in SAR and the WAIT bit in ICMR. See section 16.3.6, IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control. The conditions under which IRIC is set also differ depending on the setting of the ACKE bit in ICCR. IRIC is cleared by reading IRIC after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRIC. When the DTC is used, IRIC is cleared automatically and transfer can be performed continuously without CPU intervention. Bit 1 IRIC 0 Description Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1 2. When ICDR is written or read by the DTC (When the TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared to 0) (This is not always a clearing condition; see the description of DTC operation for details) (Initial value) 430 Bit 1 IRIC 1 Description Interrupt requested [Setting conditions] * I 2C bus format master mode 1. When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is issued (when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission) 2. When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT = 1 3. At the end of data transfer (when a wait is not inserted (WAIT = 0), at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock pulse, or, when a wait is inserted (WAIT = 1), at the fall of the 8th transmit/receive clock pulse) 4. When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost (when the AL flag is set to 1) 5. When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1 (when the ACKB bit is set to 1) I 2C bus format slave mode 1. When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches (when the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 2. When the general call address is detected (when FS = 0 and the ADZ flag is set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 3. When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1 (when the ACKB bit is set to 1) 4. When a stop condition is detected (when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1) Synchronous serial format, and formatless mode 1. At the end of data transfer (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 2. When a start condition is detected with serial format selected 3. When the SW bit is set to 1 in DDCSWR Except for above, when the condition to set the TDRE or RDRF internal flag to 1 is generated. * * 431 When, with the I2C bus format selected, IRIC is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated, other flags must be checked in order to identify the source that set IRIC to 1. Although each source has a corresponding flag, caution is needed at the end of a transfer. When the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set, the readable IRTR flag may or may not be set. The IRTR flag (the DTC start request flag) is not set at the end of a data transfer up to detection of a retransmission start condition or stop condition after a slave address (SVA) or general call address match in I 2C bus format slave mode. Even when the IRIC flag and IRTR flag are set, the TDRE or RDRF internal flag may not be set. The IRIC and IRTR flags are not cleared at the end of the specified number of transfers in continuous transfer using the DTC. The TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared, however, since the specified number of ICDR reads or writes have been completed. Table 16.3 shows the relationship between the flags and the transfer states. Table 16.3 Flags and Transfer States MST TRS BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR 1/0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1 1 1/0 1/0 0 0 0 0 1/0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 AASX AL 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 AAS 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1 1 0 0 ADZ 0 0 0 0 0 1/0 0 1 0 0 ACKB State 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0 0 0 0 0/1 Idle state (flag clearing required) Start condition issuance Start condition established Master mode wait Master mode transmit/receive end Arbitration lost SAR match by first frame in slave mode General call address match SARX match Slave mode transmit/receive end (except after SARX match) Slave mode transmit/receive end (after SARX match) Stop condition detected 0 0 0 1/0 1 1/0 1 1 0 0 0 1/0 0 0 1/0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0/1 432 Bit 0--Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit (SCP): Controls the issuing of start and stop conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is not stored. Bit 0 SCP 0 1 Description Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag Reading always returns a value of 1 Writing is ignored (Initial value) 16.2.6 Bit I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) 7 ESTP 0 R/(W)* 6 STOP 0 R/(W)* 5 IRTR 0 R/(W)* 4 AASX 0 R/(W)* 3 AL 0 R/(W)* 2 AAS 0 R/(W)* 1 ADZ 0 R/(W)* 0 ACKB 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flags. ICSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs flag confirmation and acknowledge confirmation and control. ICSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Error Stop Condition Detection Flag (ESTP): Indicates that a stop condition has been detected during frame transfer in I2C bus format slave mode. 433 Bit 7 ESTP 0 Description No error stop condition [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 * In I 2C bus format slave mode Error stop condition detected [Setting condition] When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer * In other modes No meaning (Initial value) Bit 6--Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag (STOP): Indicates that a stop condition has been detected after completion of frame transfer in I2C bus format slave mode. Bit 6 STOP 0 Description No normal stop condition [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 * In I 2C bus format slave mode Normal stop condition detected [Setting condition] When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer * In other modes No meaning (Initial value) Bit 5--I2C Bus Interface Continuous Transmission/Reception Interrupt Request Flag (IRTR): Indicates that the I2C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU, and the source is completion of reception/transmission of one frame in continuous transmission/reception for which DTC activation is possible. When the IRTR flag is set to 1, the IRIC flag is also set to 1 at the same time. IRTR flag setting is performed when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1. IRTR is cleared by reading IRTR after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRTR. IRTR is also cleared automatically when the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. 434 Bit 5 IRTR 0 Description Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 Continuous transfer state [Setting condition] * * In I 2C bus interface slave mode When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX = 1 In other modes When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 (Initial value) Bit 4--Second Slave Address Recognition Flag (AASX): In I2C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVAX6 to SVAX0 in SARX. AASX is cleared by reading AASX after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AASX. AASX is also cleared automatically when a start condition is detected. Bit 4 AASX 0 Description Second slave address not recognized [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1 2. When a start condition is detected 3. In master mode 1 Second slave address recognized [Setting condition] When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX = 0 (Initial value) Bit 3--Arbitration Lost (AL): This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. The I2C bus interface monitors the bus. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the bus at nearly the same time, if the I2C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL to 1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another master. 435 AL is cleared by reading AL after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AL. In addition, AL is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. Bit 3 AL 0 Description Bus arbitration won [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1 1 Arbitration lost [Setting conditions] 1. If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode 2. If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode (Initial value) Bit 2--Slave Address Recognition Flag (AAS): In I2C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR, or if the general call address (H'00) is detected. AAS is cleared by reading AAS after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AAS. In addition, AAS is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. Bit 2 AAS 0 Description Slave address or general call address not recognized [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1 3. In master mode 1 Slave address or general call address recognized [Setting condition] When the slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode while FS = 0 (Initial value) 436 Bit 1--General Call Address Recognition Flag (ADZ): In I2C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition is the general call address (H'00). ADZ is cleared by reading ADZ after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in ADZ. In addition, ADZ is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. Bit 1 ADZ 0 Description General call address not recognized [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1 3. In master mode 1 General call address recognized [Setting condition] When the general call address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX = 0 or FS = 0 (Initial value) Bit 0--Acknowledge Bit (ACKB): Stores acknowledge data. In transmit mode, after the receiving device receives data, it returns acknowledge data, and this data is loaded into ACKB. In receive mode, after data has been received, the acknowledge data set in this bit is sent to the transmitting device. When this bit is read, in transmission (when TRS = 1), the value loaded from the bus line (returned by the receiving device) is read. In reception (when TRS = 0), the value set by internal software is read. When this bit is written to, the set value of the acknowledge data sent in reception is rewritten regardless of the value of TRS. As the value loaded from the receive device is unchanged, care is required when using a bit manipulation instruction to modify this register. Bit 0 ACKB 0 Description Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing (Initial value) Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data (signal is 0) 1 Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the data (signal is 1) 437 16.2.7 Bit Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) 7 -- 0 R/W 6 IICX1 0 R/W 5 IICX0 0 R/W 4 IICE 0 R/W 3 FLSHE 0 R/W 2 -- 0 R/W 1 ICKS1 0 R/W 0 ICKS0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the I2C interface operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), and on-chip flash memory (F-ZTAT versions), and selects the TCNT input clock source. For details of functions not related to the I 2C bus interface, see section 3.2.4, Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: This bit must not be set to 1. Bits 6 and 5--I2C Transfer Select 1 and 0 (IICX1, IICX0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR, select the transfer rate in master mode. For details, see section 16.2.4, I 2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR). Bit 4--I2C Master Enable (IICE): Controls CPU access to the I2C bus interface data and control registers (ICCR, ICSR, ICDR/SARX, ICMR/SAR), PWMX data and control registers, and SCI control registers. Bit 4 IICE 0 Description CPU access to I 2C bus interface data and control registers is disabled CPU access to SCI control registers is enabled 1 CPU access to I 2C bus interface data and control registers is enabled CPU access to PWMX data and control registers is enabled (Initial value) Bit 3--Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls CPU access to the flash memory control registers, power-down state control registers, and peripheral module control registers. For details see section 3.2.4, Serial /Timer Control Register (STCR). Bit 2--Reserved: This bit must not be set to 1. Bits 1 and 0--Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICSK0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR, select the clock input to the timer counters (TCNT). For details, see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register. 438 16.2.8 Bit DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) 7 SWE 0 R/W 6 SW 0 R/W 5 IE 0 R/W 4 IF 0 R/(W)*1 3 CLR3 1 W*2 2 CLR2 1 W*2 1 CLR1 1 W*2 0 CLR0 1 W*2 Initial value Read/Write Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 2. Always read as 1. DDCSWR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the IIC channel 0 automatic format switching function and IIC internal latch clearance. DDCSWR is initialized to H'0F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--DDC Mode Switch Enable (SWE): Selects the function for automatically switching IIC channel 0 from formatless mode to the I2C bus format. Bit 7 SWE 0 1 Description Automatic switching of IIC channel 0 from formatless mode to I 2C bus format is disabled Automatic switching of IIC channel 0 from formatless mode to I 2C bus format is enabled (Initial value) Bit 6--DDC Mode Switch (SW): Selects either formatless mode or the I2C bus format for IIC channel 0. Bit 6 SW 0 Description IIC channel 0 is used with the I 2C bus format [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software 2. When a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin when SWE = 1 1 IIC channel 0 is used in formatless mode [Setting condition] When 1 is written in SW after reading SW = 0 (Initial value) Bit 5--DDC Mode Switch Interrupt Enable Bit (IE): Enables or disables an interrupt request to the CPU when automatic format switching is executed for IIC channel 0. 439 Bit 5 IE 0 1 Description Interrupt when automatic format switching is executed is disabled Interrupt when automatic format switching is executed is enabled (Initial value) Bit 4--DDC Mode Switch Interrupt Flag (IF): Flag that indicates an interrupt request to the CPU when automatic format switching is executed for IIC channel 0. Bit 4 IF 0 Description No interrupt is requested when automatic format switching is executed [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in IF after reading IF = 1 1 An interrupt is requested when automatic format switching is executed [Setting condition] When a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin when SWE = 1 (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0--IIC Clear 3 to 0 (CLR3 to CLR0): These bits control initialization of the internal state of IIC0 and IIC1. These bits can only be written to; if read they will always return a value of 1. When a write operation is performed on these bits, a clear signal is generated for the internal latch circuit of the corresponding module(s),and the internal state of the IIC module(s) is initialized. The write data for these bits is not retained. To perform IIC clearance, bits CLR3 to CLR0 must be written to simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a bit manipulation instruction such as BCLR. When clearing is required again, all the bits must be written to in accordance with the setting. Bit 3 CLR3 0 Bit 2 CLR2 0 1 Bit 1 CLR1 -- 0 1 1 -- -- Bit 0 CLR0 -- 0 1 0 1 -- Description Setting prohibited Setting prohibited IIC0 internal latch cleared IIC1 internal latch cleared IIC0 and IIC1 internal latches cleared Invalid setting 440 16.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTP4 or MSTP3 bit is set to 1, operation of the corresponding IIC channel is halted at the end of the bus cycle, and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 21.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRL Bit 4--Module Stop (MSTP4): Specifies IIC channel 0 module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 4 MSTP4 0 1 Description IIC channel 0 module stop mode is cleared IIC channel 0 module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRL Bit 3--Module Stop (MSTP3): Specifies IIC channel 1 module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 3 MSTP3 0 1 Description IIC channel 1 module stop mode is cleared IIC channel 1 module stop mode is set (Initial value) 441 16.3 16.3.1 Operation I2C Bus Data Format The I2C bus interface has serial and I2C bus formats. The I2C bus formats are addressing formats with an acknowledge bit. These are shown in figures 16.3 (a) and (b). The first frame following a start condition always consists of 8 bits. IIC channel 0 only is capable of formatless operation, as shown in figure 16.4. The serial format is a non-addressing format with no acknowledge bit. This is shown in figure 16.5. Figure 16.6 shows the I2C bus timing. The symbols used in figures 16.3 to 16.6 are explained in table 16.4. (a) I2C bus format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0) S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n A 1 m A/A 1 P 1 transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) transfer frame count (m 1) (b) I2C bus format (start condition retransmission, FS = 0 or FSX = 0) S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n1 m1 A/A 1 S 1 SLA 7 1 transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8) transfer frame count (m1 and m2 1) R/W 1 A 1 DATA n2 m2 A/A 1 P 1 Figure 16.3 I2C Bus Data Formats (I2C Bus Formats) 442 IIC0 only, FS = 0 or FSX = 0 DATA 8 1 A 1 DATA n A 1 m A/A 1 transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) transfer frame count (m 1) Note: This mode applies to the DDC (Display Data Channel) which is a PC monitoring system standard. Figure 16.4 Formatless FS = 1 and FSX = 1 S 1 DATA 8 1 DATA n m P 1 n: transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) m: transfer frame count (m 1) Figure 16.5 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format) SDA SCL S 1-7 SLA 8 R/W 9 A 1-7 DATA 8 9 A 1-7 DATA 8 9 A/A P Figure 16.6 I2C Bus Timing 443 Table 16.4 I2C Bus Data Format Symbols Legend S SLA R/W A DATA P Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high Slave address, by which the master device selects a slave device Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0 Acknowledge. The receiving device (the slave in master transmit mode, or the master in master receive mode) drives SDA low to acknowledge a transfer Transferred data. The bit length is set by bits BC2 to BC0 in ICMR. The MSB-first or LSB-first format is selected by bit MLS in ICMR Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high 16.3.2 Master Transmit Operation In I2C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowlede signal. The transmission procedure and operations by which data is sequentially transmitted in synchronization with ICDR write operations, are described below. [1] Set the ICE bit in ICCR to l. Set bits MLS, WAIT, and CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR, and bit IICX in STCR, according to the operation mode. [2] Read the BBSY flag to confirm that the bus is free. [3] Set the MST and TRS bits to 1 in ICCR to select master transmit mode. [4] Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP. This switches SDA from high to low when SCL is high, and generates the start condition. [5] When the start condition is generated, the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to l, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. [6] Write data to ICDR (slave address + R/W) With the I 2C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data following the start condition indicates the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction. Then clear the IRIC flag to indicate the end of transfer. Writing to ICDR and clearing of the IRIC flag must be executed continuously, so that no interrupt is inserted. If a period of time that is equal to transfer one byte has elapsed by the time the IRlC flag is cleared, the end of transfer cannot be identified. 444 The master device sequentially sends the transmit clock and the data written to ICDR with the timing shown in figure 16.7. The selected slave device (i.e. , the slave device with the matching slave address) drives SDA low at the 9th transmit clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. [7] When one frame of data has been transimitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted, SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written. [8] Read the ACKB bit to confirm that ACKB is 0. When the slave device has not returned an acknowledge signal and ACKB remains 1, execute the transmit end processing described in step [12] and perfrom transmit operation again. [9] Write the next data to be transmitted in ICDR. To indicate the end of data transfer, clear the IRIC flag to 0. As described in step [6] above, writing to ICDR and clearing of the IRIC flag must be executed continuously so that no interrupt is inserted. The next frame is transmitted in synchronization with the internal clock. [10] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted, SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written. [11] Read the ACKB bit of ICSR. Confirm that the slave device has returned an acknowledge signal and ACKB is 0. When more data is to be transmitted, return to step [9] to execute next transmit operation. If the slave device has not returned an acknowledge signal and ACKB is 1, execute the transmit end processing described in step [12]. [12] Clear the IRIC flag to 0. Write BBSY and SCP of ICCR to 0. By doing so, SDA is changed from low to high while SCL is high and the transmit stop condition is generated. 445 Start condition generation SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SDA (slave output) IRIC IRTR ICDR Note: Data write timing in ICDR ICDR Writing prohibited [5] 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 7 bit 1 8 bit 0 R/W [7] A 9 1 bit 7 2 bit 6 Slave address Data 1 address + R/W Data 1 ICDR Writing enable User processing [4] Write BBSY = 1 and SCP = 0 (start condition issuance) [6] ICDR write [6] IRIC clear [9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear Figure 16.7 Example of Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = WAIT = 0) 16.3.3 Master Receive Operation In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns an acknowledge signal. The slave device transrnits data. The receive procedure and operations by which data is sequentially received in synchronization with ICDR read operations, are described below. [1] Clear the TRS bit of ICCR to 0 and switch from transmit mode to receive mode. Set the WAIT bit to 1 and clear the ACKB bit of ICSR to 0 (acknowledge data setting). [2] When ICDR is read (dummy data read), reception is started and the receive clock is output, and data is received, in synchronization with the internal clock. To indicate the wait, clear the IRIC flag to 0. Reading from ICDR and clearing of the IRIC f1ag must be executed continuously so that no interrupt is inserted. If a period of time that is equal to transfer one byte has elapsed by the time the IRIC flag is cleared, the end of transfer cannot be identified. [3] The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the fall of the 8th clock of a one-frame reception clock. At this point, if the IEIC bit of ICCR is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated to the CPU. 446 SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag is cleared. If the first frame is the final reception frame, execute the end processing as described in [10]. [4] Clear the IRIC flag to 0 to release from the wait state. The master device outputs the 9th receive clock pulse, sets SDA to low, and returns an acknowledge signal. [5] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. The master device continues to output the receive clock for the next receive data. [6] Read the ICDR receive data. [7] Clear the IRIC flag to indicate the next wait. From clearing of the IRIC flag to completion of data reception as described in steps [5], [6], and [7], must be performed within the time taken to transfer one byte because releasing of the wait state as described in step [4] (or [9]). [8] The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag is cleared. If this frame is the final reception frame, execute the end processing as described in [10]. [9] Clear the IRIC flag to 0 to release from the wait state. The master device outputs the 9th reception clock pulse, sets SDA to low, and returns an acknowledge signal. By repeating steps [5] to [9] above, more data can be received. [10] Set the ACKB bit of ICSR to 1 and set the acknowledge data for the final reception. Set the TRS bit of ICCR to 1 to change receive mode to transmit mode. [11] Clear the IRIC flag to release from the wait state. [12] When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th reception clock pulse. [13] Clear the WAIT bit of ICMR to 0 to cancel wait mode. Read the ICDR receive data and clear the IRIC flag to 0. Clear the IRIC flag only when WAIT = 0. (If the stop-condition generation command is executed after clearing the IRIC flag to 0 and then clearing the WAIT bit to 0, the SDA line is fixed low and the stop condition cannot be generated.) [14] Write 0 to BBSY and SCP. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. 447 Master transmit mode Master receive mode SCL (master output) SDA (slave output) 9 A 1 Bit7 2 Bit6 3 Bit5 4 Bit4 5 Bit3 6 Bit2 7 Bit1 8 Bit0 [3] A 9 1 Bit7 2 Bit6 3 Bit5 4 Bit4 5 Bit3 Data 1 SDA (master output) IRIC IRTR ICDR [5] Data 2 Data 1 User processing [2] IRIC clearance [1] TRS cleared to 0 [2] ICDR read (dummy read) WAIT set to 1 ACKB cleared to 0 [4] IRIC clearance [6] ICDR read (Data 1) [7] IRIC clearance Figure 16.8 (a) Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) SCL (master output) 8 9 1 Bit7 2 Bit6 3 Bit5 4 Bit4 5 Bit3 6 Bit2 7 Bit1 8 Bit0 [8] A 9 1 Bit7 2 Bit6 Data 4 SDA Bit0 (slave output) Data 2 SDA (master output) IRIC IRTR ICDR [8] A [5] Data 3 [5] Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 User processing [9] IRIC clearance [6] ICDR read (Data 2) [7] IRIC clearance [9] IRIC Clearance [6] ICDR read (Data 3) [7] IRIC clearance Figure 16.8 (b) Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) (cont) 16.3.4 Slave Receive Operation In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The reception procedure and operations in slave receive mode are described below. 448 [1] Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set the MLS bit in ICMR and the MST and TRS bits in ICCR according to the operating mode. [2] When the start condition output by the master device is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is set to 1. [3] When the slave address matches in the first frame following the start condition, the device operates as the slave device specified by the master device. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 0, the TRS bit in ICCR remains cleared to 0, and slave receive operation is performed. [4] At the 9th clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device drives SDA low and returns an acknowledge signal. At the same time, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the RDRF internal flag has been cleared to 0, it is set to 1, and the receive operation continues. If the RDRF internal flag has been set to 1, the slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the receive clock until data is read into ICDR. [5] Read ICDR and clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0. Receive operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. When SDA is changed from low to high when SCL is high, and the stop condition is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is cleared to 0. Start condition generation SCL (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (master output) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 R/W [4] A Bit 7 Bit 6 Data 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 Slave address SDA (slave output) RDRF IRIC Interrupt request generation ICDRS Address + R/W ICDRR Address + R/W User processing [5] ICDR read [5] IRIC clear Figure 16.9 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) (MLS = ACKB = 0) 449 SCL (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (master output) 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bit 1 Data 1 Bit 0 [4] Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Data 2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 [4] SDA (slave output) A A RDRF IRIC Interrupt request generation Data 1 Interrupt request generation Data 2 ICDRS ICDRR Data 1 Data 2 User processing [5] ICDR read [5] IRIC clear Figure 16.10 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) (MLS = ACKB = 0) 16.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, while the master device outputs the receive clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure and operations in slave transmit mode are described below. [1] Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set the MLS bit in ICMR and the MST and TRS bits in ICCR according to the operating mode. [2] When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition, the slave device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. At the same time, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. .If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit in ICCR is set to 1, and the mode changes to slave transmit mode automatically. The TDRE internal flag is set to 1. The slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until ICDR data is written. [3] After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write data to ICDR. The TDRE internal flag is cleared to 0. The written data is transferred to ICDRS, and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again. After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write the next data to ICDR. The 450 slave device sequentially sends the data written into ICDR in accordance with the clock output by the master device at the timing shown in figure 16.11. [4] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. If the TDRE internal flag has been set to 1, this slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written to ICDR. The master device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse, and returns an acknowledge signal. As this acknowledge signal is stored in the ACKB bit in ICSR, this bit can be used to determine whether the transfer operation was performed normally. When the TDRE internal flag is 0, the data written into ICDR is transferred to ICDRS, transmission is started, and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again. [5] To continue transmission, clear the IRIC flag to 0, then write the next data to be transmitted into ICDR. The TDRE internal flag is cleared to 0. Transmit operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. To end transmission, write H'FF to ICDR to release SDA on the slave side. When SDA is changed from low to high when SCL is high, and the stop condition is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is cleared to 0. Slave receive mode SCL (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (slave output) SDA (master output) R/W Slave transmit mode 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 A [2] Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Data 1 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Data 2 A TDRE [3] Interrupt request generation Data 2 IRIC Interrupt request generation Interrupt request generation Data 1 ICDRT ICDRS Data 1 Data 2 User processing [3] IRIC [3] ICDR write clearance [3] ICDR write [5] IRIC clear [5] ICDR write Figure 16.11 Example of Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = 0) 451 16.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR, the FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. If the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set to 1, SCL is automatically held low after one frame has been transferred; this timing is synchronized with the internal clock. Figure 16.12 shows the IRIC set timing and SCL control. (a) When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, no wait) SCL 7 8 9 1 SDA IRIC 7 8 A 1 User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read ICDR (receive) (b) When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, wait inserted) SCL 8 9 1 SDA IRIC 8 A 1 User processing Clear IRIC Clear Write to ICDR (transmit) IRIC or read ICDR (receive) (c) When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (synchronous serial format) SCL 7 8 1 SDA IRIC 7 8 1 User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read ICDR (receive) Figure 16.12 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control 452 16.3.7 Automatic Switching from Formatless Mode to I2C Bus Format Setting the SW bit to 1 in DDCSWR enables formatless mode to be selected as the IIC0 operating mode. Switching from formatless mode to the I2C bus format (slave mode) is performed automatically when a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin. The following four preconditions are necessary for this operation: * A common data pin (SDA) for formatless and I2C bus format operation * Separate clock pins for formatless operation (VSYNCI) and I2C bus format operation (SCL) * A fixed 1 level for the SCL pin during formatless operation (the SCL pin does not output a low level) * Settings of bits other than TRS in ICCR that allow I2C bus format operation Automatic switching is performed from formatless mode to the I 2C bus format when the SW bit in DDCSWR is automatically cleared to 0 on detection of a falling edge on the SCL pin. Switching from the I2C bus format to formatless mode is achieved by having software set the SW bit in DDCSWR to 1. In formatless mode, bits (such as MSL and TRS) that control the I 2C bus interface operating mode must not be modified. When switching from the I2C bus format to formatless mode, set the TRS bit to 1 or clear it to 0 according to the transmit data (transmission or reception) in formatless mode, then set the SW bit to 1. After automatic switching from formatless mode to the I2C bus format (slave mode), in order to wait for slave address reception, the TRS bit is automatically cleared to 0. If a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin during formatless operation, the I2C bus interface operating mode is switched to the I 2C bus format without waiting for a stop condition to be detected. 453 16.3.8 Operation Using the DTC The I2C bus format provides for selection of the slave device and transfer direction by means of the slave address and the R/W bit, confirmation of reception with the acknowledge bit, indication of the last frame, and so on. Therefore, continuous data transfer using the DTC must be carried out in conjunction with CPU processing by means of interrupts. Table 16.5 shows some examples of processing using the DTC. These examples assume that the number of transfer data bytes is known in slave mode. Table 16.5 Examples of Operation Using the DTC Item Master Transmit Mode Master Receive Mode Transmission by CPU (ICDR write) Slave Transmit Mode Reception by CPU (ICDR read) Slave Receive Mode Reception by CPU (ICDR read) Slave address + Transmission by DTC (ICDR write) R/W bit transmission/ reception Dummy data read Actual data transmission/ reception Dummy data (H'FF) write Last frame processing Transfer request processing after last frame processing -- Transmission by DTC (ICDR write) -- Not necessary 1st time: Clearing by CPU 2nd time: End condition issuance by CPU Processing by CPU (ICDR read) Reception by DTC (ICDR read) -- Reception by CPU (ICDR read) Not necessary -- Transmission by DTC (ICDR write) Processing by DTC (ICDR write) Not necessary -- Reception by DTC (ICDR read) -- Reception by CPU (ICDR read) Automatic clearing Not necessary on detection of end condition during transmission of dummy data (H'FF) Reception: Actual Transmission: Actual data count data count + 1 (+1 equivalent to dummy data (H'FF)) Setting of number of DTC transfer data frames Reception: Actual Transmission: Actual data count data count + 1 (+1 equivalent to slave address + R/W bits) 454 16.3.9 Noise Canceler The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being latched internally. Figure 16.13 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler circuit. The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA) input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held. Sampling clock C SCL or SDA input signal D Latch Q D C Q Latch Match detector Internal SCL or SDA signal System clock period Sampling clock Figure 16.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler 16.3.10 Sample Flowcharts Figures 16.14 to 16.17 show sample flowcharts for using the I2C bus interface in each mode. 455 Start Initialize Read BBSY in ICCR No BBSY = 0? Yes Set MST = 1 and TRS = 1 in ICCR Write BBSY = 1 and SCP = 0 in ICCR [3] Select master transmit mode. [1] Initialize [2] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines. [4] Start condition issuance Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB in ICSR ACKB = 0? Yes Transmit mode? Yes Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No No No [5] Wait for a start condition generation [6] Set transmit data for the first byte (slave address + R/W). (After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately) [7] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. [8] Test the acknowledge bit, transferred from slave device. Master receive mode [9] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. (After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately) [10] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB in ICSR [11] Test for end of transfer No End of transmission or ACKB = 1? Yes Clear IRIC in ICCR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR End [12] Stop condition issuance Figure 16.14 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode (Example) 456 Master receive mode Set TRS = 0 in ICCR Set WAIT = 1 in ICMR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC=1? Yes Last receive ? No Clear IRIC in ICCR [4] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock. (to end the wait insertion) [5] Wait for 1 byte to be received. (9th clock rising edge) Yes [2] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. After reading ICDR, please clear IRIC immediately. [1] Select receive mode [3] Wait for 1 byte to be received. (8th clock falling edge) Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR [6] Read the received data. [7] Clear IRIC Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Yes Last receive ? No Clear IRIC in ICCR [8] Wait for the next data to be received. (8th clock falling edge) [9] Clear IRIC (to end the wait insertion) Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR Set TRS = 1 in ICCR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No [10] Set ACKB = 1 so as to return no acknowledge, or set TRS = 1 so as not to issue extra clock. [11] Clear IRIC (to end the wait insertion) [12] Wait for 1 byte to be received. IRIC = 1? Yes Set WAIT = 0 in ICMR Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR End [14] Stop condition issuance. [13] Set WAIT = 0. Read ICDR. Clear IRIC. (Note: After setting WAIT = 0, IRIC should be cleared to 0) Figure 16.15 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Example) 457 Start Initialize Set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 in ICCR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Read IRIC in ICCR [2] No IRIC = 1? Yes Read AAS and ADZ in ICSR AAS = 1 and ADZ = 0? Yes Read TRS in ICCR TRS = 0? Yes Last receive? No Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No [4] IRIC = 1? Yes Yes [1] Select slave receive mode. [3] [2] Wait for the first byte to be received (slave address). [3] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. [4] Wait for the transfer to end. [5] Set acknowledge data for the last receive. [6] Start the last receive. [7] Wait for the transfer to end. [8] Read the last receive data. Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR [5] [6] No Slave transmit mode No General call address processing * Description omitted [1] Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR End [7] [8] Figure 16.16 Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode (Example) 458 Slave transmit mode Clear IRIC in ICCR [1] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. [2] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. [3] Test for end of transfer. Read IRIC in ICCR No [2] IRIC = 1? Yes Clear IRIC in ICCR Read ACKB in ICSR End of transmission (ACKB = 1)? Yes Set TRS = 0 in ICCR Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR End [4] [3] [4] Select slave receive mode. [5] Dummy read (to release the SCL line). Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR [1] No [5] Figure 16.17 Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode (Example) 16.3.11 Initialization of Internal State The IIC has a function for forcible initialization of its internal state if a deadlock occurs during communication. Initialization is executed (1) in accordance with the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 in the DDCSWR register or (2) by clearing the ICE bit. For details of CLR3 to CLR0 bit settings, see section 16.2.8, DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR). (1) Scope of Initialization The initialization executed by this function covers the following items: 459 * TDRE and RDRF internal flags * Transmit/receive sequencer and internal operating clock counter * Internal latches for retaining the output state of the SCL and SDA pins (wait, clock, data output, etc.) The following items are not initialized: * Actual register values (ICDR, SAR, SARX, ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, DDCSWR, STCR) * Internal latches used to retain register read information for setting/clearing flags in the ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, and DDCSWR registers * The value of the ICMR register bit counter (BC2 to BC0) * Generated interrupt sources (interrupt sources transferred to the interrupt controller) (2) Notes on Initialization * Interrupt flags and interrupt sources are not cleared, and so flag clearing measures must be taken as necessary. * Basically, other register flags are not cleared either, and so flag clearing measures must be taken as necessary. * When initialization is performed by means of the DDCSWR register, the write data for bits CLR3 to CLR0 is not retained. To perform IIC clearance, bits CLR3 to CLR0 must be written to simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a bit manipulation instruction such as BCLR. Similarly, when clearing is required again, all the bits must be written to simultaneously in accordance with the setting. * If a flag clearing setting is made during transmission/reception, the IIC module will stop transmitting/receiving at that point and the SCL and SDA pins will be released. When transmission/reception is started again, register initialization, etc., must be carried out as necessary to enable correct communication as a system. The value of the BBSY bit cannot be modified directly by this module clear function, but since the stop condition pin waveform is generated according to the state and release timing of the SCL and SDA pins, the BBSY bit may be cleared as a result. Similarly, state switching of other bits and flags may also have an effect. To prevent problems caused by these factors, the following procedure should be used when initializing the IIC state. (1) Execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 or by means of the ICE bit. (2) Execute a stop condition issuance instruction (write 0 to BBSY and SCP) to clear the BBST bit to 0, and wait for two transfer rate clock cycles. (3) Re-execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 or by means of the ICE bit. (4) Initialize (re-set) the IIC registers. 460 16.4 Usage Notes * In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is immediately followed by an instruction to generate a stop condition, neither condition will be output correctly. To output consecutive start and stop conditions, after issuing the instruction that generates the start condition, read the relevant ports, check that SCL and SDA are both low, then issue the instruction that generates the stop condition. Note that SCL may not yet have gone low when BBSY is cleared to 0. * Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these conditions when reading or writing to ICDR. Write access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1 (including automatic transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS) Read access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0 (including automatic transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR) * Table 16.6 shows the timing of SCL and SDA output in synchronization with the internal clock. Timings on the bus are determined by the rise and fall times of signals affected by the bus load capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance. Table 16.6 I2C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output) Item SCL output cycle time SCL output high pulse width SCL output low pulse width SDA output bus free time Start condition output hold time Retransmission start condition output setup time Stop condition output setup time Data output setup time (master) Data output setup time (slave) Data output hold time t SDAHO Symbol t SCLO t SCLHO t SCLLO t BUFO t STAHO t STASO t STOSO t SDASO Output Timing 28t cyc to 256tcyc 0.5tSCLO 0.5tSCLO 0.5tSCLO - 1t cyc 0.5tSCLO - 1t cyc 1t SCLO 0.5tSCLO + 2tcyc 1t SCLLO - 3tcyc 1t SCLL - (6t cyc or 12t cyc *) 3t cyc ns Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes Figure 22.25 (reference) Note: * 6t cyc when IICX is 0, 12tcyc when 1. * SCL and SDA input is sampled in synchronization with the internal clock. The AC timing therefore depends on the system clock cycle tcyc, as shown in I2C Bus Timing in section 22, Electrical Characteristics. Note that the I2C bus interface AC timing specifications will not be met with a system clock frequency of less than 5 MHz. 461 * The I2C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is under 1000 ns (300 ns for highspeed mode). In master mode, the I2C bus interface monitors the SCL line and synchronizes one bit at a time during communication. If tSr (the time for SCL to go from low to VIH) exceeds the time determined by the input clock of the I2C bus interface, the high period of SCL is extended. The SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and load capacitance of the SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust the pull-up resistance and load capacitance so that the SCL rise time does not exceed the values given in the table 16.7 below. Table 16.7 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tSr) Values Time Indication tcyc Indication 7.5tcyc Normal mode High-speed mode 1 17.5tcyc Normal mode High-speed mode I C Bus Specification o = (Max.) 5 MHz 1000 ns 300 ns 1000 ns 300 ns 2 IICX 0 o= 8 MHz o= o= o= 10 MHz 16 MHz 20 MHz 750 ns 300 ns 468 ns 300 ns 375 ns 300 ns 1000 ns 937 ns 300 ns 300 ns 1000 ns 1000 ns 300 ns 300 ns 1000 ns 1000 ns 875 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns * The I2C bus interface specifications for the SCL and SDA rise and fall times are under 1000 ns and 300 ns. The I2C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by t cyc, as shown in table 16.6. However, because of the rise and fall times, the I2C bus interface specifications may not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 16.8 shows output timing calculations for different operating frequencies, including the worst-case influence of rise and fall times. tBUFO fails to meet the I2C bus interface specifications at any frequency. The solution is either (a) to provide coding to secure the necessary interval (approximately 1 s) between issuance of a stop condition and issuance of a start condition, or (b) to select devices whose input timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C bus. tSCLLO in high-speed mode and t STASO in standard mode fail to satisfy the I 2C bus interface specifications for worst-case calculations of tSr/tSf. Possible solutions that should be investigated include (a) adjusting the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load, (b) reducing the transfer rate to meet the specifications, or (c) selecting devices whose input timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I 2C bus. 462 Table 16.8 I2C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf) Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns] I 2C Bus tSr/tSf SpecifiInfluence cation o = (Min.) 5 MHz (Max.) Standard mode -1000 4000 600 4700 1300 4700 1300 4000 600 4700 600 4000 600 250 100 250 100 4000 950 4750 Item t SCLHO tcyc Indication 0.5tSCLO (-tSr) o= 8 MHz 4000 950 4750 o= o= o= 10 MHz 16 MHz 20 MHz 4000 950 4750 4000 950 4750 4000 950 4750 High-speed -300 mode t SCLLO 0.5tSCLO (-tSf ) Standard mode -250 High-speed -250 mode t BUFO 0.5tSCLO - Standard -1000 1t cyc mode ( -tSr ) High-speed -300 mode 0.5tSCLO - Standard -250 1t cyc mode (-tSf ) High-speed -250 mode 1t SCLO (-tSr ) Standard mode -1000 1000* 1 1000* 1 1000* 1 1000* 1 1000* 1 3800* 1 3875* 1 3900* 1 3938* 1 3950* 1 750* 1 4550 800 9000 2200 4400 1350 3100 400 1300 825* 1 4625 875 9000 2200 4250 1200 3325 625 2200 850* 1 4650 900 9000 2200 4200 1150 3400 700 2500 888* 1 4688 938 9000 2200 4125 1075 3513 813 2950 900* 1 4700 950 9000 2200 4100 1050 3550 850 3100 400 t STAHO t STASO High-speed -300 mode t STOSO 0.5tSCLO + Standard -1000 2t cyc mode (-tSr ) High-speed -300 mode t SDASO -1000 1t SCLLO*3 - Standard 3t cyc mode (master) (-tSr ) High-speed -300 mode t SDASO (slave) -1000 1t SCLL * 3 - Standard 12t cyc * 2 mode (-tSr ) High-speed -300 mode -1400* 1 -500* 1 -200* 1 250 463 Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns] I 2C Bus tSr/tSf SpecifiInfluence cation o = (Min.) 5 MHz (Max.) Standard mode 0 0 0 600 600 Item t SDAHO tcyc Indication 3t cyc o= 8 MHz 375 375 o= o= o= 10 MHz 16 MHz 20 MHz 300 300 188 188 150 150 High-speed 0 mode Notes: 1. Does not meet the I 2C bus interface specification. Remedial action such as the following is necessary: (a) secure a start/stop condition issuance interval; (b) adjust the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load; (c) reduce the transfer rate; (d) select slave devices whose input timing permits this output timing. The values in the above table will vary depending on the settings of the IICX bit and bits CKS0 to CKS2. Depending on the frequency it may not be possible to achieve the maximum transfer rate; therefore, whether or not the I 2C bus interface specifications are met must be determined in accordance with the actual setting conditions. 2. Value when the IICX bit is set to 1. When the IICX bit is cleared to 0, the value is (t SCLL - 6t cyc ). 3. Calculated using the I 2C bus specification values (standard mode: 4700 ns min.; highspeed mode: 1300 ns min.). * Note on ICDR Read at End of Master Reception To halt reception at the end of a receive operation in master receive mode, set the TRS bit to 1 and write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. After this, receive data can be read by means of an ICDR read, but if data remains in the buffer the ICDRS receive data will not be transferred to ICDR, and so it will not be possible to read the second byte of data. If it is necessary to read the second byte of data, issue the stop condition in master receive mode (i.e. with the TRS bit cleared to 0). When reading the receive data, first confirm that the BBSY bit in the ICCR register is cleared to 0, the stop condition has been generated, and the bus has been released, then read the ICDR register with TRS cleared to 0. Note that if the receive data (ICDR data) is read in the interval between execution of the instruction for issuance of the stop condition (writing of 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR) and the actual generation of the stop condition, the clock may not be output correctly in subsequent master transmission. Clearing of the MST bit after completion of master transmission/reception, or other modifications of IIC control bits to change the transmit/receive operating mode or settings, must be carried out during interval (a) in figure 16.18 (after confirming that the BBSY bit has been cleared to 0 in the ICCR register). 464 Stop condition (a) SDA SCL Internal clock BBSY bit Master receive mode ICDR reading prohibited Bit 0 8 A 9 Start condition Execution of stop condition issuance instruction (0 written to BBSY and SCP) Confirmation of stop condition generation (0 read from BBSY) Start condition issuance Figure 16.18 Points for Attention Concerning Reading of Master Receive Data * Notes on Start Condition Issuance for Retransmission Figure 16.19 shows the timing of start condition issuance for retransmission, and the timing for subsequently writing data to ICDR, together with the corresponding flowchart. After retransmission start condition issuance is done and determined the start condition, write the transmit data to ICDR, as shown below. 465 [1] Wait for end of 1-byte transfer IRIC=1 ? Yes Clear IRIC in ICSR Start condition issuance? Yes Read SCL pin No [2] No No [1] [2] Determine wheter SCL is low [3] Issue restart condition instruction for transmission Other processing [4] Determine whether start condition is generated or not [5] Set transmit data (slave address + R/W) SCL=Low ? Yes Write BBSY=1, SCP=0 (ICSR) Note: Program so that processing instruction from [3] to [5] is executed continuously. [3] [4] IRIC=1 ? Yes Write transmit data to ICDR [5] No Start condition (retransmission) SCL 9 SDA ACK bit 7 Data output IRIC [5] ICDR write (next transmit data) [4] IRIC determination [3] Start condition instruction issuance [2] Determination of SCL=Low [1] IRIC determination Figure 16.19 Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance for Retransmission 466 * Note on I2C Bus Interface Stop Condition Instruction Issuance If the rise time of the 9th SCL clock exceeds the specification because the bus load capacitance is large, or if there is a slave devices of the type that drives SCL low to effect a wait, after rising of the 9th SCL clock, issue the stop condition after reading SCL and determining it to be low, as shown below. 9th clock VIH SCL As waveform rise is late, SCL is detected as low SDA Stop condition generation IRIC [2] Stop condition instruction issuance [1] Determination of SCL=Low High period secured Figure 16.20 Timing of Stop Condition Issuance 467 468 Section 17 A/D Converter 17.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series incorporate a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter that allows up to eight analog input channels to be selected. In addition to the eight analog input channels, up to 8 channels of digital input can be selected for A/D conversion. Since the conversion precision falls to the equivalent of 6-bit resolution when digital input is selected, digital input is ideal for use by a comparator identifying multi-valued inputs, for example. 17.1.1 Features A/D converter features are listed below. * 10-bit resolution * Eight (analog) or 8 (digital) input channels * Settable analog conversion voltage range The analog conversion voltage range is set using the analog power supply voltage pin (AVcc) as the analog reference voltage * High-speed conversion Minimum conversion time: 6.7 s per channel (at 20 MHz operation) * Choice of single mode or scan mode Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels * Four data registers Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel * Sample and hold function * Three kinds of conversion start Choice of software or timer conversion start trigger (8-bit timer), or ADTRG pin * A/D conversion end interrupt generation An A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request can be generated at the end of A/D conversion 469 17.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter. Module data bus Bus interface ADDRC ADDRD ADDRA ADDRB ADCSR + Multiplexer - Comparator Sample-andhold circuit Control circuit ADCR Internal data bus AVCC 10-bit D/A AVSS AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6/CIN0 to CIN7 AN7 Successive approximations register o/8 o/16 ADI interrupt signal ADTRG Conversion start trigger from 8-bit timer A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D Legend: ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: ADDRD: Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter 470 17.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 17.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. The AVCC and AVSS pins are the power supply pins for the analog block in the A/D converter. Table 17.1 A/D Converter Pins Pin Name Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 Analog input pin 6 Analog input pin 7 A/D external trigger input pin Expansion A/D input pins 0 to 7 Symbol AVCC AVSS AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 AN7 ADTRG CIN0 to CIN7 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Function Analog block power supply Analog block ground and A/D conversion reference voltage Analog input channel 0 Analog input channel 1 Analog input channel 2 Analog input channel 3 Analog input channel 4 Analog input channel 5 Analog input channel 6 Analog input channel 7 External trigger input for starting A/D conversion Expansion A/D conversion input (digital input pin) channels 0 to 7 471 17.1.4 Register Configuration Table 17.2 summarizes the registers of the A/D converter. Table 17.2 A/D Converter Registers Name A/D data register AH A/D data register AL A/D data register BH A/D data register BL A/D data register CH A/D data register CL A/D data register DH A/D data register DL A/D control/status register A/D control register Module stop control register Abbreviation ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL Keyboard comparator control register KBCOMP R/W R R R R R R R R R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'3F H'3F H'FF H'00 Address* 1 H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFE3 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE7 H'FFE8 H'FFE9 H'FF86 H'FF87 H'FEE4 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 17.2 17.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 -- 0 R 3 -- 0 R 2 -- 0 R 1 -- 0 R 0 -- 0 R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 -- Initial value Read/Write There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers, ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of A/D conversion. 472 The 10-bit data resulting from A/D conversion is transferred to the ADDR register for the selected channel and stored there. The upper 8 bits of the converted data are transferred to the upper byte (bits 15 to 8) of ADDR, and the lower 2 bits are transferred to the lower byte (bits 7 and 6) and stored. Bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0. The correspondence between the analog input channels and ADDR registers is shown in table 17.3. The ADDR registers can always be read by the CPU. The upper byte can be read directly, but for the lower byte, data transfer is performed via a temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 17.3, Interface to Bus Master. The ADDR registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Table 17.3 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers Analog Input Channel Group 0 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 Group 1 AN4 AN5 AN6 or CIN0 to CIN7 AN7 A/D Data Register ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD 17.2.2 Bit A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) 7 ADF 0 R/(W)* 6 ADIE 0 R/W 5 ADST 0 R/W 4 SCAN 0 R/W 3 CKS 0 R/W 2 CH2 0 R/W 1 CH1 0 R/W 0 CH0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write Note: * Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. ADCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls A/D conversion operations. ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. 473 Bit 7--A/D End Flag (ADF): Status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion. Bit 7 ADF 0 Description [Clearing conditions] * * 1 * * When 0 is written in the ADF flag after reading ADF = 1 When the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt and ADDR is read (Initial value) [Setting conditions] Single mode: When A/D conversion ends Scan mode: When A/D conversion ends on all specified channels Bit 6--A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt (ADI) requests at the end of A/D conversion. Bit 6 ADIE 0 1 Description A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request is disabled A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request is enabled (Initial value) Bit 5--A/D Start (ADST): Selects starting or stopping of A/D conversion. Holds a value of 1 during A/D conversion. The ADST bit can be set to 1 by software, a timer conversion start trigger, or the A/D external trigger input pin (ADTRG). Bit 5 ADST 0 1 Description A/D conversion stopped (Initial value) Single mode: A/D conversion is started. Cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the specified channel ends Scan mode: A/D conversion is started. Conversion continues sequentially on the selected channels until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or a transition to standby mode or module stop mode Bit 4--Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D conversion operating mode. See section 17.4, Operation, for single mode and scan mode operation. Only set the SCAN bit while conversion is stopped. 474 Bit 4 SCAN 0 1 Description Single mode Scan mode (Initial value) Bit 3--Clock Select (CKS): Sets the A/D conversion time. Only change the conversion time while ADST = 0. Bit 3 CKS 0 1 Description Conversion time = 266 states (max.) Conversion time = 134 states (max.) (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0--Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): Together with the SCAN bit, these bits select the analog input channel(s). One analog input channel can be switched to digital input. Only set the input channel while conversion is stopped. Group Selection CH2 0 CH1 0 Channel Selection CH0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Single Mode AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 or CIN0 to CIN7 AN7 (Initial value) Description Scan Mode AN0 AN0, AN1 AN0 to AN2 AN0 to AN3 AN4 AN4, AN5 AN4, AN5, AN6 or CIN0 to CIN7 AN4, AN5, AN6 or CIN0 to CIN7 AN7 475 17.2.3 Bit A/D Control Register (ADCR) 7 TRGS1 0 R/W 6 TRGS0 0 R/W 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Initial value Read/Write ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of A/D conversion operations. ADCR is initialized to H'3F by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bits 7 and 6--Timer Trigger Select 1 and 0 (TRGS1, TRGS0): These bits select enabling or disabling of the start of A/D conversion by a trigger signal. Only set bits TRGS1 and TRGS0 while conversion is stopped. Bit 7 TRGS1 0 Bit 6 TRGS0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Start of A/D conversion by external trigger is disabled Start of A/D conversion by external trigger is disabled Start of A/D conversion by external trigger (8-bit timer) is enabled Start of A/D conversion by external trigger pin is enabled (Initial value) Bits 5 to 0--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 476 17.2.4 Keyboard Comparator Control Register (KBCOMP) Bit 7 IrE Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 IrCKS2 0 R/W 5 IrCKS1 0 R/W 4 3 2 KBCH2 0 R/W 1 0 IrCKS0 KBADE 0 R/W 0 R/W KBCH1 KBCH0 0 R/W 0 R/W KBCOMP is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the CIN input channels for A/D conversion. KBCOMP is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 4--Reserved Bit 3--Keyboard A/D Enable: Selects either analog input pin (AN6) or digital input pin (CIN0 to CIN7) for A/D converter channel 6 input. If digital input pins are selected, input on A/D converter channel 7 will not be converted correctly. Bits 2 to 0--Keyboard A/D Channel Select 2 to 0 (KBCH2 to KBCH0): These bits select the channels for A/D conversion from among the digital input pins. Only set the input channel while A/D conversion is stopped. Bit 3 KBADE 0 1 Bit 2 KBCH2 -- 0 Bit 1 KBCH1 -- 0 Bit 0 KBCH0 -- 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 A/D Converter Channel 6 Input AN6 CIN0 CIN1 CIN2 CIN3 CIN4 CIN5 CIN6 CIN7 A/D Converter Channel 7 Input AN7 Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 477 17.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP9 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, A/D converter operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. For details, see section 21.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 1--Module Stop (MSTP9): Specifies the A/D converter module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 1 MSTP9 0 1 Description A/D converter module stop mode is cleared A/D converter module stop mode is set (Initial value) 478 17.3 Interface to Bus Master ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers, but the data bus to the bus master is only 8 bits wide. Therefore, in accesses by the bus master, the upper byte is accessed directly, but the lower byte is accessed via a temporary register (TEMP). A data read from ADDR is performed as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper byte value is transferred to the CPU and the lower byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU. When reading ADDR, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained. Figure 17.2 shows the data flow for ADDR access. Upper byte read Bus master (H'AA) Bus interface Module data bus TEMP (H'40) ADDRnH (H'AA) ADDRnL (H'40) (n = A to D) Lower byte read Bus master (H'40) Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'40) ADDRnH (H'AA) ADDRnL (H'40) (n = A to D) Figure 17.2 ADDR Access Operation (Reading H'AA40) 479 17.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. 17.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) Single mode is selected when A/D conversion is to be performed on a single channel only. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by external trigger input. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. On completion of conversion, the ADF flag is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated. The ADF flag is cleared by writing 0 after reading ADCSR. When the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel is changed. Typical operations when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in single mode are described next. Figure 17.3 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. Single mode is selected (SCAN = 0), input channel AN1 is selected (CH1 = 0, CH0 = 1), the A/D interrupt is enabled (ADIE = 1), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1). 2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to ADDRB. At the same time the ADF flag is set to 1, the ADST bit is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter becomes idle. 3. Since ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, an ADI interrupt is requested. 4. The A/D interrupt handling routine starts. 5. The routine reads ADCSR, then writes 0 to the ADF flag. 6. The routine reads and processes the conversion result (ADDRB). 7. Execution of the A/D interrupt handling routine ends. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again and steps 2 to 7 are repeated. 480 Set* ADIE ADST ADF State of channel 0 (AN0) State of channel 1 (AN1) State of channel 2 (AN2) State of channel 3 (AN3) Idle Idle Idle Idle A/D conversion 1 A/D conversion starts Set* Clear* Set* Clear* Idle A/D conversion 2 Idle ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD Read conversion result A/D conversion result 1 Read conversion result A/D conversion result 2 Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. Figure 17.3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected) 481 17.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1) Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by timer or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH2 = 0; AN4 when CH2 = 1). When two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1 or AN5) starts immediately. A/D conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion results are transferred for storage into the ADDR registers corresponding to the channels. When the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel is changed. Typical operations when three channels (AN0 to AN2) are selected in scan mode are described next. Figure 17.4 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), scan group 0 is selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels AN0 to AN2 are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1) 2. When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred to ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts automatically. 3. Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2). 4. When conversion of all the selected channels (AN0 to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1 and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends. 5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again from the first channel (AN0). 482 Continuous A/D conversion execution Set*1 ADST ADF A/D conversion time State of channel 0 (AN0) State of channel 1 (AN1) State of channel 2 (AN2) State of channel 3 (AN3) Transfer ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD Notes: 1. Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 2. Data currently being converted is ignored. A/D conversion result 1 A/D conversion result 4 A/D conversion result 2 A/D conversion result 3 Idle Idle Idle A/D conversion 1 Clear*1 Clear*1 Idle A/D conversion 2 A/D conversion 4 Idle A/D conversion 5 *2 Idle A/D conversion 3 Idle Idle Idle Figure 17.4 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected) 483 17.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog input at a time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 17.5 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 17.4 indicates the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 17.5, the A/D conversion time includes t D and the input sampling time. The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 17.4. In scan mode, the values given in table 17.4 apply to the first conversion time. In the second and subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 256 states when CKS = 0 or 128 states when CKS = 1. (1) o Address (2) Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD t SPL t CONV Legend: (1): ADCSR write cycle (2): ADCSR address A/D conversion start delay tD: tSPL: Input sampling time tCONV: A/D conversion time Figure 17.5 A/D Conversion Timing 484 Table 17.4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS = 0 Item A/D conversion start delay Input sampling time A/D conversion time Symbol tD t SPL t CONV Min 10 -- 259 Typ -- 63 -- Max 17 -- 266 Min 6 -- 131 CKS = 1 Typ -- 31 -- Max 9 -- 134 Note: Values in the table are the number of states. 17.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits are set to 11 in ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software. Figure 17.6 shows the timing. o ADTRG Internal trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 17.6 External Trigger Input Timing 17.5 Interrupts The A/D converter generates an interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. The ADI interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in ADCSR. 485 17.6 Usage Notes The following points should be noted when using the A/D converter. Setting Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins: 1. Analog input voltage range The voltage applied to the ANn analog input pins during A/D conversion should be in the range AVSS ANn AVCC (n = 0 to 7). 2. Digital input voltage range The voltage applied to the CINn digital input pins should be in the range AVSS CINn AV CC and VSS CINn VCC (n = 0 to 7). 3. Relation between AV CC, AVSS and V CC, VSS As the relationship between AVCC, AVSS and V CC, VSS, set AVSS = VSS . If the A/D converter is not used, the AVCC and AVSS pins must on no account be left open. If conditions 1 to 3 above are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely affected. Notes on Board Design: In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D conversion values. Also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN0 to AN7), and analog power supply (AVCC) by the analog ground (AVSS). Also, the analog ground (AVSS) should be connected at one point to a stable digital ground (VSS) on the board. Notes on Noise Countermeasures: A protection circuit connected to prevent damage due to an abnormal voltage such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) should be connected between AVCC and AVSS as shown in figure 17.7. Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVCC and the filter capacitor connected to AN0 to AN7 must be connected to AVSS. If a filter capacitor is connected as shown in figure 17.7, the input currents at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) are averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance (Rin ), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required when deciding the circuit constants. 486 AVCC Rin* 2 *1 0.1 F AVSS 100 AN0 to AN7 Notes: Figures are reference values. 1. 10 F 0.01 F 2. Rin: Input impedance Figure 17.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit Table 17.5 Analog Pin Specifications Item Analog input capacitance Permissible signal source impedance Min -- -- Max 20 10* Unit pF k Note: * When V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V and o 12 MHz 10 k AN0 to AN7 To A/D converter 20 pF Note: Figures are reference values. Figure 17.8 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit 487 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions: H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series A/D conversion precision definitions are given below. * Resolution The number of A/D converter digital output codes * Offset error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'000) to B'0000000001 (H'001) (see figure 17.10). * Full-scale error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3FE) to B'111111111 (H'3FF) (see figure 17.10). * Quantization error The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 17.9). * Nonlinearity error The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between the zero voltage and the full-scale voltage. Does not include the offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error. * Absolute precision The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes the offset error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. 488 Digital output H'3FF H'3FE H'3FD H'004 H'003 H'002 H'001 H'000 Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Quantization error 1 2 1024 1024 1022 1023 FS 1024 1024 Analog input voltage Figure 17.9 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (1) 489 Digital output Full-scale error Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Nonlinearity error Actual A/D conversion characteristic FS Offset error Analog input voltage Figure 17.10 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (2) 490 Permissible Signal Source Impedance: H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series analog input is designed so that conversion precision is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source impedance is 10 k (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, when o 12 MHz or CKS = 0) or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 10 k (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, when o 12 MHz or CKS = 0), charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee the A/D conversion precision. However, if a large capacitance is provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 k, and the signal source impedance is ignored. But since a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/sec or greater). When converting a high-speed analog signal, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted. Influences on Absolute Precision: Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely affect absolute precision. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND such as AVSS . Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the mounting board, so acting as antennas. Sensor output impedance, up to 10 k Sensor input Low-pass filter C to 0.1 F H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series A/D converter chip equivalent circuit 10 k Cin = 15 pF 20 pF Figure 17.11 Example of Analog Input Circuit 491 492 Section 18 RAM 18.1 Overview The H8S/2128 has 4 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM, and the H8S/2127, H8S/2126, H8S/2122 and H8S/2120 have 2 kbytes. The on-chip RAM is connected to the bus master by a 16bit data bus, enabling both byte data and word data to be accessed in one state. This makes it possible to perform fast word data transfer. The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAM enable bit (RAME) in the system control register (SYSCR). 18.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'FFE080 H'FFE082 H'FFE084 H'FFE081 H'FFE083 H'FFE085 H'FFEFFE H'FFFF00 H'FFEFFF H'FFFF01 H'FFFF7E H'FFFF7F Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8S/2128) 493 18.1.2 Register Configuration The on-chip RAM is controlled by SYSCR. Table 18.1 shows the register configuration. Table 18.1 Register Configuration Name System control register Abbreviation SYSCR R/W R/W Initial Value H'09 Address* H'FFC4 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 18.2 Bit System Control Register (SYSCR) 7 CS2E 0 R/W 6 IOSE 0 R/W 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W 3 XRST 1 R 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 HIE 0 R/W 0 RAME 1 R/W Initial value Read/Write The on-chip RAM is enabled or disabled by the RAME bit in SYSCR. For details of other bits in SYSCR, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). Bit 0--RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized when the reset state is released. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME 0 1 Description On-chip RAM is disabled On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value) 494 18.3 18.3.1 Operation Expanded Mode (Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1)) When the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to H8S/2128 addresses H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, and H8S/2127, H8S/2126, H8S/2122, and H8S/2120 addresses H'(FF)E880 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, are directed to the on-chip RAM. When the RAME bit is cleared to 0, accesses to addresses H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, are directed to the off-chip address space. Since the on-chip RAM is connected to the bus master by a 16-bit data bus, it can be written to and read in byte or word units. Each type of access is performed in one state. Even addresses use the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses use the lower 8 bits. Word data must start at an even address. 18.3.2 Single-Chip Mode (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) When the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to H8S/2128 addresses H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, and H8S/2127, H8S/2126, H8S/2122, and H8S/2120 addresses H'(FF)E880 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, are directed to the on-chip RAM. When the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is not accessed. Undefined values are read from these bits, and writing is invalid. Since the on-chip RAM is connected to the bus master by a 16-bit data bus, it can be written to and read in byte or word units. Each type of access is performed in one state. Even addresses use the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses use the lower 8 bits. Word data must start at an even address. 495 496 Section 19 ROM 19.1 Overview The H8S/2128 F-ZTAT has 128 kbytes of on-chip flash memory, the H8S/2127 and H8S/2122 have 64 kbytes of on-chip mask ROM, and the H8S/2126 and H8S/2120 have 32 kbytes of onchip mask ROM. The ROM is connected to the bus master by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte and word data in one state, enabling faster instruction fetches and higher processing speed. The mode pins (MD1 and MD0) and the EXPE bit in MDCR can be set to enable or disable the on-chip ROM. The flash memory versions of the H8S/2128 can be erased and programmed on-board as well as with a general-purpose PROM programmer. 19.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the ROM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'000000 H'000002 H'000001 H'000003 H'01FFFE H'01FFFF Figure 19.1 ROM Block Diagram (H8S/2128) 497 19.1.2 Register Configuration The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series on-chip ROM is controlled by the operating mode and register MDCR. The register configuration is shown in table 19.1. Table 19.1 ROM Register Register Name Mode control register Abbreviation MDCR R/W R/W Initial Value Undefined Depends on the operating mode Address* H'FFC5 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 19.2 19.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Mode Control Register (MDCR) 7 EXPE --* R/W* 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 MDS1 --* R 0 MDS0 --* R Initial value Read/Write Note: * Determined by the MD1 and MD0 pins. MDCR is an read-only 8-bit register used to set the H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series operating mode and monitor the current operating mode. The EXPE bit is initialized in accordance with the mode pin states by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Expanded Mode Enable (EXPE): Sets expanded mode. In mode 1, EXPE is fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. In modes 2 and 3, EXPE has an initial value of 0 and can be read or written. Bit 7 EXPE 0 1 Description Single-chip mode selected Expanded mode selected 498 Bits 6 to 2--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 1 and 0--Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1, MDS0): These bits indicate values that reflects the input levels of mode pins MD1 and MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS1 and MDS0 correspond to pins MD1 and MD0, respectively. These are read-only bits, and cannot be modified. When MDCR is read, the input levels of mode pins MD1 and MD0 are latched in these bits. 19.3 Operation The on-chip ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, and both byte and word data is accessed in one state. Even addresses are connected to the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses to the lower 8 bits. Word data must start at an even address. The mode pins (MD1 and MD0) and the EXPE bit in MDCR can be set to enable or disable the on-chip ROM, as shown in table 19.2. In normal mode, the maximum amount of ROM that can be used is 56 kbytes. Table 19.2 Operating Modes and ROM Operating Mode MCU Operating CPU Operating Mode Mode Mode 1 Mode 2 Normal Advanced Advanced Mode 3 Normal Normal Description Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled Single-chip mode Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled 1 Mode Pins MD1 0 1 MD0 1 0 MDCR EXPE On-Chip ROM 1 0 1 0 1 Enabled (max. 56 kbytes) Disabled Enabled* Note: * 128 kbytes in the H8S/2128, 64 kbytes in the H8S/2127 and H8S/2122 and 32 kbytes in the H8S/2126 and H8S/2120. 499 19.4 19.4.1 Overview of Flash Memory Features The features of the flash memory are summarized below. * Four flash memory operating modes Program mode Erase mode Program-verify mode Erase-verify mode * Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 32 bytes at a time. Erasing is performed by block erase (in single-block units). When erasing multiple blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. Block erasing can be performed as required on 1-kbyte, 8-kbyte, 16-kbyte, 28kbyte, and 32-kbyte. * Programming/erase times The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming, equivalent to 300 s (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block. * Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. * On-board programming modes There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board: Boot mode User program mode * Automatic bit rate adjustment With data transfer in boot mode, the bit rate of the H8S/2128 Series chip can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host. * Protect modes There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations. * Programmer mode Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. 500 19.4.2 Block Diagram Internal address bus Internal data bus (16 bits) Module bus FLMCR1 * FLMCR2 * EBR1 EBR2 * * Bus interface/controller Operating mode Mode pins Flash memory (128 kbytes) Legend: FLMCR1: FLMCR2: EBR1: EBR2: Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Note: * These registers are used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version, a read at any of these addresses will return an undefined value, and writes are invalid. Figure 19.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory 501 19.4.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes Mode Transitions: When the mode pins are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, the MCU enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 19.3. In user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. Flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and programmer mode. MD1 = 1 User mode with on-chip ROM enabled RES = 0 Reset state RES = 0 *1 RES = 0 *2 RES = 0 Programmer mode SWE = 1 SWE = 0 User program mode Boot mode On-board programming mode Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is not accessing the flash memory. 1. MD0 = MD1 = 0, P42 = 0, P41 = P40 = 1 2. MD1 = MD0 = 0, P42 = P41 = P40 = 1 Figure 19.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions 502 On-Board Programming Modes * Boot mode 1. Initial state The flash memory is in the erased state when the device is shipped. The description here applies to the case where the old program version or data is being rewritten. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. Host Programming control program New application program 2. SCI communication check When boot mode is entered, the boot program in the H8S/2128 Series chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is started, an SCI communication check is carried out, and the boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area. Host Programming control program New application program ! " H8S/2128 Series chip Boot program H8S/2128 Series chip Boot program SCI SCI Flash memory RAM Flash memory RAM Boot program area Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. Host Programming control program New application program 4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM by SCI communication is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. Host H8S/2128 Series chip Boot program H8S/2128 Series chip Boot program SCI SCI Flash memory RAM Flash memory RAM Boot program area Programming control program Flash memory erase New application program Program execution state Figure 19.4 Boot Mode 503 * User program mode 1. Initial state (1) The program that will transfer the programming/ erase control program to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (2) The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. Host Programming/ erase control program New application program 2. Programming/erase control program transfer executes the transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to RAM. , , Host New application program H8S/2128 Series chip Boot program H8S/2128 Series chip Boot program SCI SCI Flash memory RAM Flash memory RAM Transfer program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. Host 4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks. Host New application program H8S/2128 Series chip Boot program H8S/2128 Series chip Boot program SCI SCI Flash memory RAM Flash memory RAM Transfer program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Programming/ erase control program Flash memory erase New application program Program execution state Figure 19.5 User Program Mode (Example) 504 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode Boot Mode Entire memory erase Block erase Programming control program* Yes No User Program Mode Yes Yes Program/program-verify Erase/erase-verify Program/program-verify Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm. Block Configuration: The flash memory is divided into two 32-kbyte blocks, two 8-kbyte blocks, one 16-kbyte block, one 28-kbyte block, and four 1-kbyte blocks. Address H'00000 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 28 kbytes 128 kbytes 16 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 32 kbytes 32 kbytes Address H'1FFFF Figure 19.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration 505 19.4.4 Pin Configuration The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 19.3. Table 19.3 Flash Memory Pins Pin Name Reset Mode 1 Mode 0 Port 42 Port 41 Port 40 Transmit data Receive data Abbreviation RES MD1 MD0 P42 P41 P40 TxD0 RxD0 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Input Function Reset Sets MCU operating mode Sets MCU operating mode Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Serial transmit data output Serial receive data input 19.4.5 Register Configuration The registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 19.4. In order for these registers to be accessed, the FLSHE bit must be set to 1 in STCR. Table 19.4 Flash Memory Registers Register Name Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Serial/timer control register Abbreviation R/W FLMCR1* 5 FLMCR2* 5 EBR1* 5 EBR2* 5 STCR R/W*3 R/W*3 R/W*3 R/W*3 R/W Initial Value H'80 H'00* 4 H'00* 4 H'00* 4 H'00 Address* 1 H'FF80* 2 H'FF81* 2 H'FF82* 2 H'FF83* 2 H'FFC3 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Flash memory registers share addresses with other registers. Register selection is performed by the FLSHE bit in the serial/timer control register (STCR). 3. In modes in which the on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. 4. When the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00. 5. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are 8-bit registers. Only byte accesses are valid for these registers, the access requiring 2 states. These registers are used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version, a read at any of these addresses will return an undefined value, and writes are invalid. 506 19.5 19.5.1 Register Descriptions Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) Bit 7 FWE Initial value Read/Write 1 R 6 SWE 0 R/W 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 EV 0 R/W 2 PV 0 R/W 1 E 0 R/W 0 P 0 R/W FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE to 1 and setting the corresponding bit. Program mode is entered by setting SWE to 1, then setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the P bit. Erase mode is entered by setting SWE to 1, then setting the ESU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the E bit. FLMCR1 is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. Writes to the EV and PV bits in FLMCR1 are enabled only when SWE = 1; writes to the E bit only when SWE = 1, and ESU = 1; and writes to the P bit only when SWE = 1, and PSU = 1. Bit 7--Flash Write Enable Bit (FWE): Controls programming and erasing of on-chip flash memory. This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6--Software Write Enable Bit (SWE): Enables or disables flash memory programming. SWE should be set before setting bits ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, P, and EB9 to EB0, and should not be cleared at the same time as these bits. Bit 6 SWE 0 1 Description Writes disabled Writes enabled (Initial value) Bit 5 and 4--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. 507 Bit 3--Erase-Verify (EV): Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 3 EV 0 1 Description Erase-verify mode cleared Transition to erase-verify mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 (Initial value) Bit 2--Program-Verify (PV): Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 2 PV 0 1 Description Program-verify mode cleared Transition to program-verify mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 (Initial value) Bit 1--Erase (E): Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, or P bit at the same time. Bit 1 E 0 1 Description Erase mode cleared Transition to erase mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1, and ESU = 1 (Initial value) 508 Bit 0--Program (P): Selects program mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, PSU, ESU, EV, PV, or E bit at the same time. Bit 0 P 0 1 Description Program mode cleared Transition to program mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1, and PSU = 1 (Initial value) 19.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) Bit 7 FLER Initial value Read/Write 0 R 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 ESU 0 R/W 0 PSU 0 R/W FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register that monitors the presence or absence of flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) and performs setup for flash memory program/erase mode. FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. The ESU and PSU bits are cleared to 0 in software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00 and writes are invalid. Bit 7--Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the errorprotection state. Bit 7 FLER 0 Description Flash memory is operating normally Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled [Clearing condition] Reset, hardware standby mode 1 An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled [Setting condition] See section 19.8.3, Error Protection (Initial value) 509 Bits 6 to 2--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bit 1--Erase Setup (ESU): Prepares for a transition to erase mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit to 1 in FLMCR1. Do not set the SWE, PSU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 1 ESU 0 1 Description Erase setup cleared Erase setup [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 (Initial value) Bit 0--Program Setup (PSU): Prepares for a transition to program mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting the P bit to 1 in FLMCR1. Do not set the SWE, ESU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 0 PSU 0 1 Description Program setup cleared Program setup [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 (Initial value) 19.5.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2) Bit EBR1 Initial value Read/Write Bit EBR2 Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 -- 7 EB7 0 R/W* 6 -- 0 -- 6 EB6 0 R/W 5 -- 0 -- 5 EB5 0 R/W 4 -- 0 -- 4 EB4 0 R/W 3 -- 0 -- 3 EB3 0 R/W 2 -- 0 -- 2 EB2 0 R/W 1 EB9 0 R/W* 1 EB1 0 R/W 0 EB8 0 R/W* 0 EB0 0 R/W Note: * In normal mode, these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. EBR1 and EBR2 are registers that specify the flash memory erase area block by block; bits 1 and 0 in EBR1 and bits 7 to 0 in EBR2 are readable/writable bits. EBR1 and EBR2 are each initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep 510 mode, and watch mode, when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a bit in EBR1 or EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected. Set only one bit in EBR1 or EBR2 (more than one bit cannot be set). When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 19.5. Table 19.5 Flash Memory Erase Blocks Block (Size) 128-kbyte Versions EB0 (1 kB) EB1 (1 kB) EB2 (1 kB) EB3 (1 kB) EB4 (28 kB) EB5 (16 kB) EB6 (8 kB) EB7 (8 kB) EB8 (32 kB) EB9 (32 kB) Address H'(00)0000 to H'(00)03FF H'(00)0400 to H'(00)07FF H'(00)0800 to H'(00)0BFF H'(00)0C00 to H'(00)0FFF H'(00)1000 to H'(00)7FFF H'(00)8000 to H'(00)BFFF H'(00)C000 to H'(00)DFFF H'00E000 to H'00FFFF H'010000 to H'017FFF H'018000 to H'01FFFF 19.5.4 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) Bit 7 -- Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W 6 IICX1 0 R/W 5 IICX0 0 R/W 4 IICE 0 R/W 3 FLSHE 0 R/W 2 -- 0 R/W 1 ICKS1 0 R/W 0 ICKS0 0 R/W STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the IIC operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), and on-chip flash memory (in F-ZTAT versions), and also selects the TCNT input clock. For details on functions not related to on-chip flash memory, see section 3.2.4, Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR), and descriptions of individual modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7--Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. 511 Bits 6 and 5--I2C Transfer Rate Select 1 and 0 (IICX1, IICX0): These bits control the operation of the I2C bus interface. For details see section 16.2.7, Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR). Bit 4--I2C Master Enable (IICE): Controls CPU access to the I2C bus interface data and control registers, PWMX data and control registers, and SCI control registers. For details see section 3.2.4, Serial /Timer Control Register (STCR). Bit 3--Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Setting the FLSHE bit to 1 enables read/write access to the flash memory control registers. If FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash memory control registers are deselected, and CPU access to the power-down state control registers and peripheral module control registers is selected. In this case, the flash memory control register contents are retained. Bit 3 FLSHE 0 Description In address area H'(FF)F80 to H'(FF)FF87, power-down state control registers and peripheral module control registers are accessed Flash memory control registers deselected 1 In address area H'(FF)F80 to H'(FF)FF87, flash memory control registers are accessed Power-down state registers and peripheral module control registers are deselected (Initial value) Bit 2--Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0--Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits control 8-bit timer operation. For details see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register (TCR). 512 19.6 On-Board Programming Modes When pins are set to on-board programming mode, a transition is made to in which program/erase/verify operations can be performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two onboard programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table 19.6. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 19.3. Only advanced mode setting is possible for boot mode. In the case of user program mode, user program mode is established in advanced mode or normal mode, depending on the setting of the MD0 pin. In normal mode, only programming of a 56-kbyte area of flash memory is possible. Table 19.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes Mode Mode Name Boot mode User program mode CPU Operating Mode Advanced mode Advanced mode Normal mode Note: * Can be used as I/O ports after boot mode is initiated. MD1 0 1 MD0 0 0 1 Pin P42 1* -- -- P41 1* -- -- P40 1* -- -- 19.6.1 Boot Mode When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. The channel 0 SCI to be used is set to asynchronous mode. When a reset-start is executed after the H8S/2128 Series MCU's pins have been set to boot mode, the boot program built into the MCU is started and the programming control program prepared in the host is serially transmitted to the MCU via the SCI. In the MCU, the user program received via the SCI is written into the user program area in on-chip RAM. After the transfer is completed, control branches to the start address of the user program area and the user program execution state is entered (flash memory programming is performed). The transferred user program must therefore include coding that follows the programming algorithm given later. The system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 19.7, and the boot program mode execution procedure in figure 19.8. 513 H8S/2128 Series chip Flash memory Host Write data reception Verify data transmission RxD0 SCI0 TxD0 On-chip RAM Figure 19.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode 514 Start Set pins to boot program mode and execute reset-start Host transfers data (H'00) continuously at prescribed bit rate MCU measures low period of H'00 data transmitted by host MCU calculates bit rate and sets value in bit rate register After bit rate adjustment, transmits one H'00 data byte to host to indicate end of adjustment Host confirms normal reception of bit rate adjustment end indication (H'00), and transmits one H'55 data byte After receiving H'55, MCU transfers part of boot program to RAM Check flash memory data, and if data has already been written, erase all blocks After confirming that all flash memory data has been erased, MCU transmits one H'AA data byte to host Host transmits number of user program bytes (N), upper byte followed by lower byte MCU transmits received number of bytes to host as verify data (echo-back) n=1 Host transmits user program sequentially in byte units MCU transmits received user program to host as verify data (echo-back) Transfer received programming control program to on-chip RAM No Yes End of transmission Transmit one H'AA data byte to host, and execute programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM n+1n n = N? Note: If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one H'FF byte is transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and subsequent operations are halted. Figure 19.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure 515 Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment Start bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop bit Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data) High period (1 or more bits) Figure 19.9 RxD0 Input Signal when Using Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment When boot mode is initiated, the H8S/2128 Series MCU measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The MCU calculates the bit rate of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the MCU. If reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations. Depending on the host's transmission bit rate and the MCU's system clock frequency, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the MCU. To ensure correct SCI operation, the host's transfer bit rate should be set to (2400, 4800, or 9600) bps. Table 19.7 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of the MCU's bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this system clock range. Table 19.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of H8S/2128 Series Bit Rate is Possible Host Bit Rate 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps System Clock Frequency for which Automatic Adjustment of H8S/2128 Series Bit Rate is Possible 8 MHz to 20 MHz 4 MHz to 20 MHz 2 MHz to 18 MHz On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the 128-byte area from H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F is reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure 19.10. The area to which the programming control program is transferred is the 3968-byte area from H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF. The boot program area can be used when the programming control program transferred into RAM enters the execution state. A stack area should be set up as required. 516 H'(FF)E080 Programming control program area (3,968 bytes) H'(FF)EFFF H'(FF)FF00 Boot program area* (128 bytes) H'(FF)FF7F Note: * The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note that the boot program remains stored in this area after a branch is made to the programming control program. Figure 19.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode Notes on Use of Boot Mode: * When the chip comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at the SCI's RxD0 pin. The reset should end with RxD0 high. After the reset ends, it takes about 100 states for the chip to get ready to measure the low period of the RxD0 input. * In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is unavailable, such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program activated in user program mode is accidentally erased. * Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased. * The RxD0 and TxD0 lines should be pulled up on the board. * Before branching to the programming control program (RAM area address H'(FF)E080), the chip terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 0) (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate remains set in BRR. The transmit data output pin, TxD0, goes to the high-level output state (P50DDR = 1, P50DR = 1). 517 The contents of the CPU's internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control program. In particular, since the stack pointer (SP) is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the programming control program. The initial values of other on-chip registers are not changed. * Boot mode can be entered by making the pin settings shown in table 19.6 and executing a reset-start. When the chip detects the boot mode setting at reset release*1, P42, P41, and P40 can be used as I/O ports. Boot mode can be cleared by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, then setting the mode pin and executing reset release*1. Boot mode can also be cleared by a WDT overflow reset. The mode pin input levels must not be changed in boot mode. * If the mode pin input levels are changed (for example, from low to high) during a reset, the state of ports with multiplexed address functions and bus control output pins (AS, RD, WR) will change according to the change in the microcomputer's operating mode*2. Therefore, care must be taken to make pin settings to prevent these pins from becoming output signal pins during a reset, or to prevent collision with signals outside the microcomputer. Notes: 1. Mode pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 4 states) with respect to the reset release timing. 2. Ports with multiplexed address functions will output a low level as the address signal if a state in which the mode pin setting is for mode 1 is entered during a reset. In other modes, the port pins go to the high-impedance state. The bus control output signals will output a high level if a state in which the mode pin setting is for mode 1 is entered during a reset. In other modes, the port pins go to the high-impedance state. 19.6.2 User Program Mode When set to user program mode, the chip can program and erase its flash memory by executing a user program/erase control program. Therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by providing on-board supply of programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as necessary. To select user program mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip flash memory (mode 2 or 3). In this mode, on-chip supporting modules other than flash memory operate as they normally would in mode 2 and 3. The flash memory itself cannot be read while the SWE bit is set to 1 to perform programming or erasing, so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip RAM or external memory. 518 Figure 19.11 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when transferred to on-chip RAM. Write the transfer program (and the program/erase control program if necessary) beforehand MD1, MD0 = 10, 11 Reset-start Transfer program/erase control program to RAM Branch to program/erase control program in RAM area Execute program/erase control program (flash memory rewriting) Branch to flash memory application program Note: The watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc. Figure 19.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure 519 19.7 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory In the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by software, using the CPU. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by setting the PSU and ESU bits in FLMCR2, and the P, E, PV, and EV bits in FLMCR1. The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory. Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE, EV, PV, E, and P bits in FLMCR1, and the ESU and PSU bits in FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash memory. 2. Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. 19.7.1 Program Mode Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 19.12 to write data or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 32 bytes at a time. The wait times (x, y, z, , , , , ) after setting/clearing individual bits in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and the maximum number of writes (N) are shown in table 22.12 in section 22.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. Following the elapse of (x) s or more after the SWE bit is set to 1 in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data area, and the 32-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write addresses. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. Thirty-two consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z + + ) s as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and after the elapse of (y) s or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the P bit in FLMCR1. The time during which the P bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Make a program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of (z) s. 520 19.7.2 Program-Verify Mode In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been correctly written in the flash memory. After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the P bit in FLMCR1 is cleared, then the PSU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least () s later). The watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of () s or more, and the operating mode is switched to programverify mode by setting the PV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of () s or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least () s after the dummy write before performing this read operation. Next, the originally written data is compared with the verify data, and reprogram data is computed (see figure 19.12) and transferred to the reprogram data area. After 32 bytes of data have been verified, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least () s, then clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before. However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times on the same bits. 521 Start Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) s Store 32-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area n=1 m=0 Write 32-byte data in RAM reprogram data area consecutively to flash memory Enable WDT Set PSU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (y) s Set P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z) s Clear P bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s Clear PSU bit in FLMCR2 Wait () s Disable WDT Set PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait () s Read verify data Increment address Program data = verify data? OK Reprogram data computation Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area NG End of 32-byte data verification? OK Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s m = 0? OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 End of programming *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *1 *5 Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. *4 nn+1 Start of programming *5 End of programming *5 Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. 3. If a bit for which programming has been completed in the 32-byte programming loop fails the following verify phase, additional programming is performed for that bit. 4. An area for storing program data (32 bytes) and reprogram data (32 bytes) must be provided in RAM. The contents of the latter are rewritten as programming progresses. 5. See section 22.5, Flash Memory Characteristics, for the values of x, y, z, , , , , , and N. Program Data 0 Verify Data 0 Reprogram Data 1 Comments Reprogramming is not performed if program data and verify data match Programming incomplete; reprogram -- Still in erased state; no action *2 0 1 m=1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 NG *3 *4 RAM Program data storage area (32 bytes) Reprogram data storage area (32 bytes) n N? *5 NG NG OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Programming failure Figure 19.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart 522 19.7.3 Erase Mode Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 19.13. The wait times (x, y, z, , , , , ) after setting/clearing individual bits in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and the maximum number of erases (N) are shown in table 22.12 in section 22.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. To perform data or program erasure, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in erase block register 1 or 2 (EBR1 or EBR2) at least (x) s after setting the SWE bit to 1 in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overerasing in the event of program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z + + ) ms as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for erase mode (erase setup) is carried out by setting the ESU bit in FLMCR2, and after the elapse of (y) s or more, the operating mode is switched to erase mode by setting the E bit in FLMCR1. The time during which the E bit is set is the flash memory erase time. Ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms. Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure. 19.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been correctly erased. After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the E bit in FLMCR1 is cleared, then the ESU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least () s later), the watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of () s or more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the EV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of () s or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least () s after the dummy write before performing this read operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is performed to the next address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data has not been erased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the erase/eraseverify sequence is not repeated more than N times. When verification is completed, exit eraseverify mode, and wait for at least () s. If erasure has been completed on all the erase blocks, clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If there are any unerased blocks, make a 1 bit setting in EBR1 or EBR2 for the flash memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. 523 Start *1 Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) s n=1 Set EBR1, EBR2 Enable WDT Set ESU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (y) s Set E bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z) ms Clear E bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s Clear ESU bit in FLMCR2 Wait () s Disable WDT Set EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s Set block start address to verify address *2 *2 *2 *4 *2 Start of erase *2 Halt erase *2 nn+1 H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait () s Increment address Read verify data Verify data = all 1? OK NG Last address of block? OK Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s *2 *2 *3 NG Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait () s *2 *2 NG *5 End of erasing of all erase blocks? OK n N? OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Erase failure NG Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 End of erasing Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary. See section 22.5, Flash Memory Characteristics, for the values of x, y, z, , , , , , and N. Verify data is read in 16-bit (W) units. Set only one bit in EBR1or EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. Figure 19.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erase) 524 19.8 Flash Memory Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 19.8.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). (See table 19.8.) Table 19.8 Hardware Protection Functions Item Reset/standby protection Description * In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset) and in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode, FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is entered. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC Characteristics section. Program Yes Erase Yes * 19.8.2 Software Protection Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE bit in FLMCR1 and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (See table 19.9.) 525 Table 19.9 Software Protection Functions Item SWE bit protection Description * Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the program/erase-protected state for all blocks. (Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory.) Block specification protection * Erase protection can be set for individual blocks by settings in erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all blocks in the erase-protected state. -- Yes Program Yes Erase Yes * 19.8.3 Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when MCU runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. If the MCU malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set to 1 in FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. FLER bit setting conditions are as follows: * When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction fetch) * Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing * When a SLEEP instruction (transition to software standby, sleep, subactive, subsleep, or watch mode) is executed during programming/erasing * When the bus is released during programming/erasing Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Figure 19.14 shows the flash memory state transition diagram. 526 Normal operation mode Program mode Erase mode RD VF PR ER FLER = 0 RES = 0 or STBY = 0 Reset or standby (hardware protection) RD VF PR ER FLER = 0 Error occurrence (software standby)*2 Error occurrence*1 RES = 0 or STBY = 0 RES = 0 or STBY = 0 FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, EBR2 initialization state Error protection mode RD VF*4 PR ER FLER = 1 Software standby mode Software standby mode release Error protection mode (software standby) RD VF PR ER FLER = 1 FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (except FLER bit), EBR1, EBR2 initialization state*3 Legend: RD: Memory read possible VF: Verify-read possible PR: Programming possible ER: Erasing possible RD: VF: PR: ER: Memory read not possible Verify-read not possible Programming not possible Erasing not possible Notes: 1. When an error occurs other than due to a SLEEP instruction, or when a SLEEP instruction is executed for a transition to subactive mode 2. When an error occurs due to a SLEEP instruction (except subactive mode) 3. Except sleep mode 4. VF in subactive mode Figure 19.14 Flash Memory State Transitions 19.9 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory All interrupts, including NMI, should be disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased (when the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1), and while the boot program is executing in boot mode*1, to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this: 1. An interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured. 2. In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would not be read correctly*2, possibly resulting in MCU runaway. 3. If an interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the normal boot mode sequence. 527 For these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling interrupts, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee normal erasing and programming or MCU operation. All interrupt requests, including NMI, must therefore be disabled inside and outside the MCU when programming or erasing flash memory. Interrupts are also disabled in the error-protection state while the P or E bit remains set in FLMCR1. Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the MCU until the programming control program has completed initial programming. 2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons: * If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will be returned). * If the interrupt entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly. 19.10 19.10.1 Flash Memory Programmer Mode Programmer Mode Setting Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board programming modes. In programmer mode, the on-chip ROM can be freely programmed using a PROM programmer that supports Hitachi microcomputer device types with 128-kbyte on-chip flash memory. Flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode are supported. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal signals are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation. Table 19.10 shows writer mode pin settings. Table 19.10 Programmer Mode Pin Settings Pin Names Mode pins: MD1, MD0 STBY pin RES pin XTAL and EXTAL pins Other setting pins: P47, P42, P41, P40, P67 Setting/External Circuit Connection Low-level input to MD1, MD0 High-level input (Hardware standby mode not set) Power-on reset circuit Oscillation circuit Low-level input to p42, p67, high-level input to P47, P41, P40 528 19.10.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map In programmer mode, a socket adapter is mounted on the PROM programmer to match the package concerned. Ensure that the socket adapter is obtained from a writer manufacturer supporting the Hitachi microcomputer device type with 128-kbyte on-chip flash memory. Figure 19.15 shows the memory map in programmer mode. For pin names in programmer mode, see section 1.3.2, Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode. MCU mode H'000000 On-chip ROM area H'01FFFF H'1FFFF H8S/2128 Programmer mode H'00000 Figure 19.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode 19.10.3 Programmer Mode Operation Table 19.11 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and table 19.12 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below. * Memory Read Mode Memory read mode supports byte reads. * Auto-Program Mode Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-programming. * Auto-Erase Mode Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-erasing. * Status Read Mode Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be confirmed by reading the FO6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an error occurs. 529 Table 19.11 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode Pin Names Mode Read Output disable Command write Chip disable* 1 Legend: H: High level L: Low level Hi-z: High impedance X: Don't care Notes: 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state. 2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode. CE L L L H OE L H H X WE H H L X FO0 to FO7 Data output Hi-z Data input Hi-z FA0 to FA17 Ain X Ain* 2 X Table 19.12 Programmer Mode Commands Number of Cycles 1+n 129 2 2 1st Cycle Mode Write Write Write Write Address Data X X X X H'00 H'40 H'20 H'71 Mode Read Write Write Write 2nd Cycle Address Data RA WA X X Dout Din H'20 H'71 Command Name Memory read mode Auto-program mode Auto-erase mode Status read mode Legend: RA: Read address PA: Program address Notes: 1. In auto-program mode, 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous 128-byte write. 2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write cycles (n). 530 19.10.4 Memory Read Mode * After the end of an auto-program, auto-erase, or status read operation, the command wait state is entered. To read memory contents, a transition must be made to memory read mode by means of a command write before the read is executed. * Command writes can be performed in memory read mode, just as in the command wait state. * Once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed. * After power-on, memory read mode is entered. Table 19.13 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width WE rise time WE fall time Symbol t nxtc t ceh t ces t dh t ds t wep tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 30 30 Max Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes Command write FA17 to FA0 Memory read mode Address stable CE OE WE FO7 to FO0 twep tceh tnxtc tces tf tr Data tdh tds Data Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE. Figure 19.16 Memory Read Mode Timing Waveforms after Command Write 531 Table 19.14 AC Characteristics when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width WE rise time WE fall time Symbol t nxtc t ceh t ces t dh t ds t wep tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 30 30 Max Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes Memory read mode FA17 to FA0 Other mode command write Address stable CE OE WE FO7 to FO0 tnxtc tces tf twep tceh tr H'XX tdh Data Note: Do not enable WE and OE at the same time. tds Figure 19.17 Timing Waveforms when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode 532 Table 19.15 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Access time CE output delay time OE output delay time Output disable delay time Data output hold time Symbol t acc t ce t oe t df t oh 5 Min Max 20 150 150 100 Unit s ns ns ns ns Notes FA17 to FA0 Address stable Address stable VIL tacc VIL VIH CE OE WE tacc FO7 to FO0 toh Data Data toh Figure 19.18 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Enable State Read FA17 to FA0 Address stable Address stable tacc CE tce toe tce toe VIH OE WE tacc FO7 to FO0 tdf Data toh Data tdf toh Figure 19.19 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Clocked Read 533 19.10.5 Auto-Program Mode AC Characteristics Table 19.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width Status polling start time Status polling access time Address setup time Address hold time Memory write time WE rise time WE fall time Symbol t nxtc t ceh t ces t dh t ds t wep t wsts t spa t as t ah t write tr tf 0 60 1 3000 30 30 Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 1 150 Max Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ms ns ns ns ms ns ns Notes FA17 to FA0 tceh CE tnxtc OE twep WE tces tf tds tdh FO6 FO7 to FO0 H'40 Address stable tas tah tnxtc Data transfer 1 byte to 128 bytes twsts tspa twrite (1 to 3000 ms) Programming operation end identification signal FO7 tr Programming normal end identification signal Programming wait Data Data FO0 to 5 = 0 Figure 19.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms 534 Notes on Use of Auto-Program Mode * In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers. * A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. * The lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be H'00 or H'80. If a value other than an effective address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be flagged. * Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 19.20). Do not perform transfer after the second cycle. * Do not perform a command write during a programming operation. * Perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address. Characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations. * Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose (FO7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end identification pin). * The status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and OE. 19.10.6 Auto-Erase Mode AC Characteristics Table 19.17 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width Status polling start time Status polling access time Memory erase time WE rise time WE fall time Symbol t nxtc t ceh t ces t dh t ds t wep t ests t spa t erase tr tf 100 Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 1 150 40000 30 30 Max Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ms ns ms ns ns 535 Notes FA17 to FA0 tces CE OE WE tnxtc tr tds FO7 FO6 CLin FO7 to FO0 H'20 DLin H'20 FO0 to FO5 = 0 tdh tspa tceh twep tf tests terase (100 to 40000 ms) Erase end identification signal Erase normal end confirmation signal tnxtc Figure 19.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms Notes on Use of Auto-Erase-Program Mode * Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing. * Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing. * Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose (FO7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end identification pin). * The status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and OE. 19.10.7 Status Read Mode * Status read mode is used to identify what type of abnormal end has occurred. Use this mode when an abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode. * The return code is retained until a command write for other than status read mode is performed. 536 Table 19.18 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode (Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25C 5C) Item Command write cycle CE hold time CE setup time Data hold time Data setup time Write pulse width OE output delay time Disable delay time CE output delay time WE rise time WE fall time Symbol t nxtc t ceh t ces t dh t ds t wep t oe t df t ce tr tf Min 20 0 0 50 50 70 150 100 150 30 30 Max Unit s ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes FA17 to FA0 CE tce OE twep WE tces tf tds tdh FO7 to FO0 H'71 tceh tr tnxtc tces tf tds tdh H'71 Data twep tceh tr tnxtc toe tnxtc tdf Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined. Figure 19.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms 537 Table 19.19 Status Read Mode Return Commands Pin Name FO7 Attribute FO6 FO5 Programming error FO4 Erase error FO3 -- FO2 -- FO1 FO0 Normal Command end error identification 0 Command error: 1 ProgramEffective ming or address error erase count exceeded 0 0 Initial value 0 Indications Normal end: 0 Abnormal end: 1 0 0 0 0 -- ProgramErase -- ming error: 1 Otherwise: 0 error: 1 Otherwise: 0 Otherwise: 0 Count Effective exceeded: 1 address Otherwise: 0 error: 1 Otherwise: 0 Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined. 19.10.8 Status Polling * The FO7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program or auto-erase mode. * The FO6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program or auto-erase mode. Table 19.20 Status Polling Output Truth Table Pin Names FO7 FO6 FO0 to FO5 Internal Operation in Progress 0 0 0 Abnormal End 1 0 0 -- 0 1 0 Normal End 1 1 0 19.10.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer mode setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode. Table 19.21 Command Wait State Transition Time Specifications Item Standby release (oscillation stabilization time) PROM mode setup time VCC hold time Symbol t osc1 t bmv t dwn Min 20 10 0 Max -- -- -- Unit ms ms ms Notes 538 VCC RES tosc1 tbmv Memory read Auto-program mode Auto-erase mode mode Command wait state tdwn Command Don't care wait state Normal/ abnormal end identification Command accepted Figure 19.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time and Programmer Mode Setup and Power Supply Fall Sequence 19.10.10 Notes On Memory Programming * When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out autoerasing before auto-programming. * When performing programming using programmer mode on a chip that has been programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before carrying out auto-programming. Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Hitachi. For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that autoerasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level. 2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block. 19.11 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions Precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode and writer mode are summarized below. Use the specified voltages and timing for programming and erasing: Applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. For a PROM programmer, use Hitachi microcomputer device Types with 128-kbyte on-chip flash memory that support a 5.0 V Programmer voltage. Do not select the HN28F101 setting for the PROM programmer, and only use the specified socket adapter. Incorrect use will result in damaging the device. Powering on and off: When applying or disconnecting VCC, fix the RES pin low and place the flash memory in the hardware protection state. The power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a power failure and subsequent recovery. 539 Use the recommended algorithm when programming and erasing flash memory: The recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a precaution against program runaway, etc. Do not set or clear the SWE bit during program execution in flash memory: Clear the SWE bit before executing a generated or reading data in flash memory. When the SWE bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten, but flash memory should only be accessed for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing). Do not use interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased: All interrupt requests, including NMI, should be disabled when programming or erasing flash memory to give priority to program/erase operations. Do not perform additional programming. Erase the memory before reprogramming: In onboard programming, perform only one programming operation on a 32-byte programming unit block. In programmer mode, too, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. Programming should be carried out with the entire programming unit block erased. Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM programmer: Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. Do not touch the socket adapter or chip during programming: Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. 19.12 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version The mask ROM version dose not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 19.22 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT version but not in the mask ROM version. If a register listed in table 19.22 is read in the mask ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a mask ROM version product, it must be modified to ensure that the registers in table 19.22 have no effect. 540 Table 19.22 Register Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version Abbreviation FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 Address H'FF80 H'FF81 H'FF82 H'FF83 Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 541 542 Section 20 Clock Pulse Generator 20.1 Overview The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock (o), the bus master clock, and internal clocks. The clock pulse generator consists of an oscillator circuit, a duty adjustment circuit, clock selection circuit, medium-speed clock divider, bus master clock selection circuit, subclock input circuit, and waveform shaping circuit. 20.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 20.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. EXTAL Oscillator XTAL Duty adjustment circuit Medium-speed clock divider Clock selection circuit o/2 to o/32 Bus master clock selection circuit oSUB o EXCL Subclock input circuit Waveform shaping circuit System clock To o pin Internal clock To supporting modules Bus master clock To CPU, DTC WDT1 count clock Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator 20.1.2 Register Configuration The clock pulse generator is controlled by the standby control register (SBYCR) and low-power control register (LPWRCR). Table 20.1 shows the register configuration. 543 Table 20.1 CPG Registers Name Standby control register Low-power control register Abbreviation SBYCR LPWRCR R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 Address* H'FF84 H'FF85 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 20.2 20.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Standby Control Register (SBYCR) 7 SSBY 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 -- 0 -- 2 SCK2 0 R/W 1 SCK1 0 R/W 0 SCK0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. Only bits 0 to 2 are described here. For a description of the other bits, see section 21.2.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR). SBYCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 2 to 0--System Clock Select 2 to 0 (SCK2 to SCK0): These bits select the bus master clock for high-speed mode and medium-speed mode. When operating the device after a transition to subactive mode or watch mode bits SCK2 to SCK0 should all be cleared to 0. Bit 2 SCK2 0 Bit 1 SCK1 0 Bit 0 SCK0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 544 -- Description Bus master is in high-speed mode Medium-speed clock is o/2 Medium-speed clock is o/4 Medium-speed clock is o/8 Medium-speed clock is o/16 Medium-speed clock is o/32 -- (Initial value) 20.2.2 Bit Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) 7 DTON 6 LSON 0 R/W 5 NESEL 0 R/W 4 EXCLE 0 R/W 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 -- 0 -- 0 -- 0 -- Initial value Read/Write 0 R/W LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. Only bit 4 is described here. For a description of the other bits, see section 21.2.2, Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR). LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 4--Subclock Input Enable (EXCLE): Controls subclock input from the EXCL pin. Bit 4 EXCLE 0 1 Description Subclock input from EXCL pin is disabled Subclock input from EXCL pin is enabled (Initial value) 20.3 Oscillator Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock. 20.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure 20.2. Select the damping resistance Rd according to table 20.2. An AT-cut parallel-resonance crystal should be used. CL1 EXTAL XTAL Rd CL2 CL1 = CL2 = 10 to 22pF Figure 20.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example) 545 Table 20.2 Damping Resistance Value Frequency (MHz) Rd () 2 1k 4 500 8 200 10 0 12 0 16 0 20 0 Crystal resonator: Figure 20.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal resonator that has the characteristics shown in table 20.3 and the same frequency as the system clock (o). CL L XTAL Rs EXTAL AT-cut parallel-resonance type C0 Figure 20.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit Table 20.3 Crystal Resonator Parameters Frequency (MHz) RS max () C0 max (pF) 2 500 7 4 120 7 8 80 7 10 70 7 12 60 7 16 50 7 20 40 7 Note on Board Design: When a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be noted. Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 20.4. When designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins. 546 Avoid CL2 Signal A Signal B H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series chip XTAL EXTAL CL1 Figure 20.4 Example of Incorrect Board Design 20.3.2 External Clock Input Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 20.5. If the XTAL pin is left open, make sure that stray capacitance is no more than 10 pF. In example (b), make sure that the external clock is held high in standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and wach mode. EXTAL XTAL Open External clock input (a) XTAL pin left open EXTAL XTAL External clock input (b) Complementary clock input at XTAL pin Figure 20.5 External Clock Input (Examples) External Clock: The external clock signal should have the same frequency as the system clock (o). 547 Table 20.4 and figure 20.6 show the input conditions for the external clock. Table 20.4 External Clock Input Conditions VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V Item Symbol Min 40 Max -- VCC = 5.0 V 10% Min 20 Max -- Unit ns Test Conditions Figure 20.6 External clock t EXL input low pulse width External clock t EXH input high pulse width External clock t EXr rise time External clock t EXf fall time Clock low pulse width t CL 40 -- 20 -- ns -- -- 0.4 80 10 10 0.6 -- 0.6 -- -- -- 0.4 80 0.4 80 5 5 0.6 -- 0.6 -- ns ns t cyc ns t cyc ns o 5 MHz Figure 22.4 o < 5 MHz o 5 MHz o < 5 MHz Clock high pulse width t CH 0.4 80 tEXH tEXL EXTAL VCC x 0.5 tEXr tEXf Figure 20.6 External Clock Input Timing Table 20.5 shows the external clock output settling delay time, and figure 20.7 shows the external clock output settling delay timing. The oscillator and duty adjustment circuit have a function for adjusting the waveform of the external clock input at the EXTAL pin. When the prescribed clock signal is input at the EXTAL pin, internal clock signal output is fixed after the elapse of the external clock output settling delay time (tDEXT). As the clock signal output is not fixed during the tDEXT period, the reset signal should be driven low to maintain the reset state. 548 Table 20.5 External Clock Output Settling Delay Time Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V Item External clock output settling delay time Symbol t DEXT* Min 500 Max -- Unit s Notes Figure 20.7 Note: * t DEXT includes RES pulse width (t RESW). VCC STBY VIH EXTAL o (internal or external) RES tDEXT* Note: * tDEXT includes RES pulse width (tRESW). Figure 20.7 External Clock Output Settling Delay Timing 549 20.4 Duty Adjustment Circuit When the oscillator frequency is 5 MHz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the system clock (o). 20.5 Medium-Speed Clock Divider The medium-speed clock divider divides the system clock to generate o/2, o/4, o/8, o/16, and o/32 clocks. 20.6 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit The bus master clock selection circuit selects the system clock (o) or one of the medium-speed clocks (o/2, o/4, o/8, o/16, or o/32) to be supplied to the bus master, according to the settings of bits SCK2 to SCK0 in SBYCR. 20.7 Subclock Input Circuit The subclock input circuit controls the subclock input from the EXCL pin. Inputting the Subclock: When a subclock is used, a 32.768 kHz external clock should be input from the EXCL pin. In this case, clear bit P46DDR to 0 in P4DDR and set bit EXCLE to 1 in LPWRCR. The subclock input conditions are shown in table 20.6 and figure 20.8. Table 20.6 Subclock Input Conditions VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V Item Symbol Min -- -- -- -- Typ 15.26 15.26 -- -- Max -- -- 10 10 Unit s s ns ns Test Conditions Figure 20.8 Subclock input low pulse t EXCLL width Subclock input high pulse t EXCLH width Subclock input rise time Subclock input fall time t EXCLr t EXCLf 550 tEXCLH tEXCLL EXCL VCC x 0.5 tEXCLr tEXCLf Figure 20.8 Subclock Input Timing When Subclock is not Needed: Do not enable subclock input when the subclock is not needed. 20.8 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit To eliminate noise in the subclock input from the EXCL pin, this circuit samples the clock using a clock obtained by dividing the o clock. The sampling frequency is set with the NESEL bit in LPWRCR. For details, see section 21.2.2, Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR). The clock is not sampled in subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode. 20.9 Clock Selection Circuit This circuit selects the system clock used inside the MCU. When returning from high-speed mode, medium-speed mode, sleep mode, the reset state, or standby mode, the XTAL/EXTAL pin clock generated by the oscillator is selected as the system clock. In subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode, the subclock input from the EXCL pin is selected as the system clock. In this case, modules and functions including the CPU, TMR0/1, WDT0/1, ports, and interrupts operate on oSUB, and the count clocks for the timers are also scaled from oSUB. 551 552 Section 21 Power-Down State 21.1 Overview In addition to the normal program execution state, the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series have a power-down state in which operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. Low-power operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and so on. The H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series operating modes are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. High-speed mode Medium-speed mode Subactive mode Sleep mode Subsleep mode Watch mode Module stop mode Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Of these, 2 to 9 are power-down modes. Sleep mode and subsleep mode are CPU modes, mediumspeed mode is a CPU and bus master mode, subactive mode is a CPU, bus master, and on-chip supporting module mode, and module stop mode is an on-chip supporting module mode (including bus masters other than the CPU). Certain combinations of these modes can be set. After a reset, the MCU is in high-speed mode and module stop mode (excluding the DTC). Table 21.1 shows the internal chip states in each mode, and table 21.2 shows the conditions for transition to the various modes. Figure 21.1 shows a mode transition diagram. 553 Table 21.1 H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series Internal States in Each Mode Function System clock oscillator Subclock input CPU operation Instructions Registers External interrupts NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 On-chip DTC supporting module operation WDT1 WDT0 TMR0, 1 FRT TMRX, Y Timer connection IIC0 IIC1 SCI0 SCI1 PWM PWMX A/D RAM I/O Functioning Functioning Function- Function- Function- Retained ing ing (DTC) ing Function- Functioning ing Function- Retained ing Function- Retained ing Function- Retained ing Retained Retained Retained High impedance Function- Halted ing/halted (reset) (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Functioning/halted (retained) Functioning Functioning Mediumspeed Functioning Function- Halted ing/halted (retained) (retained) Function- Subclock ing operation Halted (retained) Halted Halted (retained) (retained) Subclock Subclock operation operation Halted Halted (retained) (reset) Halted Halted (retained) (reset) Functioning HighSpeed Functioning Functioning Functioning MediumSpeed Sleep Module Stop Watch Software Hardware Subactive Subsleep Standby Standby Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Retained Halted Halted Halted Undefined Function- Functioning ing Function- Functioning ing Mediumspeed Halted Retained Function- Functioning ing Function- Halted ing Function- Functioning ing Function- Halted ing Retained Function- Functioning ing Function- Functioning ing Subclock Halted operation Retained Function- Functioning ing Function- Halted ing Function- Functioning ing Halted Halted (retained) (retained) Note: "Halted (retained)" means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is "operation suspended." "Halted (reset)" means that internal register values and internal states are initialized. In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted (reset or retained). 554 Program-halted state STBY pin = low Reset state STBY pin = high RES pin = low RES pin = high Program execution state SLEEP instruction Any interrupt*3 SLEEP instruction External interrupt*4 SLEEP instruction SSBY = 1 PSS = 1, DTON = 0 Watch mode (subclock) SSBY = 1 PSS = 0, LSON = 0 Software standby mode SSBY = 0, LSON = 0 Sleep mode (main clock) Hardware standby mode High-speed mode (main clock) SCK2 to SCK0 = 0 SCK2 to SCK0 0 Medium-speed mode (main clock) SLEEP instruction SSBY = 1, PSS = 1, DTON = 1, LSON = 0 Clock switching exception handling after oscillation setting time (STS2 to STS0) Interrupt*1, SLEEP instruction SSBY = 1, PSS = 1, LSON bit = 0 DTON = 1, LSON = 1 Clock switching SLEEP exception handling instruction Interrupt*1, LSON bit = 1 SLEEP instruction Interrupt*2 SSBY = 0 PSS = 1, LSON = 1 Subsleep mode (subclock) Subactive mode (subclock) : Transition after exception handling : Power-down mode Notes: * When a transition is made between modes by means of an interrupt, transition cannot be made on interrupt source generation alone. Ensure that interrupt handling is performed after accepting the interrupt request. * From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. * From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low. * When a transition is made to watch mode or subactive mode, high-speed mode must be set. *1 *2 *3 *4 NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2, and WDT1 interrupts NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2, and WDT0 interrupts, WDT1 interrupt, TMR0 interrupt, TMR1 interrupt All interrupts NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2 Figure 21.1 Mode Transitions 555 Table 21.2 Power-Down Mode Transition Conditions Control Bit States at Time of Transition State before Transition SSBY PSS * * 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 LSON 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 * 0 1 * 0 1 0 1 DTON * * * * 0 0 1 1 * * * * 0 0 1 1 State after Transition State after Return by SLEEP Instruction by Interrupt Sleep -- Software standby -- Watch Watch -- Subactive -- -- Subsleep -- Watch Watch High-speed -- High-speed/ medium-speed -- High-speed/ medium-speed -- High-speed Subactive -- -- -- -- Subactive -- High-speed Subactive -- -- High-speed/ 0 medium-speed 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Subactive 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 *: Don't care --: Do not set. 556 21.1.1 Register Configuration The power-down state is controlled by the SBYCR, LPWRCR, TCSR (WDT1), and MSTPCR registers. Table 21.3 summarizes these registers. Table 21.3 Power-Down State Registers Name Standby control register Low-power control register Timer control/status register (WDT1) Module stop control register Abbreviation SBYCR LPWRCR TCSR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial Value H'00 H'00 H'00 H'3F H'FF Address* 1 H'FF84* 2 H'FF85* 2 H'FFEA H'FF86* 2 H'FF87* 2 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Some power-down state registers are assigned to the same address as other registers. In this case, register selection is performed by the FLSHE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR). 21.2 21.2.1 Bit Register Descriptions Standby Control Register (SBYCR) 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W 3 -- 0 -- 2 SCK2 0 R/W 1 SCK1 0 R/W 0 SCK0 0 R/W Initial value Read/Write SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. SBYCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7--Software Standby (SSBY): Determines the operating mode, in combination with other control bits, when a power-down mode transition is made by executing a SLEEP instruction. The SSBY setting is not changed by a mode transition due to an interrupt, etc. 557 Bit 7 SSBY 0 Description Transition to sleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode Transition to subsleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode 1 Transition to software standby mode, subactive mode, or watch mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode Transition to watch mode or high-speed mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode (Initial value) Bits 6 to 4--Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the time the MCU waits for the clock to stabilize when software standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode is cleared and a transition is made to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode by means of a specific interrupt or instruction. With crystal oscillation, refer to table 21.4 and make a selection according to the operating frequency so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the oscillation settling time). With an external clock, any selection can be made. Bit 6 STS2 0 Bit 5 STS1 0 Bit 4 STS0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description Standby time = 8192 states Standby time = 16384 states Standby time = 32768 states Standby time = 65536 states Standby time = 131072 states Standby time = 262144 states Reserved Standby time = 16 states* (Initial value) Note: * This setting must not be used in the flash memory version. Bit 3--Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 0. 558 Bits 2 to 0--System Clock Select (SCK2 to SCK0): These bits select the clock for the bus master in high-speed mode and medium-speed mode. When operating the device after a transition to subactive mode or watch mode, bits SCK2 to SCK0 should all be cleared to 0. Bit 2 SCK2 0 Bit 1 SCK1 0 Bit 0 SCK0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 -- Description Bus master is in high-speed mode Medium-speed clock is o/2 Medium-speed clock is o/4 Medium-speed clock is o/8 Medium-speed clock is o/16 Medium-speed clock is o/32 -- (Initial value) 21.2.2 Bit Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) 7 DTON 0 R/W 6 LSON 0 R/W 5 NESEL 0 R/W 4 EXCLE 0 R/W 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 -- 0 -- 0 -- 0 -- Initial value Read/Write LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7--Direct-Transfer On Flag (DTON): Specifies whether a direct transition is made between high-speed mode, medium-speed mode, and subactive mode when making a power-down transition by executing a SLEEP instruction. The operating mode to which the transition is made after SLEEP instruction execution is determined by a combination of other control bits. 559 Bit 7 DTON 0 Description When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, software standby mode, or watch mode* When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to subsleep mode or watch mode (Initial value) 1 When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, a transition is made directly to subactive mode*, or a transition is made to sleep mode or software standby mode When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made directly to high-speed mode, or a transition is made to subsleep mode Note: * When a transition is made to watch mode or subactive mode, high-speed mode must be set. Bit 6--Low-Speed On Flag (LSON): Determines the operating mode in combination with other control bits when making a power-down transition by executing a SLEEP instruction. Also controls whether a transition is made to high-speed mode or to subactive mode when watch mode is cleared. Bit 6 LSON 0 Description When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, software standby mode, or watch mode* When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to watch mode, or directly to high-speed mode After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to high-speed mode 1 (Initial value) When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode a transition is made to watch mode or subactive mode* When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to subsleep mode or watch mode After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to subactive mode Note: * When a transition is made to watch mode or subactive mode, high-speed mode must be set. Bit 5--Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select (NESEL): Selects the frequency at which the subclock (oSUB) input from the EXCL pin is sampled with the clock (o) generated by the system clock oscillator. When o = 5 MHz or higher, clear this bit to 0. 560 Bit 5 NESEL 0 1 Description Sampling at o divided by 32 Sampling at o divided by 4 (Initial value) Bit 4--Subclock Input Enable (EXCLE): Controls subclock input from the EXCL pin. Bit 4 EXCLE 0 1 Description Subclock input from EXCL pin is disabled Subclock input from EXCL pin is enabled (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0--Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. 21.2.3 TCSR1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OVF 0 R/(W)* 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 PSS 0 R/W 3 RST/NMI 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) Note: * Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. TCSR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs selection of the WDT1 TCNT input clock, mode, etc. Only bit 4 is described here. For details of the other bits, see section 14.2.2, Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR). TCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 4--Prescaler Select (PSS): Selects the WDT1 TCNT input clock. This bit also controls the operation in a power-down mode transition. The operating mode to which a transition is made after execution of a SLEEP instruction is determined in combination with other control bits. 561 For details, see the description of Clock Select 2 to 0 in section 14.2.2, Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR). Bit 4 PSS 0 Description TCNT counts o-based prescaler (PSM) divided clock pulses When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, a transition is made to sleep mode or software standby mode (Initial value) 1 TCNT counts oSUB-based prescaler (PSM) divided clock pulses When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, watch mode*, or subactive mode* When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to subsleep mode, watch mode, or high-speed mode Note: * When a transition is made to watch mode or subactive mode, high-speed mode must be set. 21.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers that perform module stop mode control. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTRCRH and MSTPCRL Bits 7 to 0--Module Stop (MSTP 15 to MSTP 0): These bits specify module stop mode. See table 21.3 for the method of selecting on-chip supporting modules. MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL Bits 7 to 0 MSTP15 to MSTP0 0 1 Description Module stop mode is cleared Module stop mode is set (Initial value of MSTP15, MSTP14) (Initial value of MSTP13 to MSTP0) 562 21.3 Medium-Speed Mode When the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SBYCR are set to 1 in high-speed mode, the operating mode changes to medium-speed mode at the end of the bus cycle. In medium-speed mode, the CPU operates on the operating clock (o/2, o/4, o/8, o/16, or o/32) specified by the SCK2 to SCK0 bits. The bus master other than the CPU (the DTC) also operates in medium-speed mode. On-chip supporting modules other than the bus masters always operate on the high-speed clock (o). In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to the bus master operating clock. For example, if o/4 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip memory is accessed in 4 states, and internal I/O registers in 8 states. Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing all of bits SCK2 to SCK0 to 0. A transition is made to high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle. If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in LPWRCR are cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, and the LSON bit in LPWRCR and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) are both cleared to 0, a transition is made to software standby mode. When software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. When the RES pin is driven low, a transition is made to the reset state, and medium-speed mode is cleared. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer. When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Figure 21.2 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode. 563 Medium-speed mode o, supporting module clock Bus master clock Internal address bus SBYCR SBYCR Internal write signal Figure 21.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing 21.4 21.4.1 Sleep Mode Sleep Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in LPWRCR are both cleared to 0, the CPU enters sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops but the contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Other supporting modules do not stop. 21.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode Sleep mode is cleared by any interrupt, or with the RES pin or STBY pin. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, sleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception handling is started. Sleep mode will not be cleared if interrupts are disabled, or if interrupts other than NMI have been masked by the CPU. Clearing with the RES Pin: When the RES pin is driven low, the reset state is entered. When the RES pin is driven high after the prescribed reset input period, the CPU begins reset exception handling. Clearing with the STBY Pin: When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. 564 21.5 21.5.1 Module Stop Mode Module Stop Mode Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip supporting modules. When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating independently. Table 21.4 shows MSTP bits and the corresponding on-chip supporting modules. When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module starts operating again at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules other than the SCI, A/D converter, 8-bit PWM module, and 14-bit PWM module, are retained. After reset release, all modules other than the DTC are in module stop mode. When an on-chip supporting module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is disabled. 565 Table 21.4 MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-Chip Supporting Modules Register MSTPCRH Bit MSTP15 MSTP14* MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11* MSTP10* MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTPCRL MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5* MSTP4* MSTP3* MSTP2* MSTP1* MSTP0* Module -- Data transfer controller (DTC) 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) 8-bit timers (TMR0, TMR1) 8-bit PWM timer (PWM), 14-bit PWM timer (PWMX) -- A/D converter 8-bit timers (TMRX, TMRY), timer connection Serial communication interface 0 (SCI0) Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1) -- I 2C bus interface (IIC) channel 0 (option) I 2C bus interface (IIC) channel 1 (option) -- -- -- Note: Bit 15 must not be set to 1. Bits 10, 5, 2, 1, and 0 can be read or written to, but do not affect operation. * Must be set to 1 in the H8S/2124 Series. 21.5.2 Usage Note If there is conflict between DTC module stop mode setting and a DTC bus request, the bus request has priority and the MSTP bit will not be set to 1. Write 1 to the MSTP bit again after the DTC bus cycle. When using an H8S/2124 Series MCU, the MSTP bits for nonexistent modules must be set to 1. 566 21.6 21.6.1 Software Standby Mode Software Standby Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) is cleared to 0, software standby mode is entered. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and oscillator all stop. However, the contents of the CPU's internal registers, RAM data, and the states of on-chip supporting modules other than the SCI, PWM, and PWMX, and of the I/O ports, are retained. In this mode the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced. 21.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode Software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI pin, or pin IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2), or by means of the RES pin or STBY pin. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 interrupt request signal is input, clock oscillation starts, and after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR, stable clocks are supplied to the entire chip, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started. Software standby mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0 or has been masked by the CPU. Clearing with the RES Pin: When the RES pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the same time as clock oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the RES pin must be held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin goes high, the CPU begins reset exception handling. Clearing with the STBY Pin: When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. 567 21.6.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below. Using a Crystal Oscillator: Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the oscillation settling time). Table 21.5 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits STS2 to STS0. Table 21.5 Oscillation Settling Time Settings 20 STS2 STS1 STS0 Standby Time MHz 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 0.41 0.82 1.6 3.3 16 MHz 0.51 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 12 MHz 0.65 1.3 2.7 5.5 10.9 21.8 -- 1.3 10 MHz 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 8 MHz 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 6 MHz 1.3 2.7 5.5 4 MHz 2.0 4.1 8.2 2 MHz 4.1 8.2 16.4 32.8 65.5 131.2 -- 8.0 *: Don't care s Unit ms 10.9 16.4 21.8 43.6 -- 2.7 32.8 65.6 -- 4.0 131072 states 6.6 262144 states Reserved 16 states* 13.1 16.4 26.2 -- 1.6 32.8 -- 2.0 13.1 16.4 -- 0.8 -- 1.0 : Recommended time setting Note: * This setting must not be used in the flash memory version. Using an External Clock: Any value can be set. Normally, use of the minimum time is recommended. 21.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example Figure 21.3 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the falling edge on the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin. In this example, an NMI interrupt is accepted with the NMIEG bit in SYSCR cleared to 0 (falling edge specification), then the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the SSBY bit is set to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode. Software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge on the NMI pin. 568 Oscillator o NMI NMIEG SSBY NMI exception handling NMIEG = 1 SSBY = 1 Software standby mode (power-down state) Oscillation settling time tOSC2 NMI exception handling SLEEP instruction Figure 21.3 Software Standby Mode Application Example 21.6.5 Usage Note In software standby mode, I/O port states are retained. Therefore, there is no reduction in current dissipation for the output current when a high-level signal is output. Current dissipation increases while waiting for oscillation to settle. 569 21.7 21.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode Hardware Standby Mode When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode from any mode. In hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state and stop operation, resulting in a significant reduction in power dissipation. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM data is retained. I/O ports are set to the high-impedance state. In order to retain on-chip RAM data, the RAME bit in SYSCR should be cleared to 0 before driving the STBY pin low. Do not change the state of the mode pins (MD1 and MD0) while the chip is in hardware standby mode. Hardware standby mode is cleared by means of the STBY pin and the RES pin. When the STBY pin is driven high while the RES pin is low, the reset state is set and clock oscillation is started. Ensure that the RES pin is held low until the clock oscillation settles (at least 8 ms--the oscillation settling time--when using a crystal oscillator). When the RES pin is subsequently driven high, a transition is made to the program execution state via the reset exception handling state. 570 21.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing Figure 21.4 shows an example of hardware standby mode timing. When the STBY pin is driven low after the RES pin has been driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Hardware standby mode is cleared by driving the STBY pin high, waiting for the oscillation settling time, then changing the RES pin from low to high. Oscillator RES STBY Oscillation settling time Reset exception handling Figure 21.4 Hardware Standby Mode Timing 571 21.8 21.8.1 Watch Mode Watch Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or subactive mode when the SSBY in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) is set to 1, the CPU makes a transition to watch mode. In this mode, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules except WDT1 stop. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, the contents of some of the CPU's internal registers and on-chip RAM are retained, and I/O ports retain their states prior to the transition. 21.8.2 Clearing Watch Mode Watch mode is cleared by an interrupt (WOVI1 interrupt, NMI pin, or pin IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2), or by means of the RES pin or STBY pin. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, watch mode is cleared and a transition is made to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode if the LSON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, or to subactive mode if the LSON bit is set to 1. When making a transition to highspeed mode, after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, stable clocks are supplied to the entire chip, and interrupt exception handling is started. Watch mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0, or with an on-chip supporting module interrupt if acceptance of the relevant interrupt has been disabled by the interrupt enable register or masked by the CPU. See section 21.6.3, Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode, for the oscillation settling time setting when making a transition from watch mode to high-speed mode. Clearing with the RES Pin: See "Clearing with the RES Pin" in section 21.6.2, Clearing Software Standby Mode. Clearing with the STBY Pin: When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. 572 21.9 21.9.1 Subsleep Mode Subsleep Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode when the SSBY in SBYCR is cleared to 0, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 1, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) is set to 1, the CPU makes a transition to subsleep mode. In this mode, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules except TMR0, TMR1, WDT0, and WDT1 stop. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, the contents of some of the CPU's internal registers and on-chip RAM are retained, and I/O ports retain their states prior to the transition. 21.9.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt (on-chip supporting module interrupt, NMI pin, or pin IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2), or by means of the RES pin or STBY pin. Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, subsleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception handling is started. Subsleep mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0 to IRQ2 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0, or with an on-chip supporting module interrupt if acceptance of the relevant interrupt has been disabled by the interrupt enable register or masked by the CPU. Clearing with the RES Pin: See "Clearing with the RES Pin" in section 21.6.2, Clearing Software Standby Mode. Clearing with the STBY Pin: When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode 573 21.10 21.10.1 Subactive Mode Subactive Mode If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode when the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the DTON bit in LPWRCR, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) are all set to 1, the CPU makes a transition to subactive mode. When an interrupt is generated in watch mode, if the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 1, a direct transition is made to subactive mode. When an interrupt is generated in subsleep mode, a transition is made to subactive mode. In subactive mode, the CPU performs sequential program execution at low speed on the subclock. In this mode, all on-chip supporting modules except TMR0, TMR1, WDT0, and WDT1 stop. When operating the device in subactive mode, bits SCK2 to SCK0 in SBYCR must all be cleared to 0. 21.10.2 Clearing Subactive Mode Subsleep mode is cleared by a SLEEP instruction, or by means of the RES pin or STBY pin. Clearing with a SLEEP Instruction: When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) is set to 1, subactive mode is cleared and a transition is made to watch mode. When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 1, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) is set to 1, a transition is made to subsleep mode. When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit is set to 1 and the LSON bit is cleared to 0 in LPWRCR, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1) is set to 1, a transition is made directly to high-speed mode. Fort details of direct transition, see section 21.11, Direct Transition. Clearing with the RES Pin: See "Clearing with the RES Pin" in section 21.6.2, Clearing Software Standby Mode. Clearing with the STBY Pin: When the STBY pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode 574 21.11 21.11.1 Direct Transition Overview of Direct Transition There are three operating modes in which the CPU executes programs: high-speed mode, mediumspeed mode, and subactive mode. A transition between high-speed mode and subactive mode without halting the program is called a direct transition. A direct transition can be carried out by setting the DTON bit in LPWRCR to 1 and executing a SLEEP instruction. After the transition, direct transition exception handling is started. Direct Transition from High-Speed Mode to Subactive Mode: If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode while the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the LSON bit and DTON bit in LPWRCR, and the PSS bit in TSCR (WDT1) are all set to 1, a transition is made to subactive mode. Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to High-Speed Mode: If a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit is cleared to 0 and the DTON bit is set to 1 in LPWRCR, and the PSS bit in TSCR (WDT1) is set to 1, after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, a transition is made to directly to highspeed mode. 575 576 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics [H8S/2128 Series, H8S/2128 F-ZTAT] 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 22.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage Input voltage (except ports 6, and 7) Input voltage (CIN input not selected for port 6) Input voltage (CIN input selected for port 6) Input voltage (port 7) Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Symbol VCC Vin Vin Vin Vin AVCC VAN Topr Value -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 Lower voltage of -0.3 to V CC +0.3 and AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75 Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85 Operating temperature (Flash memory programming/ erasing) Storage temperature Topr Regular specifications: 0 to +75 Wide-range specifications: 0 to +85 Tstg -55 to +125 C Unit V V V V V V V C C C Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. 577 22.2 DC Characteristics Table 22.2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 22.3 lists the permissible output currents. Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (1) Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC*1 = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C*8 (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C*8 (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt P67 to P60* * , (1) trigger input IRQ2 to IRQ0* 3 voltage Input high voltage RES, STBY, (2) NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Input pins except (1) and (2) above Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, input pins except (1) and (3) above Output high All output pins voltage (except P47, and P52* 4) P47, P52* Output low voltage Input leakage current 4 2, 5 Symbol VT VT - + + - Min 1.0 -- 0.4 Typ -- -- -- Max -- Unit V Test Conditions VCC x 0.7 V -- VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 V V V VT - VT VIH VCC - 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 -- 2.0 2.0 -- -- AVCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V (3) VIL -0.3 -0.3 -- -- 0.5 0.8 V V VOH VCC - 0.5 -- 3.5 2.5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 10.0 1.0 1.0 V V V V V A A A I OH = -200 A I OH = -1 mA I OH = -1 mA I OL = 1.6 mA I OL = 10 mA Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V All output pins Ports 1 to 3 RES STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 Port 7 VOL Iin -- -- -- -- -- Vin = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V 578 Item Three-state Ports 1 to 6 leakage current (off state) Input pull-up MOS current Ports 1 to 3 Symbol ITSI Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V -I P 50 -- 300 A Vin = 0 V Input RES capacitance NMI P52, P47, P24, P23 Input pins except (4) above Current Normal operation dissipation* 6 Sleep mode Standby mode* 7 (4) Cin -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 70 55 0.01 -- 1.5 0.01 -- -- -- 80 50 20 15 90 75 5.0 20.0 3.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 -- pF pF pF pF mA mA A A mA A V V V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C I CC -- -- -- -- f = 20 MHz f = 20 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current During A/D conversion Idle AlCC -- -- AVCC = 2.0 V to 5.5 V Operating Idle/not used Analog power supply voltage* 1 AVCC 4.5 2.0 RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not leave the AVCC, and AVSS pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 5.5 V to AVCC by connection to the power supply (V CC), or some other method. 2. P67 to P60 include supporting module inputs multiplexed on those pins. 3. IRQ2 includes the ADTRG signal multiplexed on that pin. 4. In the H8S/2128 Series, P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P47/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs. An external pull-up resistor is necessary to provide high-level output from SCL0 and SDA0 (ICE = 1). In the H8S/2128 Series, P52/SCK0 and P47 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS. 579 5. The upper limit of the port 6 applied voltage is V CC + 0.3 V when CIN input is not selected, and the lower of VCC + 0.3 V and AVCC + 0.3 V when CIN input is selected. When a pin is in output mode, the output voltage is equivalent to the applied voltage. 6. Current dissipation values are for V IH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up MOSs in the off state. 7. The values are for VRAM VCC < 4.5 V, VIH min = VCC x 0.9, and V IL max = 0.3 V. 8. For flash memory program/erase operations, the applicable range is T a = 0 to +75C (regular specifications) or Ta = 0 to +85C (wide-range specifications). 580 Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (2) Conditions: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V*8, AVCC*1 = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C*8 (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C*8 (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt P67 to P60* * , (1) trigger input IRQ2 to IRQ0* 3 voltage 2, 5 Symbol VT VT - + + - + + - - Min 1.0 -- 0.4 0.8 -- 0.3 VCC - 0.7 Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- Unit V Test Conditions VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V VCC x 0.7 V -- -- V V VT - VT VT VT VCC < 4.5 V VCC x 0.7 V -- V VT - VT Input high voltage RES, STBY, (2) NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Input pins except (1) and (2) above Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, input pins except (1) and (3) above Output high All output pins voltage (except P47, and P52* 4) VOH (3) VIL VIH VCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V AVCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V VCC x 0.7 -- 2.0 2.0 -- -- -0.3 -0.3 -- -- 0.5 0.8 V V VCC - 0.5 3.5 -- -- -- -- V V I OH = -200 A I OH = -1 mA, VCC= 4.5 V to 5.5 V I OH = -1 mA, VCC < 4.5 V I OH = -1 mA I OL = 1.6 mA I OL = 10 mA Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V 3.0 P47, P52* 4 Output low voltage Input leakage current All output pins Ports 1 to 3 RES STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Iin VOL 2.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 10.0 1.0 1.0 V V V V A A A 581 Item Three-state Ports 1 to 6 leakage current (off state) Input pull-up MOS current Ports 1 to 3 Symbol ITSI Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V -I P 50 -- 300 A Vin = 0 V, VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V Vin = 0 V, VCC < 4.5 V Vin = 0 V, f = 1 MHz, Ta = 25C 30 (4) Cin -- -- -- -- I CC -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 55 42 0.01 -- 1.5 0.01 -- -- -- 200 80 50 20 15 75 62 5.0 20.0 3.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 -- A pF pF pF pF mA mA A A mA A V V V Input RES capacitance NMI P52, P47, P24, P23 Input pins except (4) above Current Normal operation dissipation* 6 Sleep mode Standby mode* 7 f = 16 MHz f = 16 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current During A/D conversion Idle AlCC -- -- AVCC = 2.0 V to 5.5 V Operating Idle/not used Analog power supply voltage* 1 AVCC 4.0 2.0 RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not leave the AVCC, and AVSS pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 5.5 V to AVCC by connection to the power supply (V CC), or some other method. 2. P67 to P60 include supporting module inputs multiplexed on those pins. 3. IRQ2 includes the ADTRG signal multiplexed on that pin. 4. In the H8S/2128 Series, P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P47/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs. An external pull-up resistor is necessary to provide high-level output from SCL0 and SDA0 (ICE = 1). In the H8S/2128 Series, P52/SCK0 and P47 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS. 5. The upper limit of the port 6 applied voltage is V CC + 0.3 V when CIN input is not selected, and the lower of VCC + 0.3 V and AVCC + 0.3 V when CIN input is selected. When a pin is in output mode, the output voltage is equivalent to the applied voltage. 582 6. Current dissipation values are for VIH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up MOSs in the off state. 7. The values are for VRAM VCC < 4.0 V, VIH min = VCC x 0.9, and V IL max = 0.3 V. 8. For flash memory program/erase operations, the applicable ranges are VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V and T a = 0 to +75C (regular specifications) or T a = 0 to +85C (wide-range specifications). 583 Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (3) Conditions (Mask ROM version): VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC*1 = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C (Flash memory version): VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC*1 = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C*8 Symbol 2, 5 Item Schmitt P67 to P60* * , (1) trigger input IRQ2 to IRQ0* 3 voltage Input high voltage RES, STBY, (2) NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Input pins except (1) and (2) above Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, input pins except (1) and (3) above Output high All output pins voltage (except P47, and P52* 4) P47, P52* 4 Output low voltage All output pins Ports 1 to 3 (3) Min Typ Max -- Unit V Test Conditions VT VT - + + - VCC x 0.2 -- -- -- VCC x 0.05 -- VCC x 0.9 -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 V -- V VT - VT VIH VCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V AVCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V VIL -0.3 -0.3 -- -- VCC x 0.1 V VCC x 0.2 V 0.8 V V V V V V VCC < 4.0 V VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V I OH = -200 A I OH = -1 mA (VCC < 4.0 V) I OH = -1 mA I OL = 1.6 mA I OL = 5 mA (VCC < 4.0 V), I OL = 10 mA (4.0 V VCC 5.5 V) Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V VOH VCC - 0.5 VCC - 1.0 1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 VOL -- -- Input leakage current RES STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Iin -- -- -- -- -- -- 10.0 1.0 1.0 A A A 584 Item Three-state Ports 1 to 6 leakage current (off state) Input pull-up MOS current Ports 1 to 3 Symbol ITSI Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V -I P 10 -- 150 A Vin = 0 V, VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V Vin = 0 V, f = 1 MHz, Ta = 25C Input RES capacitance NMI P52, P47, P24, P23 Input pins except (4) above Current Normal operation dissipation* 6 Sleep mode Standby mode* 7 (4) Cin -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 40 30 0.01 -- 1.5 0.01 -- -- -- 80 50 20 15 52 42 5.0 20.0 3.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 -- pF pF pF pF mA mA A A mA A V V V I CC -- -- -- -- f = 10 MHz f = 10 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current During A/D conversion Idle AlCC -- -- AVCC = 2.0 V to 5.5 V Operating Idle/not used Analog power supply voltage* 1 AVCC 2.7 2.0 RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not leave the AVCC, and AVSS pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 5.5 V to AVCC by connection to the power supply (V CC), or some other method. 2. P67 to P60 include supporting module inputs multiplexed on those pins. 3. IRQ2 includes the ADTRG signal multiplexed on that pin. 4. In the H8S/2128 Series, P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P47/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs. An external pull-up resistor is necessary to provide high-level output from SCL0 and SDA0 (ICE = 1). In the H8S/2128 Series, P52/SCK0 and P47 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS. 585 5. The upper limit of the port 6 applied voltage is V CC + 0.3 V when CIN input is not selected, and the lower of VCC + 0.3 V and AVCC + 0.3 V when CIN input is selected. When a pin is in output mode, the output voltage is equivalent to the applied voltage. 6. Current dissipation values are for V IH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up MOSs in the off state. 7. The values are for VRAM VCC < 2.7 V, VIH min = VCC x 0.9, and V IL max = 0.3 V. 8. For flash memory program/erase operations, the applicable range is VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V and T a = 0 to +75C. 586 Table 22.3 Permissible Output Currents Conditions: VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Permissible output low current (per pin) SCL1, SCL0, SDA1, SDA0 Ports 1, 2, 3 Other output pins Permissible output low current (total) Total of ports 1, 2, and 3 IOL Total of all output pins, including the above All output pins Total of all output pins -I OH -IOH Symbol Min I OL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 20 10 2 80 120 2 40 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA mA Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 22.3. 2. When driving a Darlington pair or LED, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as show in figures 22.1 and 22.2. Table 22.3 Permissible Output Currents (cont) Conditions: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C Item Permissible output low current (per pin) SCL1, SCL0, SDA1, SDA0 Ports 1, 2, 3 Other output pins Permissible output low current (total) Total of ports 1, 2, and 3 IOL Total of all output pins, including the above All output pins Total of all output pins -I OH -IOH Symbol Min I OL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 2 1 40 60 2 30 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA mA Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 22.3. 2. When driving a Darlington pair or LED, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as show in figures 22.1 and 22.2. 587 Table 22.4 Bus Drive Characteristics Conditions: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C Applicable Pins: SCL1, SCL0, SDA1, SDA0 (bus drive function selected) Item Schmitt trigger input voltage Symbol VT - Min VCC x 0.3 -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC + 0.5 VCC x 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.4 20 1.0 250 Unit V Test Conditions VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V VT+ VT - VT Input high voltage Input low voltage Output low voltage VIH VIL VOL + - VCC x 0.05 VCC x 0.7 -0.5 -- -- -- V VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V V I OL = 16 mA, VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V I OL = 8 mA I OL = 3 mA Input capacitance Cin -- -- pF A ns Vin = 0 V, f = 1 MHz, Ta = 25C Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V Three-state leakage | ITSI | current (off state) SCL, SDA output fall time t Of 20 + 0.1Cb -- H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series chip 2 k Port Darlington pair Figure 22.1 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example) 588 H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series chip 600 Ports 1 to 3 LED Figure 22.2 LED Drive Circuit (Example) 22.3 AC Characteristics Figure 22.3 shows the test conditions for the AC characteristics. VCC RL Chip output pin C = 30 pF: All ports RL = 2.4 k RH = 12 k I/O timing test levels * Low level: 0.8 V * High level: 2.0 V C RH Figure 22.3 Output Load Circuit 589 22.3.1 Clock Timing Table 22.5 shows the clock timing. The clock timing specified here covers clock (o) output and clock pulse generator (crystal) and external clock input (EXTAL pin) oscillation settling times. For details of external clock input (EXTAL pin and EXCL pin) timing, see section 20, Clock Pulse Generator. Table 22.5 Clock Timing Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item Clock cycle time Clock high pulse width Clock low pulse width Clock rise time Clock fall time Oscillation settling time at reset (crystal) Oscillation settling time in software standby (crystal) External clock output stabilization delay time Symbol t cyc t CH t CL t Cr t Cf t OSC1 Min 50 17 17 -- -- 10 Max 500 -- -- 8 8 -- Condition B 16 MHz Min 62.5 20 20 -- -- 10 Max 500 -- -- 10 10 -- Condition C 10 MHz Min 100 30 30 -- -- 20 Max 500 -- -- 20 20 -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ms Figure 22.5 Figure 22.6 Test Conditions Figure 22.4 Figure 22.4 t OSC2 8 -- 8 -- 8 -- ms t DEXT 500 -- 500 -- 500 -- s Note: * For the low-voltage F-ZTAT version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V. 590 tcyc tCH o tCL tCr tCf Figure 22.4 System Clock Timing EXTAL tDEXT VCC tDEXT STBY tOSC1 RES tOSC1 o Figure 22.5 Oscillation Settling Timing o NMI IRQi (i = 0, 1, 2) tOSC2 Figure 22.6 Oscillation Setting Timing (Exiting Software Standby Mode) 591 22.3.2 Control Signal Timing Table 22.6 shows the control signal timing. The only external interrupts that can operate on the subclock (o = 32.768 kHz) are NMI and IRQ0, 1, and IRQ2. Table 22.6 Control Signal Timing Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item RES setup time RES pulse width NMI setup time (NMI) NMI hold time (NMI) NMI pulse width (exiting software standby mode) IRQ setup time (IRQ2 to IRQ0) IRQ hold time (IRQ2 to IRQ0) IRQ pulse width (IRQ2 to IRQ0) (exiting software standby mode) Symbol t RESS t RESW t NMIS t NMIH t NMIW Min 200 20 150 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- Condition B 16 MHz Min 200 20 150 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- Condition C 10 MHz Min 300 20 250 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns t cyc ns ns ns Figure 22.8 Test Conditions Figure 22.7 t IRQS t IRQH t IRQW 150 10 200 -- -- -- 150 10 200 -- -- -- 250 10 200 -- -- -- ns ns ns Note: * For the low-voltage F-ZTAT version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V. 592 o tRESS RES tRESW tRESS Figure 22.7 Reset Input Timing o tNMIS NMI tNMIW tNMIH IRQi (i = 2 to 0) tIRQS IRQ Edge input tIRQS IRQ Level input tIRQW tIRQH Figure 22.8 Interrupt Input Timing 593 22.3.3 Bus Timing Table 22.7 shows the bus timing. Operation in external expansion mode is not guaranteed when operating on the subclock (o = 32.768 kHz). Table 22.7 Bus Timing Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item Address delay time Address setup time Address hold time CS delay time (IOS) AS delay time RD delay time 1 RD delay time 2 Read data setup time Read data hold time Symbol Min t AD t AS t AH t CSD t ASD t RSD1 t RSD2 t RDS t RDH -- Max 20 Min -- Condition B 16 MHz Max 30 Min -- Condition C 10 MHz Max 40 Test Unit Conditions ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 22.9 to figure 22.13 0.5 x -- t cyc - 15 0.5 x -- t cyc - 10 -- -- -- -- 15 0 -- -- 20 30 30 30 -- -- 1.0 x t cyc - 30 1.5 x t cyc - 25 0.5 x -- t cyc - 20 0.5 x -- t cyc - 15 -- -- -- -- 20 0 -- -- 30 45 45 45 -- -- 1.0 x t cyc - 40 1.5 x t cyc - 35 0.5 x -- t cyc - 30 0.5 x -- t cyc - 20 -- -- -- -- 35 0 -- -- 40 60 60 60 -- -- 1.0 x t cyc - 60 1.5 x t cyc - 50 Read data t ACC1 access time 1 Read data t ACC2 access time 2 594 Condition A 20 MHz Item Symbol Min -- -- -- -- -- Max 2.0 x t cyc - 30 2.5 x t cyc - 25 3.0 x t cyc - 30 30 30 Condition B 16 MHz Min -- -- -- -- -- Max 2.0 x t cyc - 40 2.5 x t cyc - 35 3.0 x t cyc - 40 45 45 Condition C 10 MHz Min -- -- -- -- -- Max 2.0 x t cyc - 60 2.5 x t cyc - 50 3.0 x t cyc - 60 60 60 Test Unit Conditions ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 22.9 to figure 22.13 Read data t ACC3 access time 3 Read data t ACC4 access time 4 Read data t ACC5 access time 5 WR delay time 1 WR delay time 2 WR pulse width 1 WR pulse width 2 Write data delay time Write data setup time Write data hold time WAIT setup time WAIT hold time t WRD1 t WRD2 t WSW1 t WSW2 t WDD t WDS t WDH t WTS t WTH 1.0 x -- t cyc - 20 1.5 x -- t cyc - 20 -- 0 10 30 5 30 -- -- -- -- 1.0 x -- t cyc - 30 1.5 x -- t cyc - 30 -- 0 15 45 5 45 -- -- -- -- 1.0x -- t cyc - 40 1.5 x -- t cyc - 40 -- 0 20 60 10 60 -- -- -- -- Note: * For the low-voltage F-ZTAT version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V. 595 T1 T2 o tAD A15 to A0, IOS* tCSD AS* tAS tAH tASD tASD tRSD1 RD (read) tAS tACC2 tRSD2 tACC3 D7 to D0 (read) tRDS tRDH tWRD2 WR (write) tAS tWDD D7 to D0 (write) tWSW1 tWRD2 tAH tWDH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 22.9 Basic Bus Timing (Two-State Access) 596 T1 T2 T3 o tAD A15 to A0, IOS* tCSD AS* tAS tASD tASD tAH tRSD1 RD (read) tAS tACC4 tRSD2 tACC5 D7 to D0 (read) tRDS tRDH tWRD1 WR (write) tWDD tWDS D7 to D0 (write) tWSW2 tWRD2 tAH tWDH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 22.10 Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access) 597 T1 T2 TW T3 o A15 to A0, IOS* AS* RD (read) D7 to D0 (read) WR (write) D7 to D0 (write) tWTS tWTH WAIT tWTS tWTH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 22.11 Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access with One Wait State) 598 T1 T2 or T3 T1 T2 o tAD A15 to A0, IOS* tAS AS* tASD tASD tAH tRSD2 RD (read) tACC3 D7 to D0 (read) tRDS tRDH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 22.12 Burst ROM Access Timing (Two-State Access) 599 T1 o T2 or T3 T1 tAD A15 to A0, IOS* AS* tRSD2 RD (read) tACC1 D7 to D0 (read) tRDS tRDH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 22.13 Burst ROM Access Timing (One-State Access) 600 22.3.4 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules Tables 22.8 and 22.9 show the on-chip supporting module timing. The only on-chip supporting modules that can operate in subclock operation (o = 32.768 kHz) are the I/O ports, external interrupts (NMI and IRQ0, 1, and IRQ2), the watchdog timer, and the 8-bit timer (channels 0 and 1). Table 22.8 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz* 1, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz* 1, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*2, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz* 1, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A Condition B Condition C 20 MHz Item I/O ports Symbol Min Output data delay t PWD time Input data setup time Input data hold time FRT t PRS t PRH -- 30 30 -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 Max 50 -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- 16 MHz Min -- 30 30 -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 Max 50 -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- 10 MHz Min -- 50 50 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 Max 100 -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- t cyc Figure 22.16 ns Figure 22.15 Test Unit Conditions ns Figure 22.14 Timer output delay t FTOD time Timer input setup t FTIS time Timer clock input setup time Timer clock pulse width Single edge Both edges t FTCS t FTCWH t FTCWL 601 Condition A Condition B Condition C 20 MHz Item TMR Timer output delay time Timer reset input setup time Timer clock input setup time Timer clock pulse width Single edge Both edges Symbol Min t TMOD t TMRS t TMCS t TMCWH t TMCWL t PWOD -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 -- 4 6 t SCKW t SCKr t SCKf 0.4 -- -- Max 50 -- -- -- -- 50 -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 16 MHz Min -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 -- 4 6 0.4 -- -- Max 50 -- -- -- -- 50 -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 10 MHz Min -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 -- 4 6 0.4 -- -- Max 100 -- -- -- -- 100 -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 t Scyc t cyc ns t cyc Figure 22.20 Figure 22.21 t cyc Test Unit Conditions ns Figure 22.17 Figure 22.19 Figure 22.18 PWM, Pulse output PWMX delay time SCI Input clock cycle Asynchro- t Scyc nous Synchronous Input clock pulse width Input clock rise time Input clock fall time 602 Condition A Condition B Condition C 20 MHz Item SCI Transmit data delay time (synchronous) Receive data setup time (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous) A/D Trigger input converter setup time Symbol Min t TXD -- Max 50 16 MHz Min -- Max 50 10 MHz Min -- Max 100 Test Unit Conditions ns Figure 22.22 t RXS 50 -- 50 -- 100 -- ns t RXH 50 -- 50 -- 100 -- ns t TRGS 30 -- 30 -- 50 -- ns Figure 22.23 Notes: 1. Only supporting modules that can be used in subclock operation 2. For the low-voltage F-ZTAT version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V 603 T1 T2 o tPRS Ports 1 to 7 (read) tPRH tPWD Ports 1 to 6 (write) Figure 22.14 I/O Port Input/Output Timing o tFTOD FTOA, FTOB tFTIS FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID Figure 22.15 FRT Input/Output Timing o tFTCS FTCI tFTCWL tFTCWH Figure 22.16 FRT Clock Input Timing 604 o tTMOD TMO0, TMO1 TMOX Figure 22.17 8-Bit Timer Output Timing o tTMCS TMCI0, TMCI1 TMIX, TMIY tTMCWL tTMCWH tTMCS Figure 22.18 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing o tTMRS TMRI0, TMRI1 TMIX, TMIY Figure 22.19 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing o tPWOD PW15 to PW0, PWX1, PWX0 Figure 22.20 PWM, PWMX Output Timing 605 tSCKW SCK0, SCK1 tSCKr tSCKf tScyc Figure 22.21 SCK Clock Input Timing SCK0, SCK1 tTXD TxD0, TxD1 (transmit data) tRXS RxD0, RxD1 (receive data) tRXH Figure 22.22 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode) o tTRGS ADTRG Figure 22.23 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing 606 Table 22.9 I2C Bus Timing Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 5 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Item SCL clock cycle time SCL clock high pulse width SCL clock low pulse width SCL, SDA input rise time SCL, SDA input fall time SCL, SDA input spike pulse elimination time SDA input bus free time Start condition input hold time Retransmission start condition input setup time Stop condition input setup time Data input setup time Data input hold time SCL, SDA capacitive load Symbol t SCL t SCLH t SCLL t Sr t Sf t SP Min 12 3 5 -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- -- -- 7.5 * 300 1 Unit t cyc t cyc t cyc t cyc ns t cyc Test Conditions Notes Figure 22.24 t BUF t STAH t STAS 5 3 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- t cyc t cyc t cyc t STOS t SDAS t SDAH Cb 3 0.5 0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 t cyc t cyc ns pF Note: * 17.5tcyc can be set according to the clock selected for use by the I 2C module. For details, see section 16.4, Usage Notes. 607 SDA0, SDA1 tBUF VIH VIL tSTAH tSCLH tSP tSTOS tSTAS SCL0, SCL1 P* S* tSf tSCLL tSCL tSr tSDAH Sr* tSDAS P* Note: * S, P, and Sr indicate the following conditions. S: Start condition P: Stop condition Sr: Retransmission start condition Figure 22.24 I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing (Option) 608 22.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics Tables 22.10 and 22.11 list the A/D conversion characteristics. Table 22.10 A/D Conversion Characteristics (AN7 to AN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10% VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*5, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*5 VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item Resolution Conversion time* Analog input capacitance Permissible signalsource impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy 6 Condition B 16 MHz Condition C 10 MHz Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 6.7 20 10* 3 5*4 Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 8.4 20 10* 3 5*4 Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 13.4 20 10*1 5*2 Unit Bits s pF k -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3.0 3.5 3.5 0.5 4.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3.0 3.5 3.5 0.5 4.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 7.0 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. When 4.0 V AVCC 5.5 V When 2.7 V AVCC < 4.0 V When conversion time 11. 17 s (CKS = 1 and o 12 MHz, or CKS = 0) When conversion time < 11. 17 s (CKS = 1 and o > 12 MHz) For the low-voltage F-ZTAT version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V and AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V. At the maximum operating frequency in single mode 609 Table 22.11 A/D Conversion Characteristics (CIN7 to CIN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10% VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*5, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V*5 VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item Resolution Conversion time* Analog input capacitance Permissible signalsource impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy 6 Condition B 16 MHz Condition C 10 MHz Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 6.7 20 10* 3 5*4 Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 8.4 20 10* 3 5*4 Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 13.4 20 10*1 5*2 Unit Bits s pF k -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5.0 5.5 5.5 0.5 6.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5.0 5.5 5.5 0.5 6.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 11.0 11.5 11.5 0.5 12.0 LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. When 4.0 V AVCC 5.5 V When 2.7 V AVCC < 4.0 V When conversion time 11. 17 s (CKS = 1 and o 12 MHz, or CKS = 0) When conversion time < 11. 17 s (CKS = 1 and o > 12 MHz) For the low-voltage F-ZTAT version, V CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V and AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V. At the maximum operating frequency in single mode 610 22.5 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 22.12 shows the flash memory characteristics. Table 22.12 Flash Memory Characteristics Conditions (5 V version): VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 0 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = 0 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Conditions for low-voltage version:VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, V SS = 0 V, Ta = 0 to +75C (Programming/erasing operating temperature) Item Programming time*1,* 2,* 4 Erase time* 1,* 3,* 5 Reprogramming count Programming Wait time after SWE-bit setting* 1 Wait time after PSU-bit setting* 1 Wait time after P-bit setting* 1, * 4 Wait time after P-bit clear*1 Wait time after PSU-bit clear* 1 Wait time after PV-bit setting* 1 Wait time after dummy write* 1 Wait time after PV-bit clear* 1 Maximum programming count* 1,* 4,* 5 Symbol tP tE NWEC x y z N Min -- -- -- 10 50 150 10 10 4 2 4 -- Typ 10 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 200 1200 100 -- -- 200 -- -- -- -- -- 1000 Unit ms/ 32 bytes ms/ block Times s s s s s s s s Times z = 200 s Test Condition 611 Item Erase Wait time after SWE-bit setting* 1 Wait time after ESU-bit setting* 1 Wait time after E-bit setting* 1,* 6 Wait time after E-bit clear*1 Wait time after ESU-bit clear* 1 Wait time after EV-bit setting* 1 Wait time after dummy write* 1 Wait time after EV-bit clear* 1 Maximum erase count* 1,* 6,*7 Symbol x y z N Min 10 200 5 10 10 20 2 5 -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- -- 10 -- -- -- -- -- 120 Unit s s ms s s s s s Times Test Condition z = 10 ms Notes: 1. Set the times according to the program/erase algorithms. 2. Programming time per 32 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P-bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR1) is set. It does not include the programming verification time.) 3. Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E-bit in FLMCR1 is set. It does not include the erase verification time.) 4. Maximum programming time (tP (max) = wait time after P-bit setting (z) x maximum programming count (N)) 5. Number of times when the wait time after P-bit setting (z) = 200 s. The number of writes should be set according to the actual set value of z to allow programming within the maximum programming time (tP). 6. Maximum erase time (tE (max) = Wait time after E-bit setting (z) x maximum erase count (N)) 7. Number of times when the wait time after E-bit setting (z) = 10 ms. The number of erases should be set according to the actual set value of z to allow erasing within the maximum erase time (tE). 612 22.6 Usage Note The F-ZTAT and mask ROM versions have been confirmed as fully meeting the reference values for electrical characteristics shown in this manual. However, actual performance figures, operating margins, noise margins, and other properties may vary due to differences in the manufacturing process, on-chip ROM, layout patterns, etc. When system evaluation testing is carried out using the F-ZTAT version, the same evaluation tests should also be conducted for the mask ROM version when changing over to that version. 613 614 Section 23 Electrical Characteristics [H8S/2124 Series] 23.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 23.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 23.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage Input voltage (except ports 6, and 7) Input voltage (CIN input not selected for port 6) Input voltage (CIN input selected for port 6) Input voltage (port 7) Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Symbol VCC Vin Vin Vin Vin AVCC VAN Topr Value -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 -0.3 to VCC +0.3 Lower voltage of -0.3 to V CC +0.3 and AVCC +0.3 -0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 -0.3 to +7.0 -0.3 to AVCC +0.3 Regular specifications: -20 to +75 Wide-range specifications: -40 to +85 Storage temperature Tstg -55 to +125 Unit V V V V V V V C C C Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. 615 23.2 DC Characteristics Table 23.2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 23.3 lists the permissible output currents. Table 23.2 DC Characteristics (1) Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC*1 = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt P67 to P60* * , (1) trigger input IRQ2 to IRQ0* 3 voltage Input high voltage RES, STBY, (2) NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Input pins except (1) and (2) above Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, input pins except (1) and (3) above Output high All output pins voltage Output low voltage Input leakage current All output pins Ports 1 to 3 RES STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Iin VOL VOH (3) VIL 2, 4 Symbol VT VT - + + - Min 1.0 -- 0.4 Typ -- -- -- Max -- Unit V Test Conditions VCC x 0.7 V -- VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 V V V VT - VT VIH VCC - 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 -- 2.0 2.0 -- -- AVCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V -0.3 -0.3 -- -- 0.5 0.8 V V VCC - 0.5 -- 3.5 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 10.0 1.0 1.0 V V V V A A A I OH = -200 A I OH = -1 mA I OL = 1.6 mA I OL = 10 mA Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V 616 Item Three-state Ports 1 to 6 leakage current (off state) Input pull-up MOS current Ports 1 to 3 Symbol ITSI Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V -I P 50 -- 300 A Vin = 0 V Input RES capacitance NMI P52, P47, P24, P23 Input pins except (4) above Current Normal operation dissipation* 5 Sleep mode Standby mode* 6 (4) Cin -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 70 55 0.01 -- 1.5 0.01 -- -- -- 80 50 20 15 90 75 5.0 20.0 3.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 -- pF pF pF pF mA mA A A mA A V V V Vin = 0 V f = 1 MHz Ta = 25C I CC -- -- -- -- f = 20 MHz f = 20 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current During A/D conversion Idle AlCC -- -- AVCC = 2.0 V to 5.5 V Operating Idle/not used Analog power supply voltage* 1 AVCC 4.5 2.0 RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not leave the AVCC, and AVSS pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 5.5 V to AVCC by connection to the power supply (V CC), or some other method. 2. P67 to P60 include supporting module inputs multiplexed on those pins. 3. IRQ2 includes the ADTRG signal multiplexed on that pin. 4. The upper limit of the port 6 applied voltage is V CC + 0.3 V when CIN input is not selected, and the lower of VCC + 0.3 V and AVCC + 0.3 V when CIN input is selected. When a pin is in output mode, the output voltage is equivalent to the applied voltage. 5. Current dissipation values are for V IH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up MOSs in the off state. 6. The values are for VRAM VCC < 4.5 V, VIH min = VCC x 0.9, and V IL max = 0.3 V. 617 Table 23.2 DC Characteristics (2) Conditions: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC*1 = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Schmitt P67 to P60* * , (1) trigger input IRQ2 to IRQ0* 3 voltage 2, 4 Symbol VT VT - + + - + + - - Min 1.0 -- 0.4 0.8 -- 0.3 VCC - 0.7 Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Max -- Unit V Test Conditions VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V VCC x 0.7 V -- -- V V VT - VT VT VT VCC < 4.5 V VCC x 0.7 V -- V VT - VT Input high voltage RES, STBY, (2) NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Input pins except (1) and (2) above Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, input pins except (1) and (3) above Output high All output pins voltage VOH (3) VIL VIH VCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V AVCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V VCC x 0.7 -- 2.0 2.0 -- -- -0.3 -0.3 -- -- 0.5 0.8 V V VCC - 0.5 3.5 -- -- -- -- V V I OH = -200 A I OH = -1 mA, VCC= 4.5 V to 5.5 V I OH = -1 mA, VCC < 4.5 V I OL = 1.6 mA I OL = 10 mA Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V 3.0 Output low voltage Input leakage current All output pins Ports 1 to 3 RES STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Iin VOL -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 10.0 1.0 1.0 V V V A A A 618 Item Three-state Ports 1 to 6 leakage current (off state) Input pull-up MOS current Ports 1 to 3 Symbol ITSI Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V -I P 50 -- 300 A Vin = 0 V, VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V Vin = 0 V, VCC < 4.5 V Vin = 0 V, f = 1 MHz, Ta = 25C 30 (4) Cin -- -- -- -- I CC -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 55 42 0.01 -- 1.5 0.01 -- -- -- 200 80 50 20 15 75 62 5.0 20.0 3.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 -- A pF pF pF pF mA mA A A mA A V V V Input RES capacitance NMI P52, P47, P24, P23 Input pins except (4) above Current Normal operation dissipation* 5 Sleep mode Standby mode* 6 f = 16 MHz f = 16 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current During A/D conversion Idle AlCC -- -- AVCC = 2.0 V to 5.5 V Operating Idle/not used Analog power supply voltage* 1 AVCC 4.0 2.0 RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not leave the AVCC, and AVSS pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 5.5 V to AVCC by connection to the power supply (V CC), or some other method. 2. P67 to P60 include supporting module inputs multiplexed on those pins. 3. IRQ2 includes the ADTRG signal multiplexed on that pin. 4. The upper limit of the port 6 applied voltage is V CC + 0.3 V when CIN input is not selected, and the lower of VCC + 0.3 V and AVCC + 0.3 V when CIN input is selected. When a pin is in output mode, the output voltage is equivalent to the applied voltage. 5. Current dissipation values are for V IH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up MOSs in the off state. 6. The values are for VRAM VCC < 4.0 V, VIH min = VCC x 0.9, and V IL max = 0.3 V. 619 Table 23.2 DC Characteristics (3) Conditions : VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC*1 = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C Item Schmitt P67 to P60* * , (1) trigger input IRQ2 to IRQ0* 3 voltage Input high voltage RES, STBY, (2) NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL Port 7 Input pins except (1) and (2) above Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 NMI, EXTAL, input pins except (1) and (3) above Output high All output pins voltage VOH (3) VIL 2, 4 Symbol VT VT - + + - Min Typ Max -- Unit V Test Conditions VCC x 0.2 -- -- -- VCC x 0.05 -- VCC x 0.9 -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 -- VCC x 0.7 V -- V VT - VT VIH VCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V AVCC +0.3 V VCC +0.3 V -0.3 -0.3 -- -- VCC x 0.1 V VCC x 0.2 V 0.8 V V V V V VCC < 4.0 V VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V I OH = -200 A I OH = -1 mA (VCC < 4.0 V) I OL = 1.6 mA I OL = 5 mA (VCC < 4.0 V), I OL = 10 mA (4.0 V VCC 5.5 V) Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to AVCC - 0.5 V VCC - 0.5 VCC - 1.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.4 1.0 Output low voltage All output pins Ports 1 to 3 VOL -- -- Input leakage current RES STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Iin -- -- -- -- -- -- 10.0 1.0 1.0 A A A 620 Item Three-state Ports 1 to 6 leakage current (off state) Input pull-up MOS current Ports 1 to 3 Symbol ITSI Min -- Typ -- Max 1.0 Unit A Test Conditions Vin = 0.5 to VCC - 0.5 V -I P 10 -- 150 A Vin = 0 V, VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V Vin = 0 V, f = 1 MHz, Ta = 25C Input RES capacitance NMI P52, P47, P24, P23 Input pins except (4) above Current Normal operation dissipation* 5 Sleep mode Standby mode* 6 (4) Cin -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 40 30 0.01 -- 1.5 0.01 -- -- -- 80 50 20 15 52 42 5.0 20.0 3.0 5.0 5.5 5.5 -- pF pF pF pF mA mA A A mA A V V V I CC -- -- -- -- f = 10 MHz f = 10 MHz Ta 50C 50C < Ta Analog power supply current During A/D conversion Idle AlCC -- -- AVCC = 2.0 V to 5.5 V Operating Idle/not used Analog power supply voltage* 1 AVCC 2.7 2.0 RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not leave the AVCC, and AVSS pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 5.5 V to AVCC by connection to the power supply (V CC), or some other method. 2. P67 to P60 include supporting module inputs multiplexed on those pins. 3. IRQ2 includes the ADTRG signal multiplexed on that pin. 4. The upper limit of the port 6 applied voltage is V CC + 0.3 V when CIN input is not selected, and the lower of VCC + 0.3 V and AVCC + 0.3 V when CIN input is selected. When a pin is in output mode, the output voltage is equivalent to the applied voltage. 5. Current dissipation values are for V IH min = VCC - 0.5 V and VIL max = 0.5 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up MOSs in the off state. 6. The values are for VRAM VCC < 2.7 V, VIH min = VCC x 0.9, and V IL max = 0.3 V. 621 Table 23.3 Permissible Output Currents Conditions: VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Permissible output low current (total) Ports 1, 2, 3 Other output pins Total of ports 1, 2, and 3 IOL Total of all output pins, including the above All output pins Total of all output pins -I OH -IOH Symbol Min I OL -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- Max 10 2 80 120 2 40 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 23.3. 2. When driving a Darlington pair or LED, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as show in figures 23.1 and 23.2. Table 23.3 Permissible Output Currents (cont) Conditions: VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = -20 to +75C Item Permissible output low current (per pin) Permissible output low current (total) Ports 1, 2, 3 Other output pins Total of ports 1, 2, and 3 IOL Total of all output pins, including the above All output pins Total of all output pins -I OH -IOH Symbol Min I OL -- -- -- -- -- -- Typ -- -- -- -- -- -- - Preliminary - Max 2 1 40 60 2 30 Unit mA mA mA mA mA mA Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 23.3. 2. When driving a Darlington pair or LED, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as show in figures 23.1 and 23.2. 622 H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series chip 2 k Port Darlington pair Figure 23.1 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example) H8S/2128 Series or H8S/2124 Series chip 600 Ports 1 to 3 LED Figure 23.2 LED Drive Circuit (Example) 23.3 AC Characteristics Figure 23.3 shows the test conditions for the AC characteristics. VCC RL Chip output pin C = 30 pF: All ports RL = 2.4 k RH = 12 k I/O timing test levels * Low level: 0.8 V * High level: 2.0 V C RH Figure 23.3 Output Load Circuit 623 23.3.1 Clock Timing Table 23.5 shows the clock timing. The clock timing specified here covers clock (o) output and clock pulse generator (crystal) and external clock input (EXTAL pin) oscillation settling times. For details of external clock input (EXTAL pin and EXCL pin) timing, see section 20, Clock Pulse Generator. Table 23.5 Clock Timing Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item Clock cycle time Clock high pulse width Clock low pulse width Clock rise time Clock fall time Oscillation settling time at reset (crystal) Oscillation settling time in software standby (crystal) External clock output stabilization delay time Symbol t cyc t CH t CL t Cr t Cf t OSC1 Min 50 17 17 -- -- 10 Max 500 -- -- 8 8 -- Condition B 16 MHz Min 62.5 20 20 -- -- 10 Max 500 -- -- 10 10 -- Condition C 10 MHz Min 100 30 30 -- -- 20 Max 500 -- -- 20 20 -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ms Figure 23.5 Figure 23.6 Test Conditions Figure 23.4 Figure 23.4 t OSC2 8 -- 8 -- 8 -- ms t DEXT 500 -- 500 -- 500 -- s 624 tcyc tCH o tCL tCr tCf Figure 23.4 System Clock Timing EXTAL tDEXT VCC tDEXT STBY tOSC1 RES tOSC1 o Figure 23.5 Oscillation Settling Timing o NMI IRQi (i = 0, 1, 2) tOSC2 Figure 23.6 Oscillation Setting Timing (Exiting Software Standby Mode) 625 23.3.2 Control Signal Timing Table 23.6 shows the control signal timing. The only external interrupts that can operate on the subclock (o = 32.768 kHz) are NMI and IRQ0, 1, and IRQ2. Table 23.6 Control Signal Timing Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item RES setup time RES pulse width NMI setup time (NMI) NMI hold time (NMI) NMI pulse width (exiting software standby mode) IRQ setup time (IRQ2 to IRQ0) IRQ hold time (IRQ2 to IRQ0) IRQ pulse width (IRQ2 to IRQ0) (exiting software standby mode) Symbol t RESS t RESW t NMIS t NMIH t NMIW Min 200 20 150 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- Condition B 16 MHz Min 200 20 150 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- Condition C 10 MHz Min 300 20 250 10 200 Max -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns t cyc ns ns ns Figure 23.8 Test Conditions Figure 23.7 t IRQS t IRQH t IRQW 150 10 200 -- -- -- 150 10 200 -- -- -- 250 10 200 -- -- -- ns ns ns 626 o tRESS RES tRESW tRESS Figure 23.7 Reset Input Timing o tNMIS NMI tNMIW tNMIH IRQi (i = 2 to 0) tIRQS IRQ Edge input tIRQS IRQ Level input tIRQW tIRQH Figure 23.8 Interrupt Input Timing 627 23.3.3 Bus Timing Table 23.7 shows the bus timing. Operation in external expansion mode is not guaranteed when operating on the subclock (o = 32.768 kHz). Table 23.7 Bus Timing Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item Address delay time Address setup time Address hold time CS delay time (IOS) AS delay time RD delay time 1 RD delay time 2 Read data setup time Read data hold time Symbol Min t AD t AS t AH t CSD t ASD t RSD1 t RSD2 t RDS t RDH -- Max 20 Min -- Condition B 16 MHz Max 30 Min -- Condition C 10 MHz Max 40 Test Unit Conditions ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 23.9 to figure 23.13 0.5 x -- t cyc - 15 0.5 x -- t cyc - 10 -- -- -- -- 15 0 -- -- 20 30 30 30 -- -- 1.0 x t cyc - 30 1.5 x t cyc - 25 0.5 x -- t cyc - 20 0.5 x -- t cyc - 15 -- -- -- -- 20 0 -- -- 30 45 45 45 -- -- 1.0 x t cyc - 40 1.5 x t cyc - 35 0.5 x -- t cyc - 30 0.5 x -- t cyc - 20 -- -- -- -- 35 0 -- -- 40 60 60 60 -- -- 1.0 x t cyc - 60 1.5 x t cyc - 50 Read data t ACC1 access time 1 Read data t ACC2 access time 2 628 Condition A 20 MHz Item Symbol Min -- -- -- -- -- Max 2.0 x t cyc - 30 2.5 x t cyc - 25 3.0 x t cyc - 30 30 30 Condition B 16 MHz Min -- -- -- -- -- Max 2.0 x t cyc - 40 2.5 x t cyc - 35 3.0 x t cyc - 40 45 45 Condition C 10 MHz Min -- -- -- -- -- Max 2.0 x t cyc - 60 2.5 x t cyc - 50 3.0 x t cyc - 60 60 60 Test Unit Conditions ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 23.9 to figure 23.13 Read data t ACC3 access time 3 Read data t ACC4 access time 4 Read data t ACC5 access time 5 WR delay time 1 WR delay time 2 WR pulse width 1 WR pulse width 2 Write data delay time Write data setup time Write data hold time WAIT setup time WAIT hold time t WRD1 t WRD2 t WSW1 t WSW2 t WDD t WDS t WDH t WTS t WTH 1.0 x -- t cyc - 20 1.5 x -- t cyc - 20 -- 0 10 30 5 30 -- -- -- -- 1.0 x -- t cyc - 30 1.5 x -- t cyc - 30 -- 0 15 45 5 45 -- -- -- -- 1.0x -- t cyc - 40 1.5 x -- t cyc - 40 -- 0 20 60 10 60 -- -- -- -- 629 T1 T2 o tAD A15 to A0, IOS* tCSD AS* tAS tAH tASD tASD tRSD1 RD (read) tAS tACC2 tRSD2 tACC3 D7 to D0 (read) tRDS tRDH tWRD2 WR (write) tAS tWDD D7 to D0 (write) tWSW1 tWRD2 tAH tWDH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 23.9 Basic Bus Timing (Two-State Access) 630 T1 T2 T3 o tAD A15 to A0, IOS* tCSD AS* tAS tASD tASD tAH tRSD1 RD (read) tAS tACC4 tRSD2 tACC5 D7 to D0 (read) tRDS tRDH tWRD1 WR (write) tWDD tWDS D7 to D0 (write) tWSW2 tWRD2 tAH tWDH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 23.10 Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access) 631 T1 T2 TW T3 o A15 to A0, IOS* AS* RD (read) D7 to D0 (read) WR (write) D7 to D0 (write) tWTS tWTH WAIT tWTS tWTH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 23.11 Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access with One Wait State) 632 T1 T2 or T3 T1 T2 o tAD A15 to A0, IOS* tAS AS* tASD tASD tAH tRSD2 RD (read) tACC3 D7 to D0 (read) tRDS tRDH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 23.12 Burst ROM Access Timing (Two-State Access) 633 T1 o T2 or T3 T1 tAD A15 to A0, IOS* AS* tRSD2 RD (read) tACC1 D7 to D0 (read) tRDS tRDH Note: * AS and IOS are the same pin. The function is selected by the IOSE bit in SYSCR. Figure 23.13 Burst ROM Access Timing (One-State Access) 634 23.3.4 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules Tables 23.8 and 23.9 show the on-chip supporting module timing. The only on-chip supporting modules that can operate in subclock operation (o = 32.768 kHz) are the I/O ports, external interrupts (NMI and IRQ0, 1, and IRQ2), the watchdog timer, and the 8-bit timer (channels 0 and 1). Table 23.8 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz*, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz*, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, o = 32.768 kHz*, 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A Condition B Condition C 20 MHz Item I/O ports Symbol Min Output data delay t PWD time Input data setup time Input data hold time FRT t PRS t PRH -- 30 30 -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 Max 50 -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- 16 MHz Min -- 30 30 -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 Max 50 -- -- 50 -- -- -- -- 10 MHz Min -- 50 50 -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 Max 100 -- -- 100 -- -- -- -- t cyc Figure 23.16 ns Figure 23.15 Test Unit Conditions ns Figure 23.14 Timer output delay t FTOD time Timer input setup t FTIS time Timer clock input setup time Timer clock pulse width Single edge Both edges t FTCS t FTCWH t FTCWL 635 Condition A Condition B Condition C 20 MHz Item TMR Timer output delay time Timer reset input setup time Timer clock input setup time Timer clock pulse width SCI Input clock cycle Single edge Both edges Symbol Min t TMOD t TMRS t TMCS t TMCWH t TMCWL -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 4 6 t SCKW t SCKr t SCKf t TXD 0.4 -- -- -- Max 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 50 16 MHz Min -- 30 30 1.5 2.5 4 6 0.4 -- -- -- Max 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 50 10 MHz Min -- 50 50 1.5 2.5 4 6 0.4 -- -- -- Max 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 0.6 1.5 1.5 100 ns Figure 23.21 t Scyc t cyc t cyc Figure 23.20 t cyc Test Unit Conditions ns Figure 23.17 Figure 23.19 Figure 23.18 Asynchro- t Scyc nous Synchronous Input clock pulse width Input clock rise time Input clock fall time Transmit data delay time (synchronous) Receive data setup t RXS time (synchronous) Receive data hold t RXH time (synchronous) A/D converter Trigger input setup t TRGS time 50 50 30 -- -- -- 50 50 30 -- -- -- 100 100 50 -- -- -- ns ns ns Figure 23.22 Note: * Only supporting modules that can be used in subclock operation 636 T1 T2 o tPRS Ports 1 to 7 (read) tPRH tPWD Ports 1 to 6 (write) Figure 23.14 I/O Port Input/Output Timing o tFTOD FTOA, FTOB tFTIS FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID Figure 23.15 FRT Input/Output Timing o tFTCS FTCI tFTCWL tFTCWH Figure 23.16 FRT Clock Input Timing 637 o tTMOD TMO0, TMO1 Figure 23.17 8-Bit Timer Output Timing o tTMCS TMCI0, TMCI1, TMIY tTMCWL tTMCWH tTMCS Figure 23.18 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing o tTMRS TMRI0, TMRI1, TMIY Figure 23.19 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing tSCKW SCK0, SCK1 tScyc tSCKr tSCKf Figure 23.20 SCK Clock Input Timing 638 SCK0, SCK1 tTXD TxD0, TxD1 (transmit data) tRXS RxD0, RxD1 (receive data) tRXH Figure 23.21 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode) o tTRGS ADTRG Figure 23.22 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing 639 23.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics Tables 23.9 and 23.10 list the A/D conversion characteristics. Table 23.9 A/D Conversion Characteristics (AN7 to AN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10% VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item Resolution Conversion time* Analog input capacitance Permissible signalsource impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy 5 Condition B 16 MHz Condition C 10 MHz Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 6.7 20 10* 3 5*4 Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 8.4 20 10* 3 5*4 Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 13.4 20 10*1 5*2 Unit Bits s pF k -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3.0 3.5 3.5 0.5 4.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3.0 3.5 3.5 0.5 4.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 7.0 7.5 7.5 0.5 8.0 LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When 4.0 V AVCC 5.5 V When 2.7 V AVCC < 4.0 V When conversion time 11. 17 s (CKS = 1 and o 12 MHz, or CKS = 0) When conversion time < 11. 17 s (CKS = 1 and o > 12 MHz) At the maximum operating frequency in single mode 640 Table 23.10 A/D Conversion Characteristics (CIN7 to CIN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) Condition A: VCC = 5.0 V 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V 10% VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition B: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C (regular specifications), Ta = -40 to +85C (wide-range specifications) Condition C: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V VSS = AVSS = 0 V, o = 2 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = -20 to +75C Condition A 20 MHz Item Resolution Conversion time* Analog input capacitance Permissible signalsource impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy 5 Condition B 16 MHz Condition C 10 MHz Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 6.7 20 10* 3 5*4 Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 8.4 20 10* 3 5*4 Min 10 -- -- -- Typ 10 -- -- -- Max 10 13.4 20 10*1 5*2 Unit Bits s pF k -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5.0 5.5 5.5 0.5 6.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5.0 5.5 5.5 0.5 6.0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 11.0 11.5 11.5 0.5 12.0 LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When 4.0 V AVCC 5.5 V When 2.7 V AVCC < 4.0 V When conversion time 11. 17 s (CKS = 1 and o 12 MHz, or CKS = 0) When conversion time < 11. 17 s (CKS = 1 and o > 12 MHz) At the maximum operating frequency in single mode 641 23.5 Usage Note The specifications of the H8S/2128 F-ZTAT version and H8S/2124 Series mask ROM version differ in terms of on-chip module functions provided and port (P47, P52) output specifications. Also, while the FZTAT and mask ROM versions both satisfy the electrical characteristics shown in this manual, actual electrical characteristic values, operating margins, noise margins, and other properties may vary due to differences in manufacturing process, on-chip ROM, layout patterns, etc. When system evaluation testing is carried out using the H8S/2128 F-ZTAT version, the above differences must be taken into consideration in system design, and the same evaluation testing should also be conducted for the mask ROM version when changing over to that version. 642 Appendix A Instruction Set A.1 Instruction Operation Notation Rd Rs Rn ERn MAC (EAd) (EAs) EXR CCR N Z V C PC SP #IMM disp + - x / ()<> :8/:16/:24/:32 General register (destination)* 1 General register (source)* 1 General register* 1 General register (32-bit register) Multiply-and-accumulate register (32-bit register)*2 Destination operand Source operand Extend register Condition code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C (carry) flag in CCR Program counter Stack pointer Immediate data Displacement Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Logical AND Logical OR Exclusive logical OR Transfer from left-hand operand to right-hand operand, or transition from lefthand state to right-hand state NOT (logical complement) Operand contents 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length Notes: 1. General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7). 2. MAC instructions cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. 643 Condition Code Notation Symbol Meaning Changes according operation result. * 0 1 -- Indeterminate (value not guaranteed). Always cleared to 0. Always set to 1. Not affected by operation result. 644 Table A.1 Instruction Set 1. Data Transfer Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) Normal 1 1 2 3 5 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 3 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 5 3 3 4 2 3 5 3 3 4 @@aa I -- HNZ VC MOV MOV.B #xx:8,Rd MOV.B Rs,Rd MOV.B @ERs,Rd MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd MOV.B @ERs+,Rd MOV.B @aa:8,Rd MOV.B @aa:16,Rd MOV.B @aa:32,Rd MOV.B Rs,@ERd MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd) MOV.B Rs,@-ERd MOV.B Rs,@aa:8 MOV.B Rs,@aa:16 MOV.B Rs,@aa:32 MOV.W #xx:16,Rd MOV.W Rs,Rd MOV.W @ERs,Rd MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd MOV.W @ERs+,Rd MOV.W @aa:16,Rd MOV.W @aa:32,Rd MOV.W Rs,@ERd MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd) MOV.W Rs,@-ERd MOV.W Rs,@aa:16 MOV.W Rs,@aa:32 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B W W W W W W W W W W W W W W 2 2 2 4 8 2 2 4 6 2 4 8 2 2 4 6 4 2 2 4 8 2 4 6 2 4 8 2 4 6 #xx:8Rd8 Rs8Rd8 @ERsRd8 @(d:16,ERs)Rd8 @(d:32,ERs)Rd8 @ERsRd8,ERs32+1ERs32 @aa:8Rd8 @aa:16Rd8 @aa:32Rd8 Rs8@ERd Rs8@(d:16,ERd) Rs8@(d:32,ERd) ERd32-1ERd32,Rs8@ERd Rs8@aa:8 Rs8@aa:16 Rs8@aa:32 #xx:16Rd16 Rs16Rd16 @ERsRd16 @(d:16,ERs)Rd16 @(d:32,ERs)Rd16 @ERsRd16,ERs32+2ERs32 @aa:16Rd16 @aa:32Rd16 Rs16@ERd Rs16@(d:16,ERd) Rs16@(d:32,ERd) ERd32-2ERd32,Rs16@ERd Rs16@aa:16 Rs16@aa:32 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0 ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @ERn Operation @aa Size #xx Rn 645 Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) MOV MOV.L #xx:32,ERd MOV.L ERs,ERd MOV.L @ERs,ERd MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd MOV.L @ERs+,ERd MOV.L @aa:16,ERd MOV.L @aa:32,ERd MOV.L ERs,@ERd MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd) MOV.L ERs,@-ERd MOV.L ERs,@aa:16 MOV.L ERs,@aa:32 L L L L L L L L L L L L L L W L W L L 6 2 4 6 10 4 6 8 4 6 10 4 6 8 #xx:32Rd32 ERs32ERd32 @ERsERd32 @(d:16,ERs)ERd32 @(d:32,ERs)ERd32 @ERsERd32,ERs32+4ERs32 @aa:16ERd32 @aa:32ERd32 ERs32@ERd ERs32@(d:16,ERd) ERs32@(d:32,ERd) ERd32-4ERd32,ERs32@ERd ERs32@aa:16 ERs32@aa:32 2 @SPRn16,SP+2SP 4 @SPERn32,SP+4SP 2 SP-2SP,Rn16@SP 4 SP-4SP,ERn32@SP 4 (@SPERn32,SP+4SP) Repeated for each restored register. ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- Normal 3 1 4 5 7 5 5 6 4 5 7 5 5 6 3 5 3 5 [2] [2] @@aa I HN Z VC POP POP.W Rn POP.L ERn PUSH PUSH.W Rn PUSH.L ERn LDM*4 LDM @SP+,(ERm-ERn) -- -- -- -- -- -- 7/9/11 [1] STM*4 STM (ERm-ERn),@-SP L 4 (SP-4SP,ERn32@SP) Repeated for each saved register. -- -- -- -- -- -- 7/9/11 [1] MOVFPE MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd MOVTPE MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16 Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. 646 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- 2. Arithmetic Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) ADD ADD.B #xx:8,Rd ADD.B Rs,Rd ADD.W #xx:16,Rd ADD.W Rs,Rd ADD.L #xx:32,ERd ADD.L ERs,ERd B B W W L L B B L L L B W W L L B B W W L L B B L L L B W W L L 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rd8+#xx:8Rd8 Rd8+Rs8Rd8 Rd16+#xx:16Rd16 Rd16+Rs16Rd16 ERd32+#xx:32ERd32 ERd32+ERs32ERd32 Rd8+#xx:8+CRd8 Rd8+Rs8+CRd8 ERd32+1ERd32 ERd32+2ERd32 ERd32+4ERd32 Rd8+1Rd8 Rd16+1Rd16 Rd16+2Rd16 ERd32+1ERd32 ERd32+2ERd32 Rd8 decimal adjust Rd8 Rd8-Rs8Rd8 Rd16-#xx:16Rd16 Rd16-Rs16Rd16 ERd32-#xx:32ERd32 ERd32-ERs32ERd32 Rd8-#xx:8-CRd8 Rd8-Rs8-CRd8 ERd32-1ERd32 ERd32-2ERd32 ERd32-4ERd32 Rd8-1Rd8 Rd16-1Rd16 Rd16-2Rd16 ERd32-1ERd32 ERd32-2ERd32 -- -- -- [3] -- [3] -- [4] -- [4] -- -- [5] [5] Normal 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 @@aa I HN Z VC ADDX ADDX #xx:8,Rd ADDX Rs,Rd ADDS ADDS #1,ERd ADDS #2,ERd ADDS #4,ERd ------------ ------------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --* -- -- [3] -- [3] -- [4] -- [4] -- -- [5] [5] -- -- -- -- -- INC INC.B Rd INC.W #1,Rd INC.W #2,Rd INC.L #1,ERd INC.L #2,ERd DAA SUB DAA Rd SUB.B Rs,Rd SUB.W #xx:16,Rd SUB.W Rs,Rd SUB.L #xx:32,ERd SUB.L ERs,ERd * SUBX SUBX #xx:8,Rd SUBX Rs,Rd SUBS SUBS #1,ERd SUBS #2,ERd SUBS #4,ERd ------------ ------------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- -- -- -- -- -- DEC DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1,Rd DEC.W #2,Rd DEC.L #1,ERd DEC.L #2,ERd 647 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) DAS MULXU DAS Rd MULXU.B Rs,Rd MULXU.W Rs,ERd B B W B W B 2 2 2 4 4 2 Rd8 decimal adjust Rd8 Rd8xRs8Rd16 (unsigned multiplication) Rd16xRs16ERd32 (unsigned multiplication) Rd8xRs8Rd16 (signed multiplication) Rd16xRs16ERd32 (signed multiplication) Rd16/Rs8Rd16 (RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient) (unsigned division) ERd32/Rs16ERd32 (Ed: remainder, Rd: quotient) (unsigned division) Rd16/Rs8Rd16 (RdH: remainder, RdL: quotient) (signed division) ERd32/Rs16ERd32 (Ed: remainder, Rd: quotient) (signed division) Rd8-#xx:8 --* *-- Normal 1 12 20 13 21 12 20 13 21 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 @@aa I HN Z VC ------------ ------------ ---- ---- ---- ---- MULXS MULXS.B Rs,Rd MULXS.W Rs,ERd DIVXU DIVXU.B Rs,Rd -- -- [6] [7] -- -- DIVXU.W Rs,ERd W 2 -- -- [6] [7] -- -- DIVXS DIVXS.B Rs,Rd B 4 -- -- [8] [7] -- -- DIVXS.W Rs,ERd W 4 -- -- [8] [7] -- -- CMP CMP.B #xx:8,Rd CMP.B Rs,Rd CMP.W #xx:16,Rd CMP.W Rs,Rd CMP.L #xx:32,ERd CMP.L ERs,ERd B B W W L L B W L W L W L B 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 -- -- -- [3] -- [3] -- [4] -- [4] -- -- -- ---- 0 ---- 0 ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- Rd8-Rs8 Rd16-#xx:16 Rd16-Rs16 ERd32-#xx:32 ERd32-ERs32 0-Rd8Rd8 0-Rd16Rd16 0-ERd32ERd32 0 ( NEG NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd EXTU EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd EXTS EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd TAS TAS @ERd*3 648 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) MAC MAC @ERn+,@ERm+ Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. Normal @@aa I -- HNZ VC [2] CLRMAC CLRMAC LDMAC LDMAC ERs,MACH LDMAC ERs,MACL STMAC STMAC MACH,ERd STMAC MACL,ERd 649 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @ERn Operation @aa Size #xx Rn 3. Logic Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) AND AND.B #xx:8,Rd AND.B Rs,Rd AND.W #xx:16,Rd AND.W Rs,Rd AND.L #xx:32,ERd AND.L ERs,ERd B B W W L L B B W W L L B B W W L L B W L 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 2 Rd8#xx:8Rd8 Rd8Rs8Rd8 Rd16#xx:16Rd16 Rd16Rs16Rd16 ERd32#xx:32ERd32 ERd32ERs32ERd32 Rd8#xx:8Rd8 Rd8Rs8Rd8 Rd16#xx:16Rd16 Rd16Rs16Rd16 ERd32#xx:32ERd32 ERd32ERs32ERd32 Rd8#xx:8Rd8 Rd8Rs8Rd8 Rd16#xx:16Rd16 Rd16Rs16Rd16 ERd32#xx:32ERd32 ERd32ERs32ERd32 Rd8Rd8 Rd16Rd16 ERd32ERd32 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- 0-- Normal 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 @@aa I HN Z VC OR OR.B #xx:8,Rd OR.B Rs,Rd OR.W #xx:16,Rd OR.W Rs,Rd OR.L #xx:32,ERd OR.L ERs,ERd XOR XOR.B #xx:8,Rd XOR.B Rs,Rd XOR.W #xx:16,Rd XOR.W Rs,Rd XOR.L #xx:32,ERd XOR.L ERs,ERd NOT NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd 650 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- 4. Shift Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) SHAL SHAL.B Rd SHAL.B #2,Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.W #2,Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAL.L #2,ERd B B W W L L B B W W L L B B W W L L B B W W L L B B W W L L 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 C MSB LSB 0 MSB LSB C C MSB LSB MSB LSB C C MSB LSB ---- ---- 0 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Normal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 @@aa I HN Z VC SHAR SHAR.B Rd SHAR.B #2,Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.W #2,Rd SHAR.L ERd SHAR.L #2,ERd SHLL SHLL.B Rd SHLL.B #2,Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.W #2,Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLL.L #2,ERd SHLR SHLR.B Rd SHLR.B #2,Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.W #2,Rd SHLR.L ERd SHLR.L #2,ERd ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.B #2,Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.W #2,Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXL.L #2,ERd 651 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.B #2,Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.W #2,Rd ROTXR.L ERd ROTXR.L #2,ERd B B W W L L B B W W L L B B W W L L 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 MSB LSB 2 2 C C MSB LSB MSB LSB C ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Normal @@aa I -- HNZ VC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROTL ROTL.B Rd ROTL.B #2,Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.W #2,Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTL.L #2,ERd ROTR ROTR.B Rd ROTR.B #2,Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.W #2,Rd ROTR.L ERd ROTR.L #2,ERd 652 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @ERn Operation @aa Size #xx Rn 5. Bit Manipulation Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) Normal 1 4 4 5 6 1 4 4 5 6 1 4 4 5 6 1 4 4 5 6 1 4 4 5 6 1 4 4 5 6 @@aa I HN Z VC BSET BSET #xx:3,Rd BSET #xx:3,@ERd BSET #xx:3,@aa:8 BSET #xx:3,@aa:16 BSET #xx:3,@aa:32 BSET Rn,Rd BSET Rn,@ERd BSET Rn,@aa:8 BSET Rn,@aa:16 BSET Rn,@aa:32 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 (#xx:3 of Rd8)1 (#xx:3 of @ERd)1 (#xx:3 of @aa:8)1 (#xx:3 of @aa:16)1 (#xx:3 of @aa:32)1 (Rn8 of Rd8)1 (Rn8 of @ERd)1 (Rn8 of @aa:8)1 (Rn8 of @aa:16)1 (Rn8 of @aa:32)1 (#xx:3 of Rd8)0 (#xx:3 of @ERd)0 (#xx:3 of @aa:8)0 (#xx:3 of @aa:16)0 (#xx:3 of @aa:32)0 (Rn8 of Rd8)0 (Rn8 of @ERd)0 (Rn8 of @aa:8)0 (Rn8 of @aa:16)0 (Rn8 of @aa:32)0 (#xx:3 of Rd8) [ (#xx:3 of Rd8)] (#xx:3 of @ERd) [ (#xx:3 of @ERd)] (#xx:3 of @aa:8) [ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)] (#xx:3 of @aa:16) [ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)] (#xx:3 of @aa:32) [ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)] (Rn8 of Rd8) [ (Rn8 of Rd8)] ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ BCLR BCLR #xx:3,Rd BCLR #xx:3,@ERd BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8 BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16 BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32 BCLR Rn,Rd BCLR Rn,@ERd BCLR Rn,@aa:8 BCLR Rn,@aa:16 BCLR Rn,@aa:32 BNOT BNOT #xx:3,Rd BNOT #xx:3,@ERd BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8 BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16 BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32 BNOT Rn,Rd BNOT Rn,@ERd BNOT Rn,@aa:8 BNOT Rn,@aa:16 BNOT Rn,@aa:32 (Rn8 of @ERd) [ (Rn8 of @ERd)] -- -- -- -- -- -- (Rn8 of @aa:8) [ (Rn8 of @aa:8)] -- -- -- -- -- -- (Rn8 of @aa:16) [ (Rn8 of @aa:16)] (Rn8 of @aa:32) [ (Rn8 of @aa:32)] ------------ ------------ 653 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) BTST BTST #xx:3,Rd BTST #xx:3,@ERd BTST #xx:3,@aa:8 BTST #xx:3,@aa:16 BTST #xx:3,@aa:32 BTST Rn,Rd BTST Rn,@ERd BTST Rn,@aa:8 BTST Rn,@aa:16 BTST Rn,@aa:32 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 (#xx:3 of Rd8)Z (#xx:3 of @ERd)Z (#xx:3 of @aa:8)Z (#xx:3 of @aa:16)Z (#xx:3 of @aa:32)Z (Rn8 of Rd8)Z (Rn8 of @ERd)Z (Rn8 of @aa:8)Z (Rn8 of @aa:16)Z (Rn8 of @aa:32)Z (#xx:3 of Rd8)C (#xx:3 of @ERd)C (#xx:3 of @aa:8)C (#xx:3 of @aa:16)C (#xx:3 of @aa:32)C (#xx:3 of Rd8)C (#xx:3 of @ERd)C (#xx:3 of @aa:8)C (#xx:3 of @aa:16)C (#xx:3 of @aa:32)C C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C(#xx:3 of @ERd) C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C(#xx:3 of @aa:16) C(#xx:3 of @aa:32) C(#xx:3 of Rd8) C(#xx:3 of @ERd) C(#xx:3 of @aa:8) C(#xx:3 of @aa:16) C(#xx:3 of @aa:32) ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- Normal @@aa I -- HNZ VC 1 3 3 4 5 1 3 3 4 5 1 3 3 4 5 1 3 3 4 5 1 4 4 5 6 1 4 4 5 6 BLD BLD #xx:3,Rd BLD #xx:3,@ERd BLD #xx:3,@aa:8 BLD #xx:3,@aa:16 BLD #xx:3,@aa:32 ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ BILD BILD #xx:3,Rd BILD #xx:3,@ERd BILD #xx:3,@aa:8 BILD #xx:3,@aa:16 BILD #xx:3,@aa:32 BST BST #xx:3,Rd BST #xx:3,@ERd BST #xx:3,@aa:8 BST #xx:3,@aa:16 BST #xx:3,@aa:32 BIST BIST #xx:3,Rd BIST #xx:3,@ERd BIST #xx:3,@aa:8 BIST #xx:3,@aa:16 BIST #xx:3,@aa:32 654 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @ERn Operation @aa Size #xx Rn Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) BAND BAND #xx:3,Rd BAND #xx:3,@ERd BAND #xx:3,@aa:8 BAND #xx:3,@aa:16 BAND #xx:3,@aa:32 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 2 4 4 6 8 C (#xx:3 of Rd8)C C (#xx:3 of @ERd)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:8)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:16)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:32)C C [ (#xx:3 of Rd8)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @ERd)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)]C C (#xx:3 of Rd8)C C (#xx:3 of @ERd)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:8)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:16)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:32)C C [ (#xx:3 of Rd8)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @ERd)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)]C C (#xx:3 of Rd8)C C (#xx:3 of @ERd)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:8)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:16)C C (#xx:3 of @aa:32)C C [ (#xx:3 of Rd8)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @ERd)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)]C C [ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)]C ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ---------- Normal @@aa I -- HNZ VC 1 3 3 4 5 1 3 3 4 5 1 3 3 4 5 1 3 3 4 5 1 3 3 4 5 1 3 3 4 5 BIAND BIAND #xx:3,Rd BIAND #xx:3,@ERd BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8 BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16 BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32 BOR BOR #xx:3,Rd BOR #xx:3,@ERd BOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BOR #xx:3,@aa:32 BIOR BIOR #xx:3,Rd BIOR #xx:3,@ERd BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32 BXOR BXOR #xx:3,Rd BXOR #xx:3,@ERd BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32 BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3,Rd BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32 655 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @ERn Operation @aa Size #xx Rn 6. Branch Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,ERn) @(d,PC) Bcc BRA d:8(BT d:8) BRA d:16(BT d:16) BRN d:8(BF d:8) BRN d:16(BF d:16) BHI d:8 BHI d:16 BLS d:8 BLS d:16 BCC d:8(BHS d:8) BCC d:16(BHS d:16) BCS d:8(BLO d:8) BCS d:16(BLO d:16) BNE d:8 BNE d:16 BEQ d:8 BEQ d:16 BVC d:8 BVC d:16 BVS d:8 BVS d:16 BPL d:8 BPL d:16 BMI d:8 BMI d:16 BGE d:8 BGE d:16 BLT d:8 BLT d:16 BGT d:8 BGT d:16 BLE d:8 BLE d:16 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 if condition is true then PCPC+d else next; Always ------------ ------------ Normal 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 @@aa @ERn Branch Condition I HN Z VC Never ------------ ------------ CZ=0 ------------ ------------ CZ=1 ------------ ------------ C=0 ------------ ------------ C=1 ------------ ------------ Z=0 ------------ ------------ Z=1 ------------ ------------ V=0 ------------ ------------ V=1 ------------ ------------ N=0 ------------ ------------ N=1 ------------ ------------ NV=0 ------------ ------------ NV=1 ------------ ------------ Z(NV)=0 -- -- -- -- -- -- ------------ Z(NV)=1 -- -- -- -- -- -- ------------ 656 Advanced Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @aa Size #xx Rn -- Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) @-ERn/@ERn+ Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) JMP JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 4 2 2 4 2 4 2 PCERn PCaa:24 PC@aa:8 PC@-SP,PCPC+d:8 PC@-SP,PCPC+d:16 PC@-SP,PCERn PC@-SP,PCaa:24 PC@-SP,PC@aa:8 2 PC@SP+ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 Normal @@aa I -- HNZ VC 2 3 5 4 5 4 5 6 5 BSR BSR d:8 BSR d:16 JSR JSR @ERn JSR @aa:24 JSR @@aa:8 RTS RTS 657 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @ERn Operation @aa Size #xx Rn 7. System Control Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) TRAPA TRAPA #xx:2 -- PC@-SP,CCR@-SP, EXR@-SP, 1 -- -- -- -- -- 7 [9] 8 [9] RTE RTE -- SLEEP LDC SLEEP LDC #xx:8,CCR LDC #xx:8,EXR LDC Rs,CCR LDC Rs,EXR LDC @ERs,CCR LDC @ERs,EXR LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR LDC @ERs+,CCR LDC @ERs+,EXR LDC @aa:16,CCR LDC @aa:16,EXR LDC @aa:32,CCR LDC @aa:32,EXR -- B B B B W W W W W W W W W W W W ------------ Normal 2 1 2 1 1 3 3 4 4 6 6 4 4 4 4 5 5 @@aa I HN Z VC 5 [9] ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ 658 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) STC STC CCR,Rd STC EXR,Rd STC CCR,@ERd STC EXR,@ERd STC CCR,@(d:16,ERd) STC EXR,@(d:16,ERd) STC CCR,@(d:32,ERd) STC EXR,@(d:32,ERd) STC CCR,@-ERd STC EXR,@-ERd STC CCR,@aa:16 STC EXR,@aa:16 STC CCR,@aa:32 STC EXR,@aa:32 B B W W W W W W W W W W W W B B B B B B -- 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2 4 4 6 6 10 10 4 4 6 6 8 8 CCRRd8 EXRRd8 CCR@ERd EXR@ERd CCR@(d:16,ERd) EXR@(d:16,ERd) CCR@(d:32,ERd) EXR@(d:32,ERd) ERd32-2ERd32,CCR@ERd ERd32-2ERd32,EXR@ERd CCR@aa:16 EXR@aa:16 CCR@aa:32 EXR@aa:32 CCR#xx:8CCR EXR#xx:8EXR CCR#xx:8CCR EXR#xx:8EXR CCR#xx:8CCR EXR#xx:8EXR 2 PCPC+2 ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ Normal 1 1 3 3 4 4 6 6 4 4 4 4 5 5 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 @@aa I HN Z VC ANDC ANDC #xx:8,CCR ANDC #xx:8,EXR ------------ ORC ORC #xx:8,CCR ORC #xx:8,EXR ------------ XORC XORC #xx:8,CCR XORC #xx:8,EXR ------------ ------------ NOP NOP 659 Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- 8. Block Transfer Instructions Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes) Condition Code No. of States*1 @(d,PC) EEPMOV EEPMOV.B -- 4 if R4L0 Repeat @ER5@ER6 ER5+1ER5 ER6+1ER6 R4L-1R4L Until R4L=0 else next; 4 if R40 Repeat @ER5@ER6 ER5+1ER5 ER6+1ER6 R4-1R4 Until R4=0 else next; ------------ 4+2n*2 EEPMOV.W -- ------------ 4+2n*2 Notes: 1. The number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction and its operands are located in on-chip memory. 2. n is the initial value set in R4L or R4. 3. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 4. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. [1] 7 states when the number of saved/restored registers is 2, 9 states when 3, and 11 states when 4. [2] Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. [3] Set to 1 when there is a carry from or borrow to bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0. [4] Set to 1 when there is a carry from or borrow to bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0. [5] If the result is zero, the previous value of the flag is retained; otherwise the flag is cleared to 0. [6] Set to 1 if the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. [7] Set to 1 if the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. [8] Set to 1 if the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. [9] When EXR is valid, the number of states is increased by 1. 660 Normal @@aa I HN Z VC Advanced @(d,ERn) Mnemonic @-ERn/@ERn+ Operation @ERn @aa Size #xx Rn -- A.2 Instruction Size 1st Byte 8 0 7 0 7 0 0 0 0 9 0 E 1 7 6 7 0 0 0 IMM 7 7 7 6 6 4 5 4 5 8 1 0 1 disp disp 8 0 0 0 disp disp A 3 0 A 1 0 abs abs E abs 7 0 7 6 0 IMM 0 7 6 0 IMM 0 6 0 IMM C 0 erd 0 7 0 6 0 IMM 6 0 IMM rd 1 4 1 0 6 6 IMM 1 F 0 6 6 0 ers 0 erd A 6 0 erd IMM 6 rs rd 9 6 rd IMM 6 rs rd rd IMM E rs rd rd IMM B 9 0 erd B 8 0 erd B 0 0 erd A 1 ers 0 erd A 1 0 erd IMM 9 rs rd 9 1 rd IMM 8 rs rd rd IMM 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte 10th Byte B B W W L L L L L B B B B W W L L B B B B B B B -- -- -- -- Mnemonic Instruction Format Table A.2 ADD ADD.B #xx:8,Rd ADD.B Rs,Rd ADD.W #xx:16,Rd ADD.W Rs,Rd ADD.L #xx:32,ERd ADD.L ERs,ERd ADDS ADDS #1,ERd ADDS #2,ERd Instruction Codes Instruction Codes ADDS #4,ERd ADDX ADDX #xx:8,Rd ADDX Rs,Rd AND AND.B #xx:8,Rd AND.B Rs,Rd AND.W #xx:16,Rd AND.W Rs,Rd AND.L #xx:32,ERd AND.L ERs,ERd ANDC ANDC #xx:8,CCR ANDC #xx:8,EXR BAND BAND #xx:3,Rd BAND #xx:3,@ERd BAND #xx:3,@aa:8 BAND #xx:3,@aa:16 BAND #xx:3,@aa:32 Bcc BRA d:8 (BT d:8) BRA d:16 (BT d:16) BRN d:8 (BF d:8) BRN d:16 (BF d:16) 661 662 Instruction Format Size 1st Byte 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 disp E disp F 0 disp 0 disp 5 4 5 8 F 8 E 8 0 D D disp disp 8 0 C C disp disp 8 0 disp B B disp 8 0 disp A A disp 8 0 disp 9 9 disp 8 0 disp 8 8 disp 8 0 disp 7 7 disp 8 0 disp 6 6 disp 8 0 disp 5 5 disp 8 0 disp 4 4 disp 8 0 disp 3 3 disp 8 0 disp 2 2 disp 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Instruction Mnemonic 10th Byte Bcc BHI d:8 BHI d:16 BLS d:8 BLS d:16 BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) BNE d:8 BNE d:16 BEQ d:8 BEQ d:16 BVC d:8 BVC d:16 BVS d:8 BVS d:16 BPL d:8 BPL d:16 BMI d:8 BMI d:16 BGE d:8 BGE d:16 BLT d:8 BLT d:16 BGT d:8 BGT d:16 BLE d:8 BLE d:16 Instruction Size 1st Byte 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 7 6 6 7 7 1 IMM 1 IMM abs abs 7 6 0 1 IMM 0 7 6 1 IMM 0 7 6 6 7 7 1 IMM 1 IMM abs abs 0 7 7 1 IMM 0 7 7 1 IMM 0 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 A 3 0 A 1 0 E abs 7 C 0 erd 0 7 4 4 4 1 IMM rd 1 IMM 1 IMM abs abs 0 0 7 4 1 IMM 0 7 4 1 IMM 0 A 3 0 A 1 0 E abs 7 7 C 0 erd 0 7 7 0 7 1 IMM rd A 3 0 A 1 0 E abs 7 6 C 0 erd 0 7 6 0 6 1 IMM rd A 3 8 abs 6 A 1 8 abs 6 2 rn 0 2 rn 0 F abs 6 2 rn 0 D 0 erd 0 6 2 rn 0 2 rn rd A 3 8 abs 7 0 IMM 2 0 A 1 8 abs 7 0 IMM 2 0 F 0 IMM abs 7 2 0 D 0 erd 0 IMM 0 7 2 0 2 0 IMM rd 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B Mnemonic Instruction Format 10th Byte BCLR BCLR #xx:3,Rd BCLR #xx:3,@ERd BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8 BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16 BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32 BCLR Rn,Rd BCLR Rn,@ERd BCLR Rn,@aa:8 BCLR Rn,@aa:16 BCLR Rn,@aa:32 BIAND BIAND #xx:3,Rd BIAND #xx:3,@ERd BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8 BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16 BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32 BILD BILD #xx:3,Rd BILD #xx:3,@ERd BILD #xx:3,@aa:8 BILD #xx:3,@aa:16 BILD #xx:3,@aa:32 BIOR BIOR #xx:3,Rd BIOR #xx:3,@ERd BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32 663 664 Instruction Format Size 1st Byte 6 1 IMM 0 erd abs 1 abs abs 6 1 IMM 7 0 1 IMM 3 1 IMM 0 erd abs 1 abs abs 7 1 IMM 3 0 IMM 0 erd abs 1 abs abs 3 0 IMM 0 erd abs 1 abs abs 3 rn 0 erd abs 1 3 8 8 6 0 6 1 1 abs abs rd rn rn 0 0 6 1 rn 0 6 1 rn 0 8 8 7 0 IMM 1 0 7 1 0 IMM 0 7 1 0 IMM 0 0 0 IMM 7 1 0 rd 0 0 7 7 7 0 IMM 7 0 0 IMM 0 7 7 0 IMM 0 0 0 IMM 7 7 0 rd 0 0 7 5 0 5 1 IMM 0 7 1 IMM 5 0 0 1 IMM 7 5 0 rd 8 8 6 7 0 6 1 IMM 7 0 0 1 IMM 6 7 0 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 7 6 6 A A F D 1 A A F D 1 A A E C 7 A A E C 5 A A F D 7 rd 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B Instruction Mnemonic 10th Byte BIST BIST #xx:3,Rd BIST #xx:3,@ERd BIST #xx:3,@aa:8 BIST #xx:3,@aa:16 BIST #xx:3,@aa:32 BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3,Rd BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32 BLD BLD #xx:3,Rd BLD #xx:3,@ERd BLD #xx:3,@aa:8 BLD #xx:3,@aa:16 BLD #xx:3,@aa:32 BNOT BNOT #xx:3,Rd BNOT #xx:3,@ERd BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8 BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16 BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32 BNOT Rn,Rd BNOT Rn,@ERd BNOT Rn,@aa:8 BNOT Rn,@aa:16 BNOT Rn,@aa:32 Instruction Size 1st Byte 7 7 7 abs 1 abs 0 IMM 7 0 IMM 4 0 abs 3 0 IMM 0 erd 0 IMM 0 IMM abs 0 IMM 7 abs 7 0 0 0 0 IMM 0 0 abs 1 3 rn 0 erd abs 1 abs abs 3 disp 0 disp 0 IMM 0 erd 0 IMM 0 IMM abs abs abs 1 3 0 IMM 0 erd abs 1 3 rn 0 erd 0 0 rd 0 C 6 3 rn 0 0 7 7 rd 3 3 0 IMM 0 IMM abs abs 0 0 7 3 0 IMM 0 7 3 0 IMM 0 8 8 6 7 0 6 7 0 0 6 7 0 IMM 0 6 7 0 IMM 0 rd 0 8 8 6 0 6 0 rn 0 rn 0 6 0 rn 0 0 6 0 rn 0 rd 8 8 7 0 0 7 0 0 rd 0 0 7 4 0 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 7 6 6 5 5 6 7 7 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 6 7 3 A A E C 3 A A F D 7 C 5 A A F D 0 A A F D 0 A A E 0 IMM 7 4 0 C 0 erd 0 IMM 0 7 4 0 4 0 IMM rd 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B -- -- B B B B B B B B B B B B Mnemonic Instruction Format 10th Byte BOR BOR #xx:3,Rd BOR #xx:3,@ERd BOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BOR #xx:3,@aa:32 BSET BSET #xx:3,Rd BSET #xx:3,@ERd BSET #xx:3,@aa:8 BSET #xx:3,@aa:16 BSET #xx:3,@aa:32 BSET Rn,Rd BSET Rn,@ERd BSET Rn,@aa:8 BSET Rn,@aa:16 BSET Rn,@aa:32 BSR BSR d:8 BSR d:16 BST BST #xx:3,Rd BST #xx:3,@ERd BST #xx:3,@aa:8 BST #xx:3,@aa:16 BST #xx:3,@aa:32 BTST BTST #xx:3,Rd BTST #xx:3,@ERd BTST #xx:3,@aa:8 BTST #xx:3,@aa:16 BTST #xx:3,@aa:32 BTST Rn,Rd BTST Rn,@ERd 665 666 Instruction Format Size 1st Byte 7 abs 1 abs abs 6 3 rn 0 3 0 IMM 0 erd abs 1 abs abs 7 5 3 0 0 7 5 0 IMM 0 0 IMM 0 7 0 IMM 5 0 0 0 IMM 7 5 0 rd 0 0 6 3 rn 0 6 6 7 7 7 6 6 Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. A IMM rs 2 IMM rs 2 IMM 1 ers 0 erd 0 0 0 5 D 7 F D D rs rs 5 D rd 0 erd C 4 5 5 9 9 8 8 F F 0 5 0 5 0 erd 1 3 rs rs rd 0 erd 0 erd rd rd rd rd rd 0 erd rd rd rd 1 7 1 7 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 5 5 7 7 B B 3 1 1 1 B B B B A F F F A D 9 C rd A A E C 5 A A E 6 3 rn 0 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte B B B B B B B B -- B B W W L L B B B W W L L B W B W -- -- Instruction Mnemonic 10th Byte BTST BTST Rn,@aa:8 BTST Rn,@aa:16 BTST Rn,@aa:32 BXOR BXOR #xx:3,Rd BXOR #xx:3,@ERd BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32 CLRMAC CLRMAC CMP CMP.B #xx:8,Rd CMP.B Rs,Rd CMP.W #xx:16,Rd CMP.W Rs,Rd CMP.L #xx:32,ERd CMP.L ERs,ERd DAA DAA Rd DAS DAS Rd DEC DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1,Rd DEC.W #2,Rd DEC.L #1,ERd DEC.L #2,ERd DIVXS DIVXS.B Rs,Rd DIVXS.W Rs,ERd DIVXU DIVXU.B Rs,Rd DIVXU.W Rs,ERd EEPMOV EEPMOV.B EEPMOV.W Instruction Size 1st Byte 1 7 D rd 0 erd rd 0 erd rd rd rd 0 erd 0 erd 0 abs abs 0 ern 0 abs abs IMM 4 1 0 7 rs rs 0 6 9 9 F F 8 7 0 1 4 4 0 1 6 6 6 6 8 D D B B 6 6 6 7 1 0 1 0 1 0 ers 0 ers 0 ers 0 ers 0 ers 0 ers 0 ers 0 ers 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 abs abs 1 6 6 B B disp disp 2 2 0 0 disp disp 0 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 IMM F 5 7 0 5 D 7 F 0 ern 7 7 7 A B B B B 9 A B D E F 7 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte W L W L B W W L L -- -- -- -- -- -- B B B B W W W W W W W W W W Mnemonic Instruction Format 10th Byte EXTS EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd EXTU EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd INC INC.B Rd INC.W #1,Rd INC.W #2,Rd INC.L #1,ERd INC.L #2,ERd JMP JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 JSR JSR @ERn JSR @aa:24 JSR @@aa:8 LDC LDC #xx:8,CCR LDC #xx:8,EXR LDC Rs,CCR LDC Rs,EXR LDC @ERs,CCR LDC @ERs,EXR LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR LDC @ERs+,CCR LDC @ERs+,EXR LDC @aa:16,CCR LDC @aa:16,EXR 667 668 Instruction Format Size 1st Byte 0 0 0 0 0 Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. 1 0 ern+3 3 0 6 D 7 1 0 ern+2 2 0 6 D 7 1 0 ern+1 1 0 6 D 7 1 0 abs 4 1 6 B 2 1 0 abs 4 0 6 B 2 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte W W L L L L L -- B IMM rs 0 ers 0 ers disp 6 rd A 2 disp 0 ers 0 ers abs 0 abs abs 2 1 erd 1 erd disp 6 A A rs disp 0 erd 1 erd abs 8 A 0 rs 0 ers 0 ers 0 ers rd rd rd 0 8 6 B disp 2 rd disp rd rs IMM rs abs abs rs 0 rs rs rd rd rd 0 rd rd rd B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B W W W W W 7 6 F 6 9 0 D 7 9 6 A 6 A 3 rs 6 C 7 8 6 E 6 8 6 A 6 A 2 rd 6 C 7 8 6 E 6 8 0 C F rd Instruction Mnemonic 10th Byte LDC LDC @aa:32,CCR LDC @aa:32,EXR LDM*3 LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+1) LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+2) LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+3) LDMAC LDMAC ERs,MACH LDMAC ERs,MACL MAC MAC @ERn+,@ERm+ MOV MOV.B #xx:8,Rd MOV.B Rs,Rd MOV.B @ERs,Rd MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd MOV.B @ERs+,Rd MOV.B @aa:8,Rd MOV.B @aa:16,Rd MOV.B @aa:32,Rd MOV.B Rs,@ERd MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd) MOV.B Rs,@-ERd MOV.B Rs,@aa:8 MOV.B Rs,@aa:16 MOV.B Rs,@aa:32 MOV.W #xx:16,Rd MOV.W Rs,Rd MOV.W @ERs,Rd MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd Instruction Size 1st Byte 6 0 ers 0 abs abs 2 1 erd 1 erd 0 erd 1 erd 8 abs abs IMM A 0 0 erd 1 ers 0 erd 0 0 ers 0 erd 0 ers 0 erd disp 6 B 2 0 erd disp 0 ers 0 ers 0 erd 0 0 erd 0 erd 2 1 erd 0 ers 1 erd 0 ers 0 erd 0 6 B disp A 0 ers disp abs abs 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 6 B B 0 6 D 0 7 8 0 6 F 0 6 9 0 6 B 0 6 B 0 6 D 0 7 8 0 6 F 0 6 9 rs rs rs 0 disp 6 B A rs rs disp rs rd rd 6 6 6 6 7 6 6 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F A B B D 8 F 9 B B D rd 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte W W W W W W W W W L L L L L L L L L L Mnemonic Instruction Format 10th Byte MOV MOV.W @ERs+,Rd MOV.W @aa:16,Rd MOV.W @aa:32,Rd MOV.W Rs,@ERd MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd) MOV.W Rs,@-ERd MOV.W Rs,@aa:16 MOV.W Rs,@aa:32 MOV.L #xx:32,Rd MOV.L ERs,ERd MOV.L @ERs,ERd MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd MOV.L @ERs+,ERd MOV.L @aa:16 ,ERd MOV.L @aa:32 ,ERd MOV.L ERs,@ERd MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd)*1 L L L L B B B 0 0 5 5 2 0 1 C rs rs W B W 1 C 0 0 rd 0 erd 5 5 0 2 MOV.L ERs,@-ERd 1 erd 0 ers 8 A 0 ers 0 ers abs abs MOV.L ERs,@aa:16 MOV.L ERs,@aa:32 MOVFPE MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. MOVTPE MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16 MULXS MULXS.B Rs,Rd rs rs rd 0 erd MULXS.W Rs,ERd MULXU MULXU.B Rs,Rd MULXU.W Rs,ERd 669 670 Instruction Format Size 1st Byte 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 C 1 7 6 7 0 0 0 6 0 6 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 F 0 erd 2 0 erd B 2 D rd 2 9 rd 2 C rd 2 8 rd 1 0 0 6 D F D F rn 0 ern 1 0 0 6 D 7 0 ern D 7 rn 1 4 1 0 4 IMM 4 IMM 1 F 0 6 4 0 ers 0 erd A 4 0 erd IMM 4 rs rd 9 4 rd IMM 4 rs rd rd IMM 7 3 0 erd 7 1 rd 7 0 rd 0 0 0 7 B 0 erd 7 9 rd 7 8 rd 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte B W L -- B W L B B W W L L B B W L W L B B W W L L Instruction Mnemonic 10th Byte NEG NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd NOP NOP NOT NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd OR OR.B #xx:8,Rd OR.B Rs,Rd OR.W #xx:16,Rd OR.W Rs,Rd OR.L #xx:32,ERd OR.L ERs,ERd ORC ORC #xx:8,CCR ORC #xx:8,EXR POP POP.W Rn POP.L ERn PUSH PUSH.W Rn PUSH.L ERn ROTL ROTL.B Rd ROTL.B #2, Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.W #2, Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTL.L #2, ERd Instruction Size 1st Byte 1 1 1 1 1 0 erd 0 erd rd rd rd rd 0 erd 0 erd rd rd rd rd 0 erd 0 erd 0 0 rd rd rd rd 0 erd 0 erd 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 F 0 B 0 D 0 9 0 C 0 8 4 7 6 7 3 7 3 3 3 5 3 1 3 4 3 0 2 7 2 3 2 5 2 1 2 4 2 0 3 F 3 B 3 D rd 3 9 rd 3 C rd 3 8 rd 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte B B W W L L B B W W L L B B W W L L -- -- B B W W L L Mnemonic Instruction Format 10th Byte ROTR ROTR.B Rd ROTR.B #2, Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.W #2, Rd ROTR.L ERd ROTR.L #2, ERd ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.B #2, Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.W #2, Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXL.L #2, ERd ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.B #2, Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.W #2, Rd ROTXR.L ERd ROTXR.L #2, ERd RTE RTE RTS RTS SHAL SHAL.B Rd SHAL.B #2, Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.W #2, Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAL.L #2, ERd 671 672 Instruction Format Size 1st Byte 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 6 7 1 4 4 4 1 0 1 7 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 4 0 1 4 1 1 4 0 1 4 1 1 4 0 9 9 F F 8 8 D D 2 1 rd 1 erd 1 erd 1 erd 1 erd 0 erd 0 erd 1 erd 1 erd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 6 B B disp disp A A 0 0 disp disp 2 0 rd 1 8 0 1 0 erd 7 1 0 erd 3 1 5 rd 1 1 rd 1 4 rd 1 0 rd 0 0 erd 7 0 0 erd 3 0 5 rd 0 1 rd 0 4 rd 0 0 rd 1 0 erd F 1 0 erd B 1 D rd 1 9 rd 1 C rd 1 8 rd 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte B B W W L L B B W W L L B B W W L L -- B B W W W W Instruction Mnemonic 10th Byte SHAR SHAR.B Rd SHAR.B #2, Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.W #2, Rd SHAR.L ERd SHAR.L #2, ERd SHLL SHLL.B Rd SHLL.B #2, Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.W #2, Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLL.L #2, ERd SHLR SHLR.B Rd SHLR.B #2, Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.W #2, Rd SHLR.L ERd SHLR.L #2, ERd SLEEP SLEEP STC STC.B CCR,Rd STC.B EXR,Rd STC.W CCR,@ERd STC.W EXR,@ERd STC.W CCR,@(d:16,ERd) W STC.W EXR,@(d:16,ERd) W STC.W CCR,@(d:32,ERd) W STC.W EXR,@(d:32,ERd) W STC.W CCR,@-ERd STC.W EXR,@-ERd Instruction Size 1st Byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. 1 3 0 6 D F 0 ern 1 2 0 6 D F 0 ern 1 1 0 6 D F 0 ern 1 4 1 6 B A 0 abs 1 4 0 6 B A 0 abs 1 4 1 6 B 8 0 abs 1 4 0 6 B 8 0 abs 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte 6th Byte 7th Byte 8th Byte 9th Byte W W W W L L L L L B 1 7 1 7 1 1 1 1 B 1 0 5 00 IMM IMM rs 5 rs 5 F rd 0 erd 0 6 5 IMM 0 ers 0 erd rd rd IMM D 1 7 6 7 0 1 A 5 9 5 rd 7 0 1 E 0 7 B 0 erd E rs rd C rd IMM B 9 0 erd B 8 0 erd B 0 0 erd A 1 ers 0 erd A 3 0 erd IMM 9 rs rd 9 3 rd IMM 8 rs rd W W L L L L L B B B -- B B W W L L Mnemonic Instruction Format 10th Byte STC STC.W CCR,@aa:16 STC.W EXR,@aa:16 STC.W CCR,@aa:32 STC.W EXR,@aa:32 STM*3 STM.L (ERn-ERn+1), @-SP STM.L (ERn-ERn+2), @-SP STM.L (ERn-ERn+3), @-SP STMAC STMAC MACH,ERd STMAC MACL,ERd SUB SUB.B Rs,Rd SUB.W #xx:16,Rd SUB.W Rs,Rd SUB.L #xx:32,ERd SUB.L ERs,ERd SUBS SUBS #1,ERd SUBS #2,ERd SUBS #4,ERd SUBX SUBX #xx:8,Rd SUBX Rs,Rd TAS TAS @ERd*2 TRAPA TRAPA #x:2 XOR XOR.B #xx:8,Rd XOR.B Rs,Rd XOR.W #xx:16,Rd XOR.W Rs,Rd XOR.L #xx:32,ERd XOR.L ERs,ERd 673 674 Instruction Format Size 1st byte 0 0 1 4 1 0 5 IMM 5 IMM 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte B B Instruction Mnemonic 10th byte XORC XORC #xx:8,CCR XORC #xx:8,EXR Note: 1. Bit 7 of the 4th byte of the MOV.L ERs, @ (d:32, ERd) instruction can be either 0 or 1. 2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Immediate data (2, 3, 8, 16, or 32 bits) Absolute address (8, 16, 24, or 32 bits) Displacement (8, 16, or 32 bits) Register field (4 bits, indicating an 8-bit or 16-bit register. rs, rd, and rn correspond to operand formats Rs, Rd, and Rn, respectively.) Register field (3 bits, indicating an address register or 32-bit register. ers, erd, ern, and erm correspond to operand formats ERs, ERd, ERn, and ERm, respectively.) Legend IMM: abs: disp: rs, rd, rn: ers, erd, ern, erm: The correspondence between register fields and general registers is shown in the following table. 16-Bit Register Register Field 0000 0001 * * * 0111 1000 1001 * * * 1111 R0 R1 * * * R7 E0 E1 * * * E7 0000 0001 * * * 0111 1000 1001 * * * 1111 General Register Register Field 8-Bit Register General Register R0H R1H * * * R7H R0L R1L * * * R7L Address Registers 32-Bit Registers Register Field General Register 000 001 * * * 111 ER0 ER1 * * * ER7 A.3 Table A.3 Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 0. 2nd byte BL Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 1. Instruction code: 1st byte AH AL BH AL 3 4 9 C D MOV CMP ADD SUB A B ORC OR MOV.B XOR AND Table A.3 (2) XORC ANDC LDC 5 6 7 8 AH 0 1 2 E ADDX SUBX F 0 NOP 1 Table A.3 (2) LDC Table STC * * A.3 (2) STMAC LDMAC Table Table Table A.3 (2) A.3 (2) A.3 (2) Table A.3 (2) Table A.3 (2) Table A.3 (2) Table A.3 (2) Table A.3 (2) Table A.3 (2) Operation Code Map Operation Code Map (1) 2 Table A.3 shows the operation code map. 3 BLS BCC BEQ TRAPA JMP MOV MOV Table A.3 (2) Table A.3 (2) BVC BVS BPL BMI RTS BSR RTE BNE DIVXU BTST BCS BGE BSR MOV Table A.3 (3) BLT BGT JSR BLE 4 BRA BRN BHI 5 MULXU DIVXU MULXU 6 BSET BNOT BCLR 7 ADD ADDX CMP SUBX OR XOR AND MOV BST XOR AND OR BIST BOR BLD BXOR BAND BIOR BILD BIXOR BIAND Table A.3 (2) Table A.3 (2) EEPMOV 8 9 A B C D E F Note: * Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. 675 676 2nd byte BH BL 2 5 7 SLEEP ADD INC INC ADDS MOV SHLL SHLL SHLR ROTXL ROTXR EXTU EXTU ROTR NEG NEG SUB DEC DEC SUBS CMP BHI BCS MOV CMP OR OR CMP SUB SUB XOR XOR Table A.3 (4) * MOVFPE AND AND BLS BCC BNE BEQ BVC MOV BVS BPL MOV BMI BGE * MOVTPE BLT BGT BLE DEC DEC ROTL SHAR SHAL SHLR ROTXL ROTXR NOT SHAL SHAR ROTL ROTR EXTS SHAL SHAR ROTL ROTR EXTS INC INC * CLRMAC Table A.3 (3) * MAC 6 8 B C STM STC LDC 3 4 9 A D Table A.3 (3) E TAS F Table A.3 (3) Table A.3 Instruction code: 1st byte AH AL BH AH AL 0 1 01 MOV LDM 0A INC 0B ADDS Operation Code Map (2) 0F DAA 10 SHLL 11 SHLR 12 ROTXL 13 ROTXR 17 NOT 1A DEC 1B SUBS 1F DAS 58 BRA BRN 6A MOV Table A.3 (4) 79 MOV ADD 7A MOV ADD Note: * Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. Table A.3 Instruction code: BH BL CH CL DH DL 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte AH AL Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 0. Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 1. CL 2 MULXS DIVXS OR BTST BTST BCLR BCLR BTST BTST BCLR BCLR XOR AND 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B AH AL BH BL CH 0 1 C D E F 01C05 MULXS Operation Code Map (3) 01D05 DIVXS 01F06 7Cr06*1 7Cr07*1 7Dr06*1 BSET BNOT BOR BXOR BAND BLD BIOR BIXOR BIAND BILD BST BIST 7Dr07*1 BSET BNOT 7Eaa6*2 7Eaa7*2 7Faa6*2 BSET BNOT BOR BXOR BAND BLD BIOR BIXOR BIAND BILD BST BIST 7Faa7*2 BSET BNOT Notes: 1. r is the register specification field. 2. aa is the absolute address specification. 677 678 2nd byte BH BL CH CL DH DL EH EL FH FL Instruction when most significant bit of FH is 0. Instruction when most significant bit of FH is 1. 2 BTST BXOR BAND BLD BOR BIXOR BIAND BILD BIOR BST BIST 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte BCLR 2nd byte BH BL CH CL DH DL EH EL 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte FH FL 7th byte GH GL 8th byte HH HL Indicates case where MSB of HH is 0. Indicates case where MSB of HH is 1. 2 BTST 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F BCLR BXOR BAND BLD BOR BIXOR BIAND BILD BIOR BST BIST Table A.3 Instruction code: 1st byte AH AL EL AHALBHBLCHCLDHDLEH 0 1 6A10aaaa6* 6A10aaaa7* Operation Code Map (4) 6A18aaaa6* BSET BNOT 6A18aaaa7* Instruction code: 1st byte AH AL GL AHALBHBL ... FHFLGH 0 1 6A30aaaaaaaa6* 6A30aaaaaaaa7* 6A38aaaaaaaa6* BSET BNOT 6A38aaaaaaaa7* Note: * aa is the absolute address specification. A.4 Number of States Required for Execution The tables in this section can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction execution by the H8S/2000 CPU. Table A.5 shows the number of instruction fetch, data read/write, and other cycles occurring in each instruction, and table A.4 shows the number of states required per cycle according to the bus size. The number of states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows: Number of states = I x S I + J x S J + K x S K + L x S L + M x S M + N x S N Examples of Calculation of Number of States Required for Execution Examples: Advanced mode, external address space designated for the program area and stack area, on-chip supporting modules accessed in two states with 8-bit bus width, external devices accessed in three states with one wait state and 8-bit bus width. 1. BSET #0,@FFFFC7:8 From table A.5, I = L = 2 and J = K = M = N = 0 From table A.4, SI = 8 and SL = 2 Number of states = 2 x 8 + 2 x 2 = 20 2. JSR @@30 From table A.5, I = J = K = 2 and L = M = N = 0 From table A.4, SI = SJ= SK = 8 Number of states = 2 x 8 + 2 x 8 + 2 x 8 = 48 679 Table A.4 Number of States per Cycle Access Conditions On-Chip Supporting Module External Device 8-Bit Bus 2-State Access 4 3-State Access 6 + 2m 16-Bit Bus* 2-State Access 2 3-State Access 3+m Execution State (Cycle) Instruction fetch SI Branch address fetch SJ Stack operation SK Byte data access SL Word data access SM Internal operation SN On-Chip Memory 1 8-Bit Bus 4 16-Bit Bus 2 2 2 3+m 4 4 6 + 2m 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Legend: m: Number of wait states inserted into external device access Note: * Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. 680 Table A.5 Number of Cycles per Instruction Instruction Fetch I 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 4 2 2 2 2 (BHS d:8) (BLO d:8) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Instruction Mnemonic ADD ADD.B #xx:8,Rd ADD.B Rs,Rd ADD.W #xx:16,Rd ADD.W Rs,Rd ADD.L #xx:32,ERd ADD.L ERs,ERd ADDS ADDX ADDS #1/2/4,ERd ADDX #xx:8,Rd ADDX Rs,Rd AND AND.B #xx:8,Rd AND.B Rs,Rd AND.W #xx:16,Rd AND.W Rs,Rd AND.L #xx:32,ERd AND.L ERs,ERd ANDC ANDC #xx:8,CCR ANDC #xx:8,EXR BAND BAND #xx:3,Rd BAND #xx:3,@ERd BAND #xx:3,@aa:8 BAND #xx:3,@aa:16 BAND #xx:3,@aa:32 Bcc BRA d:8 BRN d:8 BHI d:8 BLS d:8 BCC d:8 BCS d:8 BNE d:8 BEQ d:8 BVC d:8 BVS d:8 BPL d:8 BMI d:8 BGE d:8 BLT d:8 (BT d:8) (BF d:8) 681 Instruction Mnemonic Bcc BGT d:8 BLE d:8 BRA d:16 BRN d:16 BHI d:16 BLS d:16 BCC d:16 BCS d:16 BNE d:16 BEQ d:16 BVC d:16 BVS d:16 BPL d:16 BMI d:16 BGE d:16 BLT d:16 BGT d:16 BLE d:16 BCLR BCLR #xx:3,Rd BCLR #xx:3,@ERd BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8 BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16 BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32 BCLR Rn,Rd BCLR Rn,@ERd BCLR Rn,@aa:8 BCLR Rn,@aa:16 BCLR Rn,@aa:32 BIAND BIAND #xx:3,Rd BIAND #xx:3,@ERd BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8 BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16 BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32 (BHS d:16) (BLO d:16) (BT d:16) (BF d:16) Instruction Fetch I 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 682 Instruction Mnemonic BILD BILD #xx:3,Rd BILD #xx:3,@ERd BILD #xx:3,@aa:8 BILD #xx:3,@aa:16 BILD #xx:3,@aa:32 BIOR BIOR #xx:8,Rd BIOR #xx:8,@ERd BIOR #xx:8,@aa:8 BIOR #xx:8,@aa:16 BIOR #xx:8,@aa:32 BIST BIST #xx:3,Rd BIST #xx:3,@ERd BIST #xx:3,@aa:8 BIST #xx:3,@aa:16 BIST #xx:3,@aa:32 BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3,Rd BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32 BLD BLD #xx:3,Rd BLD #xx:3,@ERd BLD #xx:3,@aa:8 BLD #xx:3,@aa:16 BLD #xx:3,@aa:32 BNOT BNOT #xx:3,Rd BNOT #xx:3,@ERd BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8 BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16 BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32 BNOT Rn,Rd BNOT Rn,@ERd BNOT Rn,@aa:8 BNOT Rn,@aa:16 BNOT Rn,@aa:32 Instruction Fetch I 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 683 Instruction Mnemonic BOR BOR #xx:3,Rd BOR #xx:3,@ERd BOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BOR #xx:3,@aa:32 BSET BSET #xx:3,Rd BSET #xx:3,@ERd BSET #xx:3,@aa:8 BSET #xx:3,@aa:16 BSET #xx:3,@aa:32 BSET Rn,Rd BSET Rn,@ERd BSET Rn,@aa:8 BSET Rn,@aa:16 BSET Rn,@aa:32 BSR BSR d:8 Normal Advanced BSR d:16 Normal Advanced BST BST #xx:3,Rd BST #xx:3,@ERd BST #xx:3,@aa:8 BST #xx:3,@aa:16 BST #xx:3,@aa:32 BTST BTST #xx:3,Rd BTST #xx:3,@ERd BTST #xx:3,@aa:8 BTST #xx:3,@aa:16 BTST #xx:3,@aa:32 BTST Rn,Rd BTST Rn,@ERd BTST Rn,@aa:8 BTST Rn,@aa:16 BTST Rn,@aa:32 Instruction Fetch I 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 2 3 4 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 684 Instruction Mnemonic BXOR BXOR #xx:3,Rd BXOR #xx:3,@ERd BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16 BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32 CLRMAC CMP CLRMAC CMP.B #xx:8,Rd CMP.B Rs,Rd CMP.W #xx:16,Rd CMP.W Rs,Rd CMP.L #xx:32,ERd CMP.L ERs,ERd DAA DAS DEC DAA Rd DAS Rd DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1/2,Rd DEC.L #1/2,ERd DIVXS DIVXS.B Rs,Rd DIVXS.W Rs,ERd DIVXU DIVXU.B Rs,Rd DIVXU.W Rs,ERd EEPMOV EEPMOV.B EEPMOV.W EXTS EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd EXTU EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd INC INC.B Rd INC.W #1/2,Rd INC.L #1/2,ERd JMP JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 JMP @@aa:8 Normal Advanced Instruction Fetch I 1 2 2 3 4 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 1 1 1 1 Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 2n+2 * 2 2n+2 * 2 11 19 11 19 685 Instruction Mnemonic JSR JSR @ERn Normal Advanced JSR @aa:24 Normal Advanced JSR @@aa:8 Normal Advanced LDC LDC #xx:8,CCR LDC #xx:8,EXR LDC Rs,CCR LDC Rs,EXR LDC @ERs,CCR LDC @ERs,EXR LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR LDC @ERs+,CCR LDC @ERs+,EXR LDC @aa:16,CCR LDC @aa:16,EXR LDC @aa:32,CCR LDC @aa:32,EXR LDM* 4 Instruction Fetch I 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 3 5 5 2 2 3 3 4 4 2 2 2 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K 1 2 1 2 Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 6 8 1 1 1 1 1 LDM.L @S P+, (ERn-ERn+1) LDM.L @S P+, (ERn-ERn+2) LDM.L @S P+, (ERn-ERn+3) LDMAC LDMAC ERs, MACH LDMAC ERs, MACL Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. MAC MOV MAC @ERn+, @ERm+ MOV.B #xx:8,Rd MOV.B Rs,Rd MOV.B @ERs,Rd MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd MOV.B @ERs+,Rd MOV.B @aa:8,Rd MOV.B @aa:16,Rd 1 1 1 2 4 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 686 Instruction Mnemonic MOV MOV.B @aa:32,Rd MOV.B Rs,@ERd MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd) MOV.B Rs,@-ERd MOV.B Rs,@aa:8 MOV.B Rs,@aa:16 MOV.B Rs,@aa:32 MOV.W #xx:16,Rd MOV.W Rs,Rd MOV.W @ERs,Rd MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd MOV.W @ERs+,Rd MOV.W @aa:16,Rd MOV.W @aa:32,Rd MOV.W Rs,@ERd MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd) MOV.W Rs,@-ERd MOV.W Rs,@aa:16 MOV.W Rs,@aa:32 MOV.L #xx:32,ERd MOV.L ERs,ERd MOV.L @ERs,ERd MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd MOV.L @ERs+,ERd MOV.L @aa:16,ERd MOV.L @aa:32,ERd MOV.L ERs,@ERd MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd) MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd) MOV.L ERs,@-ERd MOV.L ERs,@aa:16 MOV.L ERs,@aa:32 Instruction Fetch I 3 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 3 3 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 4 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 687 Instruction Mnemonic MOVFPE MOVTPE MULXS MOVFPE @:aa:16,Rd MOVTPE Rs,@:aa:16 MULXS.B Rs,Rd MULXS.W Rs,ERd MULXU MULXU.B Rs,Rd MULXU.W Rs,ERd NEG NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd NOP NOT NOP NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd NOT.L ERd OR OR .B #xx:8,Rd OR .B Rs,Rd OR .W #xx:16,Rd OR.W Rs,Rd OR.L #xx:32,ERd OR.L ERs,ERd ORC ORC #xx:8,CCR ORC #xx:8,EXR POP POP.W Rn POP.L ERn PUSH PUSH.W Rn PUSH.L ERn ROTL ROTL.B Rd ROTL.B #2,Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.W #2,Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTL.L #2,ERd Instruction Fetch I Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N Cannot be used with the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 11 19 11 19 1 1 1 1 688 Instruction Mnemonic ROTR ROTR.B Rd ROTR.B #2,Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.W #2,Rd ROTR.L ERd ROTR.L #2,ERd ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.B #2,Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.W #2,Rd ROTXL.L ERd ROTXL.L #2,ERd ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.B #2,Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.W #2,Rd ROTXR.L ERd ROTXR.L #2,ERd RTE RTS RTE RTS Normal Advanced SHAL SHAL.B Rd SHAL.B #2,Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.W #2,Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAL.L #2,ERd SHAR SHAR.B Rd SHAR.B #2,Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.W #2,Rd SHAR.L ERd SHAR.L #2,ERd Instruction Fetch I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 2/3 * 1 1 2 1 1 1 689 Instruction Mnemonic SHLL SHLL.B Rd SHLL.B #2,Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.W #2,Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLL.L #2,ERd SHLR SHLR.B Rd SHLR.B #2,Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.W #2,Rd SHLR.L ERd SHLR.L #2,ERd SLEEP STC SLEEP STC.B CCR,Rd STC.B EXR,Rd STC.W CCR,@ERd STC.W EXR,@ERd STC.W CCR,@(d:16,ERd) STC.W EXR,@(d:16,ERd) STC.W CCR,@(d:32,ERd) STC.W EXR,@(d:32,ERd) STC.W CCR,@-ERd STC.W EXR,@-ERd STC.W CCR,@aa:16 STC.W EXR,@aa:16 STC.W CCR,@aa:32 STC.W EXR,@aa:32 STM* 4 STM.L (ERn-ERn+1),@-SP STM.L (ERn-ERn+2),@-SP STM.L (ERn-ERn+3),@-SP SUB SUB.B Rs,Rd SUB.W #xx:16,Rd SUB.W Rs,Rd SUB.L #xx:32,ERd SUB.L ERs,ERd Instruction Fetch I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 5 5 2 2 3 3 4 4 2 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 6 8 1 1 1 1 1 690 Instruction Mnemonic SUBS SUBX SUBS #1/2/4,ERd SUBX #xx:8,Rd SUBX Rs,Rd TAS TRAPA TAS @ERd* 3 TRAPA #x:2 Normal Advanced XOR XOR.B #xx:8,Rd XOR.B Rs,Rd XOR.W #xx:16,Rd XOR.W Rs,Rd XOR.L #xx:32,ERd XOR.L ERs,ERd XORC XORC #xx:8,CCR XORC #xx:8,EXR Instruction Fetch I 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 Branch Address Read J Stack Operation K Byte Data Access L Word Data Access M Internal Operation N 2 1 2 2/3 * 1 2 2 2/3 * 1 Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2 when EXR is invalid, 3 when valid. When n bytes of data are transferred. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 691 A.5 Bus States During Instruction Execution Table A.6 indicates the types of cycles that occur during instruction execution by the CPU. See table A.4 for the number of states per cycle. How to Read the Table: Order of execution Instruction JMP@aa:24 1 R:W 2nd 2 Internal operation 2 state 3 R:W EA 4 5 6 7 8 End of instruction Read effective address (word-size read) No read or write Read 2nd word of current instruction (word-size read) Legend R:B R:W W:B W:W :M 2nd 3rd 4th 5th NEXT EA VEC Byte-size read Word-size read Byte-size write Word-size write Transfer of the bus is not performed immediately after this cycle Address of 2nd word (3rd and 4th bytes) Address of 3rd word (5th and 6th bytes) Address of 4th word (7th and 8th bytes) Address of 5th word (9th and 10th bytes) Start address of instruction following executing instruction Effective address Vector address 692 Figure A.1 shows timing waveforms for the address bus and the RD, WR signals during execution of the above instruction with an 8-bit bus, using three-state access with no wait states. o Address bus RD WR High level R:W 2nd Fetching 3rd byte of instruction Fetching 4th byte of instruction Internal operation R:W EA Fetching 1st byte of branch instruction Fetching 2nd byte of branch instruction Figure A.1 Address Bus, RD, WR Timing (8-Bit Bus, Three-State Access, No Wait States) 693 Table A.6 Instruction ADD.B #xx:8,Rd ADD.B Rs,Rd Instruction Execution Cycle 1 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ADD.W #xx:16,Rd ADD.W Rs,Rd ADD.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd ADD.L ERs,ERd ADDS #1/2/4,ERd ADDX #xx:8,Rd ADDX Rs,Rd AND.B #xx:8,Rd AND.B Rs,Rd AND.W #xx:16,Rd AND.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT AND.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd AND.L ERs,ERd ANDC #xx:8,CCR ANDC #xx:8,EXR BAND #xx:3,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT BAND #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd BAND #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd BAND #xx:3, @aa:16 BAND #xx:3, @aa:32 BRA d:8 BRN d:8 BHI d:8 BLS d:8 R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W:M NEXT (BT d:8) R:W NEXT R:W EA (BF d:8) R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) R:W NEXT R:W EA BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) R:W NEXT R:W EA BNE d:8 BEQ d:8 BVC d:8 BVS d:8 BPL d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA 694 Instruction BMI d:8 BGE d:8 BLT d:8 BGT d:8 BLE d:8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state BRA d:16 (BT d:16) R:W 2nd BRN d:16 (BF d:16) R:W 2nd BHI d:16 R:W 2nd BLS d:16 R:W 2nd BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) BNE d:16 R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd BEQ d:16 R:W 2nd BVC d:16 R:W 2nd BVS d:16 R:W 2nd BPL d:16 R:W 2nd BMI d:16 R:W 2nd BGE d:16 R:W 2nd 695 Instruction BLT d:16 1 R:W 2nd 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state BGT d:16 R:W 2nd BLE d:16 R:W 2nd BCLR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 3rd R:W 3rd W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA BCLR #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd BCLR#xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd BCLR#xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd BCLR Rn,Rd BCLR Rn,@ERd BCLR Rn,@aa:8 BCLR Rn,@aa:16 BCLR Rn,@aa:32 BIAND #xx:3,Rd BIAND #xx:3, @ERd BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 BIAND #xx:3, @aa:16 BIAND #xx:3, @aa:32 BILD #xx:3,Rd BILD #xx:3,@ERd BILD #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 3rd R:W 3rd W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B: EA R:W:M NEXT BILD #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd 696 Instruction 1 2 R:W 3rd 3 R:W 4th 4 R:B EA 5 R:W:M NEXT 6 7 8 9 BILD #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd BIOR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT BIOR #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd BIST #xx:3,Rd BIST #xx:3,@ERd BIST #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 3rd R:W 3rd W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA BIST #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd BIST #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd BIXOR #xx:3,Rd BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:16 BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:32 BLD #xx:3,Rd BLD #xx:3,@ERd BLD #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W:M NEXT BLD #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd BLD #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd BNOT #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT BNOT #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT W:B EA 697 Instruction 1 2 3 4 W:B EA 5 6 7 8 9 BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd BNOT #xx:3, @aa:16 BNOT #xx:3, @aa:32 BNOT Rn,Rd BNOT Rn,@ERd BNOT Rn,@aa:8 BNOT Rn,@aa:16 BNOT Rn,@aa:32 BOR #xx:3,Rd BOR #xx:3,@ERd BOR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 4th W:B EA W:B EA R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 3rd R:W 3rd W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W NEXT BOR #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd BOR #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd BSET #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT BSET #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd BSET #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd BSET #xx:3, @aa:16 BSET #xx:3, @aa:32 BSET Rn,Rd BSET Rn,@ERd BSET Rn,@aa:8 BSET Rn,@aa:16 BSET Rn,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 3rd R:W 3rd W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 3rd R:W 3rd W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT 698 Instruction BSR d:8 BSR d:16 1 2 3 W:W:M Stack (H) 4 W:W Stack (L) W:W:M Stack (H) 5 6 7 8 9 Advanced R:W NEXT R:W EA Advanced R:W 2nd Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state W:W Stack (L) BST #xx:3,Rd BST #xx:3,@ERd BST #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 3rd R:W 3rd W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA W:B EA BST #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd BST #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd BTST #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M NEXT BTST #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd BTST #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd BTST #xx:3, @aa:16 BTST #xx:3, @aa:32 BTST Rn,Rd BTST Rn,@ERd BTST Rn,@aa:8 BTST Rn,@aa:16 BTST Rn,@aa:32 BXOR #xx:3,Rd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W:M NEXT BXOR #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd BXOR #xx:3, @aa:16 BXOR #xx:3, @aa:32 CLRMAC R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:B EA R:W:M NEXT Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series 699 Instruction CMP.B #xx:8,Rd CMP.B Rs,Rd CMP.W #xx:16,Rd CMP.W Rs,Rd 1 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W NEXT CMP.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd CMP.L ERs,ERd DAA Rd DAS Rd DEC.B Rd DEC.W #1/2,Rd DEC.L #1/2,ERd DIVXS.B Rs,Rd DIVXS.W Rs,ERd DIVXU.B Rs,Rd DIVXU.W Rs,ERd EEPMOV.B EEPMOV.W EXTS.W Rd EXTS.L ERd EXTU.W Rd EXTU.L ERd INC.B Rd INC.W #1/2,Rd INC.L #1/2,ERd JMP @ERn JMP @aa:24 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT Internal operation, 11 states R:W NEXT Internal operation, 19 states R:W NEXT Internal operation, 11 states R:W NEXT Internal operation, 19 states R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W 2nd Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state R:W aa:8 Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state W:W Stack (L) W:W:M Stack (H) W:W:M Stack (H) W:W Stack (L) W:W Stack (L) R:W EA R:B EAs*1 R:B EAd* 1 R:B EAs*2 W:B EAd*2 R:W NEXT R:B EAs*1 R:B EAd* 1 R:B EAs*2 W:B EAd*2 R:W NEXT Repeated n times *2 JMP Advanced R:W NEXT R:W:M @@aa:8 aa:8 JSR @ERn Advanced R:W NEXT R:W EA W:W:M Stack (H) JSR Advanced R:W 2nd @aa:24 Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state R:W aa:8 JSR Advanced R:W NEXT R:W:M @@aa:8 aa:8 700 Instruction LDC #xx:8,CCR LDC #xx:8,EXR LDC Rs,CCR LDC Rs,EXR LDC @ERs,CCR LDC @ERs,EXR LDC@(d:16,ERs), CCR LDC@(d:16,ERs), EXR LDC@(d:32,ERs), CCR LDC@(d:32,ERs), EXR LDC @ERs+,CCR 1 R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W 4th R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W 5th R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state R:W NEXT Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W 4th R:W 4th R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W Stack (L) *3 R:W Stack (L) *3 R:W Stack (L) *3 LDC @ERs+,EXR R:W 2nd LDC @aa:16,CCR LDC @aa:16,EXR LDC @aa:32,CCR LDC @aa:32,EXR LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+1)* 9 LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+2) *9 LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+3) *9 R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd Internal R:W:M operation, Stack (H) 1 state *3 Internal R:W:M operation, Stack (H) 1 state *3 Internal R:W:M operation, Stack (H) 1 state *3 R:W 2nd R:W 2nd LDMAC ERs,MACH Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series LDMAC ERs,MACL MAC @ERn+, @ERm+ MOV.B #xx:8,Rd MOV.B Rs,Rd MOV.B @ERs,Rd MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:B EA R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:B EA 701 Instruction MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd 1 R:W 2nd 2 R:W 3rd 3 R:W 4th 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W NEXT R:B EA MOV.B @ERs+,Rd R:W NEXT Internal R:B EA operation, 1 state MOV.B @aa:8,Rd R:W NEXT R:B EA R:W NEXT R:B EA R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:B EA MOV.B @aa:16,Rd R:W 2nd MOV.B @aa:32,Rd R:W 2nd MOV.B Rs,@ERd MOV.B Rs, @(d:16,ERd) MOV.B Rs, @(d:32,ERd) R:W NEXT W:B EA R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:B EA R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:B EA MOV.B Rs,@-ERd R:W NEXT Internal W:B EA operation, 1 state MOV.B Rs,@aa:8 R:W NEXT W:B EA R:W NEXT W:B EA R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT W:B EA MOV.B Rs,@aa:16 R:W 2nd MOV.B Rs,@aa:32 R:W 2nd MOV.W #xx:16,Rd MOV.W Rs,Rd MOV.W @ERs,Rd MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT R:W EA MOV.W @ERs+,Rd R:W NEXT Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state MOV.W @aa:16,Rd R:W 2nd MOV.W @aa:32,Rd R:W 2nd MOV.W Rs,@ERd MOV.W Rs, @(d:16,ERd) MOV.W Rs, @(d:32,ERd) R:W NEXT R:W EA R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:B EA R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:W EA MOV.W Rs,@-ERd R:W NEXT Internal W:W EA operation, 1 state MOV.W Rs,@aa:16 R:W 2nd MOV.W Rs,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:W EA 702 Instruction 1 2 R:W 3rd 3 R:W NEXT 4 5 6 7 8 9 MOV.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd MOV.L ERs,ERd R:W NEXT MOV.L @ERs,ERd R:W 2nd MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd MOV.L @ERs+, ERd MOV.L @aa:16, ERd MOV.L @aa:32, ERd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 R:W:M 3rd R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 R:W:M 3rd R:W:M 4th R:W 5th R:W:M NEXT R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 Internal R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 operation, 1 state R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 R:W:M 3rd R:W 4th R:W:M NEXT R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 MOV.L ERs,@ERd R:W 2nd MOV.L ERs, @(d:16,ERd) MOV.L ERs, @(d:32,ERd) R:W 2nd R:W 2nd W:W:M EA W:W EA+2 R:W:M 3rd R:W NEXT W:W:M EA W:W EA+2 R:W:M 3rd R:W:M 4th R:W 5th R:W:M NEXT R:W NEXT W:W:M EA W:W EA+2 MOV.L ERs,@-ERd R:W 2nd Internal W:W:M EA W:W EA+2 operation, 1 state MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 MOV.L ERs, @aa:32 MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16 MULXS.B Rs,Rd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W NEXT W:W:M EA W:W EA+2 R:W:M 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:W:M EA W:W EA+2 Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal operation, 11 states R:W NEXT Internal operation, 19 states MULXS.W Rs,ERd R:W 2nd MULXU.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT Internal operation, 11 states MULXU.W Rs,ERd R:W NEXT Internal operation, 19 states NEG.B Rd NEG.W Rd NEG.L ERd NOP NOT.B Rd NOT.W Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 703 Instruction NOT.L ERd OR.B #xx:8,Rd OR.B Rs,Rd OR.W #xx:16,Rd OR.W Rs,Rd OR.L #xx:32,ERd OR.L ERs,ERd ORC #xx:8,CCR ORC #xx:8,EXR POP.W Rn 1 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W NEXT R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT Internal R:W EA operation, 1 state R:W 2nd R:W:M NEXT Internal R:W:M EA R:W EA+2 operation, 1 state POP.L ERn PUSH.W Rn R:W NEXT Internal W:W EA operation, 1 state R:W 2nd R:W:M NEXT Internal W:W:M EA W:W EA+2 operation, 1 state PUSH.L ERn ROTL.B Rd ROTL.B #2,Rd ROTL.W Rd ROTL.W #2,Rd ROTL.L ERd ROTL.L #2,ERd ROTR.B Rd ROTR.B #2,Rd ROTR.W Rd ROTR.W #2,Rd ROTR.L ERd ROTR.L #2,ERd ROTXL.B Rd ROTXL.B #2,Rd ROTXL.W Rd ROTXL.W #2,Rd ROTXL.L ERd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 704 Instruction ROTXL.L #2,ERd ROTXR.B Rd ROTXR.B #2,Rd ROTXR.W Rd ROTXR.W #2,Rd ROTXR.L ERd ROTXR.L #2,ERd RTE 1 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W NEXT R:W Stack (EXR) Advanced R:W NEXT R:W:M Stack (H) R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W Stack (H) R:W Stack (L) R:W Stack (L) Internal R:W *4 operation, 1 state RTS Internal R:W *4 operation, 1 state SHAL.B Rd SHAL.B #2,Rd SHAL.W Rd SHAL.W #2,Rd SHAL.L ERd SHAL.L #2,ERd SHAR.B Rd SHAR.B #2,Rd SHAR.W Rd SHAR.W #2,Rd SHAR.L ERd SHAR.L #2,ERd SHLL.B Rd SHLL.B #2,Rd SHLL.W Rd SHLL.W #2,Rd SHLL.L ERd SHLL.L #2,ERd SHLR.B Rd SHLR.B #2,Rd SHLR.W Rd SHLR.W #2,Rd SHLR.L ERd SHLR.L #2,ERd 705 Instruction SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W NEXT Internal operation :M R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W 4th R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W 5th R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W NEXT W:W EA STC CCR,Rd STC EXR,Rd STC CCR,@ERd STC EXR,@ERd STC CCR, @(d:16,ERd) STC EXR, @(d:16,ERd) STC CCR, @(d:32,ERd) STC EXR, @(d:32,ERd) STC CCR,@-ERd R:W NEXT Internal W:W EA operation, 1 state R:W NEXT Internal W:W EA operation, 1 state R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W 3rd R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:W:M NEXT R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W 4th R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:W EA R:W NEXT W:W EA W:W Stack (L) *3 W:W Stack (L) *3 W:W Stack (L) *3 STC EXR,@-ERd R:W 2nd STC CCR,@aa:16 STC EXR,@aa:16 STC CCR,@aa:32 STC EXR,@aa:32 STM.L (ERn-ERn+1), @-SP* 9 STM.L (ERn-ERn+2), @-SP* 9 STM.L (ERn-ERn+3), @-SP* 9 R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd R:W 2nd Internal W:W:M operation, Stack (H) 1 state *3 Internal W:W:M operation, Stack (H) 1 state *3 Internal W:W:M operation, Stack (H) 1 state *3 R:W 2nd R:W 2nd STMAC MACH,ERd Cannot be used in the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series STMAC MACL,ERd SUB.B Rs,Rd SUB.W #xx:16,Rd SUB.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT SUB.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd SUB.L ERs,ERd R:W NEXT 706 Instruction SUBS #1/2/4,ERd SUBX #xx:8,Rd SUBX Rs,Rd TAS @ERd* 8 1 R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R:W NEXT R:B:M EA W:B EA W:W Stack (H) W:W Stack (EXR) R:W:M VEC R:W VEC+2 Internal R:W *7 operation, 1 state TRAPA Advanced R:W NEXT Internal W:W #x:2 operation, Stack (L) 1 state XOR.B #xx8,Rd XOR.B Rs,Rd XOR.W #xx:16,Rd XOR.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W NEXT R:W NEXT XOR.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd XOR.L ERs,ERd XORC #xx:8,CCR XORC #xx:8,EXR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W VEC+2 Internal R:W *5 operation, 1 state W:W Stack (H) W:W Stack (EXR) R:W:M VEC R:W VEC+2 Internal R:W *7 operation, 1 state Reset Advanced R:W:M excepVEC tion handling Interrupt Advanced R:W *6 exception handling Internal W:W operation, Stack (L) 1 state Notes: 1. EAs is the contents of ER5. EAd is the contents of ER6. 2. EAs is the contents of ER5. EAd is the contents of ER6. Both registers are incremented by 1 after execution of the instruction. n is the initial value of R4L or R4. If n = 0, these bus cycles are not executed. 3. Repeated two times to save or restore two registers, three times for three registers, or four times for four registers. 4. Start address after return. 5. Start address of the program. 6. Prefetch address, equal to two plus the PC value pushed onto the stack. In recovery from sleep mode or software standby mode the read operation is replaced by an internal operation. 7. Start address of the interrupt-handling routine. 8. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 9. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 707 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers B.1 Addresses Bit 7 SM1 Bit 6 SM0 Bit 5 DM1 Bit 4 DM0 Bit 3 MD1 Bit 2 MD0 Bit 1 DTS Bit 0 Sz Module Name DTC Bus Width 16/32* Register Address Name H'EC00 to H'EFFF MRA SAR MRB DAR CHN E DISEL -- -- -- -- -- -- CRA CRB H'FEE4 H'FEE6 H'FEE8 H'FEE9 KBCOMP IrE DDCSWR SWE ICRA ICRB ICR7 ICR7 ICR7 -- -- -- IrCKS2 SW ICR6 ICR6 ICR6 -- -- -- IrCKS1 IE ICR5 ICR5 ICR5 -- -- IrCKS0 IF ICR4 ICR4 ICR4 -- -- KBADE CLR3 ICR3 ICR3 ICR3 -- -- KBCH2 CLR2 ICR2 ICR2 ICR2 IRQ2F -- KBCH1 CLR1 ICR1 ICR1 ICR1 IRQ1F -- KBCH0 CLR0 ICR0 ICR0 ICR0 IRQ0F -- Expansion 8 A/D IIC0 Interrupt controller 8 8 H'FEEA ICRC H'FEEB ISR H'FEEC ISCRH H'FEED ISCRL H'FEEE DTCERA H'FEEF DTCERB H'FEF0 H'FEF1 H'FEF2 H'FEF3 H'FEF4 H'FEF5 H'FEF6 H'FEF7 DTCERC DTCERD DTCERE DTVECR ABRKCR BARA BARB BARC IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA DTC 8 DTCEA7 DTCEA6 DTCEA5 DTCEA4 DTCEA3 DTCEA2 DTCEA1 DTCEA0 DTCEB7 DTCEB6 DTCEB5 DTCEB4 DTCEB3 DTCEB2 DTCEB1 DTCEB0 DTCEC7 DTCEC6 DTCEC5 DTCEC4 DTCEC3 DTCEC2 DTCEC1 DTCEC0 DTCED7 DTCED6 DTCED5 DTCED4 DTCED3 DTCED2 DTCED1 DTCED0 DTCEE7 DTCEE6 DTCEE5 DTCEE4 DTCEE3 DTCEE2 DTCEE1 DTCEE0 SWDTE CMF A23 A15 A7 DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 -- A22 A14 A6 -- A21 A13 A5 -- A20 A12 A4 -- A19 A11 A3 -- A18 A10 A2 -- A17 A9 A1 BIE A16 A8 -- Interrupt controller 8 708 Register Address Name H'FF80 H'FF81 H'FF82 FLMCR1 FLMCR2 PCSR EBR1 H'FF83 H'FF84 H'FF85 H'FF86 H'FF87 H'FF88 EBR2 SBYCR Bit 7 FWE FLER -- -- EB7 SSBY Bit 6 SWE -- -- -- EB6 STS2 LSON Bit 5 -- -- -- -- EB5 STS1 NESEL Bit 4 -- -- -- -- EB4 STS0 EXCLE Bit 3 EV -- -- -- EB3 -- -- Bit 2 PV -- PWCKB -- EB2 SCK2 -- Bit 1 E ESU PWCKA EB9 EB1 SCK1 -- Bit 0 P PSU -- EB8 EB0 SCK0 -- MSTP8 MSTP0 CKS0 SCP Module Name FLASH Bus Width 8 PWM FLASH 8 8 SYSTEM 8 LPWRCR DTON MSTPCRH MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTPCRL MSTP7 SMR1 ICCR1 C/A ICE MSTP6 CHR IEIC MSTP5 PE MST MSTP4 O/E TRS MSTP3 STOP ACKE MSTP2 MP BBSY MSTP1 CKS1 IRIC SCI1 IIC1 SCI1 8 H'FF89 BRR1 ICSR1 ESTP TIE STOP RIE IRTR TE AASX RE AL MPIE AAS TEIE ADZ CKE1 ACKB CKE0 8 IIC1 SCI1 8 H'FF8A H'FF8B H'FF8C H'FF8D H'FF8E SCR1 TDR1 SSR1 RDR1 SCMR1 ICDR1 SARX1 TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT -- ICDR7 SVAX6 MLS SVA6 ICIAE ICFA -- ICDR6 SVAX5 WAIT SVA5 ICIBE ICFB -- ICDR5 SVAX4 CKS2 SVA4 ICICE ICFC -- ICDR4 SVAX3 CKS1 SVA3 ICIDE ICFD SDIR ICDR3 SVAX2 CKS0 SVA2 OCIAE OCFA SINV ICDR2 SVAX1 BC2 SVA1 OCIBE OCFB -- ICDR1 SVAX0 BC1 SVA0 OVIE OVF SMIF ICDR0 FSX BC0 FS -- CCLRA FRT 16 IIC1 8 H'FF8F ICMR1 SAR1 H'FF90 H'FF91 H'FF92 H'FF93 H'FF94 TIER TCSR FRCH FRCL OCRAH OCRBH H'FF95 OCRAL OCRBL H'FF96 H'FF97 H'FF98 TCR TOCR ICRAH OCRARH IEDGA IEDGB IEDGC IEDGD OCRS BUFEA OEA BUFEB OEB CKS1 OLVLA CKS0 OLVLB ICRDMS OCRAMS ICRS 709 Register Address Name H'FF99 ICRAL OCRARL H'FF9A ICRBH OCRAFH H'FF9B ICRBL OCRAFL H'FF9C ICRCH Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name FRT Bus Width 16 OCRDMH 0 H'FF9D ICRCL OCRDML H'FF9E H'FF9F H'FFA0 ICRDH ICRDL DADRAH DACR H'FFA1 H'FFA6 DADRAL DADRBH DACNTH H'FFA7 DADRBL DACNTL H'FFA8 TCSR0 TCNT0 (write) H'FFA9 TCNT0 (read) OVF DA5 DA13 TEST DA5 DA13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DA12 PWME DA4 DA12 DA11 -- DA3 DA11 DA10 -- DA2 DA10 DA9 OEB DA1 DA9 DA8 OEA DA0 DA8 DA7 OS CFS DA7 DA6 CKS -- DA6 PWMX 8 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS -- REGS REGS CKS0 WDT0 16 WT/IT TME RSTS RST/NMI CKS2 CKS1 H'FFAC P1PCR H'FFAD P2PCR H'FFAE P3PCR H'FFB0 H'FFB1 H'FFB2 H'FFB3 H'FFB4 H'FFB5 H'FFB6 H'FFB7 H'FFB8 H'FFB9 P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR P3DDR P4DDR P3DR P4DR P5DDR P6DDR P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR P17DR P27DR P16DR P26DR P15DR P25DR P14DR P24DR P13DR P23DR P12DR P22DR P11DR P21DR P10DR P20DR Ports 8 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR P37DR P47DR -- P36DR P46DR -- P35DR P45DR -- P34DR P44DR -- P33DR P43DR -- P32DR P42DR P31DR P41DR P30DR P40DR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR -- -- -- -- -- P52DR P51DR P50DR H'FFBA P5DR 710 Register Address Name H'FFBB P6DR H'FFBE P7PIN H'FFC2 H'FFC3 H'FFC4 H'FFC5 H'FFC6 H'FFC7 H'FFC8 H'FFC9 IER STCR SYSCR MDCR BCR WSCR TCR0 TCR1 Bit 7 P67DR P77PIN -- IICS CS2E EXPE ICIS1 RAMS CMIEB CMIEB CMFB CMFB Bit 6 P66DR P76PIN -- IICX1 IOSE -- ICIS0 RAM0 CMIEA CMIEA CMFA CMFA Bit 5 P65DR P75PIN -- IICX0 INTM1 -- Bit 4 P64DR P74PIN -- IICE INTM0 -- Bit 3 P63DR P73PIN -- FLSHE XRST -- Bit 2 P62DR P72PIN IRQ2E -- NMIEG -- Bit 1 P61DR P71PIN IRQ1E ICKS1 HIE MDS1 IOS1 WC1 CKS1 CKS1 OS1 OS1 Bit 0 P60DR P70PIN IRQ0E ICKS0 RAME MDS0 IOS0 WC0 CKS0 CKS0 OS0 OS0 Module Name Ports Bus Width 8 Interrupt controller System 8 8 BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0 -- ABW OVIE OVIE OVF OVF AST CCLR1 CCLR1 ADTE -- WMS1 CCLR0 CCLR0 OS3 OS3 WMS0 CKS2 CKS2 OS2 OS2 Bus controller TMR0, TMR1 8 16 H'FFCA TCSR0 H'FFCB TCSR1 H'FFCC TCORA0 H'FFCD TCORA1 H'FFCE TCORB0 H'FFCF TCORB1 H'FFD0 H'FFD1 H'FFD2 H'FFD3 H'FFD4 H'FFD5 H'FFD6 H'FFD7 TCNT0 TCNT1 PWOERB OE15 PWOERA OE7 PWDPRB OS15 PWDPRA OS7 PWSL PWDR0 to PWDR15 SMR0 ICCR0 C/A ICE PWCKE OE14 OE6 OS14 OS6 PWCKS OE13 OE5 OS13 OS5 -- OE12 OE4 OS12 OS4 -- OE11 OE3 OS11 OS3 RS3 OE10 OE2 OS10 OS2 RS2 OE9 OE1 OS9 OS1 RS1 OE8 OE0 OS8 OS0 RS0 PWM 8 H'FFD8 CHR IEIC PE MST O/E TRS STOP ACKE MP BBSY CKS1 IRIC CKS0 SCP SCI0 IIC0 SCI0 8 H'FFD9 BRR0 ICSR0 ESTP TIE STOP RIE IRTR TE AASX RE AL MPIE AAS TEIE ADZ CKE1 ACKB CKE0 IIC0 SCI0 H'FFDA SCR0 H'FFDB TDR0 H'FFDC SSR0 H'FFDD RDR0 H'FFDE SCMR0 ICDR0 SARX0 TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT -- ICDR7 SVAX6 -- ICDR6 SVAX5 -- ICDR5 SVAX4 -- ICDR4 SVAX3 SDIR ICDR3 SVAX2 SINV ICDR2 SVAX1 -- ICDR1 SVAX0 SMIF ICDR0 FSX IIC0 711 Register Address Name H'FFDF ICMR0 SAR0 H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFE3 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE7 H'FFE8 H'FFE9 ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR Bit 7 MLS SVA6 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 ADF TRGS1 OVF Bit 6 WAIT SVA5 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 ADIE TRGS0 WT/IT Bit 5 CKS2 SVA4 AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- AD7 -- ADST -- TME Bit 4 CKS1 SVA3 AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- AD6 -- SCAN -- PSS Bit 3 CKS0 SVA2 AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- AD5 -- CKS -- Bit 2 BC2 SVA1 AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- AD4 -- CH2 -- Bit 1 BC1 SVA0 AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- AD3 -- CH1 -- CKS1 Bit 0 BC0 FS AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- AD2 -- CH0 -- CKS0 Module Name IIC0 Bus Width 8 A/D 8 H'FFEA TCSR1 TCNT1 (write) H'FFEB TCNT1 (read) H'FFF0 TCRX TCRY H'FFF1 TCSRX TCSRY H'FFF2 TICRR TCORAY H'FFF3 TICRF TCORBY H'FFF4 TCNTX TCNTY H'FFF5 TCORC TISR H'FFF6 H'FFF7 TCORAX TCORBX RST/NMI CKS2 WDT1 16 CMIEB CMIEB CMFB CMFB CMIEA CMIEA CMFA CMFA OVIE OVIE OVF OVF CCLR1 CCLR1 ICF ICIE CCLR0 CCLR0 OS3 OS3 CKS2 CKS2 OS2 OS2 CKS1 CKS1 OS1 OS1 CKS0 CKS0 OS0 OS0 TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY TMRX 8 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- IS TMRY TMRX H'FFFC TCONRI SIMOD1 SIMOD0 SCONE VOE CLOE ICST CBOE HFINV HOINV VFINV VOINV HIINV VIINV H'FFFD TCONRO HOE H'FFFE H'FFFF TCONRS SEDGR CLOINV CBOINV Timer 8 connection TMRX/Y ISGENE HOMOD1 HOMOD0 VOMOD1 VOMOD0 CLMOD1 CLMOD0 VEDG HEDG CEDG HFEDG VFEDG PREQF IHI IVI 712 B.2 Register Selection Conditions H8S/2128 Series Register Selection Conditions RAME = 1 in SYSCR H8S/2124 Series Register Selection Conditions -- Module Name DTC Lower Register Address Name H'EC00 to H'EFFF MRA SAR MRB DAR CRA CRB H'FEE4 H'FEE6 H'FEE8 H'FEE9 H'FEEA H'FEEB H'FEEC H'FEED H'FEEE H'FEEF H'FEF0 H'FEF1 H'FEF2 H'FEF3 H'FEF4 H'FEF5 H'FEF6 H'FEF7 H'FF80 H'FF81 H'FF82 KBCOMP DDCSWR ICRA ICRB ICRC ISR ISCRH ISCRL DTCERA DTCERB DTCERC DTCERD DTCERE DTVECR ABRKCR BARA BARB BARC FLMCR1 FLMCR2 PCSR EBR1 H'FF83 H'FF84 H'FF85 H'FF86 H'FF87 EBR2 SBYCR LPWRCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL No conditions MSTP4 = 0 No conditions No conditions -- No conditions Expansion A/D IIC0 Interrupt controller No conditions -- DTC No conditions No conditions Interrupt controller FLSHE = 1 in STCR FLSHE = 1 in STCR Flash memory PWM Flash memory Flash memory System FLSHE = 0 in STCR FLSHE = 1 in STCR FLSHE = 1 in STCR FLSHE = 0 in STCR -- FLSHE = 1 in STCR FLSHE = 1 in STCR FLSHE = 0 in STCR 713 Lower Register Address Name H'FF88 SMR1 ICCR1 H'FF89 BRR1 ICSR1 H'FF8A H'FF8B H'FF8C H'FF8D H'FF8E SCR1 TDR1 SSR1 RDR1 SCMR1 ICDR1 SARX1 H'FF8F ICMR1 SAR1 H'FF90 H'FF91 H'FF92 H'FF93 H'FF94 TIER TCSR FRCH FRCL OCRAH OCRBH H'FF95 OCRAL OCRBL H'FF96 H'FF97 H'FF98 TCR TOCR ICRAH OCRARH H'FF99 ICRAL OCRARL H'FF9A ICRBH OCRAFH H'FF9B ICRBL OCRAFL H'FF9C ICRCH OCRDMH H'FF9D ICRCL OCRDML H8S/2128 Series Register Selection Conditions MSTP6=0, IICE=0 in STCR MSTP3=0, IICE=1 in STCR MSTP6=0, IICE=0 in STCR MSTP3=0, IICE=1 in STCR MSTP6=0 H8S/2124 Series Register Selection Conditions MSTP6=0, IICE=0 in STCR -- MSTP6=0, IICE=0 in STCR -- MSTP6=0 Module Name SCI1 IIC1 SCI1 IIC1 SCI1 MSTP6=0, IICE=0 in STCR MSTP3=0, IICE=1 in STCR ICE=1 in ICCR1 ICE = 0 in ICCR1 ICE = 1 in ICCR1 ICE = 0 in ICCR1 MSTP13 = 0 MSTP6=0, IICE=0 in STCR -- IIC1 MSTP13 = 0 FRT OCRS = 0 in TOCR OCRS = 1 in TOCR OCRS = 0 in TOCR OCRS = 1 in TOCR OCRS = 0 in TOCR OCRS = 1 in TOCR OCRS = 0 in TOCR OCRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR 714 Lower Register Address Name H'FF9E H'FF9F H'FFA0 ICRDH ICRDL DADRAH H8S/2128 Series Register Selection Conditions MSTP13 = 0 H8S/2124 Series Register Selection Conditions MSTP13 = 0 Module Name FRT MSTP11 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR REGS = 0 in DACNT/ DADRB REGS = 1 in DACNT/ DADRB MSTP11 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR REGS = 0 in DACNT/ DADRB MSTP11 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR REGS = 0 in DACNT/ DADRB REGS = 1 in DACNT/ DADRB REGS = 0 in DACNT/ DADRB REGS = 1 in DACNT/ DADRB No conditions -- PWMX DACR H'FFA1 DADRAL -- PWMX H'FFA6 DADRBH DACNTH H'FFA7 DADRBL DACNTL H'FFA8 TCSR0 TCNT0 (write) No conditions WDT0 H'FFA9 H'FFAC H'FFAD H'FFAE H'FFB0 H'FFB1 H'FFB2 H'FFB3 H'FFB4 H'FFB5 H'FFB6 H'FFB7 H'FFB8 H'FFB9 H'FFBA H'FFBB TCNT0 (read) P1PCR P2PCR P3PCR P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR P3DDR P4DDR P3DR P4DR P5DDR P6DDR P5DR P6DR No conditions No conditions Ports 715 Lower Register Address Name H'FFBE H'FFC2 H'FFC3 H'FFC4 H'FFC5 H'FFC6 H'FFC7 H'FFC8 H'FFC9 H'FFCA H'FFCB H'FFCC H'FFCD H'FFCE H'FFCF H'FFD0 H'FFD1 H'FFD2 H'FFD3 H'FFD4 H'FFD5 H'FFD6 H'FFD7 H'FFD8 P7PIN IER STCR SYSCR MDCR BCR WSCR TCR0 TCR1 TCSR0 TCSR1 TCORA0 TCORA1 TCORB0 TCORB1 TCNT0 TCNT1 PWOERB PWOERA PWDPRB PWDPRA PWSL PWDR0 to 15 SMR0 ICCR0 H'FFD9 BRR0 ICSR0 H'FFDA H'FFDB H'FFDC H'FFDD H'FFDE SCR0 TDR0 SSR0 RDR0 SCMR0 ICDR0 SARX0 H8S/2128 Series Register Selection Conditions No conditions No conditions No conditions H8S/2124 Series Register Selection Conditions No conditions No conditions No conditions Module Name Ports Interrupt controller System Bus controller MSTP12 = 0 MSTP12 = 0 TMR0, TMR1 No conditions -- PWM MSTP11 = 0 MSTP7 = 0, IICE = 0 in STCR MSTP4 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR MSTP7 = 0, IICE = 0 in STCR MSTP4 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR MSTP7 = 0 MSTP7 = 0, IICE = 0 in STCR -- MSTP7 = 0, IICE = 0 in STCR -- MSTP7 = 0 SCI0 IIC0 SCI0 IIC0 SCI0 MSTP7 = 0, IICE = 0 in STCR MSTP4 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR ICE = 1 in ICCR0 ICE = 0 in ICCR0 MSTP7 = 0, IICE = 0 in STCR -- IIC0 716 Lower Register Address Name H'FFDF ICMR0 SAR0 H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFE3 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE7 H'FFE8 H'FFE9 H'FFEA ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR TCSR1 TCNT1 (write) H'FFEB H'FFF0 TCNT1 (read) TCRX TCRY H'FFF1 TCSRX TCSRY H'FFF2 TICRR TCORAY H'FFF3 TICRF TCORBY H'FFF4 TCNTX TCNTY H'FFF5 TCORC TISR H8S/2128 Series Register Selection Conditions MSTP4 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR ICE = 1 in ICCR0 ICE = 0 in ICCR0 MSTP9 = 0 H8S/2124 Series Register Selection Conditions -- Module Name IIC0 MSTP9 = 0 A/D No conditions No conditions WDT1 MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMRX/Y = 0 -- in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR in TCONRS MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMRX/Y = 0 -- in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR in TCONRS MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMRX/Y = 0 -- in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR in TCONRS MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMRX/Y = 0 -- in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR in TCONRS MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMRX/Y = 0 -- in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR in TCONRS MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMRX/Y = 0 -- in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR in TCONRS TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY TMRX TMRY 717 Lower Register Address Name H'FFF6 H'FFF7 H'FFFC H'FFFD H'FFFE H'FFFF TCORAX TCORBX TCONRI TCONRO TCONRS SEDGR H8S/2128 Series Register Selection Conditions H8S/2124 Series Register Selection Conditions Module Name TMRX MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMRX/Y = 0 -- in TCONRS MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR -- Timer connection 718 B.3 Functions Register name Address to which the register is mapped Name of on-chip supporting module D/A Converter Register acronym DACR--D/A Control Register H'FFFA Bit numbers Bit 7 DAOE1 0 R/W 6 DAOE0 0 R/W 5 DAE 0 R/W 4 -- 1 -- 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 -- 1 -- Initial bit values Initial value Read/Write Names of the bits. Dashes (--) indicate reserved bits. D/A enabled DAOE1 DAOE0 DAE * 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 * Conversion result Channel 0 and 1 D/A conversion disabled Channel 0 D/A conversion enabled Channel 1 D/A conversion disabled Channel 0 and 1 D/A conversion enabled Channel 0 D/A conversion disabled Channel 1 D/A conversion enabled Channel 0 and 1 D/A conversion enabled Channel 0 and 1 D/A conversion enabled Possible types of access R W Read only Write only 0 0 1 Full name of bit R/W Read and write Descriptions of bit settings D/A output enable 0 0 1 Analog output DA0 disabled Channel 0 D/A conversion enabled. Analog output DA0 enabled D/A output enable 1 0 1 Analog output DA1 disabled Channel 1 D/A conversion enabled. Analog output DA1 enabled 719 MRA--DTC Mode Register A Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SM1 -- 6 SM0 -- 5 DM1 -- 4 DM0 -- H'EC00-H'EFFF 3 MD1 -- 2 MD0 -- 1 DTS -- 0 Sz -- DTC Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DTC data transfer size 0 Byte-size transfer 1 Word-size transfer DTC transfer mode select 0 Destination side is repeat area or block area 1 Source side is repeat area or block area DTC mode 0 1 0 Normal mode 1 Repeat mode 0 Block transfer mode 1-- Destination address mode 0 -- DAR is fixed 1 0 DAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1) 1 DAR is decremented after a transfer (by -1 when Sz = 0; by -2 when Sz = 1) Source Address Mode 0 -- SAR is fixed 1 0 SAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1) 1 SAR is decremented after a transfer (by -1 when Sz = 0; by -2 when Sz = 1) 720 MRB--DTC Mode Register B Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CHNE -- 6 DISEL -- 5 -- -- 4 -- -- H'EC00-H'EFFF 3 -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- -- 0 -- -- DTC Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DTC interrupt select 0 After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is disabled unless the transfer counter is 0 1 After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is enabled DTC chain transfer enable 0 End of DTC data transfer 1 DTC chain transfer SAR--DTC Source Address Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 23 22 21 20 19 H'EC00-H'EFFF --------4 3 2 1 DTC 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Specifies DTC transfer data source address DAR--DTC Destination Address Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 23 22 21 20 19 H'EC00-H'EFFF --------4 3 2 1 DTC 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Specifies DTC transfer data destination address 721 CRA--DTC Transfer Count Register A Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 H'EC00-H'EFFF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DTC 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- CRAH CRAL Specifies the number of DTC data transfers CRB--DTC Transfer Count Register B Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 H'EC00-H'EFFF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DTC 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Specifies the number of DTC block data transfers 722 KBCOMP--Keyboard Comparator Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 IrE 0 R/W 6 IrCKS2 0 R/W 5 IrCKS1 0 R/W 4 IrCKS0 0 R/W 3 KBADE 0 R/W 2 H'FEE4 1 KBCH1 0 R/W 0 KBCH0 0 R/W COMP KBCH2 0 R/W Reserved bits Keyboard comparator control A/D converter KBADE KBCH2 KBCH1 KBCH0 channel 6 input 0 1 -- 0 -- 0 1 1 0 1 -- 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 AN6 CIN0 CIN1 CIN2 CIN3 CIN4 CIN5 CIN6 CIN7 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 A/D converter channel 7 input AN7 Undefined 723 DDCSWR--DDC Switch Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SWE 0 R/W 6 SW 0 R/W 5 IE 0 R/W 4 IF 0 R/(W)*1 3 CLR3 1 W*2 H'FEE6 2 CLR2 1 W*2 1 CLR1 1 W*2 0 CLR0 1 W*2 IIC0 IIC clear bits Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 CLR3 CLR2 CLR1 CLR0 0 0 1 -- 0 1 1 -- -- -- 0 1 0 1 -- Description Setting prohibited Setting prohibited IIC0 internal latch cleared IIC1 internal latch cleared IIC0 and IIC1 internal latches cleared Invalid setting DDC mode switch interrupt flag 0 No interrupt is requested when automatic format switching is executed [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in IF after reading IF = 1 An interrupt is requested when automatic format switching is executed [Setting condition] When a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin when SWE = 1 1 DDC mode switch interrupt enable bit 0 1 Interrupt when automatic format switching is executed is disabled Interrupt when automatic format switching is executed is enabled DDC mode switch 0 IIC channel 0 is used with the I2C bus format [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written by software * When a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin when SWE = 1 IIC channel 0 is used in formatless mode [Setting condition] When 1 is written in SW after reading SW = 0 1 DDC Mode switch enable 0 1 Automatic switching of IIC channel 0 from formatless mode to I2C bus format is disabled Automatic switching of IIC channel 0 from formatless mode to I2C bus format is enabled Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 2. Always read as 1. 724 ICRA--Interrupt Control Register A ICRB--Interrupt Control Register B ICRC--Interrupt Control Register C Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ICR7 0 R/W 6 ICR6 0 R/W 5 ICR5 0 R/W 4 H'FEE8 H'FEE9 H'FEEA 3 ICR3 0 R/W 2 ICR2 0 R/W Interrupt Controller Interrupt Controller Interrupt Controller 1 ICR1 0 R/W 0 ICR0 0 R/W ICR4 0 R/W Interrupt control level 0 1 Corresponding interrupt source is control level 0 (non-priority) Corresponding interrupt source is control level 1 (priority) Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and ICR Settings Register ICRA ICRB Bits 7 IRQ0 6 IRQ1 5 IRQ2 -- -- -- 4 -- 3 2 DTC 1 0 Watchdog Watchdog timer 0 timer 1 A/D Freeconverter running timer 8-bit timer 8-bit timer 8-bit timer -- channel 0 channel 1 channels X, Y -- -- ICRC SCI SCI -- channel 0 channel 1 IIC IIC -- channel 0 channel 1 (option) (option) 725 ISR--IRQ Status Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 R/(W)* 6 -- 0 R/(W)* 5 -- 0 R/(W)* 4 -- 0 H'FEEB 3 -- 0 R/(W)* 2 IRQ2F 0 R/(W)* Interrupt Controller 1 IRQ1F 0 R/(W)* 0 IRQ0F 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* IRQ2 to IRQ0 flags 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in IRQnF after reading IRQnF = 1 * When interrupt exception handling is executed while low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) and IRQn input is high * When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed while falling, rising, or both-edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1 or IRQnSCA = 1) [Setting conditions] * When IRQn input goes low while low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) * When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input while falling edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 0, IRQnSCA = 1) * When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input while rising edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1, IRQnSCA = 0) * When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQn input while both-edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 1) (n = 2 to 0) Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 1 726 ISCRH--IRQ Sense Control Register H ISCRL--IRQ Sense Control Register L ISCRH H'FEEC H'FEED Interrupt Controller Interrupt Controller Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 -- 0 R/W 14 -- 0 R/W 13 -- 0 R/W 12 -- 0 R/W 11 -- 0 R/W 10 -- 0 R/W 9 -- 0 R/W 8 -- 0 R/W Reserved ISCRL Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 R/W 6 -- 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA IRQ2 to IRQ0 sense control A and B ISCRL bits 5-0 IRQ2SCB- IRQ0SCB 0 IRQ2SCA- IRQ0SCA 0 1 1 0 1 Description Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ2-IRQ0 input Interrupt request generated by falling edge of IRQ2-IRQ0 input Interrupt request generated by rising edge of IRQ2-IRQ0 input Interrupt request generated by rising and falling edges of IRQ2-IRQ0 input 727 DTCER--DTC Enable Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 DTCE7 0 R/W 6 DTCE6 0 R/W 5 DTCE5 0 R/W 4 H'FFEE to H'FFF2 3 DTCE3 0 R/W 2 DTCE2 0 R/W 1 DTCE1 0 R/W 0 DTC DTCE4 0 R/W DTCE0 0 R/W DTC activation enable 0 DTC activation by interrupt is disabled [Clearing conditions] * When data transfer ends while the DISEL bit is 1 * When the specified number of transfers are completed DTC activation by interrupt is enabled [Maintenance condition] When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not been completed 1 DTVECR--DTC Vector Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/(W)* 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 H'FEF3 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W DTC SWDTE DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 R/W Sets vector number for DTC software activation DTC software activation enable 0 DTC software activation is disabled [Clearing condition] When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not been completed DTC software activation is enabled [Maintenance conditions] * When data transfer ends while the DISEL bit is 1 * When the specified number of transfers are completed * During data transfer activated by software 1 Note: * A value of 1 can always be written to the SWDTE bit, but 0 can only be written after 1 is read. 728 ABRKCR--Address Break Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CMF 0 R/W 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- H'FEF4 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- Interrupt Controller 1 -- 0 -- 0 BIE 0 R/W Break interrupt enable 0 1 Condition match flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] When address break interrupt exception handling is executed [Setting condition] When address set by BARA-BARC is prefetched while BIE = 1 Address break disabled Address break enabled 729 BARA--Break Address Register A BARB--Break Address Register B BARC--Break Address Register C Bit BARA Initial value Read/Write 7 A23 0 R/W 6 A22 0 R/W 5 A21 0 R/W 4 A20 0 R/W H'FEF5 H'FEF6 H'FEF7 3 A19 0 R/W 2 A18 0 R/W Interrupt Controller Interrupt Controller Interrupt Controller 1 A17 0 R/W 0 A16 0 R/W Specifies address (bits 23-16) at which address break is to be generated Bit BARB Initial value Read/Write 7 A15 0 R/W 6 A14 0 R/W 5 A13 0 R/W 4 A12 0 R/W 3 A11 0 R/W 2 A10 0 R/W 1 A9 0 R/W 0 A8 0 R/W Specifies address (bits 15-8) at which address break is to be generated Bit BARC Initial value Read/Write 7 A7 0 R/W 6 A6 0 R/W 5 A5 0 R/W 4 A4 0 R/W 3 A3 0 R/W 2 A2 0 R/W 1 A1 0 R/W 0 -- 0 -- Specifies address (bits 7-1) at which address break is to be generated 730 FLMCR1--Flash Memory Control Register 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 FWE 1 R 6 SWE 0 R/W 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- H'FF80 3 EV 0 R/W 2 PV 0 R/W 1 E 0 R/W Flash Memory 0 P 0 R/W Program 0 1 Program mode cleared Transition to program mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1, and PSU = 1 Erase 0 1 Erase mode cleared Transition to erase mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1, and ESU = 1 Program-verify 0 1 Program-verify mode cleared Transition to program-verify mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Erase-verify 0 1 Erase-verify mode cleared Transition to erase-verify mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Software write enable 0 1 Reserved Writes disabled Writes enabled 731 FLMCR2--Flash Memory Control Register 2 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 FLER 0 R 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- H'FF81 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 ESU 0 R/W Flash Memory 0 PSU 0 R/W Program setup bit 0 1 Program setup cleared Program setup [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Erase setup bit 0 1 Erase setup cleared Erase setup [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Flash memory error 0 Flash memory is operating normally Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled [Clearing condition] Reset or hardware standby mode An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled [Setting condition] See section 19.8.3, Error Protection 1 732 PCSR--Peripheral Clock Select Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 -- 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- H'FF82 3 -- 0 -- 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 -- 0 -- PWM PWCKB PWCKA PWM clock select PWSL Bit 7 0 1 Bit 6 -- 0 1 PCSR Bit 2 -- -- 0 1 Bit 1 -- -- 0 1 0 1 Description Clock input disabled o (system clock) selected o/2 selected o/4 selected o/8 selected o/16 selected PWCKE PWCKS PWCKB PWCKA 733 EBR1--Erase Block Register 1 EBR2--Erase Block Register 2 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 -- 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- H'FF82 H'FF83 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 EB9 0 Flash Memory Flash Memory 0 EB8 0 R/W* R/W* Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 EB7 0 R/W* 6 EB6 0 R/W 5 EB5 0 R/W 4 EB4 0 R/W 3 EB3 0 R/W 2 EB2 0 R/W 1 EB1 0 R/W 0 EB0 0 R/W Note: * In normal mode, a read will return 0, and writes are invalid. Erase Blocks Block (Size) 128-kbyte versions EB0 (1 kbyte) EB1 (1 kbyte) EB2 (1 kbyte) EB3 (1 kbyte) EB4 (28 kbytes) EB5 (16 kbytes) EB6 (8 kbytes) EB7 (8 kbytes) EB8 (32 kbytes) EB9 (32 kbytes) Addresses H'(00)0000-H'(00)03FF H'(00)4000-H'(00)07FF H'(00)8000-H'(00)0BFF H'(00)C000-H'(00)0FFF H'(00)1000-H'(00)7FFF H'(00)8000-H'(00)BFFF H'(00)C000-H'(00)DFFF H'00E000-H'00FFFF H'010000-H'017FFF H'018000-H'01FFFF 734 SBYCR--Standby Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SSBY 0 R/W 6 STS2 0 R/W 5 STS1 0 R/W 4 STS0 0 R/W H'FF84 3 -- 0 -- 2 SCK2 0 R/W 1 SCK1 0 R/W 0 System SCK0 0 R/W System clock select 2 to 0 0 0 0 Bus master is in high-speed mode 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- Medium-speed clock = o/2 Medium-speed clock = o/4 Medium-speed clock = o/8 Medium-speed clock = o/16 Medium-speed clock = o/32 -- Standby timer select 2 to 0 0 0 0 Standby time = 8192 states 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Standby time = 16384 states Standby time = 32768 states Standby time = 65536 states Standby time = 131072 states Standby time = 262144 states Reserved Standby time = 16 states* Note: * This setting must not be used in the flash memory version. Software standby 0 Transition to sleep mode on execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode Transition to subsleep mode on execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode Transition to software standby mode, subactive mode, or watch mode on execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode Transition to watch mode or high-speed mode on execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode 1 735 LPWRCR--Low-Power Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 DTON 0 R/W 6 LSON 0 R/W 5 NESEL 0 R/W 4 EXCLE 0 R/W H'FF85 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 -- 0 -- 0 -- 0 -- System Subclock input enable 0 1 Subclock input from EXCL pin disabled Subclock input from EXCL pin enabled Noise elimination sampling frequency select 0 1 Low-speed on flag 0 * Transition to sleep mode, software standby mode, or watch mode* on execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode * Transition to watch mode, or direct transition to high-speed mode, on execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode * Transition to high-speed mode after watch mode is cleared * Transition to watch mode or subactive mode* on execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode * Transition to subsleep mode or watch mode on execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode * Transition to subactive mode after watch mode is cleared Sampling at o divided by 32 Sampling at o divided by 4 1 Note: * When a transition is made to watch mode or subactive mode, high-speed mode must be set. Direct transfer on flag 0 * Transition to sleep mode, software standby mode, or watch mode* on execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode * Transition to subsleep mode or watch mode on execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode * Direct transition to subactive mode*, or transition to sleep mode or software standby mode, on execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode * Direct transition to high-speed mode, or transition to subsleep mode, on execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive mode 1 Note: * When a transition is made to watch mode or subactive mode, high-speed mode must be set. 736 MSTPCRH--Module Stop Control Register H MSTPCRL--Module Stop Control Register L MSTPCRH Bit Initial value 7 0 6 0 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 H'FF86 H'FF87 MSTPCRL 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 System System 1 1 0 1 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Module stop 0 1 Module stop mode cleared Module stop mode set The correspondence between MSTPCR bits and on-chip supporting modules is shown below. Register MSTPCRH Bit MSTP15 MSTP13 MSTP12 -- 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) 8-bit timers (TMR0, TMR1) Module MSTP14* Data transfer controller (DTC) MSTP11* 8-bit PWM timer (PWM), 14-bit PWM timer (PWMX) MSTP10* -- MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTPCRL MSTP7 MSTP6* MSTP5* MSTP4* MSTP3* MSTP2* MSTP1* MSTP0* A/D converter 8-bit timers (TMRX, TMRY), timer connection Serial communication interface 0 (SCI0) Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1) -- I2C bus interface (IIC) channel 0 (option) I2C bus interface (IIC) channel 1 (option) -- -- -- Note: Bit 15 must not be set to 1. Bits 10, 5, 2, 1, and 0 can be read or written to, but do not affect operation. * Must be set to 1 in the H8S/2124 Series. 737 SMR1--Serial Mode Register 1 SMR0--Serial Mode Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 C/A 0 R/W 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W H'FF88 H'FFD8 3 STOP 0 R/W 2 MP 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W SCI1 SCI0 Clock select 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Multiprocessor mode 0 1 Multiprocessor function disabled Multiprocessor format selected o clock o/4 clock o/16 clock o/64 clock Stop bit length 0 1 1 stop bit 2 stop bits Parity mode 0 1 Parity enable 0 1 Parity bit addition and checking disabled Parity bit addition and checking enabled Even parity Odd parity Character length 0 1 8-bit data 7-bit data* Note: * When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted, and the choice of LSB-first or MSB-first mode is not available. Communication mode 0 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode 738 ICCR1--I2C Bus Control Register 1 ICCR0--I2C Bus Control Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ICE 0 R/W 6 IEIC 0 R/W 5 MST 0 R/W 4 TRS 0 R/W H'FF88 H'FFD8 3 ACKE 0 R/W 2 BBSY 0 R/W 1 IRIC 0 R/(W)* 0 SCP 1 W IIC1 IIC0 Start condition/stop condition prohibit 0 Writing issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag Reading always returns a value of 1; writing is ignored 1 I2C bus interface interrupt request flag 0 1 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress Interrupt requested Note: For the clearing and setting conditions, see section 16.2.5, I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR). Bus busy 0 I2C bus interface interrupt enable 0 1 Interrupt requests disabled Interrupt requests enabled 1 Bus is free [Clearing condition] When a stop condition is detected Bus is busy [Setting condition] When a start condition is detected Acknowledge mode select 0 Acknowledge bit is ignored and transfer is performed continuously When acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is discontinued I2C bus interface enable 0 Module is non-operational (SCL/SDA pin has port function) SAR and SARX can be accessed Module is enabled for transfer operations (SC/SDA pin in bus drive state) ICMR and ICDR can be accessed 1 Master/slave select (MST), transmit/receive select (TRS) 0 1 0 1 0 1 Slave receive mode Slave transmit mode Master receive mode Master transmit mode 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Note: For details, see section 16.2.5, I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR). 739 BRR1--Bit Rate Register 1 BRR0--Bit Rate Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W H'FF89 H'FFD9 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W SCI1 SCI0 Sets the serial transmit/receive bit rate 740 ICSR1--I2C Bus Status Register 1 ICSR0--I2C Bus Status Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ESTP 0 R/(W)*1 6 STOP 0 R/(W)*1 5 IRTR 0 R/(W)*1 4 AASX 0 R/(W)*1 H'FF89 H'FFD9 3 AL 0 R/(W)*1 2 AAS 0 R/(W)*1 1 ADZ 0 R/(W)*1 0 ACKB 0 R/W IIC1 IIC0 Acknowledge bit 0 Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing Transmit mode: indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data (0 value) Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing Transmit mode: indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the data (1 value) 1 General call address recognition flag*2 0 1 General call address not recognized General call address recognized Slave address recognition flag*2 0 1 Slave address or general call address not recognized Slave address or general call address recognized Arbitration lost flag*2 0 1 Bus arbitration won Bus arbitration lost Second slave address recognition flag*2 0 1 I2C 0 1 Second slave address not recognized Second slave address recognized bus interface continuous transmission/reception interrupt request flag*2 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress Continuous transfer state Normal stop condition detection flag*2 0 1 No normal stop condition In I2C bus format slave mode: Normal stop condition detected In other modes: No meaning Error stop condition detection flag*2 0 1 No error stop condition In I2C bus format slave mode: Error stop condition detected In other modes: No meaning Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 2. For the clearing and setting conditions, see section 16.2.6, I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR). 741 SCR1--Serial Control Register 1 SCR0--Serial Control Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TIE 0 R/W 6 RIE 0 R/W 5 TE 0 R/W 4 RE 0 R/W H'FF8A H'FFDA 3 MPIE 0 R/W 2 TEIE 0 R/W 1 CKE1 0 R/W 0 CKE0 0 R/W SCI1 SCI0 Clock enable 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Internal clock/SCK pin functions as I/O port Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock output Internal clock/SCK pin functions as clock output Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock output External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock input External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock input Transmit end interrupt enable 0 1 Transmit end interrupt (TEI) request disabled Transmit end interrupt (TEI) request enabled Multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 Multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed) [Clearing conditions] * When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 * When data with MPB = 1 is received Multiprocessor interrupts enabled Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received Transmit interrupt enable 0 1 Transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request disabled Transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request enabled 1 Receive interrupt enable 0 Receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request disabled Receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request enabled Receive enable 0 1 Reception disabled Reception enabled Transmit enable 0 1 Transmission disabled Transmission enabled 1 742 RDR1--Receive Data Register 1 RDR0--Receive Data Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R H'FF8D H'FFDD 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R 0 0 R SCI1 SCI0 Stores serial receive data TDR1--Transmit Data Register 1 TDR0--Transmit Data Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W H'FF8B H'FFDB 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 SCI1 SCI0 R/W Stores serial transmit data 743 SSR1--Serial Status Register 1 SSR0--Serial Status Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TDRE 1 R/(W)* 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* 4 FER 0 R/(W)* H'FF8C H'FFDC 3 PER 0 R/(W)* 2 TEND 1 R 0 1 SCI1 SCI0 1 MPB 0 R 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor bit transfer Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted Multiprocessor bit 0 [Clearing condition] When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received [Setting condition] When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received 1 Transmit end 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR [Setting conditions] * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 * When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character 1 Parity error 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in PER after reading PER = 1 [Setting condition] When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR Framing error 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in FER after reading FER = 1 [Setting condition] When the SCI checks whether the stop bit at the end of the receive data is 1 when reception ends, and the stop bit is 0 Overrun error 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in ORER after reading ORER = 1 [Setting condition] When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1 Receive data register full 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 * When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and reads data from RDR [Setting condition] When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR 1 Transmit data register empty 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR [Setting conditions] * When the TE bit in SCR is 0 * When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data can be written in TDR 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 744 SCMR1--Serial Interface Mode Register 1 SCMR0--Serial Interface Mode Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FF8E H'FFDE 3 SDIR 0 R/W 2 SINV 0 R/W 1 -- 1 -- 0 SMIF 0 R/W SCI1 SCI0 Serial communication interface mode select 0 1 Data invert 0 1 TDR contents are transmitted as they are TDR contents are stored in RDR as they are TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted Receive data is stored in RDR in inverted form Normal SCI mode Setting prohibited Data transfer direction 0 1 TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first Receive data is stored in RDR LSB-first TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first Receive data is stored in RDR MSB-first 745 ICDR1--I2C Bus Data Register 1 ICDR0--I2C Bus Data Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ICDR7 -- R/W 6 ICDR6 -- R/W 5 ICDR5 -- R/W 4 ICDR4 -- R/W H'FF8E H'FFDE 3 ICDR3 -- R/W 2 ICDR2 -- R/W 1 ICDR1 -- R/W 0 IIC1 IIC0 ICDR0 -- R/W ICDRR Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- R 6 -- R 5 -- R 4 -- R 3 -- R 2 -- R 1 -- R 0 -- R ICDRR7 ICDRR6 ICDRR5 ICDRR4 ICDRR3 ICDRR2 ICDRR1 ICDRR0 ICDRS Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- -- 6 -- -- 5 -- -- 4 -- -- 3 -- -- 2 -- -- 1 -- -- 0 -- -- ICDRS7 ICDRS6 ICDRS5 ICDRS4 ICDRS3 ICDRS2 ICDRS1 ICDRS0 ICDRT Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- W 6 -- W 5 -- W 4 -- W 3 -- W 2 -- W 1 -- W 0 -- W ICDRT7 ICDRT6 ICDRT5 ICDRT4 ICDRT3 ICDRT2 ICDRT1 ICDRT0 TDRE, RDRF (internal flags) Bit Initial value Read/Write Note: For details, see section 16.2.1, I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR). -- TDRE 0 -- -- RDRF 0 -- 746 SARX1--Second Slave Address Register 1 SAR1--Slave Address Register 1 SARX0--Second Slave Address Register 0 SAR0--Slave Address Register 0 SAR Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SVA6 0 R/W 6 SVA5 0 R/W 5 SVA4 0 R/W 4 SVA3 0 R/W H'FF8E H'FF8F H'FFDE H'FFDF IIC1 IIC1 IIC0 IIC0 3 SVA2 0 R/W 2 SVA1 0 R/W 1 SVA0 0 R/W 0 FS 0 R/W Slave address SARX Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 SVAX6 0 R/W 6 SVAX5 0 R/W 5 SVAX4 0 R/W 4 SVAX3 0 R/W 3 SVAX2 0 R/W 2 SVAX1 0 R/W 1 Format select 0 FSX 1 R/W SVAX0 0 R/W Second slave address Format select DDCSWR Bit 6 SW 0 SAR Bit 0 FS 0 SARX Bit 0 FSX 0 1 I2C bus format * SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized I2C bus format * SAR slave address recognized * SARX slave address ignored I2C bus format * SAR slave address ignored * SARX slave address recognized Synchronous serial format * SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored Formatless mode (start/stop conditions not detected) * Acknowledge bit present Formatless mode* (start/stop conditions not detected) * No acknowledge bit Operating Mode 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Note: * Do not select this mode when automatic switching to the I2C bus format is performed by means of a DDCSWR setting. 747 ICMR1--I 2C Bus Mode Register 1 ICMR0--I 2C Bus Mode Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 MLS 0 R/W 6 WAIT 0 R/W 5 CKS2 0 R/W 4 CKS1 0 R/W Bit counter BC2 0 H'FF8F H'FFDF 3 CKS0 0 R/W 2 BC2 0 R/W 1 BC1 0 R/W 0 BC0 0 R/W IIC1 IIC0 BC1 0 1 BC0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 Synchronous serial format 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I2C bus format 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transfer clock select IICX CKS2 CKS1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Clock o/28 o/40 o/48 o/64 o/80 o/100 o/112 o/128 o/56 o/80 o/96 o/128 o/160 o/200 o/224 o/256 Wait insertion bit 0 1 Data and acknowledge transferred consecutively Wait inserted between data and acknowledge MSB-first/LSB-first select* 0 1 MSB-first LSB-first Note: * Do not set this bit to 1 when using the I2C bus format. 748 TIER--Timer Interrupt Enable Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ICIAE 0 R/W 6 ICIBE 0 R/W 5 ICICE 0 R/W 4 ICIDE 0 R/W H'FF90 3 OCIAE 0 R/W 2 OCIBE 0 R/W 1 OVIE 0 R/W 0 -- 1 -- FRT Timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 OVF interrupt request (FOVI) is disabled OVF interrupt request (FOVI) is enabled Output compare interrupt B enable 0 1 OCFB interrupt request (OCIB) is disabled OCFB interrupt request (OCIB) is enabled Output compare interrupt A enable 0 1 OCFA interrupt request (OCIA) is disabled OCFA interrupt request (OCIA) is enabled Input capture interrupt D enable 0 1 ICFD interrupt request (ICID) is disabled ICFD interrupt request (ICID) is enabled Input capture interrupt C enable 0 1 ICFC interrupt request (ICIC) is disabled ICFC interrupt request (ICIC) is enabled Input capture interrupt B enable 0 1 ICFB interrupt request (ICIB) is disabled ICFB interrupt request (ICIB) is enabled Input capture interrupt A enable 0 1 ICFA interrupt request (ICIA) is disabled ICFA interrupt request (ICIA) is enabled 749 TCSR--Timer Control/Status Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ICFA 0 R/(W)* 6 ICFB 0 R/(W)* 5 ICFC 0 R/(W)* 4 ICFD 0 R/(W)* H'FF91 3 OCFA 0 R/(W)* 2 OCFB 0 R/(W)* 1 OVF 0 R/(W)* 0 CCLRA 0 R/W FRT Counter clear A 0 1 Timer overflow 0 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in OVF after reading OVF = 1 [Setting condition] When the FRC value overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000 FRC clearing is disabled FRC is cleared at compare match A 1 Output compare flag B 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in OCFB after reading OCFB = 1 [Setting condition] When FRC = OCRB Output compare flag A 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in OCFA after reading OCFA = 1 [Setting condition] When FRC = OCRA Input capture flag D 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in ICFD after reading ICFD = 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal is generated Input capture flag C 0 1 Input capture flag B 0 1 Input capture flag A 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in ICFA after reading ICFA = 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be transferred to ICRA [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in ICFB after reading ICFB = 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be transferred to ICRB [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in ICFC after reading ICFC = 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal is generated Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 1, to clear the flags. 750 FRC--Free-Running Counter Bit Initial value 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 H'FF92 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 FRT 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Count value OCRA/OCRB--Output Compare Register A/B Bit Initial value 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 H'FF94 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 FRT 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Constantly compared with FRC value; OCF is set when OCR = FRC 751 TCR--Timer Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 IEDGA 0 R/W 6 IEDGB 0 R/W 5 IEDGC 0 R/W 4 IEDGD 0 R/W H'FF96 3 BUFEA 0 R/W 2 BUFEB 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 CKS0 0 R/W FRT Clock select 0 0 1 1 0 1 Internal clock: counting on o/2 Internal clock: counting on o/8 Internal clock: counting on o/32 External clock: counting on rising edge Buffer enable B 0 1 ICRD is not used as ICRB buffer register ICRD is used as ICRB buffer register Buffer enable A 0 1 ICRC is not used as ICRA buffer register ICRC is used as ICRA buffer register Input edge select D 0 1 Capture at falling edge of input capture input D Capture at rising edge of input capture input D Input edge select C 0 1 Capture at falling edge of input capture input C Capture at rising edge of input capture input C Input edge select B 0 1 Capture at falling edge of input capture input B Capture at rising edge of input capture input B Input edge select A 0 1 Capture at falling edge of input capture input A Capture at rising edge of input capture input A 752 TOCR--Timer Output Compare Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 ICRS 0 R/W 4 OCRS 0 R/W H'FF97 3 OEA 0 R/W 2 OEB 0 R/W 1 OLVLA 0 R/W 0 OLVLB 0 R/W FRT ICRDMS OCRAMS Output level B 0 1 0 output at compare match B 1 output at compare match B Output level A 0 1 0 output at compare match A 1 output at compare match A Output enable B 0 1 Output compare B output disabled Output compare B output enabled Output enable A 0 1 Output compare A output disabled Output compare A output enabled Output compare register select 0 1 OCRA register selected OCRB register selected Input capture register select 0 1 ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC registers selected OCRAR, OCRAF, and OCRDM registers selected Output compare A mode select 0 1 OCRA set to normal operating mode OCRA set to operating mode using OCRAR and OCRAF Input capture D mode select 0 1 ICRD set to normal operating mode ICRD set to operating mode using OCRDM 753 OCRAR--Output Compare Register AR OCRAF--Output Compare Register AF Bit Initial value 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 H'FF98 H'FF9A 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 FRT FRT 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Used for OCRA operation when OCRAMS = 1 in TOCR (For details, see section 11.2.4, Output Compare Registers AR and AF (OCRAR, OCRAF).) OCRDM--Output Compare Register DM Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 H'FF9C 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 FRT 0 0 R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Used for ICRD operation when ICRDMS = 1 in TOCR (For details, see section 11.2.5, Output Compare Register DM (OCRDM).) ICRA--Input Capture Register A ICRB--Input Capture Register B ICRC--Input Capture Register C ICRD--Input Capture Register D Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R H'FF98 H'FF9A H'FF9C H'FF9E 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R 2 0 R 1 0 R FRT FRT FRT FRT 0 0 R Stores FRC value when input capture signal is input (ICRC and ICRD can be used for buffer operation. For details, see section 11.2.3, Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD).) 754 DADRAH--PWM (D/A) Data Register AH DADRAL--PWM (D/A) Data Register AL DADRBH--PWM (D/A) Data Register BH DADRBL--PWM (D/A) Data Register BL DADRH Bit (CPU) Bit (data) DADRA Initial value 15 13 14 12 13 11 12 10 11 9 10 8 9 7 8 6 7 5 H'FFA0 H'FFA1 H'FFA6 H'FFA7 DADRL 6 4 5 3 4 2 3 1 2 0 1 -- PWMX PWMX PWMX PWMX 0 -- -- 1 DA13 DA12 DA11 DA10 DA9 DA8 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -- DADRB Initial value DA13 DA12 DA11 DA10 DA9 DA8 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS REGS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Register select (DADRB only) 0 1 DADRA and DADRB can be accessed DACR and DACNT can be accessed Carrier frequency select 0 1 Operates on basic cycle = resolution (T) x 64 DADR value range is H'0401 to H'FFFD Operates on basic cycle = resolution (T) x 256 DADR value range is H'0103 to H'FFFF D/A conversion data 755 DACR--PWM (D/A) Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TEST 0 R/W 6 PWME 0 R/W 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FFA0 3 OEB 0 R/W 2 OEA 0 R/W 1 OS 0 R/W 0 PWMX CKS 0 R/W Clock select 0 1 Operates at resolution (T) = system clock cycle (tcyc) Operates at resolution (T) = system clock cycle (tcyc) x 2 Output select 0 1 PWM direct output PWM inverted output Output enable A 0 1 PWM (D/A) channel A output (PWX0 output pin) disabled PWM (D/A) channel A output (PWX0 output pin) enabled Output enable B 0 1 PWM enable 0 1 Test mode 0 1 PWM (D/A) in user state, normal operation PWM (D/A) in test state, correct conversion results unobtainable DACNT operates as 14-bit up-counter Stop at DACNT = H'0003 PWM (D/A) channel B output (PWX1 output pin) disabled PWM (D/A) channel B output (PWX1 output pin) enabled 756 DACNTH--PWM (D/A) Counter H DACNTL--PWM (D/A) Counter L DACNTH Bit (CPU) Bit (counter) Initial value Read/Write 15 7 14 6 13 5 12 4 11 3 10 2 9 1 8 0 H'FFA6 H'FFA7 DACNTL 7 8 6 9 5 10 4 11 3 12 2 13 1 -- -- PWMX PWMX 0 -- REGS 1 R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W -- Register select 0 1 Up-counter DADRA and DADRB can be accessed DACR and DACNT can be accessed 757 TCSR0--Timer Control/Status Register 0 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OVF 0 R/(W)* 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 RSTS 0 R/W H'FFA8 3 RST/NMI 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 WDT0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select 2 to 0 CKS2 0 CKS1 0 1 1 0 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 o/2 o/64 o/128 o/512 o/2048 o/8192 o/32768 o/131072 Clock Reset or NMI 0 1 Reserved Timer enable 0 1 TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted TCNT counts NMI interrupt requested Internal reset requested Timer mode select 0 1 Overflow flag 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in the TME bit * When 0 is written in OVF after reading TCSR when OVF = 1 [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 When internal reset request is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by an internal reset after being set Interval timer mode: Interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) sent to CPU when TCNT overflows Watchdog timer mode: Reset or NMI interrupt request sent to CPU when TCNT overflows 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 758 TCNT0--Timer Counter 0 TCNT1--Timer Counter 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W H'FFA8 (W), H'FFA9 (R) H'FFEA (W), H'FFEB (R) 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 WDT0 WDT1 R/W Up-counter P1PCR--Port 1 MOS Pull-Up Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W H'FFAC 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 Port 1 P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR R/W Control of port 1 built-in MOS input pull-ups P2PCR--Port 2 MOS Pull-Up Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W H'FFAD 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 Port 2 P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR R/W Control of port 2 built-in MOS input pull-ups P3PCR--Port 3 MOS Pull-Up Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W H'FFAE 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 Port 3 P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR R/W Control of port 3 built-in MOS input pull-ups 759 P1DDR--Port 1 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W H'FFB0 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 1 0 0 W P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Specification of input or output for port 1 pins P2DDR--Port 2 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W H'FFB1 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W Port 2 0 0 W P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Specification of input or output for port 2 pins P1DR--Port 1 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P17DR 0 R/W 6 P16DR 0 R/W 5 P15DR 0 R/W 4 P14DR 0 R/W H'FFB2 3 P13DR 0 R/W 2 P12DR 0 R/W 1 P11DR 0 R/W 0 Port 1 P10DR 0 R/W Stores output data for port 1 pins P2DR--Port 2 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P27DR 0 R/W 6 P26DR 0 R/W 5 P25DR 0 R/W 4 P24DR 0 R/W H'FFB3 3 P23DR 0 R/W 2 P22DR 0 R/W 1 P21DR 0 R/W 0 Port 2 P20DR 0 R/W Stores output data for port 2 pins 760 P3DDR--Port 3 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W H'FFB4 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W Port 3 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Specification of input or output for port 3 pins P4DDR--Port 4 Data Direction Register Bit Mode 1 Initial value Read/Write Modes 2 and 3 Initial value Read/Write 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 1 W 0 W 0 W 7 6 5 4 H'FFB5 3 2 1 0 Port 4 P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W Specification of input or output for port 4 pins P3DR--Port 3 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P37DR 0 R/W 6 P36DR 0 R/W 5 P35DR 0 R/W 4 P34DR 0 R/W H'FFB6 3 P33DR 0 R/W 2 P32DR 0 R/W 1 P31DR 0 R/W 0 Port 3 P30DR 0 R/W Stores output data for port 3 pins P4DR--Port 4 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P47DR 0 R/W 6 P46DR --* R 5 P45DR 0 R/W 4 P44DR 0 R/W H'FFB7 3 P43DR 0 R/W 2 P42DR 0 R/W 1 P41DR 0 R/W 0 Port 4 P40DR 0 R/W Stores output data for port 4 pins Note: * Determined by state of pin P46. 761 P5DDR--Port 5 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FFB8 3 -- 1 -- 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W Port 5 P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR Specification of input or output for port 5 pins P6DDR--Port 6 Data Direction Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 W 6 0 W 5 0 W 4 0 W H'FFB9 3 0 W 2 0 W 1 0 W 0 0 W Port 6 P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR Specification of input or output for port 6 pins P5DR--Port 5 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FFBA 3 -- 1 -- 2 P52DR 0 R/W 1 P51DR 0 R/W 0 Port 5 P50DR 0 R/W Stores output data for port 5 pins P6DR--Port 6 Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P67DR 0 R/W 6 P66DR 0 R/W 5 P65DR 0 R/W 4 P64DR 0 R/W H'FFBB 3 P63DR 0 R/W 2 P62DR 0 R/W 1 P61DR 0 R/W 0 Port 6 P60DR 0 R/W Stores output data for port 6 pins 762 P7PIN--Port 7 Input Data Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 P77PIN --* R 6 --* R 5 --* R 4 --* R H'FFBE 3 --* R 2 --* R 1 --* R 0 Port 7 P76PIN P75PIN P74PIN P73PIN P72PIN P71PIN P70PIN --* R Port 7 pin states Note: * Determined by state of pins P77 to P70. IER--IRQ Enable Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 R 6 -- 1 R 5 -- 1 R 4 -- 1 R H'FFC2 3 -- 1 R 2 IRQ2E 0 R/W Interrupt Controller 1 IRQ1E 0 R/W 0 IRQ0E 0 R/W IRQ2 to IRQ0 enable 0 1 IRQn interrupt disabled IRQn interrupt enabled (n = 0 to 2) 763 STCR--Serial Timer Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 0 R/W 6 IICX1 0 R/W 5 IICX0 0 R/W 4 IICE 0 R/W H'FFC3 3 FLSHE 0 R/W 2 -- 0 R/W 1 ICKS1 0 R/W 0 ICKS0 0 R/W System Internal clock source select*1 Reserved Flash memory control register enable 0 1 I2C 0 1 CPU access to power-down state control registers and some peripheral module control registers is enabled CPU access to flash memory control registers is enabled master enable CPU access to SCI0 and SCI1 control registers is disabled CPU access to I2C bus interface data, PWMX data register and control registers is enabled I2C transfer rate select 1 and 0*2 Reserved Notes: 1. Used for 8-bit timer input clock selection. For details, see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register (TCR). 2. Used for I2C bus interface transfer clock selection. For details, see section 16.2.4, I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR). 764 SYSCR--System Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CS2E 0 R/W 6 IOSE 0 R/W 5 INTM1 0 R 4 INTM0 0 R/W H'FFC4 3 XRST 1 R 2 NMIEG 0 R/W 1 HIE 0 R/W 0 System RAME 1 R/W RAM Enable 0 On-chip RAM is disabled 1 On-chip RAM is enabled Host interface enable 0 Access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers is disabled 1 Access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers is enabled NMI edge select 0 Falling edge 1 Rising edge External reset 0 Reset generated by watchdog timer overflow 1 Reserved Reset generated by an external reset Interrupt control mode select 0 0 Interrupt control mode 0 1 Interrupt control mode 1 IOS enable 0 1 AS/IOS is address strobe pin (low output in external area access) AS/IOS is I/O strobe pin (low output when accessing specified address from H'(FF)F000 to H(FF)FE4F) 765 MDCR--Mode Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 EXPE --* R/W* 6 -- 0 -- 5 -- 0 -- 4 -- 0 -- H'FFC5 3 -- 0 -- 2 -- 0 -- 1 MDS1 --* R System 0 MDS0 --* R Current mode pin operating mode Expanded mode enable 0 1 Single-chip mode selected Expanded mode selected Note: * Determined by pins MD1 and MD0. 766 BCR--Bus Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ICIS1 1 R/W 6 ICIS0 1 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 1 R/W H'FFC6 3 0 R/W 2 -- 1 R/W 1 IOS1 1 R/W Bus Controller 0 IOS0 1 R/W BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0 IOS select IOS1 IOS0 Addresses for which AS/IOS pin output goes low when IOSE = 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F03F Low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F0FF Low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F3FF Low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)FE4F Burst cycle select 0 0 1 Max. 4 words in burst access Max. 8 words in burst access Burst cycle select 1 0 1 Burst cycle comprises 1 state Burst cycle comprises 2 states Burst ROM enable Reserved 0 1 Basic bus interface Burst ROM interface Idle Cycle Insert 0 0 1 Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles 767 WSCR--Wait State Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 RAMS 0 R/W 6 RAM0 0 R/W 5 ABW 1 R/W 4 AST 1 R/W H'FFC7 3 WMS1 0 R/W 2 WMS0 0 R/W 1 WC1 1 R/W Bus Controller 0 WC0 1 R/W Wait count 1 and 0 0 0 1 No programmable waits inserted 1 programmable wait state inserted in external memory space access 2 programmable wait states inserted in external memory space access 3 programmable wait states inserted in external memory space access 1 0 1 Reserved Wait mode select 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Access state control 0 External memory space designated as 2-state access space Wait state insertion in external memory space access is disabled External memory space designated as 3-state access space Wait state insertion in external memory space access is enabled Programmable wait mode Wait disabled mode Pin wait mode Pin auto-wait mode 1 Bus width control 0 1 External memory space designated as 16-bit access space External memory space designated as 8-bit access space 768 TCR0--Timer Control Register 0 TCR1--Timer Control Register 1 TCRX--Timer Control Register X TCRY--Timer Control Register Y Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CMIEB 0 R/W 6 CMIEA 0 R/W 5 OVIE 0 R/W 4 CCLR1 0 R/W H'FFC8 H'FFC9 H'FFF0 H'FFF0 3 CCLR0 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W 0 TMR0 TMR1 TMRX TMRY CKS0 0 R/W Clock select 2 to 0 Channel Counter clear 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 Clear is disabled Clear by compare match A Clear by compare match B Clear by rising edge of external reset input 1 1 Timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 OVF interrupt request (OVI) is disabled OVF interrupt request (OVI) is enabled 1 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Clock input disabled Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/2 1 0*1 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/64 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/32 1*1 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/1024 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/256 0 0 Counting at TCNT1 overflow signal*2 Clock input disabled Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/2 0*1 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/64 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/128 1*1 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/1024 Compare match interrupt enable A 0 1 CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is disabled CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is enabled X 1 0 0 0 1 1 Y 0 0 0 1 1 All 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Compare Match Interrupt Enable B 0 1 CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is disabled CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is enabled 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/2048 Count at TCNT0 compare match A*2 Clock input disabled Internal clock: counting on o Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/2 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/4 Clock input disabled Clock input disabled Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/4 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/256 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/2048 Clock input disabled External clock: counting at rising edge External clock: counting at falling edge External clock: counting at both rising and falling edges Description CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 1*1 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/8 1 1*1 Internal clock: counting at falling edge of o/8 Notes: 1. Selected by ICKS1 and ICKS0 in STCR. For details, see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register (TCR). 2. If the clock input of channel 0 is the TCNT1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the TCNT0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this setting. 769 TCSR0--Timer Control/Status Register 0 TCSR0 Bit Initial value Read/Write H'FFCA TMR0 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ADTE 0 R/W 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 OS0 0 R/W Output select 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Output select 3 and 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 A/D trigger enable 0 1 A/D converter start requests by compare match A are disabled A/D converter start requests by compare match A are enabled No change at compare match B 0 output at compare match B 1 output at compare match B Output inverted at compare match B (toggle output) No change at compare match A 0 output at compare match A 1 output at compare match A Output inverted at compare match A (toggle output) Timer overflow flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in OVF after reading OVF = 1 [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 Compare match flag A 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in CMFA after reading CMFA = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a CMIA interrupt [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORA 1 Compare match flag B 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in CMFB after reading CMFB = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a CMIB interrupt [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORB 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 5, to clear the flags. 770 TCSR1--Timer Control/Status Register 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 -- 1 -- H'FFCB 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 TMR1 OS0 0 R/W Output select 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 No change at compare match A 0 output at compare match A 1 output at compare match A Output inverted at compare match A (toggle output) Output select 3 and 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 No change at compare match B 0 output at compare match B 1 output at compare match B Output inverted at compare match B (toggle output) Timer overflow flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in OVF after reading OVF = 1 [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 Compare match flag A 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in CMFA after reading CMFA = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a CMIA interrupt [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORA 1 Compare match flag B 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in CMFB after reading CMFB = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a CMIB interrupt [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORB 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 5, to clear the flags. 771 TCORA0--Time Constant Register A0 TCORA1--Time Constant Register A1 TCORB0--Time Constant Register B0 TCORB1--Time Constant Register B1 TCORAY--Time Constant Register AY TCORBY--Time Constant Register BY TCORC--Time Constant Register C TCORAX--Time Constant Register AX TCORBX--Time Constant Register BX TCORA0 TCORB0 Bit Initial value 15 1 14 1 13 1 12 1 11 1 10 1 9 1 8 1 H'FFCC H'FFCD H'FFCE H'FFCF H'FFF2 H'FFF3 H'FFF5 H'FFF6 H'FFF7 TCORA1 TCORB1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 TMR0 TMR1 TMR0 TMR1 TMRY TMRY TMRX TMRX TMRX 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Compare match flag (CMF) is set when TCOR and TCNT values match TCORAX, TCORAY TCORBX, TCORBY Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W Compare match flag (CMF) is set when TCOR and TCNT values match TCORC Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 1 R/W 6 1 R/W 5 1 R/W 4 1 R/W 3 1 R/W 2 1 R/W 1 1 R/W 0 1 R/W Compare match C signal is generated when sum of TCORC and TICR contents match TCNT value 772 TCNT0--Timer Counter 0 TCNT1--Timer Counter 1 TCNTX--Timer Counter X TCNTY--Timer Counter Y TCNT0 Bit Initial value 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 H'FFD0 H'FFD1 H'FFF4 H'FFF4 TCNT1 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 TMR0 TMR1 TMRX TMRY 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Up-counter TCNTX, TCNTY Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W Up-counter 773 PWOERA--PWM Output Enable Register A PWOERB--PWM Output Enable Register B Bit PWOERA Initial value Read/Write Bit PWOERB Initial value Read/Write 7 OE7 0 R/W 7 OE15 0 R/W 6 OE6 0 R/W 6 OE14 0 R/W 5 OE5 0 R/W 5 OE13 0 R/W 4 OE4 0 R/W 4 OE12 0 R/W H'FFD3 H'FFD2 3 OE3 0 R/W 3 OE11 0 R/W 2 OE2 0 R/W 2 OE10 0 R/W 1 OE1 0 R/W 1 OE9 0 R/W PWM PWM 0 OE0 0 R/W 0 OE8 0 R/W Switching between PWM output and port output DDR 0 1 OE 0 1 0 1 Port input Port input Port output or PWM 256/256 output PWM output (0 to 255/256 output) Description PWDPRA--PWM Data Polarity Register A PWDPRB--PWM Data Polarity Register B Bit PWDPRA Initial value Read/Write Bit PWDPRB Initial value Read/Write 7 OS7 0 R/W 7 OS15 0 R/W 6 OS6 0 R/W 6 OS14 0 R/W 5 OS5 0 R/W 5 OS13 0 R/W 4 OS4 0 R/W 4 OS12 0 R/W H'FFD5 H'FFD4 3 OS3 0 R/W 3 OS11 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 2 OS10 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 1 OS9 0 R/W PWM PWM 0 OS0 0 R/W 0 OS8 0 R/W PWM output polarity control 0 PWM direct output (PWDR value corresponds to high width of output) 1 PWM inverted output (PWDR value corresponds to low width of output) 774 PWSL--PWM Register Select Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FFD6 3 RS3 0 R/W 2 RS2 0 R/W 1 RS1 0 R/W 0 PWM PWCKE PWCKS RS0 0 R/W Register Select 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 PWM clock enable, PWM clock select PWSL Bit 7 0 1 Bit 6 -- 0 1 PCSR Bit 2 -- -- 0 1 Bit 1 -- -- 0 1 0 1 Description Clock input disabled o (system clock) selected o/2 selected o/4 selected o/8 selected o/16 selected 0 PWDR0 selected 1 PWDR1 selected 0 PWDR2 selected 1 PWDR3 selected 0 PWDR4 selected 1 PWDR5 selected 0 PWDR6 selected 1 PWDR7 selected 0 PWDR8 selected 1 PWDR9 selected 0 PWDR10 selected 1 PWDR11 selected 0 PWDR12 selected 1 PWDR13 selected 0 PWDR14 selected 1 PWDR15 selected PWCKE PWCKS PWCKB PWCKA 775 PWDR0 to PWDR15--PWM Data Registers Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W H'FFD7 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W 1 0 R/W 0 0 PWM R/W Specifies duty factor of basic output pulse and number of additional pulses ADDRAH--A/D Data Register AH ADDRAL--A/D Data Register AL ADDRBH--A/D Data Register BH ADDRBL--A/D Data Register BL ADDRCH--A/D Data Register CH ADDRCL--A/D Data Register CL ADDRDH--A/D Data Register DH ADDRDL--A/D Data Register DL ADDRH Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 0 R 14 0 R 13 0 R 12 0 R 11 0 R 10 0 R 9 0 R 8 0 R H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFE3 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE7 ADDRL 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 -- 0 R 3 -- 0 R A/D Converter A/D Converter A/D Converter A/D Converter A/D Converter A/D Converter A/D Converter A/D Converter 2 -- 0 R 1 -- 0 R 0 -- 0 R AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 -- Stores A/D data Correspondence between analog input channels and ADDR registers Analog Input Channel Group 0 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 Group 1 AN4 AN5 AN6 or CIN0-CIN7 AN7 A/D Data Register ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD 776 ADCSR--A/D Control/Status Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 ADF 0 R/(W)* 6 ADIE 0 R/W 5 ADST 0 R/W 4 SCAN 0 R/W H'FFE8 3 CKS 0 R/W 2 CH2 0 R/W 1 CH1 0 R/W A/D Converter 0 CH0 0 R/W Channel select Group selection CH2 0 Channel selection CH1 0 1 1 0 1 CH0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Single mode AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 AN6 or CIN0-7 AN7 AN0 AN0, AN1 AN0, AN1, AN2 AN0, AN1, AN2, AN3 AN4 AN4, AN5 AN4, AN5, AN6 or CIN0-7 AN4, AN5, AN6 or CIN0-7, AN7 Description Scan mode Clock select 0 1 Conversion time = 266 states (max.) Conversion time = 134 states (max.) Scan mode 0 1 A/D start 0 1 A/D conversion stopped * Single mode: A/D conversion is started. Cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the specified channel ends * Scan mode: A/D conversion is started. Conversion continues consecutively on the selected channels until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or a transition to standby mode or module stop mode Single mode Scan mode A/D interrupt enable 0 1 A/D end flag 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written to ADF after reading ADF = 1 * When the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt, and ADDR is read [Setting conditions] * Single mode: When A/D conversion ends * Scan mode: When A/D conversion ends for all specified channels A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request disabled A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request enabled 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 777 ADCR--A/D Control Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TRGS1 0 R/W 6 TRGS0 0 R/W 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FFE9 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- A/D Converter 0 -- 1 -- Timer trigger select 0 1 0 1 0 1 A/D conversion start by external trigger is disabled A/D conversion start by external trigger is disabled A/D conversion start by external trigger (8-bit timer) is enabled A/D conversion start by external trigger pin is enabled 778 TCSR1--Timer Control/Status Register 1 Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 OVF 0 R/(W)*1 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W 4 PSS 0 R/W H'FFEA 3 RST/NMI 0 R/W 2 CKS2 0 R/W 1 CKS1 0 R/W WDT1 0 CKS0 0 R/W Clock select 2 to 0 PSS CSK2 CSK1 CSK0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Reset or NMI 0 1 Prescaler select*2 0 1 Timer enable 0 1 Timer mode select 0 1 Overflow flag 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in the TME bit * When 0 is written in OVF after reading TCSR when OVF = 1 [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 When internal reset request is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by an internal reset after being set Interval timer mode: Interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) sent to CPU when TCNT overflows Watchdog timer mode: Reset or NMI interrupt request sent to CPU when TCNT overflows TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted TCNT counts TCNT counts on a o-based prescaler (PSM) scaled clock TCNT counts on a oSUB-based prescaler (PSS) scaled clock NMI interrupt requested Internal reset requested Clock o/2 o/64 o/128 o/512 o/2048 o/8192 o/32768 o/131072 oSUB/2 oSUB/4 oSUB/8 oSUB/16 oSUB/32 oSUB/64 oSUB/128 oSUB/256 1 Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 2. For operation control when a transition is made to power-down mode, see section 21.2.3, Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR). 779 TCSRX--Timer Control/Status Register X Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ICF 0 R/(W)* H'FFF1 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 TMRX OS0 0 R/W Output select 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 No change at compare match A 0 output at compare match A 1 output at compare match A Output inverted at compare match A (toggle output) Output select 3 and 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 Input capture flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in ICF after reading ICF = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected in the external reset signal after the ICST bit is set to 1 in TCONRI No change at compare match B 0 output at compare match B 1 output at compare match B Output inverted at compare match B (toggle output) Timer overflow flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in OVF after reading OVF = 1 [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 Compare match flag A 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in CMFA after reading CMFA = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a CMIA interrupt [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORA 1 Compare match flag B 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in CMFB after reading CMFB = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a CMIB interrupt [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORB 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 4, to clear the flags. 780 TCSRY--Timer Control/Status Register Y Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 CMFB 0 R/(W)* 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ICIE 0 R/W H'FFF1 3 OS3 0 R/W 2 OS2 0 R/W 1 OS1 0 R/W 0 TMRY OS0 0 R/W Output select 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 No change at compare match A 0 output at compare match A 1 output at compare match A Output inverted at compare match A (toggle output) Output select 3 and 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 No change at compare match B 0 output at compare match B 1 output at compare match B Output inverted at compare match B (toggle output) Input capture interrupt enable 0 1 ICF interrupt request (ICIX) is disabled ICF interrupt request (ICIX) is enabled Timer overflow flag 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in OVF after reading OVF = 1 [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 Compare match flag A 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in CMFA after reading CMFA = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a CMIA interrupt [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORA 1 Compare match flag B 0 [Clearing conditions] * When 0 is written in CMFB after reading CMFB = 1 * When the DTC is activated by a CMIB interrupt [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORB 1 Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 5, to clear the flags. 781 TICRR--Input Capture Register R TICRF--Input Capture Register F Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R 6 0 R 5 0 R 4 0 R 3 0 R H'FFF2 H'FFF3 2 0 R 1 0 R TMRX TMRX 0 0 R Stores TCNT value at fall of external trigger input TISR--Timer Input Select Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 -- 1 -- 6 -- 1 -- 5 -- 1 -- 4 -- 1 -- H'FFF5 3 -- 1 -- 2 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 0 IS 0 TMRY R/W Input select 0 1 IVG signal is selected (H8S/2128 Series) External clock/reset input is disabled (H8S/2124 Series) VSYNC1/TMIY (TMCIY/TMRIY) is selected 782 TCONRI--Timer Connection Register I Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 ICST 0 R/W H'FFFC 3 HFINV 0 R/W 2 VFINV 0 R/W Timer Connection 1 HIINV 0 R/W 0 VIINV 0 R/W SIMOD1 SIMOD0 SCONE Input synchronization signal inversion 0 The VSYNCI pin state is used directly as the VSYNCI input The VSYNCI pin state is inverted before use as the VSYNCI input 1 Input synchronization signal inversion 0 1 The HSYNCI and CSYNCI pin states are used directly as the HSYNCI and CSYNCI inputs The HSYNCI and CSYNCI pin states are inverted before use as the HSYNCI and CSYNCI inputs Input synchronization signal inversion 0 1 The VFBACKI pin state is used directly as the VFBACKI input The VFBACKI pin state is inverted before use as the VFBACKI input Input synchronization signal inversion 0 1 The HFBACKI pin state is used directly as the HFBACKI input The HFBACKI pin state is inverted before use as the HFBACKI input Input capture start bit 0 The TICRR and TICRF input capture functions are stopped [Clearing condition] When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIX The TICRR and TICRF input capture functions are operating (Waiting for detection of a rising edge followed by a falling edge on TMRIX) [Setting condition] When 1 is written in ICST after reading ICST = 0 1 Synchronization signal connection enable SCONE 0 Mode Normal connection FTIA FTIA input FTIB FTIB input TMO1 signal FTIC FTIC input VFBACKI input FTID FTID input IHI signal TMCI1 TMCI1 input IHI signal TMRI1 TMRI1 input IVI inverse signal 1 Synchronization IVI signal connecsignal tion mode Input synchronization mode select 1 and 0 SIMOD1 0 SIMOD0 0 1 1 0 1 Mode No signal S-on-G mode Composite mode Separate mode IHI signal HFBACKI input CSYNCI input HSYNCI input HSYNCI input IVI signal VFBACKI input PDC input PDC input VSYNCI input 783 TCONRO--Timer Connection Register O Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 HOE 0 R/W 6 VOE 0 R/W 5 CLOE 0 R/W 4 CBOE 0 R/W H'FFFD 3 HOINV 0 R/W 2 VOINV 0 R/W Timer Connection 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W CLOINV CBOINV Output synchronization signal inversion 0 The CBLANK signal is used directly as the CBLANK output The CBLANK signal is inverted before use as the CBLANK output 1 Output synchronization signal inversion 0 The CLO signal (CL1, CL2, CL3, or CL4 signal) is used directly as the CLAMPO output The CLO signal (CL1, CL2, CL3, or CL4 signal) is inverted before use as the CLAMPO output 1 Output synchronization signal inversion 0 1 The IVO signal is used directly as the VSYNCO output The IVO signal is inverted before use as the VSYNCO output Output synchronization signal inversion 0 1 Output enable 0 1 The P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the P27/A15/PW15 pin In mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled): The P27/A15/ PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the A15 pin In modes 2 and 3 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled): The P27/ A15/PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the CBLANK pin The IHO signal is used directly as the HSYNCO output The IHO signal is inverted before use as the HSYNCO output Output enable 0 1 Output enable 0 1 Output enable 0 1 The P67/TMO1/TMOX/CIN7/HSYNCO pin functions as the P67/TMO1/TMOX/CIN7 pin The P67/TMO1/TMOX/CIN7/HSYNCO pin functions as the HSYNCO pin The P61/FTOA/CIN1/VSYNCO pin functions as the P61/FTOA/CIN1 pin The P61/FTOA/CIN1/VSYNCO pin functions as the VSYNCO pin The P64/FTIC/CIN4/CLAMPO pin functions as the P64/FTIC/CIN4 pin The P64/FTIC/CIN4/CLAMPO pin functions as the CLAMPO pin 784 TCONRS--Timer Connection Register S Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 TMRX/Y 0 R/W 6 0 R/W 5 0 R/W 4 0 R/W H'FFFE 3 0 R/W 2 0 R/W Timer Connection 1 0 R/W 0 0 R/W ISGENE HOMOD1 HOMOD0 VOMOD1 VOMOD0 CLMOD1 CLMOD0 Clamp waveform mode select 1 and 0 ISGENE CLMOD1 CLMOD0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Vertical synchronization output mode select 1 and 0 ISGENE VOMOD1 VOMOD0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Horizontal synchronization output mode select 1 and 0 ISGENE HOMOD1 HOMOD0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Internal synchronization signal select 8-bit timer access select 0 1 The TMRX registers are accessed at addresses H'FFF0 to H'FFF5 The TMRY registers are accessed at addresses H'FFF0 to H'FFF5 The IHG signal is selected Description The IHI signal (without 2fH modification) is selected The IHI signal (with 2fH modification) is selected The CLI signal is selected Description The IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) is selected The IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) is selected The IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) is selected The IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) is selected The IVG signal is selected The CL4 signal is selected Description The CL1 signal is selected The CL2 signal is selected The CL3 signal is selected 785 SEDGR--Edge Sense Register Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 VEDG 0 R/(W) *1 H'FFFF 5 CEDG 0 R/(W) *1 Timer Connection 2 0 1 IHI --*2 *1 6 HEDG 0 R/(W) *1 4 0 R/(W) *1 3 0 R/(W) *1 0 IVI --*2 R HFEDG VFEDG PREQF R/(W) R IVI signal level 0 1 The IVI signal is low The IVI signal is high IHI signal level 0 1 The IHI signal is low The IHI signal is high Pre-equalization flag 0 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in PREQF after reading PREQF = 1 [Setting condition] When an IHI signal 2fH modification condition is detected 1 VFBACKI edge 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in VFEDG after reading VFEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the VFBACKI pin HFBACKI edge 0 1 CSYNCI edge 0 1 HSYNCI edge 0 1 VSYNCI edge 0 1 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in VEDG after reading VEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the VSYNCI pin [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in HEDG after reading HEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the HSYNCI pin [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in CEDG after reading CEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the CSYNCI pin [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in HFEDG after reading HFEDG = 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the HFBACKI pin Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flags. 2. The initial value is undefined since it depends on the pin states. 786 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram Mode 2, 3 EXPE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P1nPCR C RP1P Hardware standby WP1P Reset R D Q P1nDDR C WP1D Mode 1 Internal address bus 8-bit PWM PWM output enable PWM output 14-bit PWM PWX0, PWX1 output Output enable Reset P1n R Q D P1nDR C WP1 RP1 WP1P: Write to P1PCR WP1D: Write to P1DDR WP1: Write to port 1 RP1P: Read P1PCR RP1: Read port 1 n = 0 or 1 Figure C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram (Pins P10 and P11) Internal data bus 787 Mode 2, 3 EXPE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P1nPCR C RP1P Hardware standby Mode 1 WP1P Reset R D Q P1nDDR C WP1D Internal address bus 8-bit PWM PWM output enable PWM output P1n Reset R Q D P1nDR C WP1 RP1 WP1P: Write to P1PCR WP1D: Write to P1DDR WP1: Write to port 1 RP1P: Read P1PCR RP1: Read port 1 n = 2 to 7 Figure C.2 Port 1 Block Diagram (Pins P12 to P17) 788 Internal data bus C.2 Port 2 Block Diagrams Mode 2, 3 EXPE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P2nPCR C RP2P Hardware standby Mode 1 WP2P Reset R D Q P2nDDR C WP2D Internal data bus Internal address bus 8-bit PWM PWM output enable PWM output P2n Reset R Q D P2nDR C WP2 RP2 WP2P: Write to P2PCR WP2D: Write to P2DDR WP2: Write to port 2 RP2P: Read P2PCR RP2: Read port 2 n = 0 to 2 Figure C.3 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pins P20 to P22) 789 Hardware standby Mode 2, 3 EXPE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P23PCR C RP2P Hardware standby WP2P Reset R D Q P23DDR C WP2D *1 Internal data bus Mode 1 Internal address bus 8-bit PWM PWM output enable PWM output Reset P23 R Q D P23DR C WP2 *2 IIC1 SDA1 output Transmit enable RP2 SDA1 input WP2P: WP2D: WP2: RP2P: RP2: Write to P2PCR Write to P2DDR Write to port 2 Read P2PCR Read port 2 Notes: 1. Output enable signal 2. Open-drain control signal Figure C.4 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin 23) 790 Mode 2, 3 EXPE IOSE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P24PCR C RP2P Hardware standby WP2P Reset R D Q P24DDR C WP2D *1 Internal data bus Mode 1 Internal address bus 8-bit PWM PWM output enable PWM output IIC1 SCL1 output Transmit enable SCL1 input Reset P24 *2 R Q D P24DR C WP2 RP2 WP2P: WP2D: WP2: RP2P: RP2: Write to P2PCR Write to P2DDR Write to port 2 Read P2PCR Read port 2 Notes: 1. Output enable signal 2. Open-drain control signal Figure C.5 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin 24) 791 Mode 2, 3 EXPE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P25PCR C RP2P WP2P Reset Mode 1 R D Q P25DDR C WP2D Internal data bus Hardware standby Internal address bus 8-bit PWM PWM output enable PWM output SCI1 Output enable Serial transmit data Reset P2n R Q D P25DR C WP2 RP2 WP2P WP2D WP2 RP2P RP2 : Write to P2PCR : Write to P2DDR : Write to port 2 : Read P2PCR : Read port 2 Figure C.6 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P25) 792 Mode 2, 3 EXPE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P26PCR C RP2P Hardware standby Mode 1 WP2P Reset R D Q P26DDR C WP2D Internal data bus Internal address bus 8-bit PWM PWM output enable PWM output SCI1 Input enable Serial receive data P2n Reset R Q D P26DR C WP2 RP2 WP2P WP2D WP2 RP2P RP2 : Write to P2PCR : Write to P2DDR : Write to port 2 : Read P2PCR : Read port 2 Figure C.7 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P26) 793 Mode 2, 3 EXPE IOSE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P27PCR C RP2P Hardware standby Mode 1 WP2P Reset R D Q P27DDR C WP2D 8-bit PWM PWM output enable PWM output P27 Reset R Q D P27DR C Mode 2, 3 WP2 Internal address bus Timer connection CBLANK CBLANK output enable SCI1 Input enable Clock output Output enable Clock input RP2 WP2P: WP2D: WP2: RP2P: RP2: Write to P2PCR Write to P2DDR Write to port 2 Read P2PCR Read port 2 Figure C.8 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P27) 794 Internal data bus C.3 Port 3 Block Diagram Mode 2, 3 EXPE Mode 1 Reset R Q D P3nPCR C RP3P Hardware standby WP3P Reset R D Q P3nDDR C WP3D P3n Reset R Q D P3nDR C WP3 RP3 External address read WP3P: Write to P3PCR WP3D: Write to P3DDR WP3: Write to port 3 RP3P: Read P3PCR RP3: Read port 3 n = 0 to 7 Figure C.9 Port 3 Block Diagram Internal data bus 795 C.4 Port 4 Block Diagrams Reset R D Q P40DDR C WP4D Reset P40 R Q D P40DR C WP4 RP4 Internal data bus A/D converter External trigger input IRQ2 input IRQ2 enable WP4D: Write to P4DDR WP4: Write to port 4 RP4: Read port 4 Figure C.10 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P40) 796 Reset R D Q P4nDDR C WP4D Reset P4n R Q D P4nDR C WP4 RP4 Internal data bus IRQ1 input IRQ0 input IRQ1 enable IRQ0 enable WP4D: Write to P4DDR WP4: Write to port 4 RP4: Read port 4 n = 1 or 2 Figure C.11 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pins P41, P42) 797 Reset Mode 2, 3 EXPE EXPE R D Q P4nDDR C WP4D Internal data bus Bus controller RD output WR output AS/IOS output Reset P4n R Q D P4nDR C WP4 RP4 WP4D: Write to P4DDR WP4: Write to port 4 RP4: Read port 4 n = 3 to 5 Figure C.12 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pins P43 to P45) 798 Reset Mode 1 Hardware standby SR D Q P46DDR C Subclock input enable P46 WP4D o output RP4 Internal data bus Subclock input WP4D: Write to P4DDR RP4: Read port 4 Figure C.13 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P46) 799 Reset R D Q P47DDR C WP4D *1 Internal data bus Bus controller Input enable WAIT input IIC0 SDA0 output Transmit enable SDA0 input EXPE Reset R Q D P47DR C P47 *2 WP4 RP4 WP4D: Write to P4DDR WP4: Write to port 4 RP4: Read port 4 Notes: 1. Output enable signal 2. Open drain control signal Figure C.14 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P47) 800 C.5 Port 5 Block Diagrams Reset R D Q P50DDR C WP5D Internal data bus SCI0 Serial transmit data Output enable P50 Reset R Q D P50DR C WP5 RP5 WP5D: Write to P5DDR WP5: Write to port 5 RP5: Read port 5 Figure C.15 Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P50) 801 Reset R D Q P51DDR C WP5D Internal data bus SCI0 Input enable Serial receive data Reset P51 R Q D P51DR C WP5 RP5 WP5D: Write to P5DDR WP5: Write to port 5 RP5: Read port 5 Figure C.16 Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P51) 802 Reset R D Q P52DDR C WP5D *1 Reset P52 *2 R Q D P52DR C WP5 Internal data bus SCI0 Input enable Clock output Output enable Clock input IIC0 SCL0 output Transmit enable SCL0 input RP5 WP5D: Write to P5DDR WP5: Write to port 5 RP5: Read port 5 Notes: 1. Output enable signal 2. Open drain control signal Figure C.17 Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P52) 803 C.6 Port 6 Block Diagrams Reset R D Q P6nDDR C WP6D Reset P6n R Q D P6nDR C WP6 Internal data bus 16-bit FRT FTCI input FTIA input FTIB input FTID input Timer connection 8-bit timers Y, X HFBACKI input, TMIX input, VSYNCI input, TMIY input, VFBACKI input A/D converter Analog input Hardware standby RP6 WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 n = 0, 2, 3, 5 Figure C.18 Port 6 Block Diagram (Pins P60, P62, P63, P65) 804 Hardware standby Reset R D Q P61DDR C WP6D Internal data bus 16-bit FRT FTOA output Output enable Timer connection VSYNCO output Output enable A/D converter Analog input Reset P61 R Q D P61DR C WP6 RP6 WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C.19 Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P61) 805 Hardware standby Reset R D Q P64DDR C WP6D Internal data bus Timer connection CLAMPO output Output enable 16-bit FRT FTIC input A/D converter Analog input Reset P64 R Q D P64DR C WP6 RP6 WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C.20 Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P64) 806 Hardware standby Reset R D Q P66DDR C WP6D Internal data bus 16-bit FRT FTOB output Output enable A/D converter Analog input Reset P66 R Q D P66DR C WP6 RP6 WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C.21 Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P66) 807 Hardware standby Reset R D Q P67DDR C WP6D Internal data bus 8-bit timer X TMOX output Output enable A/D converter Analog input Reset P67 R Q D P67DR C WP6 RP6 WP6D: Write to P6DDR WP6: Write to port 6 RP6: Read port 6 Figure C.22 Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P67) 808 C.7 Port 7 Block Diagrams RP7 P7n Internal data bus A/D converter Analog input RP7: Read port 7 n = 0 to 7 Figure C.23 Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P70 to P77) 809 Appendix D Pin States D.1 Port States in Each Processing State I/O Port States in Each Processing State Hardware Software MCU Operating Standby Standby Mode Reset Mode Mode 1 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) L T T keep* Watch Mode keep* Sleep Mode keep* Subsleep Mode keep* Subactive Mode A7 to A0 Address output/ input port I/O port L T T keep* keep* keep* keep* A15 to A8 Address output/ input port I/O port T T T T T T D7 to D0 Program Execution State A7 to A0 Address output/ input port I/O port A15 to A8 Address output/ input port I/O port D7 to D0 Table D.1 Port Name Pin Name Port 1 A7 to A0 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Port 2 A15 to A8 1 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Port 3 D7 to D0 1 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Port 47 WAIT 1 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Port 46 o EXCL 1 Clock T output T keep keep keep [DDR = 1] clock output [DDR = 0] T T T keep T/keep keep keep keep I/O port I/O port WAIT/ I/O port I/O port Clock output/ EXCL input/ input port T/keep T/keep T/keep WAIT/ I/O port keep EXCL input I/O port EXCL input [DDR = 0] T [DDR = 1] H EXCL input 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Port 45 to 43 1 AS, WR, RD 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Port 42 to 40 1 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Port 5 1 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) H T T H H H H AS, WR, RD AS, WR, RD keep T T keep keep keep keep keep keep keep I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port T T keep keep keep keep I/O port I/O port 810 Port Name Pin Name Port 6 Hardware Software MCU Operating Standby Standby Mode Reset Mode Mode 1 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) T T keep Watch Mode keep Sleep Mode keep Subsleep Mode keep Subactive Mode I/O port Program Execution State I/O port Port 7 1 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) T T T T T T Input port Input port Legend: H: High L: Low T: High-impedance state keep: Input ports are in the high-impedance state (when DDR = 0 and PCR = 1, MOS input pullups remain on). Output ports maintain their previous state. Depending on the pins, the on-chip supporting modules may be initialized and the I/O port function determined by DDR and DR used. DDR: Data direction register Note: * In the case of address output, the last address accessed is retained. 811 Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode E.1 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode (1) To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit set to 1 in SYSCR, drive the RES signal low 10 system clock cycles before the STBY signal goes low, as shown in figure E.1. RES must remain low until STBY signal goes low (minimum delay from STBY low to RES high: 0 ns). STBY t1 10tcyc RES t2 0 ns Figure E.1 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode (2) To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit cleared to 0 in SYSCR, or when RAM contents do not need to be retained, RES does not have to be driven low as in (1). E.2 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode Drive the RES signal low at least 100 ns before STBY goes high to execute a reset. STBY t 100 ns RES tOSC Figure E.2 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode 812 Appendix F Product Code Lineup Table F.1 H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series Product Code Lineup -- Preliminary -- Package (Hitachi Package Code) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) 64-pin shrink Under DIP (DP-64S) development 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) Product Type H8S/2128 Series F-ZTAT version Standard product (5 V/4 V version) Product Code HD64F2128 Mark Code HD64F2128PS20 HD64F2128FA20 HD64F2128TF20 Notes Low-voltage version (3 V version) HD64F2128V HD64F2128VPS10 HD64F2128VFA10 HD64F2128VTF10 H8S/2127 Mask ROM Standard product HD6432127R version (5 V version, 4 V version, 3 V version) HD6432127R(***)PS HD6432127R(***)FA HD6432127R(***)TF Version with on-chip HD6432127RW HD6432127RW(***)PS64-pin shrink I2C bus interface DIP (DP-64S) (5 V version, 4 V version, HD6432127RW(***)FA 64-pin QFP 3 V version) (FP-64A) HD6432127RW(***)TF 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) H8S/2128 H8S/2126 Mask ROMStandard product HD6432126R Series version (5 V version, 4 V version, 3 V version) HD6432126R(***)PS 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) HD6432126R(***)FA HD6432126R(***)TF 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) Version with on-chip HD6432126RW HD6432126RW(***)PS64-pin shrink I2C bus interface DIP (DP-64S) (5 V version, 4 V version, HD6432126RW(***)FA 64-pin QFP 3 V version) (FP-64A) HD6432126RW(***)TF 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) 813 Product Type Product Code Mark Code HD6432122(***)PS HD6432122(***)FA HD6432122(***)TF Package (Hitachi Package Code) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) 64-pin shrink DIP (DP-64S) 64-pin QFP (FP-64A) 80-pin TQFP (TFP-80C) Notes H8S/2124 H8S/2122 Mask ROMStandard product HD6432122 Series version (5 V version, 4 V version, 3 V version) H8S/2120 Mask ROMStandard product HD6432120 version (5 V version, 4 V version, 3 V version) HD6432120(***)PS HD6432120(***)FA HD6432120(***)TF Note: (***) is the ROM code. The F-ZTAT version of the H8S/2128 has an on-chip I 2C bus interface as standard. The F-ZTAT 5 V/4 V version supports the operating ranges of the 5 V version and the 4 V version. The operating range of the F-ZTAT low-voltage version will be decided later. The above table includes products in the planning stage or under development. Information on the status of individual products can be obtained from Hitachi's sales offices. 814 Appendix G Package Dimensions Figures G.1, G.2 and G.3 show the package dimensions of the H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series. Unit: mm 64 57.6 58.5 Max 33 1 1.46 Max 1.0 32 2.54 Min 5.08 Max 17.0 18.6 Max 19.05 0.51 Min 1.78 0.25 0.48 0.10 0.25 - 0.05 0 - 15 + 0.11 Hitachi Code JEDEC EIAJ Weight (reference value) DP-64S -- Conforms 8.8 g Figure G.1 Package Dimensions (DP-64S) 815 17.2 0.3 14 Unit: mm 33 32 48 49 17.2 0.3 64 1 16 17 3.05 Max *0.17 0.05 0.15 0.04 *0.37 0.08 0.35 0.06 0.15 M 2.70 0.8 1.0 1.6 0 - 8 0.8 0.3 0.10 0.10 +0.15 -0.10 *Dimension including the plating thickness Base material dimension Hitachi Code JEDEC EIAJ Weight (reference value) FP-64A -- Conforms 1.2 g Figure G.2 Package Dimensions (FP-64A) 816 14.0 0.2 12 60 61 41 40 Unit: mm 14.0 0.2 80 1 *0.22 0.05 0.20 0.04 20 0.10 M 1.25 21 0.5 *0.17 0.05 0.15 0.04 1.20 Max 1.00 1.0 0 - 8 0.5 0.1 Hitachi Code JEDEC EIAJ Weight (reference value) TFP-80C -- Conforms 0.4 g 0.10 *Dimension including the plating thickness Base material dimension Figure G.3 Package Dimensions (TFP-80C) 0.10 0.10 817 818 H8S/2128 Series and H8S/2124 Series Hardware Manual Publication Date: 1st Edition, September 1997 3rd Edition, March 2001 Published by: Electronic Devices Sales & Marketing Group Semiconductor & Integrated Circuits Hitachi, Ltd. Edited by: Technical Documentation Group Hitachi Kodaira Semiconductor Co., Ltd. Copyright (c) Hitachi, Ltd., 1997. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. |
Price & Availability of H8S2128F-ZTAT
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |